HSS Cover CTP Output.cdr - Cambridge University Press India

Anthropology,
Politics, and the
State
ANTHROPOLOGY
Abortion in Asia
Local Dilemmas,
Global Politics
Andrea Whittaker
Democracy and
Violence in South Asia
The issue of abortion forces a confrontation with
the effects of poverty and economic inequalities,
local moral worlds, and the cultural and social
perceptions of the female body, gender, and
reproduction. Based on extensive original field
research, this provocative collection presents
case studies from India, Thailand, Cambodia,
Burma, Vietnam, Bangladesh and Indonesia. It
includes powerful insights into the conditions and
hard choices faced by women and the
circumstances surrounding instances of
unplanned pregnancies. It explores the
connections among poverty, violence, barriers to
access, and the politics and strategies involved in
abortion law reform. The contributors analyse
these issues within the broader conflicts
surrounding women's status, gender roles,
religion, nationalism and modernity, as well as the
global politics of reproductive health.
Jonathan Spencer
Contents: 1. The strange death of political
anthropology; 2. Locating the political; 3. Culture,
nation and misery; 4. Performing democracy;
5. The state and self-making; 6. The state and
violence; 7. Pluralism in theory, pluralism in
practice; 8. Politics and counter-politics.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; List of
Appendices; Acknowledgements; List of
Contributors; 1. Abortion in Asia: An Overview;
2. Contraceptive Use and Unsafe Abortion in
Rural Cambodia; 3. Between Remembering and
Forgetting: Post-diagnostic Abortions in Hanoi,
Vietnam; 4. Violence, Poverty and ‘Weakness’:
Interpersonal and Institutional Reasons Why
Burmese Women on the Thai Border Utilise
Abortion; 5. Quality of Care and Pregnancy
Terminations for Adolescent Women in Urban
Slums, Bangladesh; 6. Choosing Abortion
Providers in Rural Tamil Nadu: Balancing Costs
and Quality of Care; 7. Abortion in Vietnam:
History, Culture and Politics Collide in the Era of
Doi Moi; 8. Abortion and Politics in Indonesia;
9. Barriers to Access to Abortion Services in
Malaysia: Misinformation and Stigma;
10. Improving Access to Safe Termination of
Pregnancy in Thailand: An Analysis of the Policy
Development During 1999 to 2006; 11. Epilogue:
Further Challenges; Glossary; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993155
270pp
In recent years anthropology has rediscovered its
interest in politics. Building on the findings of this
research, this book offers a new way of analysing
the relationship between culture and politics, with
special attention to democracy, nationalism, the
state and political violence. Beginning with
scenes from an unruly early 1980s election
campaign in Sri Lanka, it covers issues from rural
policing in north India to slum housing in Delhi,
presenting arguments about secularism and
pluralism, and the ambiguous energies released
by electoral democracy across the subcontinent.
It ends by discussing feminist peace activists in
Sri Lanka, struggling to sustain a window of
shared humanity after two decades of war.
Bringing together and linking the themes of
democracy, identity and conflict, this important
new study shows how anthropology can take a
central role in understanding other people’s
politics, especially the issues that seem to have
divided the world since 9/11.
ISBN: 9780521722124
Asian Voices in a
Postcolonial Age
Susan Bayly
HB ` 895.00
218pp
PB ` 495.00
This study of intellectuals and their cosmopolitan
life trajectories is based on anthropological and
historical research in Vietnam and India, two
great Asian societies with contrasting
experiences of empire, decolonisation and the
rise and fall of the twentieth-century socialist
world system. Building on the author's longstanding research experience in India and on
remarkable family narratives collected during
fieldwork in northern Vietnam, the book deals with
epic events and complex social transformations
from a perspective that emphasizes the personal
and the familial. Its central theme is the
extraordinary mobility of intelligentsia lives. The
author explores the role of the intellectual in the
economic, social and cultural transformation of
the post-colonial world through in-depth
ethnographic fieldwork methods. In identifying
parallels and contrasts between Hanoi's 'socialist
moderns' and the family and career experiences
of their Indian counterparts, the book makes a
distinctive contribution to the study of colonial,
socialist and post-socialist Asia.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The modern
intellectual family. Separation, provision and
nurture; 3. Narrating family lives in present-day
Hanoi; 4. The pains and perils of intelligentsia life;
5. India as a domain of socialist modernity;
6. Cosmopolitan spaces in revolutionary times;
7. Vistas of modernity in the insurgent
countryside; 8. At home and beyond in the new
socialist era; 9. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9780521516808
1
218pp
HB ` 895.00
Disquieting Gifts
Humanitarianism in
New Delhi
Erica Bornstein
Taming Tibet
This book takes a close look at people working on
humanitarian projects in New Delhi and
addresses several issues – why they engage in
philanthropic work, what ‘humanitarianism’ means
to them, and the ethical and political tangles they
encounter. There are many studies focusing on
the outcomes of humanitarian work, but the
impulses that inspire people to engage in the first
place receive less attention. In this book, the
author investigates specific cases of people
engaged in humanitarian work to reveal different
perceptions of assistance to strangers versus
assistance to kin, how the impulse to give to
others in distress is tempered by its regulation,
suspicions about recipient suitability, and why the
figure of the orphan is so valuable in
humanitarian discourse. The book would be of
interest to students and academics in Sociology,
Anthropology, Development Studies and Human
Rights.
Landscape
Transformation
and the Gift of
Chinese Development
Emily T. Yeh
Contents: Foreword; Acknowledgements;
Prologue; Introduction; Chapter 1 Philanthropy;
Chapter 2 Trust; Chapter 3 Orphans; Chapter 4
Experience; Chapter 5 Empathy; Epilogue; Notes;
Bibliography.
ISBN: 9789382264637
Fighting Eviction
Tribal Land Rights and
Research-in-Action
Daniel Buckles, Rajeev
Khedkar, Bansi Ghevde
and Dnyaneshwar Patil
232pp
Contents: List of illustrations; Preface; Note on
Transliterations and Place Names; Abbreviations
and Terms; Introduction; A Celebration; 1. State
Space: Power, Fear, and the State of Exception;
Hearing and Forgetting; Part I. Soil; The
Aftermath of 2008 (I); 2. Cultivating Control:
Nature, Gender, and Memories of Labor in State
Incorporation; Part II. Plastic; Lhasa Humor;
3. Vectors of Development: Migrants and the
Making of “Little Sichuan”; Signs of Lhasa; 4. The
Micropolitics of Marginalization; Science and
Technology Transfer Day; 5. Indolence and the
Cultural Politics of Development; Part III.
Concrete; Michael Jackson as Lhasa; 6. “Build a
Civilized City”: Making Lhasa Urban; The
Aftermath of 2008 (II); 7. Engineering
Indebtedness and Image: Comfortable Housing
and the New Socialist Countryside; Conclusion;
Afterword: Fire; Notes; References; Index.
HB ` 895.00
The book engages readers in a process of
reflection on what it means to do research ‘with’
people rather than ‘on’ people, by recounting a
collaborative inquiry with the Katkari, formerly
called ‘Criminal Tribe’ and so-called ‘Primitive
Tribal Group’ in Maharashtra, India. The book is
designed to help readers learn about participatory
action research progressively and with a strong
narrative grounded in issues facing Adivasi
populations in South Asia and the real-life
dilemmas of engaged research. As such it is
accessible to both graduate and undergraduate
students in many disciplines. This includes all of
the standard social science departments teaching
methods and promoting field-based research.
The book will appeal to development practitioners
and graduate students of Sociology,
Anthropology, Development Studies and Tribal
Studies.
ISBN: 9789382993995
Wandering with
Sadhus
Ascetics in the Hindu
Himalayas
Sondra L. Hausner
Contents: List of Tables; List of Figures; List of
Images; Foreword; Acknowledgements;
Introduction; Chapter 1: Origins of the Gaothan
Problem; Chapter 2: Responses to the Threat of
Eviction; Chapter 3: Understanding Complexity;
Chapter 4: Addressing Government Neglect;
Chapter 5: Breaking the Bonds of Migratory
Labor; Chapter 6: Strengthening Katkari
Collective Organization; Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264538
258pp
The violent protests in Lhasa in 2008 against
Chinese rule were met by disbelief and anger on
the part of Chinese citizens and state authorities,
perplexed by Tibetans’ apparent ingratitude for
the generous provision of development. This
book examines how Chinese development
projects in Tibet served to consolidate state
space and power. Drawing on sixteen months of
ethnographic fieldwork between 2000 and 2009,
Yeh traces how the transformation of the material
landscape of Tibet between the 1950s and the
first decade of the twenty-first century has often
been enacted through the labour of Tibetans
themselves. Focusing on Lhasa, Yeh shows how
attempts to foster and improve Tibetan livelihoods
through the expansion of markets and the
subsidized building of new houses, the control
over movement and space, and the education of
Tibetan desires for development have worked
together at different times and how they are
experienced in everyday life.
HB ` 795.00
2
344pp
HB ` 695.00
In this moving ethnographic portrait of Hindu
renouncers – sadhus or ascetics – in northern
India and Nepal, Sondra L. Hausner considers a
paradox that shapes their lives: While ostensibly
defined by their solitary spiritual practice, the
stripping away of social commitments, and their
break with family and community, renouncers in
fact regularly interact with each other and with
“householder” society. They form a distinctive,
alternative community with its own internal
structure, one that is not located in any single
space. Highly-mobile and dispersed across the
subcontinent, its members are regulalrly brought
together through pilgrimage circuits on festival
cycles. Drawing on many years of fieldwork,
Hausner presents intimate portraits of individual
sadhus as she examines the shared views of
space, time, and the body that create the ground
of everyday experience. Written with an
extraordinary blend of empathy, compassion, and
anthropological insight, this study will appeal to
scholars, students and general readers alike.
environment; Part II. The Management Culture:
5. Shared beliefs about rewards, risks,
opportunities and rule-bending; 6. Shared beliefs
about control and learning; Part III. The
Corporate Executives: 7. The bigger-is-better
corporate philosophy; 8. The small-is-beautiful
corporate philosophy; 9. New business creation
challenges for corporate executives;
10. Guidance and coaching by the DGM's boss
and support and challenge by the controllers;
Part IV. The Division General Manager: 11. The
DGM's personal assets; 12. The DGM's
motivation and strategy for new business
creation; 13. Building corporate support for new
business creation; 14. Leading the division for
new business creation; Part V. The Division and
Its Top Management Team; 15. The identification
and pursuit of new business opportunities; 16.
Other new business creation challenges for the
division; 17. The division's organization,
competence and collaboration for new business
creation; 18. The effectiveness of the division's
top management team; Part IV. Putting it All
Together: 19. How the five major influences
interact to drive new business creation;
20. Managing ten critical issues in new business
creation; Notes; Bibliography; Index.
Contents: Acknowledgements; Note on
Transliteration; Introduction – Wandering with
Renouncers; One – The Body and Sadhu
Society; Two –The Social Structures of Sadhu
Life; Three – Hardwar: The Ground of Space;
Four –Allahabad: The Community in Time; Five –
Kathmandu: The Body in Place; Conclusion –
The Culture of Hindu Renunciation; Appendix:
Literatures on Renunciation and Embodiment;
Notes; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175968929
The Conquests of
Alexander the
Great
Waldemar Heckel
266pp
HB ` 495.00
In this book, Waldemar Heckel traces the rise
and eventual fall of one of the most successful
military commanders in history. In 325 BCE,
Alexander and his conquering army prepared to
return home, after overcoming everything in their
path: armies, terrain, climate, all invariably
hostile. Little did they know that within two years
their beloved king would be dead and their
labours seemingly wasted. Tracing the rise and
eventual fall of one of the most successful
military commanders in history, Heckel
engagingly, and with great detail, shows us how
Alexander earned his appellation, The Great.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction; 2. How do we
know? Sources for Alexander the Great; 3. The
Macedonian background; 4. The Persian enemy;
5. Conquest of the Achaemenids; 6. Resistance
on two fronts; 7. Conquest of the Punjab; 8. The
ocean and the West; 9. The long road from Susa
to Babylon.
ISBN: 9781107637528
240pp
ISBN: 9780521613927
Decentralization and
Empowerment for
Rural Development
HB ` 350.00
Hari K. Nagarajan,
Hans P. BinswangerMkhize and
S. S. Meenakshisundaram
ECONOMICS AND BUSINESS STUDIES
Corporate
Entrepreneurship
Top Managers and
New Business
Creation
Vijay Sathe
How do large corporations encourage their senior
managers to become more entrepreneurial? This
is a key question, which is seldom addressed in
mainstream entrepreneurship studies. Vijay
Sathe has written a pioneering book based on
hundreds of hours of interviews with senior
managers to help understand why some
organizations and some top managers are better
than others in fostering entrepreneurship leading
to successful new business growth. The book
explores the real world of top managers in a
systematic and comprehensive way, examining
business realities, management culture,
corporate philosophy, organization politics,
personalities and personal priorities of people at
the top. It also offers both a theory of corporate
entrepreneurship and practical advice on how to
manage it better.
408pp
PB ` 795.00
This book examines the empowerment of citizens
in general, and of the poor and marginalized
groups in particular, by the process of
decentralization. It discusses the precise role of
Panchayat and local governance on the quantity
and quality of services. Some of the findings
include – long-term impact of political reservation
for women, positive relationship between local
revenue generation and quality of governance,
significant welfare gains due to parochial politics
and even bribes. The mechanisms through which
improvements in governance are achieved
include Gram Sabha meetings with specific
agenda related to services, participation of
households in such meetings, and, the impact of
specific institutions such as VECs, VWUSCs, and
the Pani Panchayats. The authors are able to
prove that a positive relationship exists between
the quality of services and increasing local
revenues. The large number of tied grants that
Panchayats receive has long been criticized as
leading to a general constriction of choices left
with the Panchayats to be able to effectively
allocate expenditures. Most importantly, the book
quantifies the impact of Panchayats in terms of
the ability of households to reduce vulnerability
and transit out of poverty. Hari
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Foreword
1; Foreword 2; Preface; 1. Introduction;
2. Decentralization: Cross-country Experiences;
3. Thinking about Decentralization in India: 73rd
Amendment and Beyond; 4. Literature; 5. An
Overview of the Data; 6. Analytical Approaches
and Econometric Methods Used; 7. Can
Panchayats Improve the Quality of Services?
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Foreword; Preface; List of abbreviations;
1. Introduction; 2. Why a consistent emphasis
and approach for new business creation is
beneficial but difficult to achieve; Part I. The
Business Environment: 3. The external business
environment; 4. The internal business
3
Some Qualitative Evidence; 8. Impact of Political
Reservations for Women in Panchayats;
9. Importance of Individual Empowerment of
Women; 10. Governance, Service Provision and
Development Outcomes; 11. The Impact of Fiscal
Grants on Tax Efforts of Village Panchayats;
12. Incidence of Identity-based Voting and Bribes
in Panchayats; 13. Panchayats and Household
Vulnerability; 14. Key Findings, Conclusions and
Policy Recommendations; References; Index;
About the Authors.
ISBN: 9789382264781
Economic Reform
in India
Challenges, Prospects,
and Lessons
Nicholas C. Hope,
Anjini Kochar, Roger
Noll and T. N.
Srinivasan
384pp
1983–2005 Peter Lanjouw and Rinku Murgai;
Part IV. Infrastructure: Electricity and
Transportation: 12. An assessment of Indian
telecommunications reform Roger Noll and Scott
Wallsten; 13. Managing demand-side economic
and political constraints on electricity industry
restructuring process Frank A. Wolak; 14. Moving
India: the political economy of transport sector
reform Nirvikar K. Singh and Jessica S. Wallack.
ISBN: 9781107046047
543pp HB ` 1295.00
HB ` 895.00
Financial Analysis,
Planning &
Forecasting
The essays in this volume are written by leading
economists working on the Indian economy. They
collectively emphasize the importance of policies
and institutions for sustained growth and poverty
reduction, stressing that the success of sectorspecific policies is vitally dependent on the nature
of markets and the functioning of institutions such
as those charged with regulating and overseeing
critical sectors. Individual contributions assess
the role of Indian Government policy in key
sectors and emphasize the policies required to
ensure improvements in these sectors. The first
section discusses aspects of the macro
economy; the second deals with agriculture and
social sectors; the third with jobs and how labor
markets function in agriculture, industry and
services; and the fourth with infrastructure
services, specifically electricity,
telecommunications and transport. The essays
are drawn from the most influential papers
presented in recent years on Indian economic
policy at the Stanford Center for International
Development.
Theory and Application
Alice C. Lee, John C.
Lee and Cheng F. Lee
Based on the authors' extensive teaching,
research and business experiences, this book
reviews, discusses, and integrates both
theoretical and practical aspects of financial
planning and forecasting. The book is divided
into six parts: Information and Methodology for
Financial Analysis, Alternative Finance Theories
and Their Application, Capital Budgeting and
Leasing Decisions, Corporate Policies and Their
Interrelationships, Short-term Financial
Decisions, Financial Planning and Forecasting,
and Overview. The theories used in this book are
pre-Modigliani–Miller Theorem, Modigliani–Miller
Theorem, Capital Asset Pricing Model and
Arbitrage Pricing Theory, and Option Pricing
Theory. The interrelationships among these
theories are carefully analysed. Meaningful realworld examples of using these theories are
discussed step-by-step, with relevant data and
methodology. Alternative planning and
forecasting models are also used to show how
the interdisciplinary approach is helpful in making
meaningful financial management decisions.
Contents: • Information and Methodology for
Financial Analysis; • Accounting Information,
Regression Analysis, and Financial
Management; • Discriminant Analysis and Factor
Analysis: Theory and Method; • Application of
Discriminant Analysis and Factor Analysis in
Financial Management; • Alternative Financial
Theories and Cost of Capital; • Risk Estimation
and Diversification; • Risk and Return Trade-Off
Analysis; • Options and Option Strategies; •
Capital Budgeting and Leasing Decisions; •
Alternative Cost of Capital Analysis and
Estimation; • Capital Budgeting Under Certainty; •
Capital Budgeting Under Uncertainty; • Corporate
Policies and Their Interrelationships; • Mergers:
Theory and Evidence; • Dividend Policy and
Empirical Evidence; • Interaction of Financing,
Investment and Dividend Policies; • Financial
Planning and Forecasting:; • Short-Term
Financial Analysis and Planning; • Credit
Management; • Cash, Marketable Securities, and
Inventory Management; • Long-Range Financial
Planning — A Linear-Programming Modeling
Approach; • Time-Series: Analysis, Model, and
Forecasting; o and other papers;
Contents: 1. Introduction Nicholas C. Hope,
Anjini Kochar, Roger Noll and T. N. Srinivasan;
Part I. The Macro Economy: 2. Federalism and
economic development in India: an assessment
Nirvikar K. Singh and T. N. Srinivasan; 3. India
and China: trade and foreign investment Arvind
Panagariya; 4. Financial sector reforms and
monetary policy: the Indian experience Rakesh
Mohan; Part II. Institutional Reforms: Agriculture
and Education: 5. Land reform, decentralized
governance and rural development in West
Bengal Pranab Bardhan and Dilip Mookherjee;
6. Market-driven agricultural growth: contrasting
experiences in Punjab and Rajasthan Peter
Hazell, Abhijit Sharma and Laurence Smith;
7. India's higher education opportunity Naushad
Forbes; 8. Improving the quality of rural primary
schools: an evaluation of a computer aided
learning program in south India Verghese Jacob,
Anjini Kochar and Suresh Reddy; Part III.
Employment, Industrial Structure and Poverty: 9.
The missing middle Anne O. Kreuger; 10. Some
aspects of the trends in employment and
unemployment in Bihar and Kerala since the
seventies T. N. Srinivasan and Treb Allen; 11.
Size matters: urban growth and poverty in India
ISBN: 9788175967885
4
1136pp PB ` 695.00
Globalization and
Competition
Why Some Emergent
Countries Succeed
While Others Fall
Behind
L. C. Bresser Pereira
India Working
Globalization and Competition explains why
some middle-income countries, principally those
in Asia, grow fast while others are not successful.
The author criticizes both old-style
developmentalism and the economics of the
Washington Consensus. He argues instead for a
'new developmentalism' or third approach that
builds on a national development strategy. This
approach differs from the neoliberal strategy that
rich nations propose to emerging economies
principally on macroeconomic grounds.
Developing countries face a key obstacle to
growth, namely, the tendency to overvaluate
foreign exchange. Instead of neutralizing it, the
policy that rich countries promote mistakenly
seeks growth through foreign savings, which
causes additional appreciation of the national
currency and often results in financial crises
rather than genuine investment.
Essays on Society and
Economy
Barbara Harriss-White
Contents: 1. Introduction; the character of the
Indian economy; 2. Labour, work and its social
construction in India; 3. Class: Indian
development and the intermediate classes;
4. The local state and the informal economy;
5. Gender, family businesses and business
families; 6. India’s religious plurality and its
implications for the economy; 7. Caste and
corporatist capitalism; 8. Space and synergy;
9. How India works; 10. Postscript: Proto-fascist
politics and the economy.
Contents: Introduction; Part I. Political Economy:
1. Globalization and catching up; 2. The key
institution; 3. New developmentalism; Part II.
Development Macroeconomics: 4. The tendency
of the exchange rate to overvaluation; 5. The
Dutch disease; 6. Foreign savings and slow
growth; 7. Foreign savings and financial crises;
Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107623996
264pp
By drawing on her extensive fieldwork in India
and on the adjacent theoretical literature, Barbara
Harriss-White describes the working of the Indian
economy through its most important social
structures of accumulation. Successive chapters
explore a range of topics including labour,
capital, the state, gender, religious plurality, caste
and space. Despite the complexity of the subject,
the book is vivid and compelling. The author’s
intimate knowledge of the country enables the
reader to experience the Indian local scene and
to engage with the precariousness of daily life.
Her conclusion challenges the prevailing notion
that liberalization releases the economy from
political interference and leads to a postscript on
the economic base for Fascism in India. This is
an intelligent book, by a distinguished scholar, for
students of economics, as well as for those
studying the region.
PB ` 595.00
ISBN: 9788175962309
Human Capital
R. Rajaram
Human Capital is based on the concept that
organizations should create an environment
where people are valued and encouraged to
maximize their abilities. An inside view of
rewarding and retaining performing employees
and assigning challenging tasks to them is
revealed. The importance of nurturing a
performance-oriented culture to harness human
capital for competitive advantages has been
underlined. In the fast-changing business world,
organisations constantly evolve and this
diversifies the manager’s role. Openness and
perceptiveness are blended at various levels of
organization management. Human Capital uses
several real-life examples to explain theoretical
concepts of human resource management. The
book deftly redefines and reorients management
tactics to create new understanding of the
employer-employee relationship.
Innovation in India
Shyama V. Ramani
Contents: Preface; 1. Peak Performance; 2.
Supportive Environment; 3. Rewarding
Performance; 4. Job Satisfaction; 5. Productivity
Settlement; 6. Power of Communication; 7.
Human Capital; 8. Nurturing Work Culture; 9.
Manage Change; 10. Knowledge Management;
11. Managerial Effectiveness; 12. Retention of
Talents; 13. Leadership; 14. Industrial Relations;
15. Demotivators; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175965461
216pp
336pp
PB ` 495.00
It has been a little more than sixty years since the
foundations of India's national system of
innovation were laid, and it is time to look back
and examine what form it has taken. What are
the achievements of the Indian system of
innovation? How has it performed in terms of
building industrial capabilities and promoting
development? Using the 'National System of
Innovation' and the 'Sectoral System of
Innovation' approach, this book organizes
historical evidence on the accumulation of
scientific, technical, innovation and industrial
capabilities in different industrial sectors. It is also
useful to keep in mind that according to the
sectoral tales of this book, irrespective of the
policy, there will always be some individuals and
organisations who will experiment to find creative
ways of pursuing opportunities.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Prologue;
1. Innovation in India: the challenge of combining
economic growth with inclusive development
Shyama V. Ramani and Adam Szirmai.
ISBN: 9781107037564
PB ` 495.00
5
418pp
HB ` 795.00
Making Money
The Philosophy of
Crisis Capitalism
Ole Bjerg
Environment: Uncertain State of New
Technologies; PART III: The Institutional Basis
for Industry and Health; 8 Health Technologies in
Comparative Global Perspective; 9 Markets and
Metropolis; Notes; Index
What is money? Where does it come from? Who
makes it? And how can we understand the
current state of our economy as a crisis of money
itself? This book turns these questions into a
matter of philosophical analysis rather than an
economic one. Applying the thought of Slavoj
Zizek and other scholars to mainstream
economic literature, Bjerg provides a radical new
way of looking at the mysterious stuff we use to
buy things. It is a theory unfolded in reflections
on the nature of monetary phenomena such as
financial markets, banks, debt, credit, derivatives,
gold, risk, value, price, interests, and arbitrage.
The analysis of money is put into a historical
context, suggesting that the current financial
turbulence and debt crisis are evidence that we
live in the age of post-credit capitalism. By
bridging the fields of economics and
contemporary philosophy, Bjerg’s work engages
in a compelling form of intellectual arbitrage.
ISBN: 9789382993056
Monetary Policy,
Sovereign Debt
and Financial
Stability
The New Trilemma
Deepak Mohanty
Contents: Introduction: Seinsvergessenheit and
Money; PART 1: The Philosophy of Finance;
1. Analyzing Financial Markets; 2. Modern
Finance and the Fantasy of the Efficient Market;
PART 2: The Philosophy of Money; 3. Analyzing
Money; 4. Credit Money and the Ideology of
Banking; PART 3: The Age of Post-Credit
Money; 5. Money without Cash; 6. The
Financialization of Money; Conclusion: Life after
Debt – Revolution in theAge of Financial
Capitalism; Glossary of Financial Terms;
Bibliography; Index
ISBN: 9789384463489
Market Menagerie
Health and
Development in Late
Industrial States
Smita Srinivas
304pp
PB ` 395.00
Market Menagerie examines technological
advance and market regulation in the health
industries of nations such as India, Brazil, South
Africa, Nigeria, and China. Pharmaceutical and
life science industries can reinforce economic
development and industry growth, but not
necessarily positive health outcomes. Yet wellcrafted industrial and health policies can
strengthen each other and reconcile economic
and social goals. This book advocates moving
beyond traditional market failure to bring together
three uncommonly paired themes: the growth of
industrial capabilities, the politics of health
access, and the geography of production and
redistribution.
344pp
PB ` 795.00
The global financial crisis and the following Eurozone sovereign debt crisis have since changed
the art and science of central banking in a
fundamental way. It challenged the stereotypical
view that price stability and financial stability
complement each other as the global financial
sector came to the brink of collapse in the midst
of a period of extraordinary price stability. Post
crisis, central banks across the globe continue to
grapple with the new trilemma of pursuing with
the objectives of monetary policy, sovereign debt
and financial stability in a co-ordinated fashion.
The authors in this volume address several
issues in relation to advanced economies: Is the
trilemma a new impossible trinity or a holy trinity?
What are the implication of this expanded
mandate for the effectiveness and autonomy of
central banks? Does it indicate the return of fiscal
dominance on monetary policy? Is fiscal
responsibility more than a question of monetary
policy independence? Is the interaction between
sovereign debt management and monetary policy
an important determinant of market confidence?
Is co-ordination among central banks to assess
the implications of their policies on global liquidity
and spillovers relevant for global financial
stability?
Contents: Foreword; Introduction; Chapter 1:
Price Stability, Financial Stability and Sovereign
Debt Sustainability Policy Challenges from the
New Trilemma- Duvvuri Subbarao; Chapter 2:
Evidence on Interest Rate Channel of Monetary
Policy: Transmission in India- Deepak Mohanty;
Chapter 3: A Macroprudential Approach to
Financial Supervision and Monetary Policy in
Emerging Economies-Yung Chul Park; Chapter
4: Reassessing the Impact of Finance on Growth
-Stephen G Cecchetti and Enisse Kharroubi;
Chapter 5: Post-Crisis Debt Overhang: Growth
Implications across Countries-Jorgen Elmeskov
and Douglas Sutherland; Chapter 6: Financial
Stability and Responsive Monetary Policy:
Resolving a Dynamic Incompatibility-Benjamin M.
Friedman; Chapter 7: Credit Crises and the
Shortcomings of Traditional Policy ResponsesWilliam R White; Chapter 8: Political Economy of
Debt Accumulation and Fiscal Adjustment in a
Financial Crisis-Parthasarathi Shome; Chapter 9:
Rethinking Central Banking-Barry Eichengreen,
Eswar Prasad and Raghuram Rajan; Chapter 10:
Sovereign Debt Overhang and Monetary PolicyFrank Smets and Mathias Trabandt; Contributors.
Contents: Illustrations; Acknowledgments; PART
I: Market Menagerie: Planning the Health of Late
Industrial Development; Introduction; Health and
Development in Late Industrial States;
Barbarians at the Gate: Late Industrial Supply;
Data, Methods, and Structure; The Chapters
Ahead; 1 Well Beyond Market Failure; PART II:
1950– 2000: Indian Market Menagerie; 2 The
First Market Environment: Trouble in the Making
Phase I, 1950– 1970s: Coveted; 3 “Essential”
Markets, Public Health, and Private Learning; 4
Demand and Democracy; 5 The Second Market
Environment: Learning by Proving in Global
Regulatory Harmonization; 6 Demand as
Necessary but Not Sufficient: Vaccine
Procurement Markets; 7 The Third Market
ISBN: 9789382993209
6
384pp
HB ` 995.00
Nanotechnology
and Development
What’s in it for
Emerging Countries?
Shyama V. Ramani
Public Expenditure
and Indian
Development
Policy
1960-1970
Nanotechnology is a generic platform with
potential applications in many sectors. It
promises to be a motor of economic growth with
inclusive development through innovations
related to materials, foods, medicines, etc. Both
developed and emerging countries have
participated in the nanotechnology race, but the
importance of this race was understood at
different times. The opportunity cost of funds
diverted to knowledge base, equipment or
scientific and technological capabilities is higher
for emerging countries with high poverty. In this
context, how should emerging economies
attempt to participate in the nanotechnology
race? What are the trade-offs between the
different possible trajectories for catching-up?
This book is an attempt to answer these queries.
The book identifies the nature and magnitude of
the nanotechnology divide between high-income
countries and the rest of the world. It also studies
the determinants of the evolution and functioning
of state policy and technology clusters in
developed regions like the US and the EU in
order to identify the strategies that can or cannot
be replicated elsewhere. Tracing the trajectories
in nanotechnology being carved out by four
emerging countries, China, India, Brazil, and
Mexico, it identifies common as well as countryspecific factors that influence the rates of return
to public and private investment related to
nanotechnology in emerging countries. The book
also makes policy recommendations to bridge
the nanotechnology divide while promoting
economic growth and inclusive development.
J. F. J. Toye
Contents: List of Figures; List of Tables;
Acknowledgments; Part I: Introduction to
Nanotechnology and Participation of Developing
Countries; 1. On Nanoscience, Nanotechnology,
and Nanoproducts: Why Everyone Wants to Join
this Game?; Susan E. Reid, Roger Coronini, and
Shyama V. Ramani; Part II: Winning and Losing
in Nanotech: Case Studies from Developed
Countries; 2. Learning from Solyndra: Changing
Paradigms in the US Innovation System;
Christopher Newfield and Daryl Boudreaux;
3. How is a Regional Technology Cluster
Created? Insight from the Construction of the
Nanotech Cluster in Grenoble; Dominique Vinck
and Shyama V. Ramani; 4. Co-Patenting
Patterns in Nanotechnology: A Comparison of
South Korea and Germany; Ad Notten and
Shyama V. Ramani; ; Part III: Placing Bets on
Nanotech: Case Studies of Emerging Countries;
5. Sure Bet or Mirage? On the Chinese
Trajectory in Nanotechnology; Can Huang and
Yilin Wu; 6. Dancing with the Scientists or How
NST Emerged in Brazil; Nédson Campos; 7. NST
without NII? The Mexican Case Study; Eduardo
Robles Belmont and Rebeca de Gortari Rabiela;
8. On India’s Plunge into Nanotechnology: What
are Good Ways to Catch-Up?; Shyama V.
Ramani, Nupur Chowdhury, Roger Coronini, and
Susan E. Reid; ; Part IV: Conclusions;
9. Nanotech after Biotech in Emerging
Economies: Déjà vu or a New Form of Catching
Up?; Shyama V. Ramani and Jorge Niosi;
Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9781107037588
280pp
Of the many different ways in which economists
have tried to analyse public expenditure, the
most relevant to Indian economic development is
that which links the level of public expenditure
with the rate at which the state can accumulate
capital. The abstract theory of this link, however,
must be complemented by a historical account of
the degree to which a state accumulation policy
was understood by Indian policy makers, and of
the other (often inconsistent) elements in the
economic strategy of Indian nationalism. After
attempting to provide accounts both of the
abstract theory and of the institutional and policy
context within which it was applied, this book
analyses original empirical data on public
expenditure in India between 1960 and 1970.
The real growth rate of public expenditure, its
functional and economic composition at the allIndia level are presented, and the strong contrast
between the patterns of the first and last five year
periods is elucidated. The effect of the 1965-67
droughts and bad harvests in producing this
contrast is assessed.At a more disaggregated
level, studies are made of changes in the degree
of centralization of public capital formation and
public saving. Differences between individual
states in their rates of growth of real public
expenditure, public capital formation and public
saving are also examined, and possible
explanations considered. It is argued that the
public expenditure data are consistent with a
specific view of the way state accumulation took
place within the context of the Indian nationalist
economic strategy. The attempt to create a
‘modern’ structure of output, without using foreign
trade to divorce domestic production from
domestic demand, and without control over
domestic demand either, was superimposed on
the basic task of state accumulation and made its
achievement progressively more difficult.
Contents: List of tables; Preface; List of
abbreviations; Introduction; Part I. General:
1. Public expenditure and state accumulation in
theory; 2. Indian nationalism and the state
accumulation policy; 3. The interpretation of
Indian public expenditure statistics; Part II.
Empirical Evidence: 4. The fiscal performance of
the public sector; 5. Public expenditure and the
industrial recession; 6. The degree of public
expenditure centralization; 7. The growth of state
governments' spending; 8. Public investment,
public saving and the state governments; Part III.
Conclusions: 9. The Indian state accumulation
policy in retrospect; 10. Summary of conclusions;
Appendices; List of works cited; Index.
ISBN: 9780521059282
HB ` 695.00
7
292pp
PB ` 665.00
The Economics of
Derivatives
T. V. Somanathan and
V. Anantha Nageswaran
Experience in Promoting Financial Inclusion and
Policy Responses; 8. The Way Forward —
Determinants and Macro Policies ; Appendix;
Bibliography; Index
While most books on derivatives discuss how they
work, this book looks at the contributions of
derivatives to overall economic well-being. It
examines both the beneficial and adverse effects
of derivatives trading from the perspectives of
economic theory, empirical evidence and recent
economic history. Aiming to present the concepts
in a fair, non-ideological, non-mathematical and
simple manner, and with the authors' own
synthesis, it draws on economic insights from
relevant work in other disciplines, particularly
sociology and law. The book also presents new
theoretical ideas and recommendations towards a
pragmatic and practical approach for policymakers. The ultimate objective is to provide a basic
conceptual framework which will help its readers
form a judgement on whether, when and how
derivatives are beneficial or harmful to the
economy.
ISBN: 9788175968004
The G20
Macroeconomic
Agenda
India and the Emerging
Economies
Parthasarathi Shome
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Definition and
typology; 3. The economic functions of derivatives
markets; 4. Market completion;
5. Derivatives and price stabilization;
6. Derivatives and price destabilization; 7. The
effects of derivatives on prices of the underlying: a
synthesis; 8. Causes of the rapid growth in
derivatives trading: a historical perspective;
9. The role of derivatives in the global financial
crisis of 2008; 10. Models and their effects on
markets; 11. Derivatives and emerging markets;
12. Derivatives and emerging markets;
13. Regulation of derivatives; 14. Derivatives and
development: a critique; 15. Regulatory policy for
derivatives: a pragmatic approach.
ISBN: 9781107091504
The Financial
Inclusion
Imperative and
Sustainable
Approaches
Deepali Pant Joshi
269pp
HB ` 695.00
The need for Financial Inclusion is fast emerging
as an international policy issue at the macro
level. The Financial Inclusion Imperative and
Sustainable Approaches is a comprehensive
account of various components of the Financial
Inclusion. It presents a blueprint to combat
poverty and highlights the critical role of banks
and the microfinance sector. This book is
comprehensive and gives a contemporary
treatment of major issues facing the Indian
economy today. It combines academic rigour and
objectivity with clear presentation. This book will
be a valuable source of reference on the subject
for bankers, policy-makers, teachers and
students of economics.
292pp
HB ` 795.00
As the premier forum for global economic
governance, G20 was successful in warding off
the global economic crisis of 2008–09 and
preventing it from becoming a full-blown
depression. In its wake, G20 initiated a series of
financial sector reforms and managed to achieve
unprecedented global cooperation, by bringing
together the G7 and newly-emerging economies,
for improved global macroeconomic
management. As the global economy recovered
in 2010, G20 expanded to include a development
agenda in particular, achieving food security,
controlling commodity price volatility, recycling
global savings to boost infrastructure investment,
and enhancing energy and environmental
sustainability. Despite the emergence of BRICS,
there is no scholarly compendium on emerging
economy concerns and perspectives set in the
context of G20 reform initiatives and impasses.
This book assesses the progress of the G20 with
a focus on India. It discusses the role India has
played in the success of the G20 process and,
more importantly, delineates the possible barriers
to India’s enhanced involvement in the G20, and
in global governance in general. This volume fills
the need for a collection of analytical research
papers from the perspective of emerging
economies, and takes stock of the performance
of the G20 thus far. It also points towards the
unresolved issues and the future course of action
in global financial and macroeconomic stance.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Preface;
Section 1: Introduction; 1. The G20: Evolution,
Functioning, Prospects: A Concise Review;
Parthasarathi Shome; Section 2: Financial Sector
Reforms and Regulation; 2. Financial Regulation
and the G20: Options for India; Ashima Goyal;
3. Financial Sector Reforms under G20 and the
Indian Banks; Poonam Gupta; Section 3: Global
Macroeconomic Coordination and Reforming
International Financial Institutions; 4. The G20
MAP, Sustaining Global Economic Growth and
Global Imbalances: India’s Role in Supporting
Cooperation among Global Macroeconomic
Policymakers; David Vines; 5. Reform of
International Financial Institutions; T. N.
Srinivasan; 6. Capital Controls: Instruments and
Effectiveness; Parthasarathi Shome, Jyotirmoy
Bhattacharya, Shuheb Khan; 7. The International
Monetary System: Mitigating Risks from
Dominance of the Dollar and India’s Stance;
Renu Kohli; 8. The Challenges in IMS Reforms:
An Emerging Markets’ Perspective; Alok Sheel;
9. Chiang Mai Initiative and its Relevance for
India; Sheetal K. Chand; Contributors; Index.
Contents; Foreword; Acknowledgment ; 1. An
Overview on Development ; 2. Financial
Inclusion: The Nature and Extent of the
Challenge; 3. Financial Inclusion: The Indian
Perspective; 4. Tackling Financial Inclusion and
RBI Policy: Responses and Voluntary Initiatives
of Banks; 5. Microfinance Experience and Other
Institutional Approaches; 6. Policy Response
Committee on Financial Inclusion; 7. International
ISBN: 9781107051102
8
316pp
HB ` 745.00
The IMF and
Global Financial
Crises
Joseph P. Joyce
The IMF's response to the global crisis of
2008–09 marked a significant change from its
past policies. The Fund provided relatively-large
amounts of credit quickly with limited conditions
and accepted the use of capital controls. This
book traces the evolution of the IMF's actions to
promote international financial stability from the
Bretton Woods Era through the most recent
crisis. The analysis includes an examination of
the IMF's crisis management activities during the
debt crisis of the 1980s, the upheavals in
emerging markets in the 1990s and early 2000s,
and the ongoing European crisis. The dominant
influence of the United States and other
advanced economies in the governance of the
IMF is also described, and the replacement of the
G7 nations by the more inclusive G20, whose
members have promised to give the IMF a role in
their mutual assessment of policies while
undertaking reforms of the IMF's governance.
Chapter 9: From the Right to Education to the
Right to Learning; Chapter 10: Food Security,
Nutrition and Health: Policy Dilemmas and
Interlinked Challenges; Chapter 11: Redesigning
Sanitation Programmes to Make India Free from
Open Defaecation; Part 3: Building a System of
Social Protection; Chapter 12: Minimising
Leakages in Welfare Programmes: How to
Identify the Poor Correctly?; Chapter 13: Needed
a Social Insurance System for Unorganised
Workers below the Poverty Line; Chapter 14:
Introducing Cash Transfers: A Proposal for a
Minimum Income Guarantee and Some CCTs;
Part 4: Governance; Chapter 15: Two Prerequisites for Optimum Governance: Deep Fiscal
Decentralisation and the Bureaucracy’s Ability to
Learn; Chapter 16: Addressing Left-wing
Extremism: Encourage Peace to Secure
Development – or the Way Round?; Index.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Bretton Woods;
3. Transitions; 4. The debt crisis; 5. Global
finance redux; 6. Currency crises; 7. The
widening gyre; 8. Fiscal follies; 9. Lessons
learned; 10. The great recession; 11. The world
turned upside down.
ISBN: 9781107091726
ISBN: 9781107043848
257pp
Labour,
Employment and
Economic Growth
in India
HB ` 995.00
K. V. Ramaswamy
Realising the
Demographic
Dividend
Policies to Achieve
Inclusive Growth in
India
Santosh Mehrotra
This book elaborates policies to achieve inclusive
growth in India. Its theoretical framework is based
on the capability approach discussed in the first
chapter. The rest is empirical, and is focused on
specific problems with specific policy
implications. Human capital levels of youthful
workforce in India remain worrying and the
largely-informal workforce is not covered by
social insurance. In addition, the universal
elementary education, despite the Right to
Education Act 2009, is yet to be achieved in the
country. Health outcomes over the years have
improved only slowly. Sanitation still remains a
very serious problem for a major part of the
country. Specific policy implications are also
provided, beyond what is currently being
practised.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Part 1: Growth, Employment
and Inclusion; Chapter 1: Capability-centred
Approach to Inclusive Growth: Theoretical
Framework and Empirical Reality; Chapter 2:
Sustaining Economic Growth; Chapter 3:
Ensuring Higher Agricultural Growth and the
Revival of Rural India; Chapter 4: Addressing the
Employment-related Paradoxes of Economic
Growth; Chapter 5: Public Finance: Increasing
Fiscal Capacity; Chapter 6: Skill Development:
Finding New Financing Mechanisms to Take
Vocational Education and Training to Scale;
Chapter 7: A Common Platform for Skill
Development: Implementing the National Skills
Qualification Framework; Part 2: Human Capital
Formation; Chapter 8: Addressing Capability
Deprivation of Women for Inclusive Growth;
496pp
HB ` 995.00
Productive employment opportunities constitute
the primary ingredient of economic
transformation and inclusive growth. This volume
examines India’s development experience in the
sphere of labour, employment, structural change
and institutional challenges in the recent past.
The contributors in this volume have extended
the boundaries of contemporary debate in
various ways by undertaking fairly-detailed
empirical analyses of selected aspects of growth
and employment change in India. They uncover
the recent patterns of change between and within
sectors over time that challenges popular beliefs
and understanding of employment growth in
India. Analysis of population ageing, gender
discrimination, impact of labour regulation;
institutional analysis like re-examining the legal
definition of industrial worker through the lens of
economic theory and dynamics of judicial
interpretation of laws protecting workers in the
years of economic liberalization among others
have enriched the content. The volume
contributes to our knowledge of India’s labour
market and sheds light on employment
challenges in an economy undergoing rapid
growth and economic transformation.
Contents: List of tables and figures; Preface;
Part 1. Economic growth and employment; 1.
Introduction and review of issues K. V.
Ramaswamy; 2. India’s labour market during the
2000s Jayan Jose Thomas; 3. Services-led
growth and employment in India Ajit K. Ghose; 4.
Growth, structural change and poverty reduction
Rana Hasan, Sneha Lamba and Abhijit Sen
Gupta; 5. Age structure transition, population
ageing and economic growth M. R. Narayana; 6.
Labour intensity in Indian manufacturing Deb
Kusum Das, Kunal Sen and Pilu Chandra Das; 7.
Gender discrimination in manufacturing
employment in India, 1999–2009 Bishwanath
Goldar and Suresh Chand Aggarwal; Part 2.
Employment and labour law; 8. From rigidity to
9
flexibility Bibhas Saha; 9. Employment protection
legislation and threshold effects K. V.
Ramaswamy; 10. Who is a worker? Jaivir Singh;
11. Labour jurisprudence of the supreme court
Ramapriya Gopalakrishnan; Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9781107096806
India–EU People
Mobility
Rupa Chanda and
Pralok Gupta
342pp
The Service Sector
in India’s
Development
Gaurav Nayyar
HB ` 895.00
This book provides an overview of the trends and
characteristics of mobility between India and the
EU from a historical (disapora), economic (trade
and investment) and regulatory (immigration)
perspectives. It also analyses the movement of
professionals in selected sectors and
occupations, such as IT, architecture,
engineering and legal services as well as student
mobility between EU and India. The book
discusses sector-specific as well as cross-cutting
factors that shape the different types of mobility
between the two regions, the regulatory and
other constraints to these migration flows, their
impact and contribution on both sides and the
associated sensitivities and concerns. Drawing
upon the analysis of these different types of
mobility and the associated challenges, it
highlights how such mobility could be facilitated
and managed through bilateral discussions
between India and the EU, under formal as well
as other arrangements.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Services: concepts,
measurement and India's national accounts;
3. The demand for services in India: a mirror
image of Engel's Law for Food?; 4. The nature of
employment in India's services sector:
educational requirements and quality; 5. Labour
productivity in India's urban informal services
sector: a comparison with agriculture;
6. Conclusion.
Contents: List of Tables, Figures and Boxes; List
of Abbreviations; Preface; Acknowledgements;
1. India–EU People Mobility: Present Status and
Policy Perspective; 2. Economic Linkages and
India–EU Mobility; 3. Indian Diaspora in the EU;
4. Goans in Portugal: History, Identity and
Diaspora Linkages; 5. Facilitating India–EU
Mobility of IT Professionals; 6. Movement of
Indian Architects and Engineers: Prospects and
Challenges in the EU; 7. Mobility of Indian Legal
Professionals to the EU: Understanding the EU
Regulatory Regime; 8. Exploring India–EU
Student Mobility; 9. The Way Forward to a
Strategic Engagement; Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9781107104815
260pp
A striking aspect of India's recent growth has
been the dynamism of its services sector. In
2010, it accounted for 57 per cent of the country's
GDP and 25 per cent of its total employment. The
results do not conform to the growth experience
of currently-industrialized countries or other
developing economies. Is the increasing share of
the service sector in India's total output simply
notional, as several activities that were earlier
classified in the industrial sector are now
subsumed in services' value added, or because
the relative price of services has increased over
time? No. The sector's growth is real – it is linked
to household final demand, policy reforms and
increased service exports. Is this service-led
growth process sustainable? That remains an
open question because the service sector is
highly-heterogeneous, ranging from software
services and business process outsourcing to
wholesale and retail trade and personal services.
These subsectors vary considerably in the
context of different economic characteristics that
are important for development.
ISBN: 9781107035324
The Indian
Economy in
Transition
Anjan Chakrabarti,
Anup Dhar and
Byasdeb Dasgupta
HB ` 595.00
312pp
HB ` 895.00
Taking the period following the advent of
liberalization, this book explains the transition of
the Indian economy against the backdrop of
development. If the objective is to explore the
new economic map of India, then the distinct
contributions in the book could be seen as
twofold. The first is the analytical frame whereby
the authors deploy a unique Marxist approach
consisting of the initial concepts of class process
and the developing countries to address India's
economic transition. The second contribution is
substantive whereby the authors describe India's
economic transition as epochal, materializing out
of the new emergent triad of neo-liberal
globalization, global capitalism and inclusive
development. This is how the book theorizes the
structural transformation of the Indian economy in
the twenty-first century. Through this framework,
it interrogates and critiques the given debates,
ideas and policies about the economic
development of a developing nation.
Contents: Preface; Introduction; 1. The
Condition of the Working Class in Contemporary
India; 2. Capitalism: The ‘Delusive Appearance of
Things’; 3. Post-colonial Development and ‘The
Thought of the Outside’; 4.The Word and the
World of Neo-liberalism; 5. The Scrypt of
Transition: Between the Spectral and the Secret
Thereof; 6. From Self-reliance to Neo-liberalism:
10
bargaining set, kernel and nucleolus; 5. The
Shapley value; 6. The core, Shapley value and
Weber set; 7. Voting games; 8. Mathematical
matching; 9. Non-transferable utility cooperative
games; 10. Linear programming; 11. Algorithmic
aspects of cooperative game theory; 12.
Weighted majority games; 13. Stable matching
algorithm • References • Index.
The Political Economy of ‘Reform’ (1991–2014);
7. Global Capitalism and World of the Third: The
Emergent Cartography of the Indian Economy;
8. Inclusive Development, State and Violence;
9. From Economic Crisis to Transition Crisis;
Conclusion; Bibliography; Author Index; Subject
Index.
ISBN: 9781107076112
442pp
HB ` 995.00
ISBN: 9781107691322
Games in
Economic
Development
Bruce Wydick
Games in Economic Development examines the
roots of poverty and prosperity through the lens
of elementary game theory, illustrating how
patterns of human interaction can lead to vicious
cycles of poverty as well as virtuous cycles of
prosperity. This book shows how both social
norms and carefully-designed institutions can
help shape the 'rules of the game', making better
outcomes in a game possible for everyone
involved. The book explores games in natural
resource use; education; coping with risk;
borrowing and lending; technology adoption;
governance and corruption; civil conflict;
international trade; and the importance of
networks, religion, and identity, illustrating
concepts with numerous anecdotes from recent
world events.
An Introduction to
Mathematics for
Economics
Akihito Asano
Contents: 1. Economic development,
interdependence, and incentives; 2. Games; 3.
Development traps and coordination games; 4.
Rural poverty, development, and the
environment; 5. Risk, solidarity networks, and
reciprocity; 6. Understanding agrarian institutions;
7. Savings, credit, and microfinance; 8. Social
learning and technology adoption; 9. Property
rights, governance, and corruption; 10. Conflict,
violence, and development; 11. Social capital;
12. The political economy of trade and
development.
ISBN: 9781107461697
A Course on
Cooperative Game
Theory
Satya R. Chakravarty,
Manipushpak Mitra
and Palash Sarkar
314pp
276pp
PB ` 495.00
An Introduction to Mathematics for Economics
introduces quantitative methods to students of
economics and finance in a succinct and
accessible style. The introductory nature of this
textbook means a background in economics is
not essential, as it aims to help students
appreciate that learning mathematics is relevant
to their overall understanding of the subject.
Economic and financial applications are
explained in detail before students learn how
mathematics can be used, enabling students to
learn how to put mathematics into practice.
Starting with a revision of basic mathematical
principles the second half of the book introduces
calculus, emphasizing economic applications
throughout. Appendices on matrix algebra and
difference/differential equations are included for
the benefit of more advanced students. Other
features, including worked examples and
exercises, help to underpin the readers’
knowledge and learning. Akihito Asano has
drawn upon his own extensive teaching
experience to create an unintimidating yet
rigorous textbook.
Contents: 1. Demand and supply in competitive
markets; 2. Basic mathematics; 3. Financial
mathematics; 4. Differential calculus I;
5. Differential calculus II; 6. Multivariate calculus;
7. Integral calculus; Appendix A. Matrix algebra;
Appendix B. An introduction to difference and
differential equations.
PB ` 999.00
Cooperative Game Theory deals with situations
where objectives of the participants of a game
are partially cooperative and partially conflicting.
While the book mainly discusses transferable
utility games, there is a brief analysis of nontransferable utility games. Chapters 1 to 9 focus
on alternative solution concepts to cooperative
game theoretic problems, followed by the issues
related to computation of solutions in the next
four chapters. The mathematical techniques
employed in demonstrating the results will be
helpful for solving problems in game theory. The
authors have explained the concepts and results
using extensive verbal reasoning. Integration of
theory and practice helps the readers understand
the theoretical issues first and then see their
practical relevance. This book is a good starting
point for researchers in cooperative games.
ISBN: 9781107619166
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction and
motivation page; 2. Basics and preliminaries; 3.
The core and some related solutions; 4. The
11
282pp
PB ` 595.00
Bangladesh
Politics, Economy and
Civil Society
David Lewis
Since its hard-won independence from Pakistan,
Bangladesh has been ravaged by economic and
environmental disasters. Only recently has the
country begun to emerge as a fragile, but
functioning, parliamentary democracy. The story
of Bangladesh, told through the pages of this
concise and readable book, is a truly remarkable
one. By delving into its past, and through an
analysis of the economic, political and social
changes that have taken place over the last
twenty years, the book explains how Bangladesh
is becoming of increasing interest to the
international community as a portal into some of
the key issues of our age. In this way the book
offers an important corrective to the view of
Bangladesh as a failed state.
Industrial
Organization
Markets and Strategies
Paul Belleflamme and
Martin Peitz
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. A state in the
making; 3. Towards Bangladesh: British and
Pakistani rule; 4. State, politics and institutions;
5. Non-governmental actors and civil society;
6. Economic development and transformation;
7. Population, natural resources and
environment; 8. Conclusion: Bangladesh faces
the future.
ISBN: 9781107678460
Price Theory and
Applications
Decisions, Markets,
and Information
Seventh Edition
Jack Hirshleifer,
Amihai Glazer and
David Hirshleifer
248pp
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
cases; Preface; Part I. Getting Started; 1. What is
‘Markets and Strategies’?; 2. Firms, consumers
and the market; Part II. Market Power; 3. Static
imperfect competition; 4. Dynamic aspects of
imperfect competition; Part III. Sources of Market
Power; 5. Product differentiation; 6. Advertising;
7. Consumer inertia; Part IV. Pricing Strategies
and Market Segmentation; 8. Group and
personalized pricing; 9. Menu pricing; 10.
Intertemporal price discrimination; 11. Bundling;
Part V. Product Quality and Information; 12. Price
and advertising signals; 13. Marketing tools for
experience goods; Part VI. Theory of Competition
Policy; 14. Cartels and tacit collusion;
15. Horizontal mergers; 16. Strategic incumbents
and entry; 17. Vertically related markets; Part VII.
R&D Intellectual Property; 18. Innovation and
R&D; 19. Intellectual property; Part VIII.
Networks, Standards and Systems; 20. Markets
with network goods; 21. Strategies for network
goods; Part IX. Market Intermediation;
22. Markets with intermediated goods;
23. Information and reputation; Appendices: A.
Game theory; B. Competition policy; Index.
PB ` 495.00
This new seventh edition of the book offers
extensive discussion of information, uncertainty,
and game theory. It contains over 100 examples
illustrating the applicability of economic analysis
not only to mainline economic topics but also
issues in politics, history, biology, the family, and
many other areas. These discussions generally
describe recent research published in scholarly
books and articles, giving students a good idea of
the scientific work done by professional
economists. In addition the text provides
‘applications’ representing more extended
discussions of selected topics including rationing
in wartime import quotas alleged monopolistic
suppression of inventions minimum wage laws
the effects of Social Security upon saving fair
division of disrupted property and whether
individuals should pay ransom to a kidnapper.
Contents: 1. The nature and scope of
economics; 2. Working tools; 3. Utility and
preference; 4. Consumption and demand; 5.
Applications and extensions of demand theory;
6. The business firm; 7. Equilibrium in the
product market - competitive industry; 8.
Monopolies, cartels and networks; 9. Product
quality and product variety; 10. Competition
among the few: oligopoly and strategic behavior;
11. Dealing with uncertainty - the economics of
risk and information; 12. The demand for factor
services; 13. Resource supply and factor-market
equilibrium; 14. Exchange, transaction costs and
money; 15. The economics of time; 16. Welfare
economics: the market and the state;
17. Government, politics and conflict.
ISBN: 9781107682382
630pp
Industrial Organization: Markets and Strategies
provides an up-to-date account of modern
industrial organization that blends theory with
real-world applications. Written in a clear and
accessible style, it acquaints the reader with the
most important models for understanding
strategies chosen by firms with market power and
shows how such firms adapt to different market
environments. It covers a wide range of topics
including recent developments on product
bundling, branding strategies, restrictions in
vertical supply relationships, intellectual property
protection, and two-sided markets, to name just a
few. Models are presented in detail and the main
results are summarized as lessons. Formal
theory is complemented throughout by real-world
cases that show students how it applies to actual
organizational settings. Website resources for
lecturers and students including exercises,
answers to review questions, case material and
slides.
ISBN: 9781107014121
PB ` 895.00
12
724pp
PB ` 495.00
Banking and
Financial Systems
V. Nityananda Sarma
Banking and Financial Systems addresses
contemporary vital issues like capital market,
money market, indigenous bankers and money
lenders, negotiable instruments, banker and
customer relationship, cooperative banks,
regional rural banks, RBI, SBI, development
banking and banking technology. This book will
serve as a useful guide and provide reference
material for the undergraduate level and different
courses like B.Com, BBA, M.Com, MBA, CA,
ICWA, and other professional courses. It gives
complete information and analysis of changes in
the financial sector in a logical and integrated
manner.
Economic evaluation of cultural policy; Part III.
Artists’ Labour Markets and Copyright;
Introduction to Part III; 11. Economics of artists’
labour markets: theories; 12. Economics of
artists’ labour markets: empirical research; 13.
Economics of copyright; Part IV. The Creative
Industries; Introduction to Part IV; 14. Economics
of creative industries; 15. Economics of the
music industry; 16. Economics of the film
industry; 17. Economics of broadcasting; 18.
Economics of book publishing; 19. Economics of
festivals, creative cities and cultural tourism; Part
V. Conclusion; Introduction to Part V; 20.
Conclusion; Questions and exercises;
References; Index.
Contents: Preface; 1. Banking Systems;
2. Functions of Modern Commercial Banks;
3. Nationalisation of Banks in India; 4. Money
Market; 5. Capital Market; 6. Development
Banking; 7. Cooperative Banks in India; 8.
Regional Rural Banks (RRBs); 9. Exchange
Banks; 10. The Reserve Bank of India; 11. The
State Bank of India; 12. Financial Services;
13. Banking Technology; 14. Negotiable
Instruments; 15. Banker and Customer; 16.
Special Type of Customers; 17. Paying Banker;
18. Secured Advances - Modes of Creating
Charge; Index.
ISBN: 9788175966376
A Textbook of
Cultural
Economics
Ruth Towse
540pp
ISBN: 9781107646056
Microeconomics
for MBAs
The Economic Way of
Thinking for Managers
Second Edition
Richard B. McKenzie
and Dwight R. Lee
PB ` 495.00
What determines the price of a pop concert or an
opera? Why does Hollywood dominate the film
industry? Does illegal downloading damage the
record industry? Does free entry to museums
bring in more visitors? In A Textbook of Cultural
Economics, one of the world’s leading cultural
economists shows how we can use the theories
and methods of economics to answer these and
a host of other questions concerning the arts
(performing arts, visual arts and literature),
heritage (museums and built heritage) and
creative industries (the music, publishing and film
industries, broadcasting). Using international
examples and covering the most up-to-date
research, the book does not assume a prior
knowledge of economics. It is ideally suited for
students taking a course on the economics of the
arts as part of an arts administration, business,
management, or economics degree.
626pp
PB ` 795.00
The textbook that develops the economic way of
thinking through problems that MBA students will
find relevant to their career goals. Theory and
math is kept as simple as possible and illustrated
with real-life scenarios. This textbook package
includes online video tutorials on key concepts
and complex arguments, and topics likely to be
assessed in exams. The distinguished author
team has developed this textbook over 20 years
of teaching microeconomics to MBA students.
Chapters are clearly structured to support
learning: Part I develops key economic
principles. Part II draws on those principles to
discuss organizational and incentive issues in
management and focuses on solving the
‘principal-agent’ problem to maximize the
profitability of the firm – lessons that can be
applied to problems MBAs will face in the future.
Economics and management are treated equally;
this unique textbook presents economics as part
of the everyday thinking of business people.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Part I.
The Market Economy, Overview and Application;
1. Microeconomics: a way of thinking about
business; 2. Competitive product markets and
firm decisions; 3. Principles of rational behavior
in society and business; 4. Applications of the
economic way of thinking: domestic government
and management policies; 5. Applications of the
economic way of thinking: international and
environmental economics; Part II. Demand and
Production Theory; 6. Consumer choice and
demand in traditional and network markets;
7. Production costs and the theory of the firm;
8. Production costs in the short run and long run;
Part III. Competitive and Monopoly Market
Structures; 9. Firm production under idealized
competitive conditions; 10. Monopoly power and
firm pricing decisions; 11. Firm strategy under
imperfectly competitive market conditions; 12.
Competitive and monopsonistic labor markets;
Index.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
boxes; List of abbreviations; Preface; Part I.
General Issues in Cultural Economics;
Introduction to Part I; 1. Introduction to cultural
economics with appendix: brief introductions to
the economic theories used in cultural
economics; 2. Economic profile of the cultural
sector; 3. Markets for cultural goods and
services; 4. Economic organisation of the
creative industries; 5. Production, costs and
supply of cultural goods; 6. Audiences,
participation and demand for cultural goods; 7.
Welfare economics and public finance; Part II.
The ‘Traditional’ Arts and Heritage; Introduction
to Part II; 8. Economics of the performing arts; 9.
Economics of museums and heritage; 10.
ISBN: 9781107686441
13
566pp
PB ` 795.00
Resource
Economics
Second Edition
Jon M. Conrad
Resource Economics is a text for students with a
background in calculus and intermediate
microeconomics and a familiarity with the
spreadsheet software Excel. The book covers
basic concepts shows how to set up
spreadsheets to solve simple dynamic allocation
problems and presents economic models for
fisheries, forestry, nonrenewable resources, and
stock pollutants. It examines the maximin utility
criterion when the utility of a generation depends
on consumption of a manufactured good, harvest
from a renewable resource, and extraction from a
nonrenewable resource. Within the text,
numerical examples are posed and solved using
Excel’s Solver. Exercises are included at the end
of each chapter. These problems help make
concepts operational, develop economic intuition,
and serve as a bridge to the study of real-world
problems in resource management.
Financial Market
Bubbles and
Crashes
Harold L. Vogel
Contents: Part I. Background for Analysis;
1. Introduction; 2. Bubble stories; 3. Random
walks; 4. Bubble theories; 5. Framework for
investigation; Part II. Empirical Features and
Results; 6. Bubble basics; 7. Bubble dynamics;
8. Money and credit features; 9. Behavioral risk
features; 10. Crashes, panics, and chaos;
11. Financial asset bubble theory.
Contents: 1. Basic concepts; 2. Solving
numerical allocation problems using Excel’s
Solver; 3. The economics of fisheries; 4. The
economics of forestry; 5. The economics of
nonrenewable resources; 6. Stock pollutants;
7. Maximin utility with renewable and
nonrenewable resources.
ISBN: 9781107606241
From Asian to
Global Financial
Crisis
An Asian Regulator’s
View of Unfettered
Finance in the 1990s
and 2000s
Andrew Sheng
300pp
PB ` 595.00
ISBN: 9780521263306
This is a unique insider account of the new world
of unfettered finance. The author, an Asian
regulator, examines how old mindsets, market
fundamentalism, loose monetary policy, carry
trade, lax supervision, greed, cronyism, and
financial engineering caused both the Asian
crisis of the late 1990s and the global crisis of
2007 – 09. This book shows how the Japanese
zero interest rate policy to fight deflation helped
create the carry trade that generated bubbles in
Asia whose effects brought Asian economies
down. The study’s main purpose is to
demonstrate that global finance is so interlinked
and interactive that our current tools and
institutional structure to deal with critical episodes
are completely outdated. The book explains how
current financial policies and regulation failed to
deal with a global bubble and makes
recommendations on what must change.
Introductory
Econometrics
Using Monte Carlo
Simulation with
Microsoft Excel
Humberto Barreto and
Frank M. Howland
Contents: Introduction; 1. Things fall apart;
2. Japan and the Asian crisis; 3. The beam in our
eyes; 4. Banking: the weakest link;
5. Washington consensus and the IMF;
6. Thailand: the karma of globalization; 7. South
Korea: strong body, weak heart; 8. Malaysia: the
country that went her own way; 9. Indonesia:
from economic to political crisis; 10. Hong Kong:
unusual times need unusual action; 11. China:
rise of the dragon; 12. From crisis to integration;
13. The new world of financial engineering;
14. What’s wrong with financial regulation?;
15. The global financial meltdown; 16. A crisis of
governance; Appendices: From Asian to global
crisis: chronology of notable events;
Abbreviations and acronyms.
ISBN: 9780521168212
503pp
Despite the thousands of articles and the millions
of times that the word ‘bubble’ has been used in
the business press, there still does not appear to
be a cohesive theory or persuasive empirical
approach with which to study ‘bubble’ and ‘crash’
conditions. This book presents a plausible and
accessible descriptive theory and empirical
approach to the analysis of such financial market
conditions. It advances such a framework
through application of standard econometric
methods to its central idea, which is that financial
bubbles reflect urgent short side rationed
demand. From this basic idea, an elasticity of
variance concept is developed. It is further shown
that a behavioural risk premium can probably be
measured and related to the standard equity risk
premium models in a way that is consistent with
conventional theory.
384pp
PB ` 595.00
This highly accessible and innovative text and
accompanying CD-ROM use Excel workbooks
powered by Visual Basic macros to teach the
core concepts of econometrics without advanced
mathematics. These materials enable Monte
Carlo simulations to be run by students with a
click of a button. The fundamental teaching
strategy is to use clear language and take
advantage of recent developments in computer
technology to create concrete, visual explanation
of difficult, abstract ideas. Intelligent repetition of
concrete examples effectively conveys the
properties of the ordinary least squares (OLS)
estimator and the nature of heteroskedasticity
and autocorrelation. Coverage includes omitted
variables, binary response models, basic time
series methods, and an introduction to
simultaneous equations. The authors teach
students how to construct their own real-world
data sets drawn from the internet, which they can
analyze with Excel or with other econometric
software. The Excel add-ins included with this
book allow students to draw histograms, find Pvalues of various test statistics (including DurbinWatson), obtain robust standard errors, and
construct their own Monte Carlo and bootstrap
simulations. For more, visit
www.wabash.edu/econometrics.
Contents: 1. Introduction; Part I. Description:
2. Correlation; 3. Pivot tables; 4. Computing
regression; 5. Interpreting regression;
6. Functional form; 7. Multivariate regression;
8. Dummy variables; Part II. Inference: 9. Monte
Carlo simulation; 10. Inferential statistics review;
PB ` 695.00
14
11. Measurement box model; 12. Comparing two
populations; 13. The classical econometric
model; 14. The Gauss Markov theorem;
15. Understanding the standard error;
16. Hypothesis testing and confidence intervals;
17. F tests; 18. Omitted variable bias;
19. Heteroskedasticity; 20. Autocorrelation;
21. The series topics; 22. Dummy dependent
variables; 23. Bootstrap; 24. Simultaneous
equations.
CD-ROM
ISBN: 9780521132589 798pp
Phone Clones
Authenticity Work in the
Transnational Service
Economy
Kiran Mirchandani
ENGLISH LITERATURE
An Experiment in
Criticism (Canto
Classics)
C. S. Lewis
PB ` 795.00
In Phone Clones, Kiran Mirchandani explores the
experiences of the men and women who work in
Indian call centers through one hundred
interviews with workers in Bangalore, Delhi, and
Pune. As capital crosses national borders,
colonial histories and racial hierarchies become
inextricably intertwined. As a result, call center
workers in India need to imagine themselves in
the eyes of their Western clients – to represent
themselves both as foreign workers who do not
threaten Western jobs and as being ‘just like’
their customers in the West. In conversation with
Western clients, Indian customer service agents
proclaim their legitimacy, an effort Mirchandani
calls ‘authenticity work’, which involves
establishing familiarity in light of expectations of
difference. In their daily interactions with
customers, managers and trainers, Indian call
center workers reflect a complex interplay of
colonial histories, gender practices, class
relations, and national interests.
Contents: 1. The few and the many; 2. False
characterisations; 3. How the few and the many
use pictures and music; 4. The reading of the
unliterary; 5. On myth; 6. The meanings of
fantasy; 7. On realisms; 8. On misreading by the
literary; 9. Survey; 10. Poetry; 11. The
experiment; Epilogue; Appendix.
ISBN: 9781107698543
The Cambridge
Companion to
John Donne
Contents: Introduction: The Authentic Clone; 1.
Transnational Customer Service: A New
Touchstone of Globalization; 2. Language
Training: The Making of the Deficient Worker; 3.
Hate Nationalism and the Outsourcing Backlash;
4. Surveillance Schooling for Professional
Clones; 5. “Don’t Take Calls, Make Contact!”:
Legitimizing Racist Abuse; 6. Being Nowhere in
the World: Synchronous Work and Gendered
Time ; Conclusion: Authenticity Work in the
Transnational Service Economy
ISBN: 9789382264866
188pp
Why do we read literature and how do we judge
it? C. S. Lewis's classic An Experiment in
Criticism springs from the conviction that
literature exists for the joy of the reader and that
books should be judged by the kind of reading
they invite. He argues that 'good reading', like
moral action or religious experience, involves
surrender to the work in hand and a process of
entering fully the opinions of others: 'in reading
great literature I become a thousand men and yet
remain myself'. Crucial to his notion of judging
literature is a commitment to laying aside
expectations and values extraneous to the work,
in order to approach it with an open mind. Amid
the complex welter of current critical theories, C.
S. Lewis's wisdom is valuably down-to-earth,
refreshing and stimulating in the questions it
raises about the experience of reading.
Achsah Guibbory
HB ` 795.00
152pp
PB ` 295.00
The Cambridge Companion to John Donne
introduces students (undergraduate and
graduate) to the range, brilliance, and complexity
of John Donne. 16 new essays, written by an
international array of leading scholars and critics,
cover Donne’s poetry (erotic, satirical, devotional)
and prose (including his Sermons and occasional
letters). Providing readings of his texts and also
fully situating them in the historical and cultural
context of early-modern England, these essays
offer the most up-to-date scholarship and
introduce students to the current thinking and
debates about Donne, while providing tools for
students to read Donne with greater
understanding and enjoyment. Special features
include a chronology; a short biography; essays
on political and religious contexts; an essay on
the experience of reading his lyrics; a meditation
on Donne by the contemporary novelist A. S.
Byatt; and an extensive bibliography of editions
and criticism.
Contents: Chronology; 1. Donne's life: a sketch
Jonathan F. S. Post; 2. The text of Donne's
writings Ted-Larry Pebworth; 3. The social
context and nature of Donne's writing: occasional
verse and letters Arthur F. Marotti; 4. Literary
contexts: predecessors and contemporaries
Andrew Hadfield; 5. Donne's religious world
Alison Shell and Arnold Hunt; 6. Donne's political
world Tom Cain; 7. Reading and rereading
Donne's poetry Judith Herz; 8. Satirical writing:
Donne in shadows Annabel Patterson; 9. Erotic
15
poetry Achsah Guibbory; 10. Devotional writing
Helen Wilcox; 11. Donne as preacher Peter
McCullough; 12. Donne's language: the
conditions of communication Lynne Magnusson;
13. Gender matters: the women in Donne's
poems Ilona Bell; 14. Facing death Ramie
Targoff; 15. Donne's afterlife Dayton Haskin; 16.
Feeling thought: Donne and the embodied mind
A. S. Byatt; 17. Select bibliography L. E. Semler.
ISBN: 9780521697644
The Cambridge
Companion to Old
English Literature
Malcolm Godden and
Michael Lapidge
312pp
The Cambridge
Companion to
W.B. Yeats
Marjorie Howes and
John Kelly
PB ` 795.00
This book introduces students to the literature
of Anglo-Saxon England, the period from
600–1066, in a collection of 15 speciallycommissioned essays. The Companion is aimed
at students encountering Old English literature
for the first time, who require clear guidance and
orientation in an unfamiliar field. The first
chapters describe briefly the political, social and
ecclesiastical history of the period and how
poetry and prose developed and flourished. A
succinct account of Old English language
provides beginners with a guide to grammar,
syntax and vocabulary. Subsequent chapters
explore such topics as Germanic legend and
heroic ideals, paganism and fatalism, the cult of
saints and responses to the Bible. Important
prose texts, such as those by Bede, Alfred,
Aelfric and Wulfstan, are covered under these
thematic headings. Poems such as The Battle of
Maldon, The Wanderer, The Seafarer and The
Dream of the Rood, are discussed in detail, but in
association with related texts, in prose as well as
poetry. A separate chapter is devoted to Beowulf,
but aspects of the poem are also discussed in
other chapters. A bibliography lists essential
editions, reference works and critical studies.
Contents: Chronology; 1. Introduction Marjorie
Howes; 2. Yeats and Romanticism George
Bornstein; 3. Yeats, Victorianism and the 1890s
George Watson; 4. Yeats and Modernism Daniel
Albright; 5. The later poetry Helen Vendler;
6. Yeats and the drama Bernard O'Donoghue;
7. Yeats and criticism Declan Kiberd; 8. Yeats,
folklore and Irish legend James Pethica; 9. Yeats
and the occult Margaret Mills Harper; 10. Yeats
and gender Elizabeth Butler Cullingford;
11. Yeats and politics Jonathan Allison; 12. Yeats
and the postcolonial Marjorie Howes; Guide to
further reading.
ISBN: 9780521698825
The Cambridge
History of English
Romantic
Literature
Contents: List of contributors; Preface; Note on
the text; 1. Anglo-Saxon society and its literature
Patrick Wormald; 2. The Old English language
Helmut Gneuss; 3. The nature of Old English
verse D. G. Scragg; 4. The nature of Old English
prose Janet Bately; 5. Germanic legend and
Anglo-Saxon literature Roberta Frank; 6. Heroic
ideals and Christian ethics Katherine O'Brien
O'Keeffe; 7. Pagan survivals and popular belief
John D. Niles; 8. Beowulf Fred C. Robinson;
9. Fatalism and the millenium Joseph B. Trahern,
Jr; 10. Perceptions of transience Christine Fell;
11. Perceptions of eternity Milton McGatch;
12. Biblical literature: the Old Testament Malcolm
Godden; 13. Biblical literature: the New
Testament Barbara C. Raw; 14. The saintly life in
Anglo-Saxon England Michael Lapidge; 15. The
world of Anglo-Saxon learning Patrizia
Lendinara; Further reading; Index.
ISBN: 9780521698818
314pp
This accessible and thought-provoking
Companion is designed to help students
experience the pleasures and challenges offered
by one of the twentieth century's greatest poets.
A team of international contributors examine
Yeats's poetry, drama and prose in their historical
and national contexts. The essays explain and
synthesize major aspects and themes of his life
and work: his lifelong engagement with Ireland,
his complicated relationship with the English
literary tradition, his literary, social, and political
criticism and the evolution of his complex spiritual
and religious sense. First-time readers of Yeats
as well as more advanced scholars will welcome
this comprehensive account of Yeats's career
with its useful chronological outline and survey of
the most important current trends in Yeats
scholarship. Taken as a whole, this Companion is
an essential introduction for students and
teachers of Yeats.
James Chandler
262pp
PB ` 895.00
The Romantic period was one of the most
creative, intense and turbulent periods of English
literature, an age marked by revolution, reaction
and reform in politics, and by the invention of
imaginative literature in its distinctively-modern
form. This book presents an engaging account of
six decades of literary production around the turn
of the nineteenth century. Reflecting the most upto-date research, the essays are designed both
to provide a narrative of Romantic literature and
to offer new and stimulating readings of the key
texts. One group of essays addresses the
various locations of literary activity – both in
England and, as writers developed their interests
in travel and foreign cultures, across the world. A
second set of essays traces how texts responded
to great historical and social change. With a
comprehensive bibliography, timeline and index,
this volume is an important resource for research
and teaching in the field.
Contents: General Introduction; Part I. The Ends
of Enlightenment; 1. Sentiment and sensibility; 2.
Antiquarianism, balladry, and the rehabilitation of
romance; 3. The Romantics and the political
economists; 4. The problem of periodisation:
Enlightenment, Romanticism, and the fate of
system; Part II. Geographies: The Scenes of
Literary Life; 5. London in the 1790s; 6.
Edinburgh and lowland Scotland; 7. Romantic
PB ` 895.00
16
Ireland: 1750–1845; 8. France, Germany,
America; 9. The 'Warm South' Esther Schor; 10.
Country matters; 11. Romanticism and the wider
world: poetry, travel literature and Empire; 12.
The homes of England; 13. Writing, reading and
the scenes of war; 14. Regency London; Part III.
Histories: Writing in the New Movements; 15.
Rebellion, revolution, reform: the transit of the
intellectuals; 16. Changes in the world of
publishing; 17. The new poetries; 18.
Romanticism and poetic autonomy; 19.
Transformations of the novel – I; 20.
Transformations of the novel – II; 21. Theatre,
performance, and urban spectacle; 22. The
epigenesis of genre: new forms from old; 23. The
literature of the new sciences; 24. The making of
child readers; Part IV. The Ends of Romanticism;
25. Representation restructured; 26. Romantic
cultural Imperialism; 27. Romanticism and
religious modernity: from natural supernaturalism
to literary sectarianism; 28. Is Romanticism
finished?; Chronology; Bibliographies; Index.
ISBN: 9781107666023
The Metaphysics
of Text
Sukanta Chaudhuri
794pp
Think on my
Words (Canto
Classics)
David Crystal
Contents: 1. 'You speak a language that I
understand not': myths and realities; 2. 'Now, sir,
what is your text?': knowing the sources; 3. 'In
print I found it': Shakespearean graphology;
4. 'Know my stops': Shakespearean punctuation;
5. 'Speak the speech': Shakespearean
phonology; 6. 'Trippingly upon the tongue':
Shakespearean pronunciation; 7. 'Think on my
words': Shakespearean vocabulary; 8. 'Talk of a
noun and a verb': Shakespearean grammar;
9. 'Hear sweet discourse': Shakespearean
conversation; Epilogue: 'your daring tongue':
Shakespearean creativity; Appendix: an A-to-Z of
Shakespeare's false friends.
PB ` 895.00
The advances of book history and editorial theory
remind us that it is vital to look behind the text we
read. In this book Sukanta Chaudhuri explores, at
a very fundamental level, how texts are
constituted and how they work. He applies
insights from many lines of study not brought
together so closely before: theories of language,
signification and reception alongside
bibliography, textual criticism, editorial theory and
book history. Blending case studies with general
observation and theory, he considers the
implications of the physical form of the text; the
relation between oral and written language, and
between language and other media; the new
territory opened up by electronic texts; and
special categories like play-books and
translations. Drawing on an exceptionally-wide
range of material, both Western literature and
Indian works from Sanskrit aesthetics to the
poetry of Rabindranath Tagore, Chaudhuri sets a
new agenda for the study of texts.
ISBN: 9781107667686
Touch and
Intimacy in First
World War
Literature
Santanu Das
Contents: Preface; Introduction; Part I. General
Metaphysics; 1. The heron in the water: textuality
and the shapes of discourse; 2. The bounds of
the text; 3. Adam's dream, Babel's curse; 4. The
handkerchief and the cat; 5. The writer's hand, or
the world, the text and the author; 6. The
trajectories of texts; Part II. Special Territories;
7. Orality: yesterday, today and tomorrow;
8. Shakespeare and the book of the play;
9. Translation and displacement: the life and
works of Pierre Menard; 10. Writing pictures,
drawing words: the manuscript doodles of
Rabindranath Tagore.
ISBN: 9781107400337
238pp
For decades, people have been studying
Shakespeare's life and times and in recent years
there has been a renewed surge of interest in
aspects of his language. David Crystal provides a
lively and original introduction to Shakespeare's
language, making his plays easily accessible to
modern-day audiences. Covering the five main
dimensions of language structure - writing
system, pronunciation, grammar, vocabulary and
conversational style - this book demonstrates
how examining these linguistic 'nuts and bolts'
can help us achieve a greater appreciation of
Shakespeare's linguistic creativity.
266pp
PB ` 395.00
The First World War ravaged the male body on
an unprecedented scale, yet fostered moments of
physical intimacy and tenderness among the
soldiers in the trenches. Touch, the most elusive
and private of the senses, became central to war
experience. War writing is haunted by
experiences of physical contact: from the muddy
realities of the front to the emotional intensity of
trench life, to the traumatic obsession with the
wounded body in nurses' memoirs. Through
extensive archival and historical research,
analysing previously-unknown letters and diaries
alongside literary writings by figures such as
Owen and Brittain, Santanu Das recovers the
sensuous world of the First World War trenches
and hospitals. This original and evocative study
alters our understanding of the period as well as
of the body at war, and illuminates the perilous
intimacy between sense experience, emotion and
language as we try to make meaning in times of
crisis.
Contents: Introduction: ‘Touch is the spirit and
rule of all’; Part I. Mud; 1. ‘A real monster that
sucked’: the threat of mud in First World War
literature; 2. Muddy narratives; Part II. Intimacies;
3. ‘Kiss me, Hardy’: the dying kiss in the First
World War trenches; 4. Wilfred Owen and the
sense of touch; Part III. Wounds;
5. ‘Deep into his body’: service, sympathy and
suffering in the nurses' memoirs; 6. The
operating theatre; Conclusion; Bibliography.
HB ` 695.00
ISBN: 9780521517478
17
284pp
HB ` 895.00
The Cambridge
Companion to
Shakespearean
Tragedy
Second Edition
Claire McEachern
This revised and updated Companion acquaints
the student reader with the forms, contexts,
critical and theatrical lives of the 10 plays
considered to be Shakespeare’s tragedies. 30
essays, written by leading scholars in Britain and
North America, address the ways in which
Shakespearean tragedy originated, developed
and diversified, as well as how it has fared on
stage, as text and in criticism. Topics covered
include the literary precursors of Shakespeare’s
tragedies, cultural backgrounds, subgenres and
receptions of the plays. The book examines the
four major tragedies and, in addition, Titus
Andronicus, Romeo and Juliet, Julius Caesar,
Antony and Cleopatra, Coriolanus and Timon of
Athens. Essays from the first edition have been
fully revised to reflect the most up-to-date
scholarship; the bibliography has been
extensively updated; and four new chapters have
been added, discussing Shakespearean form,
Shakespeare and philosophy, Shakespeare’s
tragedies in performance, and Shakespeare and
religion.
Contents: Introduction; Chapter 1: The life and
work in historical context; Chapter 2: Early short
stories, journalism and a first (modernist) novel,
Leaf Storm (1947-1955); Chapter 3: The
neorealist turn: In Evil Hour, No One Writes to the
Colonel and Big Mama’s Funeral (1956-1962);
Chapter 4: One Hundred Years of Solitude
(1967): the global village; Chapter 5: The Autumn
of the Patriarch (1957): the love of power;
Chapter 6: Chronicle of a Death Foretold (1981):
postmodernist and Hispanic literature; Chapter 7:
Love in the Time of Cholera (1985): the power of
love; Chapter 8: More about power: The General
in His Labyrinth (1989) and News of a
Kidnapping (1996); Chapter 9: More about love:
Of Love and Other Demons (1994) and
Memories of My Melancholy Whores (2004);
Chapter 10: Memoirs: Living to Tell the Tale
(2002) • Conclusion: the achievement of the
universal Colombian Notes • Further reading
• Index.
ISBN: 9781107491755
Contents:List of illustrations • List of contributors
• Preface to the second edition • Chronology •
List of abbreviations; 1. What is a
Shakespearean tragedy?; 2. The language of
tragedy; 3. Tragedy in Shakespeare’s career;
4. Shakespearean tragedy printed and
performed; 5. Religion and Shakespearean
tragedy; 6. Tragedy and political authority;
7. Gender and family; 8. The tragic subject and
its passions; 9. Tragedies of revenge and
ambition; 10. Shakespeare’stragedies of love;
11. Shakespeare’s classical tragedies; 12. Why
think about Shakespearean tragedy today?;
13. Shakespeare’s tragedies in performance;
Select bibliography • Index.
ISBN: 9781107426979
The Cambridge
Introduction to
Gabriel Garcia
Marquez
Gerald Martin
324pp
Companion to
Comparative
Literature,
World Literatures,
and Comparative
Cultural Studies
Steven Totosy de
Zepetnek and
Tutun Mukherjee
PB ` 595.00
The Colombian Nobel Prize winner Gabriel
Garcia Marquez (b. 1927) wrote two of the
greatest novels of the twentieth century, One
Hundred Years of Solitude and Love in the Time
of Cholera. As novelist, short story writer and
journalist, Garcia Marquez has one of literature’s
most instantly-recognizable styles and since the
beginning of his career has explored a consistent
set of themes, revolving around the relationship
between power and love. His novels exemplify
the transition between modernist and
postmodernist fiction and have made magical
realism one of the most significant and influential
phenomena in contemporary writing. Aimed at
students of Latin American and Comparative
Literature, this book provides essential
information about Garcia Marquez’s life and
career, his published work in literature and
journalism, and his political engagement. It
connects the fiction effectively to the writer’s own
experience and explains his enduring importance
in world literature.
182pp
PB ` 395.00
This volume is intended to address the current
situation of scholarship in the discipline of
Comparative Literature and the fields of World
Literature and comparative cultural studies in a
global context. While the discipline of
Comparative Literature in the West appears to be
losing ground in its institutional presence, in other
parts of the world including Asia and Latin
America, as well as in ‘peripheral’ European
countries such as Spain, Portugal, Poland,
Greece, Macedonia, etc., the discipline is
flourishing both in scholarship and in its
institutional structure and pedagogical vitality.
The field of world literatures is gaining renewed
interest in US-American scholarship while the
field of comparative cultural studies is a new area
of study pursued by scholars who are committed
to the intellectual trajectories of comparative
literature — minus Eurocentrism and the nation
approach — and cultural studies. 36 articles of
around 6000 words each are presented in
thematic groups in this volume.
Contents: Introduction to the Companion to
Comparative Literature, World Literatures, and
Comparative Cultural Studies; Part 1: Theories of
Comparative Literature, World Literatures, and
Comparative Cultural Studies; Part 2:
Comparative Literature in World Languages; Part
3: Examples of New Work in Comparative
Literature, World Literatures, and Comparative
Cultural Studies; Part 4: Multilingual Bibliography
of Books in Comparative Literature, World
Literatures, and Comparative Cultural Studies;
Index.
ISBN: 9789382993506
18
536pp
PB ` 795.00
The Cambridge
Companion to
Creative Writing
David Morley and
Philip Neilsen
Contents: Preface Paul Poplawski; 1. Medieval
English, 500–1500: Chronology; I. Historical
overview; II. Literary overview; III. Texts and
issues; IV. Readings; V. Reference Valerie Allen;
2. The Renaissance, 1485–1660: Chronology; I.
Historical overview; II. Literary overview; III. Texts
and issues; IV. Readings; V. Reference Andrew
Hiscock; 3. The Restoration and 18th Century,
1660–1780: Chronology; I. Historical overview; II.
Literary overview; III. Texts and issues; IV.
Readings; V. Reference Lee Morrissey; 4. The
Romantic Period, 1780–1832: Chronology; I.
Historical overview; II. Literary overview; III. Texts
and Issues; IV. Readings; V. Reference Peter J.
Kitson; 5. The Victorian Age, 1837–1901:
Chronology; I. Historical overview; II. Literary
overview; III. Texts and issues; IV. Readings; V.
Reference Maria Frawley; 6. The twentieth
century, 1901–1939: Chronology; I. Historical
overview; II. Literary overview; III. Texts and
issues; IV. Readings; V. Reference Paul
Poplawski; 7. The twentieth century, 1939–2004:
Chronology; I. Historical overview; II. Literary
overview; III. Texts and issues; IV. Readings; V.
Reference John Brannigan.
Creative Writing has become a highly
professionalized academic discipline, with
popular courses and prestigious degree
programmes worldwide. This book is a must for
all students and teachers of creative writing,
indeed for anyone who aspires to be a published
writer. It engages with a complex art in an
accessible manner, addressing concepts
important to the rapidly-growing field of creative
writing, while maintaining a strong craft
emphasis, analysing exemplary models of writing
and providing related writing exercises. Written
by professional writers and teachers of writing,
the chapters deal with specific genres or forms –
ranging from the novel to new media – or with
significant topics that explore the cutting edge
state of creative writing internationally (including
creative writing and science, contemporary
publishing and new workshop approaches).
Contents: Foreword: on criticism and creativity;
1. Introduction; Part I. Genres and Types: 2. A
writing lesson: the Three Flat Tires and the outer
story; 3. In conversation: a new approach to
teaching long fiction; 4. Genre and speculative
fiction; 5. Writing drama; 6. Poetics and poetry;
7. Travel writing; 8. Creative writing and new
media; 9. Creative translation; 10. Life writing;
Part II. Topics: 11. Serious play: creative writing
and science; 12. Outside the academy; 13.
Contemporary publishing; 14. Imaginative
crossings: transglobal and transcultural
narratives; 15. Does that make sense?
Approaches to the creative writing workshop;
Further reading; Index.
ISBN: 9781107630475
English Literature
in Context
Paul Poplawski
244pp
ISBN: 9780521173032
Studying English
Literature
A Practical Guide
Tory Young
PB ` 245.00
Supporting the study of English literature from
the Middle Ages to the present, this book is
designed as an introductory text and a helpful
reference tool for an entire English Literature
degree. Its key mission is to help students
understand the link between the historical context
in which the literature developed, how this has
influenced the literature of the period and how
subsequent periods in literature have been
influenced by those that precede them. The book
is carefully structured for undergraduate use, with
a rich range of illustrations and textboxes that
enhance and summarize vital background
material. The seven chronological chapters are
written by a team of expert contributors who are
also highly-experienced teachers with a clear
sense of the requirements of the undergraduate
English curriculum. Each analyses a major
historical period, surveying and documenting the
cultural contexts that have shaped English
literature, and focusing on key texts. In addition
to the narrative survey, each chapter includes a
detailed chronology, providing a quick-reference
guide to the period, contextual readings of select
literary texts, and annotated suggestions for
further reading.
686pp
PB ` 595.00
Studying English Literature is a unique guide for
undergraduates beginning to study the discipline
of literature and those who are thinking of doing
so. Unlike books that provide a survey of literary
history or non-subject specific manuals that offer
rigid guidelines on how to write essays, Studying
English Literature invites students to engage with
the subject's history and theory whilst at the
same time offering information about reading,
researching and writing about literature within the
context of a university. The book is practical yet
not patronizing: for example, whilst the
discussion of plagiarism provides clear guidelines
on how not to commit this offence, it also
considers the difficulties students experience
finding their own 'voice' when writing and
provokes reflection on the value of originality and
the concepts of adaptation, appropriation and
intertextuality in literature. Above all, the book
prizes the idea of argument rather than insisting
upon formulaic essay plans, and gives many
ways of finding something to say as you read and
when you write, in chapters on reading,
argument, essays, sentences and references.
Contents: 1. Introduction: 1.1 What this book is
about; 1.2 Some practicalities: how to use this
book; 1.3 Reading and writing in your life; 1.4 A
very brief history of writing and reading; 1.5 What
do novels know?; 1.6 Literacy in contemporary
society; 1.7 Stories, narrative and identity; Works
cited; 2. Reading: 2.1 Writing as reading?; 2.2 A
love of literature; 2.3 The discipline of English;
2.4 The new English student; 2.5 Plagiarism: too
complete a loss of self; 2.6 How to read: ways of
avoiding plagiarism; 2.7 What to read; 2.8 Some
recommended websites; Works cited; 3.
Argument: 3.1 Having something to say; 3.2
Rethinking dialogue: Mikhail Mikhailovitch
19
Bakhtin (1895–1975); 3.3 Stories, arguments and
democracy; 3.4 The folded paper: how to stand
at a distance and start a dialogue with a text; 3.5
What is rhetoric?; 3.6 A very brief survey of
Classical rhetoric; 3.7 Wayne Booth (1921–2005)
and The Rhetoric of Fiction; 3.8 More ways of
discovering arguments; Works cited; 4. Essays:
4.1 What are essays for?; 4.2 What is an essay?;
4.3 How do you think you write an essay?; 4.4
The stages of writing an essay; 4.5 Thinking of or
about the question; 4.6 Research; 4.7 Making a
plan; 4.8 The thesis statement; 4.9 Writing the
main body of the essay; 4.10 Beginnings and
endings; 4.11 Editing; 4.12 Finally, a frequently
asked question: ‘Is it OK to use ‘I’?’; Works cited;
5. Sentences: 5.1 The most common errors
made in student assignments; 5.2 Errors
involving clauses; 5.3 Errors involving commas;
5.4 Errors involving apostrophes; 5.5 Errors
involving pronouns; 5.6 Errors involving verbs;
5.7 Errors involving words; Works cited; 6.
References: 6.1 The MLA system; 6.2 Citations
in the MLA style; 6.3 Quotations; 6.4
Bibliographies and works cited in the MLA style;
Works cited; Appendix: Sample essay by Alex
Hobbs.
ISBN: 9780521137546
An Introduction to
Research
The Rudiments of
Literary Research
Shirish Chindhade and
Ashok Thorat
176pp
R. K. Narayan
An Introduction
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Mohan G. Ramanan
A pioneer in Indian writing in English, R. K.
Narayan’s breadth of work, based on the fictitious
world of the tiny Malgudi town, offers both the
academic-scholar and the general reader a
variety of ideas about and insights into a small
town’s many lives. Narayan’s novels, short
fiction, non-fiction and travelogues hover around
sweet shop owners, schoolchildren, teachers,
family planning propagandists, ghosts, criminalsturned-savants and housewives – the deceptive
simplicity of his prose style offering a ‘microcosm’
of the Indian society, with its caste, class and
gender complication. All of these essential
aspects of Narayan’s work come in for sustained
attention in this eminently-readable introduction
by Mohan G. Ramanan. Ramanan posits a
genealogical perspective on Narayan’s themes
and concerns by locating these in intellectual
contexts, such as the role of English in Narayan’s
works and Indian Writing in English as a genre.
PB ` 295.00
An Introduction to Research is a differently
written book that tries to explode the myth that all
research work is produced with a wry face and
has to be read with a wry face. It is meant for
students who are already carrying out research
or are about to undertake it. It is an attempt to
communicate the message that research, though
a serious activity, is not, after all, ‘the flower of
paradise, which only angels and supermen can
pluck. Every sincere and disciplined student can
perform research and complete it satisfactorily,
provided certain simple and basic guiding
principles are followed.
Contents: Abbreviations Used;
Acknowledgements; Series Editor’s Preface;
1. Introduction; 2. Thoughtful Citizen: Narayan’s
Essays; 3. The Self And The World: Narayan’s
Memories, Travelogues And Guide Books;
4. Narayan’s Short Fiction; 5. Narayan’s Longer
Fiction; 6. Thematic Concerns; 7. Caste, Class
And Gender; 8. Form And Value In Narayan;
9. Conclusion; Topics for Discussion; Works
Cited; Select Bibliography.
An Introduction to Research deals with many of
the important facts of academic research.
Contents: Preface; 1. Research: Background
and the Current State of Affairs; 2. Planning and
Choosing a Topic; 3. What is Research?;
4. Preparing to Write; 5. Plagiarism; 6. What is in
a Name?; 7. Introduction and Conclusion;
8. Research: postscripts; Appendices.
ISBN: 9788175967106
88pp
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres. The CIWE texts cater to a wide
audience – from the student seeking information
and critical material on particular works to the
general, informed reader who might want to know
a little more about an author s/he has just
finished reading. Cast in a user-friendly format
and written with a high degree of critical and
theoretical rigour, the texts in the series will
provide astute, accessible, informed entry-points
into a wide range of works and writers. CIWE, we
hope, will further strengthen the interest in and
readership of one of the most significant
components of world literatures in English.
ISBN: 9789382993537
PB ` 195.00
20
214pp
PB ` 295.00
Raja Rao
An Introduction
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Letizia Alterno
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian Writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres.
Preface; Introduction; The Poetry; A Travelogue:
From Heaven Lake; A Verse Novel: The Golden
Gate; The Nation at Work in Post-Independence
India: A Suitable Boy; In Europe: An Equal
Music; Biographic Memoir: Two Lives;
Conclusions; Topics for Discussion; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9788175965898
Raja Rao, along with R. K. Narayan and Mulk Raj
Anand, defined Indian writing in English in the
early twentieth century. His works exhibit a deep
engagement with psychology, mysticism,
spiritualism and philosophy. His narratives
become cultural as well as individual chronicles,
and very often draw implicitly or explicitly upon
various aspects — the freedom movement to
Gandhi to myths — of an Indian ethos. Letizia
Alterno’s detailed, incisive and eminentlyreadable introduction is a rigorous examination of
the diverse, and complex, Raja Rao canon,
including some of his lesser known short-fiction.
Rohinton Mistry
An Introduction
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Nandini BhautooDewnarain
Vikram Seth
An Introduction
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Rohini MokashiPunekar
232pp
PB ` 295.00
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres.
Mistry’s fiction covers many themes, from politics
to Parsi community life and economic inequality
to national ‘events’ such as wars, rigorously
examining the impact of historical forces and
social events on ‘small’ lives. Nandini BhautooDewnarain’s study, a schematic introduction to
Mistry’s works, looks at the process of
marginalization or ‘Othering’ in his fiction.
Exploring Mistry’s themes of tradition, ageing and
families, Bhautoo-Dewnarain demonstrates how
his fiction moves from the local to the universal.
Contents: Acknowledgements; Series Editor’s
Preface; 1. Introduction; 2. Raja Rao and his
Fictional Characters; 3. The Missing Mother in
Rao’s Fiction; 4. The Yearning for a Guru;
5. Interminable Tales: The Short Stories;
6. Meaningful Gurus: The Meaning of India and
The Great Indian Way; 7. Before and After the
Guru: Two Early Works; 8. Critical Unorthodoxy:
Standpoints; Topics for Discussion; Bibliography
and Webliography; Primary Sources; Secondary
Sources.
ISBN: 9788175966277
230pp
Contents: Series Editor’s Preface; 1.
Introduction; 2. The Local and the Universal;
3. ‘Otherness’ in Mistry; 4. Politics in Mistry’s
Fiction; 5. Recurring Themes; 6. Rohinton Mistry
and Indian Writing in English; Topics for
Discussion; Appendix A: The 1975 Emergency;
Appendix B: MISA; Appendix C: The History of
the Bangladesh Conflict; Appendix D: List of
Honours and Awards; Bibliography.
PB ` 295.00
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian Writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres.
ISBN: 9788175963115
Amitav Ghosh
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Vikram Seth is one of the most celebrated
authors in Indian Writing in English today. With
the complexity and depth of his work and his
significant achievements in prose as well as
verse, Seth has proved the master of the English
language. His many themes and concerns, from
land ceiling in post-Independence India to
Western classical music to relationships, all cast
in formally-perfect prose or poetry, have gained
him a formidable reputation as a stylist and a
perfectionist. Rohini Mokashi-Punekar’s thorough
study works its way through the many forms,
themes and styles of Seth’s verse and prose. It
pays attention to both form and content, and
presents a comprehensive study of Seth’s oeuvre
by linking plot, characterization and theme in a
densely-textured analysis and close reading.
John C. Hawley
134pp
PB ` 295.00
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres.
Amitav Ghosh, a novelist with an extraordinary
sense of history and place, is indisputably one of
the most important novelists and essayists of our
times. In this volume, John Hawley provides a
lucid, friendly and thorough introduction to the
fiction and essays of Ghosh.
Contents: Series Editor’s Preface; 1. The Writer,
his Contexts and his Themes; 2. A Writer situated
in a History and in a Place: Ghosh’s non-fiction;
3. A Tale of Two Riots: The Circle of Reason and
The Shadow Lines; 4. The Ebb and Flow of
People across Continents and Generations: In
An Antique Land, The Glass Palace, The Hungry
Contents: Acknowledgements; Series Editor’s
21
Tide; 5. Subaltern Agency as Fiction or Science:
The Calcutta Chromosome; 6. Beyond the
Commonwealth:Amitav Ghosh and Indian Writing
in English; Topics for Discussion; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9788175962590
223pp
14. Empire and after: from the nineteenth to the
twentieth century in Britain and overseas; 15. The
literature of the United States of America from the
colonial period to Henry James; 16. The age of
T. S. Eliot: the mid-twentieth-century literature of
the English-speaking world; Index.
PB ` 150.00
ISBN: 9788175960787
Mahesh Dattani
(Contemporary Indian
Writers in English)
Asha Kuthari Chaudhuri
Contemporary Indian Writers in English (CIWE) is
a series that presents critical commentaries on
some of the best-known names in the genre.
With the high visibility of Indian writing in English
in academic, critical, pedagogic and reader
circles, there is a perceivable demand for lucid
yet rigorous introductions to several of its authors
and genres.
The Great Gatsby
F. Scott Fitzgerald
This critical edition of The Great Gatsby draws on
the manuscript and surviving proofs of the novel,
together with Fitzgerald’s subsequent revisions to
key passages to provide the first authoritative
text of one of the classic works of the twentieth
century.
ISBN: 9788175960435
Hard Times
Contents: Series Editor’s Preface; 1.
Introduction: Modern Indian Drama; 2. The
Setting: The Constructed/ Deconstructed Family;
3. The ‘Invisible’ Issues: Sexuality, Alternate
Sexuality and Gender; 4. Identity: Locating the
Self; 5. Reading the Stage: The Self-Reflexivity
of the Texts; 6. Film: Alternate Performances,
Shifting Genres; 7. Conclusion: Mahesh Dattani
and Contemporary Indian Writing; Topics for
Discussion; Appendix; Bibliography.
155pp
Charles Dickens
George Sampson
192pp
PB ` 125.00
This edition of Hard Times is part of the
Cambridge Literature series, and has been
specially prepared for students in schools and
colleges who are studying the book as part of
their English course.
This study edition invites you to think about what
happens when you read the novel, and it
suggests that you are not passively responding
to words on the page, which have only one
agreed interpretation, but that you are actively
exploring and making new sense of what you
read.
PB ` 150.00
Contents: Introduction; Text; Glossary; Activities.
ISBN: 9788175960510
The Concise
Cambridge History
of English
Literature
PB ` 595.00
Contents: Cambridge Literature; Introduction to
the reader; The Great Gatsby; Resource Notes;
Who has written The Great Gatsby and why?;
What type of text is it?; How was it produced?;
How is it presented?; Who reads The Great
Gatsby and why?; Glossary; Further Reading.
Mahesh Dattani is perhaps one of India’s most
daring, innovative and important playwrights in
English. He blends conventional themes with
some startingly new ones. His plays combine the
intimate with the social, the personal and the
public, often exploring the boundaries between
these realms. In this volume, Asha Kuthari
Chaudhuri explores Dattani’s central themes –
the family, alternate sexualities, other genders,
morality and identity – while also examining the
dramaturgical innovations in his work.
ISBN: 9788175962606
989pp
Sampson’s Concise History of English Literature
was first published in 1941. At the time, it was a
summary, in readable form, of the great
Cambridge History, with some personal touches
by Sampson. The second edition had a
substantial new chapter by R. C. Churchill on
twentieth-century literature and appeared in
1961. The present edition, prepared by
Mr. Churchill, provides a revision of the first
thirteen chapters. Three very substantial new
chapters are now added and these have the
effect of making this the only complete and up-todate survey of world literature in English.
The Cambridge
Introduction to the
Short Story in
English
Adrian Hunter
Contents: 1. From the beginnings to the cycles
of romance; 2. The end of the Middle Ages; 3.
Renascence and reformation; 4. Prose and
poetry: Sir Thomas North to Michael Drayton; 5.
The drama to 1642: part I; 6. The drama to 1642:
part II; 7. Cavalier and Puritan; 8. The age of
Dryden; 9. From Steele and Addison to Pope and
Swift; 10. The age of Johnson; 11. The period of
the French revolution; 12. The nineteenth
century: part I; 13. The nineteenth century: part II;
22
192pp
PB ` 150.00
The short story has become an increasinglyimportant genre since the mid-nineteenth
century. Complementing The Cambridge
Introduction to the American Short Story, this
book examines the development of the short
story in Britain and other English-language
literatures. It considers issues of form and style
alongside – and often as part of – a broader
discussion of publishing history and the cultural
contexts in which the short story has flourished
and continues to flourish. In its structure the book
provides a chronological survey of the form,
usefully grouping writers to show the
development of the genre over time. Starting with
Dickens and Kipling, the chapters cover key
authors from the past two centuries and up to the
present day. The focus on form, literary history,
and cultural context, together with the highlighting
of the greatest short stories and their authors,
make this a stimulating and informative overview
for all students of English literature.
Contents: Introduction; Part I. The Nineteenth
Century: Introduction: Publishers, plots and
prestige; 1. Charles Dickens and Thomas Hardy;
2. Rudyard Kipling and Joseph Conrad; 3. The
Yellow Book circle and the 1890s avant-garde;
Part II. The Modernist Short Story: Introduction:
‘Complete with missing parts’; 4. James Joyce; 5.
Virginia Woolf; 6. Katherine Mansfield; 7. Samuel
Beckett; Part III. Post-Modernist Stories;
Introduction: Theories of form; 8. Frank O’Connor
and Sean O’Faolain; 9. Elizabeth Bowen and V.
S. Pritchett; 10. Angela Carter and Ian McEwan;
Part IV. Post-colonial and Other Stories;
Introduction: A ‘minor’ literature?; 11. Frank
Sargeson and Marjorie Barnard; 12. James
Kelman and Chinua Achebe; 13. Alice Munro;
Guide to further reading; Index.
ISBN: 9780521734417
A Short History of
English Literature
Pramod K. Nayar
302pp
Themes and
Conventions of
Elizabethan
Tragedy
M.C. Bradbrook
PB ` 495.00
A Short History of English Literature is a
comprehensive survey, in chronological fashion,
of the major periods, authors and movements
from Chaucer to the present. Written for
undergraduate and postgraduate students in
South Asian universities, this History locates
authors, genres and developments within their
social, political and historical contexts. Informed
by contemporary literary and cultural theory, this
account also prepares the student for further
explorations in particular genres and periods in
English literature.
Contents: Preface to the second edition; Part
One The Theatre; 1. Introduction; 2. Conventions
of Presentation and Acting; 3. Conventions of
Action; 4. Elizabethan Habits of Reading, Writing
and Listening; 5. Conventions of Speech; Part
Two The Dramatists; 6. Christopher Marlowe;
7. Cyril Tourneur; 8. John Webster; 9. Thomas
Middleton; 10. Character, Identity and the
Performer’s Art in Elizabethan Drama; Outline of
related studies 1935 – 78; Index.
Contents: List of Boxed Items;
Acknowledgements; Preface; 1. English
Literature: A Prologue; Section One: The
Renaissance To The Restoration;
2. Backgrounds; 3. Literature of the Renaissance;
4. Re-reading the Renaissance: Postcolonial
Shakespeare; Section Two: From The
Restoration To The Enlightenment;
5. Backgrounds; 6. Literature of the Restoration;
7. Literature of the Enlightenment; 8. Re-reading
the Augustan Age: Gender and Genre; Section
Three: The Romantic Age; 9. Backgrounds;
10. Literature of the Romantic Age; 11. Rereading the Romantics: Colonialism,
Romanticism and Disease; Section Four: The
Victorian Age; 12. Backgrounds; 13. Literature of
the Victorian Age; 14. Late Victorian Literature;
15. Re-reading the Victorians: Constructed
Masculinities; Section Five: The Modern Age;
16. Backgrounds; 17. Towards the Modern:
Edwardian and Georgian Literature (1900-22);
18. Literature of the Modern Age; 19. The
Present; 20. Re-reading Modernism: Technology,
the Body and Literature; Postscript: ‘English
Literature’ or ‘Literatures in English’; Select
Bibliography; Webliography; Title/Topic Index;
Author Index.
ISBN: 9788175966260
460pp
The first edition of this book formed the basis of
the moden approach to Elizabethan poetic drama
as a performing art, an approach pursued in
subsequent volumes by Professor Bradbrook. Its
influence has also extended to other fields; it has
been studied by Grigori Kozintsev and Sergei
Eisenstein for instance. Conventions of open
stage, stylized plot and characters, and actors’
traditions of presentation are related to the
special expectations, which a rhetorical training
produced in the listeners. The general discussion
of tragic conventions is followed by individual
studies of how these were used by Marlowe,
Tourneur, Webster and Middleton. For this
second edition, Professor Bradbrook has revised
her material and written a new introduction. A
new final chapter on performance and
characterization describes the conventions of
role-playing. Dramatists before and after
Shakespeare are compared with him in their
methods of showing a complex identity on stage.
This chapter also considers the work of Marston,
Chapman and Ford in relation to the themes and
conventions studied in earlier chapters.
ISBN: 9788175963276
PB ` 345.00
23
278pp
PB ` 395.00
Rediscover Shakespeare with Cambridge as we launch our stunning new-look
Cambridge Shakespeare series. Featuring the same excellent page layout, glossing,
critical introductions and illustrations, you can now enjoy studying Shakespeare as
never before.
Now refreshed and complete, The New Cambridge Shakespeare appeals to readers
worldwide with its up-to-date scholarship and emphasis on performance. Edited by an
expert international team, the series includes all Shakespeare’s plays, sonnets and
poems.
ISBN
TITLE
PRICE
9781107675513
9781107610224
9781107653245
9781107669871
9781107635579
9781107659544
9781107631328
9781107642904
9781107659926
9781107636446
9781107675353
9781107614192
9781107656536
9781107651142
9781107681859
9781107693531
9781107655027
9781107625167
9781107686915
9781107669024
9781107680340
9788185618784
A Midsummer Night’s Dream
All’s Well That Ends Well
Antony and Cleopatra
As You Like It
Hamlet
Julius Caesar
King Henry VIII
King Richard II
Macbeth
Measure for Measure
Much Ado About Nothing
Othello
Romeo and Juliet
The Comedy of Errors
The Merchant of Venice
The Sonnets
The Taming of the Shrew
The Tempest
The Tragedy of King Lear
Twelfth Night
New Cambridge Shakespeare Set (20 books)
Much Ado About Nothing
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
`
9780521177191
The Tempest
` 195.00
245.00
245.00
295.00
245.00
195.00
245.00
295.00
295.00
195.00
245.00
295.00
245.00
295.00
295.00
245.00
245.00
295.00
295.00
295.00
195.00
4750.00
125.00
More titles in The New Cambridge Shakespeare (Original UK Editions, now available at a special Indian Price)
9780521296946
Cymbeline
£ 8.99
` 795.00
9780521735568
King Richard III
£ 8.99
` 795.00
9780521728744
8.99
` 795.00
£
8.99
` 795.00
£
8.99
` 795.00
£
8.99
` 795.00
Coriolanus
£
9780521596732
King Edward III
9780521687430
The First Part of King Henry IV
9780521689502
The Second Part of King Henry IV
24
ISBN
TITLE
PRICE
9780521612647
King Henry V
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521296342
The First Part of King Henry VI
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521377041
The Second Part of King Henry VI
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521377058
The Third Part of King Henry VI
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521293877
King John
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521294317
Love’s Labour Lost
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521146814
The Merry Wives of Windsor
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521297103
Pericles
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521671620
The Poems
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521294041
Timon of Athens
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521673822
Titus Andronicus
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521376198
Troilus and Cressida
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521181693
The Two Gentlemen of Verona
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521686990
The Two Noble Kinsmen
£
8.99
` 795.00
9780521293730
The Winter’s Tale
£
8.99
` 795.00
The Cambridge
Shakespeare Guide
Plots, Characters and Interpretations
Emma Smith
Perfect for students and theatregoers, this lively and authoritative guide contains key
information on Shakespeare. Covering all of Shakespeare’s dramatic and poetic
works in compact, alphabetical form, the book provides plot and character
summaries, essential background context, information on major themes and
descriptions of performance history.
Contents: Part I. The Works: 1. All’s Well That Ends Well; 2. Antony and Cleopatra;
3. As You Like It; 4. The Comedy of Errors; 5. Coriolanus; 6. Cymbeline; 7. Hamlet;
8. Julius Caesar; 9. King Henry IV Part 1; 10. King Henry IV Part 2; 11. King Henry V;
12. King Henry VI Parts 1, 2, and 3; 13. King Henry VIII, or All is True; 14. King John;
15. King Lear; 16. King Richard II; 17. King Richard III; 18. Love’s Labour’s Lost;
19. Macbeth; 20. Measure for Measure; 21. The Merchant of Venice; 22. The Merry
Wives of Windsor; 23. A Midsummer Night’s Dream; 24. Much Ado About Nothing;
25. Othello; 26. The Phoenix and the Turtle; 27. Pericles; 28. The Rape of Lucrece;
29. Romeo and Juliet; 30. The Sonnets and A Lover’s Complaint; 31. The Taming of
the Shrew; 32. The Tempest; 33. Timon of Athens; 34. Titus Andronicus; 35. Troilus
and Cressida; 36. Twelfth Night; 37. The Two Gentlemen of Verona; 38. The Two
Noble Kinsmen; 39. The Winter’s Tale; 40. Venus and Adonis; Part II. The Context:
41. Shakespeare’s life; 42. Shakespeare’s theatre; 43. Shakespeare in print;
44. Shakespearean apocrypha; 45. Shakespeare’s language; Further reading.
ISBN: 9781107668928
25
258pp
Paperback
` 395.00
Contents: Preface; Introduction;
Acknowledgements; 1. Post-Independence Urdu
Short Story; The Indian Perspective; 2. PostPartition Urdu Poetry; The Indian Panorama; 3.
Structuralism and Post-structuralism in Urdu
Criticism; 4. Jayant Parmar; The First Voice of
Dalit Poetry in Urdu; 5. Firaq as a Critic; 6. Ghalib
Criticism; An Overview; 7. Literature, Culture and
Social Consciousness; An Appraisal of Faiz’s
Prose Writings; 8. The Influence of Tagore on
Urdu Literature; 9. Early Journalistic Endeavours
of Sir Syed Ahmad Khan; 10. Pioneering the First
Urdu Book on Journalism; The First Vernacular
Book on the Art of Journalism; 11. The
Contribution of Urdu Journalists to the First War
of Independence; 12. Abul Kalam Azad’s
Journalistic Conquests; Index.
FILM, MEDIA AND GENERAL
News as Culture
Ursula Rao
At the turn of the millennium, Indian journalism
has undergone significant changes. The rapid
commercialization of the press, together with an
increase in literacy and political consciousness,
has led to swift growth in the newspaper market
and also changed the way news-makers mediate
politics. Positioned at a historical junction where
India is clearly feeling the effects of market
liberalization, News as Culture demonstrates how
journalists and informants interactively create
new forms of political action and consciousness.
The book explores English and Hindi newsmaking and investigates the creation of news
relations during the production process and how
they affect political images and leadership
traditions. It moves beyond the news-room to
outline the role of journalists in urban society, the
social lives of news texts and the way citizens
bring their ideas and desires to bear on the news
discourse. This important volume contributes to
an emerging debate about the impact of the
media on Indian society. Furthermore, it
convincingly demonstrates the inseparable link
between media-related practices and dynamic
cultural repertoires.
ISBN: 9789382993773
The Cambridge
Companion to
Cricket
Anthony Bateman and
Jeffrey Hill
Contents: List of Abbreviations; List of Figures
and Tables; Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction;
2. Lucknow News; 3. Local Voices:
Empowerment through News-Making; 4. Political
Reporting: Sites of Engagement – Performances
of Distance; 5. Infotainment: Re-Writing Politics
after Economic Liberalisation; 6. Conclusions;
References; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967861
Urdu Literature
and Journalism
Critical Perspectives
Shafey Kidwai
236pp
HB ` 895.00
Notwithstanding widespread adulation for the
creative dexterity of writers like Meer, Ghalib,
Premchand, Manto, Firaq and Shaharyar, Urdu
literature has often been viewed as inordinately
influenced by emotionalism. Urdu Literature and
Journalism, comprising well-focused and
cogently-argued essays, works out a new
perspective on Urdu literature. The author
weaves different strands of thoughts and new
theoretical discourses reflected in various genres
of literature to produce a kaleidoscopic portrait of
contemporary Urdu literature. By analysing the
texts of famous Urdu writers in tautly-rendered
poised prose, the book offers an alternative
vision of our lived reality. The book also includes
essays on Urdu journalism, tracing its history and
development in pre- and post-Partition India. The
contribution of Urdu journalism to the freedom
struggle of India and its influence on the First
War of Independence have been made clear
through these essays. However, the contention of
the author is to make it clear to the readers that
Urdu journalism is more than just ‘protest
journalism’ – a term which, he thinks, has been
wrongly attached to Urdu periodicals.
204pp
HB ` 695.00
Few other team sports can equal the global reach
of cricket. Rich in history and tradition, it is both
quintessentially English and expansively
international, a game that has evolved and
changed dramatically in recent times.
Demonstrating how the history of cricket and its
international popularity is entwined with British
imperial expansion, this book examines the
social and political impact of the game in a
variety of cultural sites: the West Indies, India,
Pakistan, Sri Lanka, South Africa, Australia and
New Zealand. An international team of
contributors explores the enduring influence of
cricket on English identity, examines why cricket
has seized the imagination of so many literary
figures and provides profiles of iconic players
including Bradman, Lara and Tendulkar.
Presenting a global panoramic view of cricket's
complicated development, its unique adaptability
and its political and sporting controversies, the
book provides a rich insight into a unique
sporting and cultural heritage.
Contents: Cricket: a chronology; Introduction
Anthony Bateman and Jeffrey Hill; 1. Cricket
pastoral and Englishness Anthony Bateman;
2. Cricket in the eighteenth century Rob Light;
3. Cricket and corruption David Frith;
4. Broadcasting and cricket in England Jack
Williams; 5. Bodyline, Jardine and masculinity
Patrick F. McDevitt; 6. Don Bradman: just a boy
from Bowral Tom Heenan and David Dunstan;
7. The Packer cricket war Richard Cashman;
8. New Zealand cricket and the colonial
relationship Greg Ryan; 9. C. L. R. James and
cricket Kenneth Surin; 10. Reading Brian Lara
and the traditions of Caribbean cricket poetry
Claire Westall; 11. The detachment of West
Indies cricket from the nationalist scaffold Hilary
McD. Beckles; 12. The Indian Premier League
and world cricket Boria Majumdar; 13. Hero,
26
celebrity and icon: Sachin Tendulkar and Indian
public culture Prashant Kidambi; 14. Conflicting
loyalties: nationalism and religion in IndiaPakistan cricket relations Mihir Bose; 15. Cricket
and representations of beauty: Newlands cricket
ground and the roots of apartheid in South
African cricket Andre Odendaal; 16. Writing the
modern game Rob Steen; 17. Cricket and
international politics Stephen Wagg and Jon
Gemmell; Further reading.
ISBN: 9781107601949
Woman as
Spectator and
Spectacle
Essays on Women
and Media
K. Durga Bhavani and
C. Vijayasree
308pp
Indian Railways
Strategy for Reforms
K. B. Verma
PB ` 595.00
Contents: List of Tables and Charts; Preface;
List of Abbreviations; Part 1: Introduction;
1. Indian Railways; 2. Historical Background;
3. Why Reform?; Part 2: The Reform Wave;
4. Introduction; 5. Japanese Railways;
6. Swedish Railways; 7. British Railways;
8. Some Other Railways; Part 3: Reforming
Indian Railways; 9. What Others Did;
10. Commercialising of Indian Railways;
11. Management Structure; 12. Incentive
Scheme; 13. The Core and Non-core Debate;
14. Production Units; 15. Rounding Up; 16. The
Road Ahead; Annexure; Select Bibliography;
Index; About the Author.
Woman as Spectator and Spectacle brings
together several critical readings on the
correlations between media and women’s issues.
Based on the papers presented at the National
Seminar on ‘Women in/ and Media’ conducted at
Osmania University, Hyderabad, this volume
deals with issues ranging from the portrayal of
women in media to the need for a definitive
gender policy for the media. The volume explores
the role of women both as objects of media
representation as well as the its producers and
consumers. The articles interweave the regional
and linguistic readings of media texts with global
Feminist media criticism. Through this, the
ramifications of media globalization on women’s
issues are analysed, thus giving voice to specific
local developments and their impact on women
and media.
ISBN: 9789384463151
Contents: Notes on Contributors; Preface;
Introduction; Part I: Media and Gender (In)
Justice; 1. Wanted: A Gender Perspective on
Media Globalisation; 2. Media Texts for Women
by Women; 3. Media-ting ‘Patriarchy; ’ 4. The
Endangered Gender: Images of Women in
Advertisements; 5. Women in Visual Media: The
Spectator vs. the Spectacle; 6. Two Faces of
Women on Television: Need for a Gender Policy;
; Part II: Farming Women; 7. Images of Women
in India Soap Operas; 8. “People Said I Created
Pornography”: Sexuality, the Gaze and Rituparno
Ghosh; 9. Women’s Issue in Telugu Films: Limits
of Social Reform; 10. A Case Study of the Reellife ‘Wimin’ in the Fire andGirlfriend: Fruition to
Miso Phallicism from mere Feminism; 11. Gender
at Cyberspace: Who’s Online; 12. Women in
Media: The Politics of Representation.
ISBN: 9788175967687
120pp
The need for reform in the Indian Railways has
become much more acute and urgent than ever
before. Suggestions for corporatization,
compensation for cost of social service
obligations, separating policy from execution and
shedding off non-core activities have long been
made. There is serious need to question the way
we look at our railway system, i.e., whether its
format as a commercial-cum-public utility service
being run by a government department has
served the needs of a growing economy or
hampered its growth. This book attempts to
develop an alternative institutional framework,
which is simple, effective and workable while
causing the least upheaval to the existing
structure.
Online Journalism
A Basic Text
Tapas Ray
HB ` 695.00
220pp
PB ` 595.00
This book provides a comprehensive and
accessible introduction to online journalism, as
well as the internet. Apart from being a medium
of communication, the internet is vast and
continuously-growing storehouse of information,
which journalists can use to their advantage.
Practical aspects of online journalism are
explained with a number of case studies. The
book attempts to equip the reader with the skills
needed to use internet technology in journalism.
It also provides an insight into the unique nature
of the medium by placing e-journalism within a
broad social context.
Among the topics covered are:
• History of the internet
• New journalisms: annotative and open source
• Computer assisted journalism
• Packaging news for the web
• Publishing on the web
• Legal and institutional issues
• Multimediality, interactivity and hypertextuality
• New roles for the journalist
• Digital access and barrier
• Trends: convergence and broadband
• The networked world
Contents: Preface; Introduction; 1. Internet and
Journalism: An Introduction; 2. The History and
Evolution of the Internet; 3. Multimediality,
Interactivity and Hypertextuality; 4. Annotative
Reporting and Open-source Journalism;
5. Computer Assisted Journalism or Reporting;
6. Preparing Online Packages; 7. Web Authoring
27
sounds and silences of the Bhasha media;
5. 'Journalists are pimps': a triangulated axis of
caste, language and politics; Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index.
and Publishing; 8. Revenue, Ethics and Law;
9. Gatekeeping: The Changing Roles of Online
Journalism; 10. Digital Determinism: Access and
Barrier; 11. Convergence and Broadband;
12. The Network Paradigm; Glossary; Index.
ISBN: 9788175963337
Cookery for the
Hospitality
Industry
Graham Dodgshun
and Michel Peters
Adapted by Sireesh
Saxena
278pp
ISBN: 9781107149359
PB ` 495.00
A Gentleman's
Word
The Legacy of Subhas
Chandra Bose in
Southeast Asia
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements;
1. Introduction; 2. Catering hygiene and (HACCP)
principles; 3. Occupational health and safety;
4. Kitchen organization; 5. Menu planning;
6. Nutrition; 7. Cost control in the commercial
kitchen; 8. Methods of cookery; 9. Food
preparation and mise en place; 10. Appetisers
and salads; 11. Canapes and sandwiches;
12. Sauces; 13. Soups; 14. Eggs; 15. Rice,
pasta, gnocchi and noodles; 16. Seafood;
17. Poultry; 18. Meat; 19. Vegetables and fruit;
20. Buffet and cold larder; 21. Pastries, cakes
and yeast goods; 22. Hot and cold desserts;
23. Cheese; 24. Food preservation; 25. Indian
recipes; Appendix 1 Gastronorm containers;
Appendix 2 Recipe list; Glossary; Index.
Making News in
Global India
Media, Publics, Politics
Sahana Udupa
647pp
PB ` 799.00
HISTORY
Cookery for the Hospitality Industry will provide
trade apprentices and other commercial cookery
students at Hotel Management Institute with
everything they need to know to achieve trade
status, and more. Cookery for the Hospitality
Industry is the latest text for commercial cookery
students that genuinely addresses the needs of
students.
ISBN: 9780521721400
292pp
Nilanjana Sengupta
PB ` 495.00
In the decades following India's opening to
foreign capital, the city of Bangalore emerged,
quite unexpectedly, as the outsourcing hub for
the global technology industry and the
aspirational global city of liberalizing India.
Through an ethnography of English and Kannada
print news media in Bangalore, this ambitious
and innovative new study reveals how the
expanding private news culture played a critical
role in shaping urban transformation in India,
when the allegedly public profession of
journalism became both an object and agent of
global urbanization. Building on extensive
fieldwork carried out with the Times of India
group, the largest media house in India, between
2008 and 2012, Sahana Udupa argues that the
class project of the 'global city' news discourse
came into striking conflict with the cultural logics
of regional language and caste practices.
Advancing new theoretical concepts, Making
News in Global India takes arguments in media
scholarship beyond the dichotomy of public good
and private accumulation.
The great Indian nationalist leader Subhas
Chandra Bose arrived in Singapore in 1943 to
revitalize the Indian National Army (INA). Taking
the opportunity of the Japanese occupation of
parts of Southeast Asia, he launched armed
struggle against British colonial rule in India. Two
years later, that attempt failed at the eastern
gates of India. Yet, it was a temporary failure
because the INA helped set in motion a series of
developments within India. These would
culminate in its freedom in a further two years.
Bose is a household name in India. He is
remembered in Southeast Asia as well,
particularly among Indians. However, while his
contributions to India’s independence movement
have been recorded exhaustively, less is known
about the legacy that he left behind in Southeast
Asia. This book seeks to fill that gap in the
international understanding of a great Indian
nationalist and pan-Asianist. It records how
participation in the nationalist struggle invested
Southeast Asian Indians with a rare sense of
dignity and helped foster a mushrooming of
militant trade unions, making it difficult for the
returning British planters to perpetuate their
control over what had been a docile workforce.
The INA’s Rani of Jhansi movement proved to be
a pioneering effort at drawing Southeast Asian
Indian women out of their traditional roles and
expectations. It inspired some of them to take up
mainstream roles for the cause of equality and
emancipation. The book will appeal to scholars of
South East Asian and South Asian history.
General readers interested in Subhas Chandra
Bose and INA, and also India’s nationalist
movement will find this book useful.
Contents: Foreword by S. R. Nathan; Message
by K. Kesavapany; Message by Joyce C. Lebra;
Preface; Acknowledgements; 1. A Journey: A
Dream; 2. An Outsider in the Crescent and a Trial
for Treason; 3. End of a War, Beginning of
Others; 4. We are the Multitudes; 5. “They Have
Done Enough at Home”: Escape from the
Shadows; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264651
Contents: Introduction: the twin mediations;
1. Regimes of desire; 2. Democracy by default;
3. The difference machine: market and field
logics of news production; 4. Kannada J?gate:
28
316pp
HB ` 895.00
A History of
Bangladesh
Willem van Schendel
Bangladesh is a new name for an old land whose
history is little known to the wider world. A
country chiefly famous in the West for media
images of poverty, underdevelopment, and
natural disasters, Bangladesh did not exist as an
independent state until 1971. Willem van
Schendel's history reveals the country's vibrant,
colourful past and its diverse culture as it
navigates the extraordinary twists and turns that
have created modern Bangladesh. The story
begins with the early geological history of the
delta, which has decisively shaped Bangladesh
society. The narrative then moves chronologically
through the era of colonial rule, the partition of
Bengal, the war with Pakistan and the birth of
Bangladesh as an independent state. In so
doing, it reveals the forces that have made
Bangladesh what it is today. This is an eloquent
introduction to a fascinating country and its
resilient and inventive people.
A Social History
of the Deccan
1300-1761
Richard M. Eaton
Contents: Introduction; Part I. The Long View;
1. A land of water and silt; 2. Jungle, fields, cities
and states; 3. A region of multiple frontiers;
4. The Delta as a crossroads; Part II. Colonial
Encounters; 5. From the Mughal Empire to the
British Empire; 6. The British impact; 7. A closing
agrarian frontier; 8. Colonial conflicts; 9. Towards
partition; 10. Partition; Part III. Becoming East
Pakistan; 11. The Pakistan experiment;
12. Pakistan falls apart; 13. East Pakistani
livelihoods; 14. The roots of aid dependence;
15. A new elite and cultural renewal; Part IV. War
and the Birth of Bangladesh; 16. Armed conflict;
17. A state is born; 18. Imagining a new society;
Part V. Independent Bangladesh; 19. Creating a
political system; 20. Transnational linkages;
21. Bursting at the seams; 22. A national
culture?; Conclusion.
ISBN: 9780521121903
374pp
In this fascinating account of one of the
least- known parts of South Asia, Eaton recounts
the history of the Deccan plateau in southern
India from the fourteenth century to the rise of
European colonialism. He does so, vividly,
through the lives of eight Indians who lived at
different times during this period, and who each
represented something particular about the
Deccan. In the first chapter, for example, the
author describes the demise of the regional
kingdom through the life of a maharaja. In the
second, a Sufi sheikh illustrates Muslim piety and
state authority. Other characters include a
merchant, a general, a slave, a poet, a bandit
and a female pawnbroker. Their stories are
woven together into a rich narrative tapestry,
which illumines the most important social
processes of the Deccan across four centuries.
This is a much-needed book by the most
highly- regarded scholar in the field.
Contents: 1. Pratapa Rudra (c. 1289–1323);
2. Muhammad Gisu Daraz (1321–1421);
3. Mahmud Gawan (1411–1481); 4. Rama Raya
(1484–1565); 5. Malik Ambar (1548–1626); 6.
Tukuram (1608–1649); 7. Papadu (1695–1710);
8. Tarabai (1675–1761).
ISBN: 9780521514422
A Struggle for
Identity
Muslim Women in
United Provinces
Firdous Azmat Siddiqui
PB ` 695.00
22pp
HB ` 895.00
In the nineteenth century, the British were
occupied with the question of becoming socially
acceptable, as they had already established
political and military sway in India. It was in this
context that the servants of the East India
Company, merchants, adventurers and
missionaries who arrived in India from Europe
attempted to enter the zennana, in much the
same manner as the ruling Indian elites. These
foreigners adopted the ways of the ruling class,
and thus demonstrated a preference for the
Muslim section of Indian society. This book is an
attempt to understand the social and economic
profile of Muslim women in India and to shed light
on the conditions of Indian Muslim women in the
United Province particularly after 1857. This
period is significant for Muslim society as it was
undergoing social and economic transition
especially with the Mughal dynasty reaching its
end.
The book critically discusses the influence of how
the new colonial judicial system weakened
traditional customs and questions whether this
legal system was beneficial to Muslim women or
whether it enhanced its complexities.
Contents: Acknowledgements; Introduction;
1. Social Stratification of Indian Muslim Women
in United Provinces; 2. Socio-Religious
Movement and Muslim Women’s Issue; 3. British
Perception towards Muslim Women: Question of
Fecundity and Health; 4. Crises in the Social and
29
Armies, Wars and
their Food
Economic Identity of Indian Muslim Women: The
Great Uprising of 1857; 5. Changing Profile of
Indian Muslim Women through Education;
6. Patriarchy and the Social Obligation of Indian
Muslim Women; 7. Cultural Clash: from Tawaif to
Kasbi; 8. Law, Land and Women; 9. Muslim
Women’s Response to new Judicial System;
Conclusion; Glossary; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993063
An Intellectual
History for India
Shruti Kapila
and C. A. Bayly
273pp
D. Vijaya Rao
HB ` 795.00
This volume addresses the power of ideas in the
making of Indian political modernity. As an
intermediate history of connections between
South Asia and the global arena the volume
raises new issues in intellectual history. It
reviews the period from the emergence of
constitutional liberalism in the1830s, through the
Swadeshi Era to the writings of Tilak, Azad and
Gandhi in the twentieth century. While several
contributions reflect on the ideologies of
nationalism, the volume seeks to rescue
intellectual history from being simply a narration
of the nation-state. It does not seek to create a
'canon' of political thought so much as to show
how Indian concepts of state and society were
redrawn in the context of emergent globalized
debates about freedom, the constitution of the
self and the good society in the late colonial era.
In so doing the contributions here resituate an
Indian intellectual history that has long been
eclipsed by social and political history. These
essays were originally published in a special
issue of the journal Modern Intellectual History .
Contents: Foreword; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Guide to Ancient Literature
and Notations in the Text; Section I: Growth of
Communities and Knowledge, Armies and Wars
in the Ancient Period; Chapter 1. In the
Beginning; Chapter 2. The Knowledge Literature
in Sanskrit; Chapter 3. Ancient Arts of War;
Chapter 4. Vedic and Epic Wars; Chapter 5. Rise
of Armies in Ancient Times; Chapter 6. Wars
from Purânâs to Panipat and Plassey; Chapter 7.
Modern Armed Forces of India; Section II: Food;
Chapter 8. Origin of Food Habits, Diets and
Beliefs; Chapter 9. Modern Food and Nutrition;
Chapter 10. Evolution of Military Rations with
Special Reference to India; Chapter 11.
Operational Rations and Combat Foods; Section
III: The Food Supply Chain; Chapter 12. The
Indian Military Food Supply Chain System;
Section IV: Science and Technology Component;
Chapter 13. Indian Food Industry and Food
Science and Technology Inputs for the Defence
Forces; Section V: Wars and Food Supply
Logistics; Chapter 14. Logistics and Food
Supplies in Wars – Past and Present; In the End;
Annexures; Index.
Contents: Preface and Acknowledgements;
Articles; Anxieties of Distance: Codification in
Early Colonial Bengal; Rammohan Roy and the
Advent of Constitutional Liberalism in Inia, 180030; Contesting Translations: Orientalism and the
Interpretation of the Vedas; Apologetic
Modernity; Beyond Culture-Contact and Colonial
Discourse: “Germanism” in Colonial Bengal;
Striking a Just Balance: Maulana Azad as a
Theorist of Transnational Jihad; Self, Spencer
and Swaraj: Nationalist Thought and Critiques of
Liberalism, 1890-1920; The Spirit and Form of an
Ethical Polity: A Meditation on Aurobindo’s
Thought; Geographies of Subjectivity, Pan-Islam
and Muslim Separatism: Muhammad Iqbal and
Selfhood; Afterword; List of Contributors.
ISBN: 9780521199759
168pp
In the history of mankind, armies fought at the
behest of a ruler to conquer and expand
territories. In due course, war crafts were devised
and war logistics were developed. However,
armies’ food remained much the same as ever
for a very long time. Eventually science and
technology played a crucial role in bringing army
foods and nourishment to the expected level of
modernity, commensurate with advancements in
other features of war craft. Armies, Wars and
their Food traces the evolution of military rations
and provides insights into the concept of nutrition
for military from the point of a food scientist. The
principal theme of the book is the historical
development of armies and the supply and
delivery systems prevalent at different periods of
time. Providing a ready source of historical
perspectives on the armies, it discusses the role
of science and technology in instigating
improvements in military ration. The book will
appeal to students of food science and nutrition,
army, navy and air force establishments, food
industry laboratories and research and
development organizations. General readers
interested in the history of science and military
history will also find this book useful.
ISBN: 9788175969186
HB ` 595.00
30
594pp HB ` 1295.00
CREATING A NEW MEDINA
State Power, Islam, and the Quest for
Pakistan in Late Colonial North India
Venkat Dhulipala
This book examines how the idea of Pakistan was
articulated and debated in the public sphere and how
popular enthusiasm was generated for its successful
achievement, especially in the crucial province of U.P.
(now Uttar Pradesh) in the last decade of British
colonial rule in India. It argues that Pakistan was not
simply a vague idea that serendipitously emerged as a
nation-state, but was popularly imagined as a
sovereign Islamic State, a new Medina, as some called
it. In this regard, it was envisaged as the harbinger of
Islam’s renewal and rise in the twentieth century, the
new leader and protector of the global community of
Muslims, and a worthy successor to the defunct
Turkish Caliphate.
The book specifically foregrounds the critical role
played by Deobandi ulama in articulating this imagined
national community with an awareness of Pakistan’s
global historical significance. It demonstrates how these
ulama collaborated with the Muslim League leadership
and forged a new political vocabulary fusing ideas of
Islamic nationhood and modern state. It, therefore,
challenges three principal strands in India’s Partition
historiography: scholarship on elite politics that largely
sees Pakistan’s emergence as the result of breakdown of
constitutional negotiations between the British
government, the leaders of the Muslim League and the
Indian National Congress; subaltern histories that argue
that Pakistan was a vague but emotive religious symbol
that found overwhelming popular support without an
awareness of its meaning or implications; and finally
narratives which argue that Jinnah led a secular
nationalist movement to create Pakistan as a liberal
democratic State.
Hardback | 978-1-107-05212-3 | ` 995.00
www.cambridge.org
Becoming India
Aniket Alam
industrial communications; 4. Exports for an
Iranian marketplace; 5. The making of a NeoIsmâ'îlism; 6. A theology for the mills and
dockyards; 7. Bombay Islam in the ocean's
southern city.
Becoming India demonstrates that the Western
Himalayas were politically, economically and
socially distant from the civilizations and empires
of the North during pre-colonial times. It helps in
better understanding of the present
developmental success of Himachal Pradesh as
well as the politics of the demand for separate
statehood by Uttarakhand. It studies how the
Western Himalayas became a part of the Indian
nation during colonial times. It examines in detail
the peasant rebellions, clan and caste,
polyandry, establishment of hill stations, land and
forest settlements, education, folklore and
mythology, begar and monetisation. It also
focuses on the British policy and nationalist
politics, to make its central point that the colonial
encounter in the Western Himalayas was
qualitatively different from the neighbouring parts
of North India and its history cannot be
subsumed into the general history of India. This
book would be of interest to historians,
sociologists, anthropologists, development
workers as well as those interested in mountain
societies and women's studies.
ISBN: 9781107020764
Changing India
Second Edition
Robert W. Stern
Contents: Preface; Glossary; Maps; Chapter 1.
The Geography of the Western Himalayas;
Chapter 2. Political Economy of the Western
Himalayas: Early Nineteenth Century; Chapter 3
The Foundation of the British Rule: Hill State, Hill
Station, Land Settlement and Monetisation;
Chapter 4. Peasant Rebellions and Royal
Reconciliation: British Rule inside the Hill States;
Chapter 5. Social Movements during British Rule;
Chapter 6. After Independence; Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175965645
Bombay Islam
The Religious Economy
of the West Indian
Ocean,1840-1915
Nile Green
354pp
344pp
HB ` 995.00
The revised edition of Robert Stern's book brings
India's story up-to-date. Since its original
publication in 1993, much has altered and, yet,
central to the author's argument remains his
belief in the remarkable continuity and vitality of
India's social systems and its resilience in the
face of change. This is a colourful, readable and
comprehensive introduction to modern India. In a
journey through its family households and
villages, the author explains its long-lived and
little understood caste and class systems, its
venerable faiths and extraordinary ethnic
diversity, its history as 'the jewel in the crown' of
British imperialism and its post-Independence
career as a major agricultural and industrial
nation. While paradoxes abound in an India that
is constantly transforming, Stern demonstrates
how and why it remains the largest and most
enduring democracy in the developing world.
Contents: Introduction; change, the societies of
India and Indian society; Part I. The Changing
Countryside; 1. Families and villages; 2. Varna,
jati and caste, Muslim quasi castes and
untouchability; 3. Class: primordial group
representation, stimuli-response and patron–
client relationships; 4. Homelands, 'linguistic',
'tribal' and 'regional' states: nation provinces and
bourgeois revolution; Part II. Change from Above;
5. British imperialism, Indian nationalism and
Muslim separatism; 6. Political and economic
development in the Indian Union and its
international politics.
HB ` 895.00
As a thriving port city, nineteenth-century
Bombay attracted migrants from across India and
beyond. Nile Green's Bombay Islam traces the
ties between industrialization, imperialism and
the production of religion to show how Muslim
migration fueled demand for a wide range of
religious suppliers, as Christian missionaries
competed with Muslim religious entrepreneurs for
a stake in the new market. Enabled by a colonial
policy of non-intervention in religious affairs, and
powered by steam travel and vernacular printing,
Bombay's Islamic productions were exported as
far as South Africa and Iran. Connecting histories
of religion, labour and globalization, the book
examines the role of ordinary people - mill hands
and merchants - in shaping the demand that
drove the market. By drawing on hagiographies,
travelogues, doctrinal works, and poems in
Persian, Urdu and Arabic, Bombay Islam
unravels a vernacular modernity that saw people
from across the Indian Ocean drawn into
Bombay's industrial economy of enchantment.
ISBN: 9780521540810
Contents: 1. Missionaries and reformists in the
market of Islams; 2. Cosmopolitan cults and the
economy of miracles; 3. The enchantment of
32
272pp
PB ` 395.00
Coming of Age in
NineteenthCentury India
The Girl-Child and the
Art of Playfulness
Ruby Lal
Creating a New
Medina
In this engaging and eloquent history, Ruby Lal
traces the becoming of nineteenth-century Indian
women through a critique of narratives of linear
transition from girlhood to womanhood. In the
north Indian patriarchal environment, women's
lives were dominated by the expectations of the
male universal, articulated most clearly in
household chores and domestic duties. The
author argues that girls and women in the early
nineteenth century experienced different form of
freedom, eroticism, adventurousness and
playfulness, even within restrictive
circumstances. Although women in the colonial
world of the later nineteenth century remained
agential figures, their activities came to be
constrained by more firmly-entrenched domestic
norms. Lal skillfully marks the subtle and
complex alterations in the multifaceted female
subject in a variety of nineteenth-century
discourses, elaborated in four different sitesforest, school, household, and rooftops.
State Power, Islam, and
the Quest for Pakistan
in Late Colonial North
India
Venkat Dhulipala
Contents: List of photographs and maps;
Acknowledgements; List of abbreviations;
Glossary; Introduction; 1. Nationalists,
communalists and the 1937 provincial elections;
2. Muslim mass contacts and the rise of the
Muslim League; 3. Two constitutional lawyers
from Bombay and the debate over Pakistan in
the public sphere; 4. Muslim League and the idea
of Pakistan in the United Provinces; 5. Ulama at
the forefront of politics; 6. Urdu press, public
opinion and controversies over Pakistan;
7. Fusing Islam and state power; 8. The
referendum on Pakistan; Epilogue; Conclusion;
Select bibliography; Index; About the author.
Contents: 1. Texts, spaces, histories; 2. The
woman of the forest; 3. The woman of the school;
4. The woman of the household; 5. The woman
of the rooftops.
ISBN: 9781107045910
Courtly Culture
and Political Life in
Early Medieval
India
Daud Ali
247pp
HB ` 995.00
Scholars have long studied classical Sanskrit
culture in almost total isolation from its courtly
context. Originally published in 2004, this book
focuses exclusively on the royal court as a social
and cultural institution. Using both literary and
inscriptional sources, it begins with the rise and
spread of royal households and political
hierarchies from the Gupta period (c. 350–750),
and traces the emergence of a coherent courtly
worldview which would remain stable for almost a
millennium to 1200. Later chapters examine key
features of courtly life such as: manners, ethics,
concepts of personal beauty, and theories of
disposition. The book ends with a sustained
examination of the theory and practice of erotic
love in the context of the wider social dynamics
and anxieties which faced the people of the court.
ISBN: 9781107052123
Culinary Culture in
Colonial India
A Cosmopolitan Platter
and the Middle Class
Utsa Ray
Contents: Introduction; Part I. The Rise and
Structure of Courtly Life in Early Medieval India;
1. The people of the court; 2. The culture of the
court; 3. The protocol of the court; Part II.
Aesthetics and the Courtly Sensibility; 4. Beauty
and refinement; 5. The education of disposition;
Part III. Anxiety and Romance; 6. Courtship and
the royal household; 7. The battle of love;
Postscript.
ISBN: 9788175963795
318pp
This book examines how the idea of Pakistan
was articulated and debated in the public sphere
and how popular enthusiasm was generated for
its successful achievement, especially in the
crucial province of UP (now Uttar Pradesh) in the
last decade of British colonial rule in India. It
argues that Pakistan was not a simply a vague
idea that serendipitously emerged as a nationstate, but was popularly imagined as a sovereign
Islamic State, a new Medina, as some called it. In
this regard, it was envisaged as the harbinger of
Islam's renewal and rise in the twentieth century,
the new leader and protector of the global
community of Muslims, and a worthy successor
to the defunct Turkish Caliphate. The book also
specifically foregrounds the critical role played by
Deobandi ulama in articulating this imagined
national community with an awareness of
Pakistan's global historical significance.
HB ` 895.00
648pp
HB ` 995.00
This book utilizes cuisine to understand the
construction of the colonial middle class in
Bengal who indigenized new culinary
experiences as a result of colonial modernity.
This process of indigenization developed certain
social practices, including imagination of the act
of cooking as a classic feminine act and the
domestic kitchen as a sacred space. The process
of indigenization was an aesthetic choice that
was imbricated in the upper caste and patriarchal
agenda of the middle-class social reform.
However, in these acts of imagination, there were
important elements of continuity from the precolonial times. The book establishes the fact that
Bengali cuisine cannot be labeled as indigenist
although it never became widely commercialized.
The point was to cosmopolitanize the domestic
and yet keep its tag of 'Bengaliness'. The
resultant cuisine was hybrid, in many senses like
its makers.
Contents: List of images, maps and tables;
Introduction; 1. Introducing 'foreign' food:
changes in the gastronomic culture of colonial
Bengal; 2. The cosmopolitan and the regional:
understanding Bengali cuisine; 3. Aestheticizing
labor? An affective discourse of cooking in
colonial Bengal; 4. Constructing 'Bengali' cuisine
33
Chapter 14: Twentieth Century Dissent within
the Catholic Church in India; Chapter 15:
Narratives of Travel, Voices of Dissent and
Attacks on the Colonial Church Fabric of the
European Missionaries: A Study on the
Varthamanapusthakam; Chapter 16: Sree
Narayana Guru’s Idioms of the Spiritual and the
Worldly; Chapter 17: Devotion and Dissent in
Narayana Guru; Contributors; Index.
caste: class and communal negotiations;
5. Fashioning the 'Bengali' middle class: dilemma
of the regional and the subregional; Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index; About the author.
ISBN: 9781107042810
Devotion and
Dissent in Indian
History
Vijaya Ramaswamy
280pp
HB ` 695.00
In contrast to sectarian movements across the
world that have been fundamentalist in terms of
their ideology and locked in conflicts with those
who worshipped ‘differently’, dissent movements
within devotional streams were characterized by
the qualities of universalism, humanism and love,
which cut across communal, caste and gender
lines. The primary focus of this volume is to
present the morphology of dissent within
devotion. In the process, the traditional tropes of
borders and boundaries get corroded. The
normally-visible communal, class, caste and
gender divides are rendered fuzzy. Equally
significant is the emergence of dissent within
dissent movements, as these movements begin
to petrify into rigid doctrinal positions. This book
seeks to provide a counterperspective to the wellknown and well-trodden school of Marxist
historiography, which locates religion firmly within
the existing socio-economic order. However, the
editor has not conceived of a tailored closure to
these two positions and this volume contains
essays that explore the notion of devotion as
being embedded in dissent, either religious or
social.
ISBN: 9789382993193
Domesticity and
Power in the Early
Mughal World
Ruby Lal
415pp
HB ` 995.00
In a fascinating and innovative study, Ruby Lal
explores domestic life and the place of women in
the Mughal court of the sixteenth century.
Challenging traditional, Orientalist interpretations
of the harem that have portrayed a domestic
world of seclusion and sexual exploitation, the
author reveals a complex society where noble
men and women negotiated their everyday life
and public-political affairs in the 'inner' chambers
as well as the 'outer' courts. Using Ottoman and
Safavid histories as a counterpoint, she
demonstrates the richness, ambiguity and
particularity of the Mughal harem, which was
pivotal in the transition to institutionalization and
imperial excellence.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. A genealogy of the
Mughal haram; 3. The question of the archive:
the challenge of a princess's memoir; 4. The
making of Mughal court society; 5. Where was
the haram in a peripatetic world?; 6. Settled,
sacred, and all-powerful: the new regime under
Akbar; 7. Settled, sacred, and 'incarcerated': the
imperial haram; 8. Conclusion.
Contents: Foreword; Introduction: Parsing of
Devotion and Dissent; Part I: Locating Devotion
in Dissent and Dissent in Devotion; Chapter 1:
Locating Devotion in Dissent and Dissent in
Devotion: A Thematic Overview; Part II: Devotion
and Dissent in Early India; Chapter 2: Dissent
and Protest in Early Buddhism with Special
Reference to Devadatta; Chapter 3: Devotion and
Dissent in Hunter’s Bhakti: Kannappa in
Hagiography, Sthalapurana and Iconographic
Representations; Chapter 4: Devotion and
Dissent in the Biographical Process of a
medieval saint—Ramanuja in Srivaishnava
Tradition and History; Part III: Dissent in Early
Medieval Devotional movements of the Deccan;
Chapter 5: Dissent Within: Devotion and Dissent
in Tamil Siddha Tradition; Chapter 6: Women in
Love: Mysticism and Eroticism in Virasaivism;
Chapter 7: Dissenting Voices: Continuities in the
Varkari Tradition; Part IV: Devotion and Dissent
in Medieval India on the Indo-Gangetic Plains;
Chapter 8: Dissent in Kabir and the Kabir Panth;
Chapter 9: Dalit Saint Poets: Devotion and
Dissent in Sikhism; Chapter 10: A Protest against
the Protest: The Nath-Siddhas and Charpatnath;
Part V: Devotion and Dissent in Sufism and
Related Movements; Chapter 11: Fakirs of
Bengal: Dissenters of Shariat and Challengers of
Establishments; Chapter 12: Music in Chishti
Sufism; Chapter 13: Dissenting the Dominant:
Caste Mobility and Ritual practice and Popular
Sufi Shrines in Contemporary Punjab; Part VI:
Devotion, Dissent and Reform in Colonial India;
ISBN: 9780521145541
Empire &
Information
C. A. Bayly
260pp
PB ` 895.00
In a penetrating account of the evolution of
British intelligence gathering in India, C. A. Bayly
shows how networks of Indian spies were
recruited by the British to secure military, political
and social information about their subjects. He
also examines the social and intellectual origins
of these ‘native informants’, and considers how
the colonial authorities interpreted and often
misinterpreted the information they supplied. It
was such misunderstandings that ultimately
contributed to the failure of the British to
anticipate the rebellions of 1857. The author
argues, however, that even before this, complex
systems of debate and communication were
challenging the political and intellectual
dominance of the European rulers.
Contents: List of maps; Preface; Glossary; List
of abbreviations Introduction; 1. Prologue:
surveillance and communication in early modern
India; 2. Political intelligence and indigenous
informants during the conquest of India, c. 1785–
1815; 3. Misinformation and failure on the fringes
of empire; 4. Between human intelligence and
colonial knowledge; 5. The Indian ecumene: an
34
indigenous public sphere; 6. Useful knowledge
and godly society, c. 1830–50; 7. Colonial
controversies: astronomers and physicians;
8. Colonial controversies: language and land;
9. The information order, the Rebellion of 1857–9
and pacification; 10. Epilogue: information,
surveillance and the public arena after the
Rebellion; Conclusion: ‘knowing the country’;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175960657
Our Indian Railway
Themes in India’s
Railway History
Roopa Srinivasan,
Manish Tiwari and
Sandeep Silas
425pp
Forest Ecology
in India
Colonial Maharashtra
1850–1950
Neena Ambre Rao
PB ` 595.00
This book commemorates 150 years of railways
in India. Introduced under colonial rule in the
second half of the nineteenth century, the
railways soon embraced the length and breadth
of India bringing with it rapid political, economic,
ecological and cultural changes. The articles in
this book explore the impact of this technological
phenomenon from a range of interdisciplinary
perspectives. From early railway thinking in
renaissance Bengal, to railway policing in Uttar
Pradesh and issues of management to railway
themes in literature, the writers in this volume
reveal the world of the railways in all its exciting
facets. The photo essay invokes the nostalgic
world of steam with a series of evocative images.
In the twenty-first century, the ever-expanding
horizon of the railways continues to draw in
people and goods in the third largest railway
network in the world.
contents: Preface; Chapter 1. Theoretical
Considerations; Chapter 2. Methodological
Framework and Positioning the Self; Chapter 3.
Indian Penitentiary and the Historiographical
Silence about Women; Chapter 4. Captive
Contexts of Crime: Stories from Inside the Prison;
Chapter 5. Life in Prison and Moments of Control;
Chapter 6. Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175965492
Contents: Foreword, Preface, Introduction;
1. The Colonial Context of the Bengal
Renaissance Dipesh Chakraborty; 2. Minute by
Dalhousie on Introduction of Railways in India;
3. Ackworth Committee Report; 4. Competition
and Adaptation: The Operation of Railways in
Northern India Ian D. Derbyshire; 5. Economic
Nationalism and the Railway Debate, circa 1880 1905 Bipan Chandra; 6. Railway Policing and
Security in Colonial India, c. 1860 - 1930 David
A. Campion; 7. Indian Nationalism and Railways
Visalakshi Menon and Sucheta Mahajan; 8. The
Railway in Colonial India: Between Ideas and
Impacts Iftekhar Iqbal; 9. The Dark Side of the
Force Ian J. Kerr; 10. Tunnels and Bridges:
Railways, Narrative and Power in two Novels of
India Peter Morey; 11. A View of the History of
Indian Railways Mark Tully; 12. The Romance of
Steam Dileep Prakash Index.
ISBN: 9788175963306
288pp
Forest Ecology in India takes a look at the human
interactions that have shaped up the ecosystem
specifically of Maharashtra, under the British
colonial rule. This work is a culmination of
extensive analysis of secondary sources and
numerous archival primary sources including
vernacular material hitherto unexamined from the
perspective of Environmental History. It traces
the evolution of political, socio-cultural and
religious attitudes and administrative policies that
had an impact on the forest ecology of
Maharashtra. The study goes beyond a
chronological narrative of events and it adopts a
fresh approach where it examines the impact of
the forest policies and subsequent responses
from the tribals, peasants and artisans. It looks at
landmark events and struggles that shaped the
resistance to the new environmental and forest
laws as well as the spillover of these
developments into the anticolonial struggles of
the early twentieth century.This book would be of
interest to students of Environmental History and
Environmental Justice.
From Subjects to
Citizens
Society and the
Everyday State in India
and Pakistan,
1947–1970
Taylor C. Sherman,
William Gould and
Sarah Ansari
HB ` 695.00
284pp
HB ` 895.00
This book explores the shift from colonial rule to
independence in India and Pakistan, with the aim
of unravelling the explicit meaning and relevance
of ‘independence’ for the new citizens of India
and Pakistan during the two decades after 1947.
While the study of postcolonial South Asia has
blossomed in recent years, this volume
addresses a number of imbalances in this
dynamic and highly-popular field. Firstly, the
histories of India and Pakistan after 1947 have
been conceived separately, with many scholars
assuming that the two states developed along
divergent paths after independence. Thus, the
dominant historical paradigm has been to
examine either India or Pakistan in relative
isolation from one another. Viewing the two
states in the same frame not only allows the
contributors of this volume to explore common
themes, but also facilitates an exploration of the
powerful continuities between the pre- and postindependence periods.
Contents: Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction;
2. Personal Law and Citizenship in India's
Transition to Independence; 3. From Subjects to
Citizens? Rationing, refugees and the publicity of
corruption over Independence in UP;
4. Performing Peace: Gandhi's assassination as
a critical moment in the consolidation of the
Nehruvian state; 5. Migration, Citizenship and
Belonging in Hyderabad (Deccan), 1946–1956;
6. Punjabi Refugees’ Rehabilitation and the
35
Indian State: Discourses, Denials and
Dissonances; 7. Sovereignty, Governmentality
and Development in Ayub's Pakistan: the Case of
Korangi Township; 8. Everyday expectations of
the state during Pakistan's early years: Letters to
the Editor, Dawn (Karachi), 1950–1953;
9. Concrete ‘progress’: irrigation, development
and modernity in mid-twentieth century Sind;
10. Partition Narratives: Displaced trauma and
culpability among British civil servants in 1940s
Punjab; Index.
ISBN: 9781107064270
Gandhi in the West
Sean Scalmer
256pp
History Culture
and the Indian City
Rajnayaran
Chandavarkar
HB ` 795.00
The non-violent protests of civil rights activists
and anti-nuclear campaigners during the 1960s
helped to redefine Western politics. But where
did they come from? Sean Scalmer uncovers
their history in an earlier generation's intense
struggles to understand and emulate the
activities of Mahatma Gandhi. He shows how
Gandhi's non-violent protests were the subject of
widespread discussion and debate in the USA
and UK for several decades. Though at first
misrepresented by Western newspapers, they
were patiently described and clarified by a
devoted group of cosmopolitan advocates. Small
groups of Westerners experimented with
Gandhian techniques in virtual anonymity and
then, on the cusp of the 1960s, brought these
methods to a wider audience. The swelling
protests of later years increasingly abandoned
the spirit of non-violence, and the central
significance of Gandhi and his supporters has
therefore been forgotten. This book recovers this
tradition, charts its transformation, and ponders
its abiding significance.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Bombay's perennial
modernities; 3. Sewers; 4. Peasants and
proletarians in Bombay City in the late nineteenth
and early twentieth century; 5. State and society
in colonial India; 6. Religion and nationalism in
India; 7. From neighbourhood to nation: the rise
and fall of the left in Bombay's Girangaon in the
twentieth century; 8. Historians and the nation;
9. Urban history and urban anthropology in South
Asia; 10. Aspects of the historiography of labour
in India; 11. Post-script; 12. Bibliography.
ISBN: 9780521767477
Humanitarian
Intervention
A History
Brendan Simms and
David J. B. Trim
Contents: Introduction; 1. Meeting the Mahatma;
2. Gandhism in action; 3. At war over words;
4. Waiting for the peace train; 5. The
experimenters; 6. An idea whose time has
come?; 7. Transformations unforeseen;
Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107014114
254pp
Raj Chandavarkar was one of the finest Indian
historians of the twentieth century. He died sadly
young in 2006, leaving behind a substantial
collection of unpublished lectures, papers and
articles. These have now been assembled and
edited by Jennifer Davis, Gordon Johnson and
David Washbrook, and their appearance will be
widely welcomed by large numbers of scholars of
Indian history, politics and society. The essays
centre around three major themes: the city of
Bombay, Indian politics and society, and Indian
historiography. Each manifests Dr
Chandavarkar's hallmark historical powers of
imaginative empirical richness, analytic acuity
and expository elegance, and the collection as a
whole will make both a major contribution to the
historiography of modern India, and a worthy
memorial to a major scholar.
HB ` 895.00
282pp
HB ` 895.00
The dilemma of how best to protect human rights
is one of the most persistent problems facing the
international community today. This unique and
wide-ranging history of humanitarian intervention
examines responses to oppression, persecution
and mass atrocities from the emergence of the
international state system and international law in
the late sixteenth century, to the end of the
twentieth century. Leading scholars show how
opposition to tyranny and religious persecution
evolved from notions of the common interests of
'Christendom' to ultimately incorporate all people
under the concept of 'human rights'. As well as
examining specific episodes of intervention, the
authors consider how these have been perceived
and justified over time, and offer important new
insights into ideas of national sovereignty,
international relations and law, as well as political
thought and the development of current theories
of 'international community'.
Contents: 1. Towards a history of humanitarian
intervention Brendan Simms and D. J. B. Trim;
Part I. Early-Modern Precedents; 2. 'If a prince
use tyrannie towards his people': interventions on
behalf of foreign populations in early-modern
Europe D. J. B. Trim; 3. The Protestant interest
and the history of humanitarian intervention,
c.1685–c.1756 Andrew Thompson; 4. 'The age of
chivalry is not dead': the idea of humanitarian
intervention in the era of Burke Brendan Simms;
Part II. The Great Powers and the Ottoman
Empire; 5. 'From an umpire to a competitor':
Castlereagh, Canning and the issue of
international intervention in the wake of the
36
Napoleonic Wars John Bew; 6. Intervening in the
Jewish question, 1840–1878 Abigail Green;
7. The 'principles of humanity' and the European
powers' intervention in Ottoman Lebanon and
Syria in 1860–61 Davide Rodogno; 8. The
guarantees of humanity: the Concert of Europe
and the origins of the Russo-Ottoman War of
1877 Matthias Schulz; 9. The European powers'
intervention in Macedonia, 1903–1908: an
instance of humanitarian intervention? Davide
Rodogno; Part III. Intervening in Africa; 10. The
price of legitimacy in humanitarian intervention:
Britain, the European powers and the abolition of
the West African slave trade, 1807–1867 Maeve
Ryan; 11. British anti-slave trade and anti-slavery
policy in East Africa, Arabia, and Turkey in the
late nineteenth century William Mulligan; 12. The
origins of humanitarian intervention in Sudan:
Anglo-American missionaries after 1899 Gideon
Mailer; Part IV. Non-European States;
13. Humanitarian intervention, democracy, and
imperialism: the American war with Spain, 1898,
and after Mike Sewell; 14. The innovation of the
Jackson–Vanik Amendment Thomas Probert;
15. Fraternal aid, self-defence, or self-interest?
Vietnam's intervention in Cambodia (1978–1989)
Sophie Quinn-Judge; Part V. Postscript;
16. Humanitarian intervention since 1990 and
'liberal interventionism' Matthew Jamison;
17. Humanitarian intervention in historical
perspective D. J. B. Trim.
ISBN: 9781107020238
India Before
Europe
Catherine B. Asher and
Cynthia Talbot
426pp
India’s Labouring
Poor
Historical Studies
c.1600–c.2000
Rana P. Behal and
Marcel van der Linden
Contents: Preface; Introduction; 1. Working
Across the Seas: Indian Maritime Laboureres in
India, Britain, and in Between, 1600-1857; 2. The
Brickmakers' Strikes on the Ganges Canal in
1848-1849; 3. On the Move: Circulating Labour in
Pre-Colonial, Colonial and Post-Colonial India;
4. Mobility and Containment: The Voyages of
South Asian Seamen, c.1900-1960; 5. Power
Structure, Discipline and Labour in Assam Tea
Plantations during Colonial Rule; 6. "Following
Custom"? Representations of Community among
Indian Immigrant Labour in the West Indies,
1880-1920; 7. Masculinity, Respect and the
Tragic: Themes of Proletarian Humor in
Contemporary Industrial Delhi; 8. Stretching
Labour Historiography: Pointers from South Asia;
Document; Editorial Introduction; War on the
Shopfloor; Select; Bibliography.
HB ` 995.00
India is a land of enormous diversity. Crosscultural influences are everywhere in evidence, in
the food people eat, the clothes they wear, and in
the places they worship. This was especially the
case in the India that existed from 1200 to 1750,
before the European intervention. The book takes
the reader on a journey across the political,
economic, religious and cultural landscapes of
medieval India, from the Ghurid conquests and
the Dehli Sultanate to the great court of the
Mughals. This was a time of conquest and
consolidation, when Muslims and Hindus came
together to create a unique culture, which still
resonates in today's India. As the first survey of
its kind in over a decade, the book is a tour de
force. It is beautifully illustrated and fluently
composed, with a cast of characters, which will
educate students and general readers alike.
ISBN: 9788175964969
Political Structure
in a Changing
Sinhalese Village
Marguerite S. Robinson
Contents: Preface; Glossary; 1. Introduction:
situating India; 2. The expansion of Turkish
power, 1180–1350; 3. Southern India in the age
of Vijayanagara, 1350–1550; 4. North India
between empires: history, society, and culture,
1350–1550; 5. Sixteenth-century north India:
empire reformulated; 6. Expanding political and
economic spheres, 1550–1650; 7. Elite cultures
in seventeenth-century South Asia; 8.
Challenging central authority, 1650–1750;
9. Changing socio-economic formations, 1650–
1750; Epilogue; Biographical notes; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9780521517508
336pp
Recent years have witnessed a renewed interest
in the historical studies of labour in India and
other parts of the world. Apart from the study of
the industrial workforce, labour history has been
enriched by the scholarly attention to migratory,
mobile labour, lives of artisans, women and
peasant immigrants to plantations within India
and overseas. Earlier the major emphasis of
labour history research was on the core countries
such as US, Canada, Europe and Japan. Now
research on the labour history of the capitalist
peripheries is growing and is increasingly
attracting international scholarship. An urgent
need is felt for reconstituting the older
frameworks, which had revolved around fixed
binaries of space, time and social relations.
Labour historians have to increasingly contend
with the existing notions of “premodern” and
modern, free/unfree, formal/ informal forms of
labour relations and traditional spatial divisions
such as the factory and the field, urban and rural
etc.
HB ` 695.00
37
292pp
HB ` 895.00
An examination of the nature of political change
within a village, which the author calls Morapitiya,
in the Kandyan highlands of Sri Lanka, during the
transition from colony to independent nation.
During the first years of Sri Lanka's
independence, the United National Party
perpetuated the 'indirect rule' policy of the British
colonial government. In 1956, with the election of
a coalition government led by the Sri Lanka
Freedom Party, this form of rule was rejected.
The new government was committed to reviving
the traditional Sinhalese culture, language and
Buddhist ideals, and to improving the living
conditions of the poor. Soon after assuming
power, the S.L.F.P. government began to
implement political and economic policies
designed to alter village structure in accordance
with the new ideals. The new politics began to
have noticeable effect in Morapitiya by mid-1963,
towards the end of her first field trip there. When
she returned in 1967, the political structure of
Morapitiya had undergone fundamental change
and incipient forms of a new political structure
were discernible.The author considers the
changes in cooperation and conflict and the
effects of the new government’s policies in
Morapitiya. She focuses on the nature of this
process of change, using the ‘equilibrium’ model
to analyse the pre-1963 village and showing that
a model of competing political structures with
different set of rules is necessary for analyszing
the same village in 1967.
Remembering
Partition
Gyanendra Pandey
Contents: List of illustrations; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Preface; 1. Introduction:
problems and assumptions; Part I. The Village of
Morapitiya; 2. An introduction to Morapitiya; Part
II. Traditional Political Structure (P-1); 3. Leaders
without groups; 4. Morapitiyan disputes: I;
5. Morapitiyan disputes: II; 6. The rules of the
game: 1963; Part III. The Political System in
Transition; 7. 1963: introduction of the new order;
8. 1967: failure of the new and collapse of the
old; 9. The emergence of P-2; Part IV. The
Morapitiyan Colonists; 10. Of ants and fire;
11. Conclusions; Epilogue, 1972; Appendices;
Glossary; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9780521058964
Private Investment
in India 1900-1939
Amiya Kumar Bagchi
400pp
Contents: Acknowledgements; List of
abbreviations; 1. By way of introduction; 2. The
three partitions of 1947; 3. Historians’ history;
4. The evidence of the historian; 5. Folding the
local into the national: Garhmukhteshwar,
November 1946; 6. Folding the national into the
local: Delhi, 1947–1948; 7. Disciplining
difference; 8. Constructing community; Select
bibliography; Index.
PB ` 915.00
This book deals with the history of private
investment in India and its determinants during
the period 1900 – 1939. It develops a simple
theoretical framework in its first part and tries to
isolate the influence on private investment in
India of factor supplies, as against demand
conditions. In the second part, all the major
manufacturing industries of the period are studied
in detail. Most of the analytical apparatus used is
developed from orthodox economic theory, but a
heavy emphasis is placed on Keynesian
ideas.Finally, the author presents a case study in
the economic relations between an imperial
power (Britain) and a dependent colony (India).
He also examines the social relations between
the ruling race and the Indians, and provides one
of the few detailed accounts of the mechanics of
imperialism.
ISBN: 9788175961098
Revolutionary
Pamphlets,
Propaganda and
Political Culture in
Colonial Bengal
Shukla Sanyal
Contents: List of tables; Preface; Abbreviations;
Part I. General - Theoretical Framework;
1. Introduction; Appendix to chapter 1; 2. The
economic policy of the Government of India;
3. The record of aggregate private industrial
investment in India, 1900–1939; 4. Land and the
supply of raw materials; Appendix to chapter 4;
5. The supply of unskilled labour; 6. The supply
of capital and entrepreneurship; Part II. Studies
of Major Industries: 7. The development of the
cotton-mill industry; 8. Private investment in the
jute industry; 9. The growth of the iron and steel
industry; 10. The growth of private engineering
firms; 11. The cement industry; 12. The growth of
the sugar industry; 13. The development of the
Indian paper industry; 14. British imperial policy
and the spread of modern industry in India;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9780521058926
Through an investigation of the violence that
marked the partition of British India in 1947, this
book analyses questions of history and memory,
the nationalization of populations and their pasts,
and the ways in which violent events are
remembered (or forgotten) in order to ensure the
unity of the collective subject – community or
nation. Stressing the continuous entanglement of
‘event’ and ‘interpretation’, the author
emphasizes both the enormity of the violence of
1947 and its shifting meanings and contours. The
book provides a sustained critique of the
procedures of history-writing and nationalist
myth-making on the question of violence, and
examines how local forms of sociality are
constituted and reconstituted, by the experience
and representation of violent events. It concludes
with a comment on the different kinds of political
community that may still be imagined even in the
wake of Partition and events like it.
232pp
PB ` 295.00
Pamphlets have usually been regarded as
ephemeral literature with little permanent impact.
This work demonstrates the historical value of
this genre of political literature. The propaganda
pamphlets help historians place a finger on the
pulse of an extraordinarily-important historical
period when new ideas concerning the nationstate, the rights of the governed and forms of
political protest complicated the political scene
and opened up new fronts of conflict between the
colonial state and the colonized subjects. This
study devises innovative approaches to reading
these pamphlets and generates new insights into
the world of the pamphleteers thus providing the
readers a more nuanced understandingof the
politics and political culture of early-twentieth
century Bengal. In the process, the book makes
an important contribution to the historical
controversies that the politics of this period has
generated among scholars of Indian nationalism.
Contents: Preface; Abbreviations and Glossary;
Introduction; Chapter 1 The origins of an idea,
1905–18; Chapter 2 The signs of the times:
Constructing a nation; Chapter 3 Legitimizing
violence; Chapter 4 The battle for domination:
State repression of revolutionary pamphlets;
Chapter 5 Summing up: An identity forged in
battle; Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107065468
496pp PB ` 1495.00
38
219pp
HB ` 695.00
Science,
Technology and
Social Formation
in Medieval Assam
Sanjeeb Kakoty
Muharram: marketplace Shi'ism; 3. Anjumans,
endowments and Indian Shi'ism: the making of
Shi'a society; 4. Aligarh, jihad, and pan-Islam: the
politicisation of the Indian Shi'a; 5. The tabarra
agitation and Shi'a-Sunni conflict in late colonial
India; Conclusion.
The beginning of the Ahom dynasty in eastern
Assam dates back to 1228 CE. This kingdom,
which was one of the longest reigning dynasties
in India, continued till the beginning of nineteenth
century. This book discusses the reasons behind
the durability of this state. It analyses the factors
that contributed both to development of Ahom
and its eventual downfall through an examination
of technology, production and system of
governance. The author proposes a new
categorization of the Ahom state, which he calls
the paik mode of production. This involves
examination of the specific tools and
technologies used in rice cultivation, varieties of
rice cultivated, techniques of gunpowder
manufacture, different kinds of guns and canons
manufactured, system of guerrilla warfare and
extent of civil construction. Overall, the book
presents a rich account of a lesser-known region
in India and opens up a new area of historical
examination. The book will interest graduate
students and academic researchers of South
Asian History, especially with a focus on
northeast India. General readers interested in the
history of Assam will also find this book useful.
ISBN: 9781107026971
Small Town
Capitalism in
Western India
Douglas E. Haynes
Contents: Preface; Chapter 1: Introduction;
Chapter 2: Production, Technology and Change:
Perspectives and Prospects; Chapter 3: Early
Ahom State: Reflection on Technology; Chapter
4: Mode of Production and Social Formation in
the Early Ahom State; Chapter 5: Technology in
the Ahom State: Agrarian; Chapter 6: Technology
in the Ahom State: Non Agrarian; Chapter 7:
Technological Changes and Social Formation in
the Later Ahom State; Chapter 8: Epilogue;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264118
Shi’a Islam in
Colonial India
Justin Jones
212pp
304pp
HB ` 895.00
This book charts the history of artisan production
and marketing in the Bombay Presidency from
1870 to 1960. While the textile mills of western
India's biggest cities have been the subject of
many rich studies, the role of artisan producers
located in the region's small towns have been
virtually ignored. Based upon extensive archival
research as well as numerous interviews with
participants in the handloom and powerloom
industries, this book explores the role of weavers,
merchants, consumers and labourers in the
making of what the author calls 'small-town
capitalism'. By focusing on the politics of
negotiation and resistance in local workshops,
the book challenges conventional narratives of
industrial change. The book provides the first indepth work on the origins of powerloom
manufacture in South Asia. It affords unique
insights into the social and economic experience
of small-town artisans as well as the informal
economy of late colonial and early postindependence India.
Contents: Introduction; 1. The historical and
global contexts of artisan production;
2. Consumers, merchants, and markets;
3. Artisanal towns; 4. The organization of
production; 5. Small town capitalism and the
living standards of artisans; 6. The colonial state
and the handloom weaver; 7. The paradox of the
Long 1930s; 8. Weaver capitalists and the
politics of the workshop, 1940–60.
HB ` 895.00
Interest in Shi'a Islam has increased greatly in
recent years, although Shi'ism in the Indian
subcontinent has remained largely
underexplored. Focusing on the influential Shi'a
minority of Lucknow and the United Provinces, a
region that was largely under Shi'a rule until
1856, this book traces the history of Indian
Shi'ism through the colonial period toward
independence in 1947. Drawing on a range of
new sources, including religious writing,
polemical literature and clerical biography, it
assesses seminal developments including the
growth of Shi'a religious activism, madrasa
education, missionary activity, ritual innovation
and the politicization of the Shi'a community. As
a consequence of these significant religious and
social transformations, a Shi'a sectarian identity
developed that existed in separation from rather
than in interaction with its Sunni counterparts. In
this way the painful birth of modern sectarianism
was initiated, the consequences of which are
very much alive in South Asia today.
ISBN: 9781107031296
Contents: Introduction; 1. Madrasas, mujtahids,
and missionaries: Shi'a clerical expansion in
colonial India; 2. Mosques, majalis and
39
362pp
HB ` 895.00
Strange Riches
Bengal in the Mercantile
Map of South Asia
Rila Mukherjee
This book commemorates 150 years of railways
in India. Introduced under colonial rule in the
second half of the nineteenth century, the
railways soon embraced the length and breadth
of India bringing with it rapid political, economic,
ecological and cultural changes. The articles in
this book explore the impact of this technological
phenomenon from a range of interdisciplinary
perspectives. From early railway thinking in
Renaissance Bengal, to railway policing in Uttar
Pradesh and issues of management to railway
themes in literature, the writers in this volume
reveal the world of the railways in all its exciting
facets. The photo essay invokes the nostalgic
world of steam with a series of evocative images.
In the twenty-first century, the ever-expanding
horizon of the railways continues to draw in
people and goods in the third largest railway
network in the world.
struggle against Napoleon Richard Hart
Sinnreich; 7. The strategy of Lincoln and Grant
Wayne Hsieh; 8. Bismarckian strategic policy,
1871–90 Marcus Jones; 9. Dowding and the
British strategy of air defense, 1936–40 Colin
Gray; 10. US naval strategy and Japan
Williamson Murray; 11. US grand strategy in
World War II Peter R. Mansoor; 12. American
grand strategy and the unfolding of the Cold War,
1945–61 Bradford A. Lee; 13. The Reagan
Administration's strategy toward the Soviet Union
Thomas G. Mahnken; Afterword Richard Hart
Sinnreich.
ISBN: 9781107518797
Telangana
People’s Struggle
and its Lessons
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements;
Abbreviations; Map 1 - Places mentioned in
Bengal and Arakan: 5th to 13th centuries; Map 2
- Land and sea routes of the Eastern Indian
Ocean: 13th to 15th centuries; 1. Introduction;
2. Conceptual Formulations; 3. Key Issues:
Bengal; 4. Introducing Bengal; 5. The Debated
Century; 6. Networks and States in South Asia;
7. Unities of Time and Space in Bengal;
8. Bengal in the Indian Ocean Centred World
Economy; 9. Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175963245
Successful
Strategies
Triumphing in War and
Peace from Antiquity to
the Present
Williamson Murray and
Richard Hart Sinnreich
452pp
Putchalapalli
Sundarayya
HB ` 895.00
Successful Strategies is a fascinating new study
of the key factors that have contributed to the
development and execution of successful
strategies throughout history. With a team of
leading historians, Williamson Murray and
Richard Hart Sinnreich examine how, and to what
effect states, individuals and military
organizations have found a solution to complex
and seemingly-insoluble strategic problems to
reach success. Bringing together grand, political
and military strategy, the book features 13
essays, each of which explores a unique case or
aspect of strategy. The focus ranges from
individuals such as Themistocles, Bismarck and
Roosevelt to organizations and bureaucratic
responses. Whether discussing grand strategy in
peacetime or that of war or politics, these case
studies are unified by their common goal of
identifying in each case the key factors that
contributed to success as well as providing
insights essential to any understanding of the
strategic challenges of the future.
475pp
PB ` 995.00
This book provides a comprehensive account of
the Telangana people’s struggle during 1946–51
to point out the political lessons that emerged
from this movement. Beginning with an account
of feudal oppression in the Nizam-governed
Hyderabad state and the organization of masses,
against the backdrop of the national movement,
the book recounts the shaping of an alternate
nationalism that gave particular emphasis to the
struggle for the depressed classes. It discusses
the sacrifices of the fighting peasantry of
Telangana and the Visalandhra state unit of the
Communist Party, which led the uprising. During
the course of the struggle, the peasantry in about
3000 villages succeeded in setting up gram raj,
on the basis of village panchayats. About one
million acres of land was redistributed among the
people and all evictions and forced labour service
were abolished. The movement also paved the
way for rewarding the political map of India on a
national, democratic and linguistic basis. After
this movement, the Communist Party emerged as
the biggest opposition group in the first
parliament following the 1952 general
election.The book analyses a series of issues
such as the role of the peasantry in the people’s
democratic revolution, the significance of partisan
resistance and rural revolutionary bases, the
concept of working class hegemony and the role
of the Communist Party in a developing country.
Contents: Preface; Introduction; Part I;
1. Hyderabad State - Its Socio-Political
Background; 2. The Peasant Upsurge and
Communist Party; 3. Armed Resistance
Movement Against Nizam and Razakars;
4. Telangana People's Armed Liberation Struggle
Against Nizam - Its Achievements; 5. The
Communist Movement in Andhra: Terror Regime
1948 - 1951; Part II; 1. Entry of Indian Army and
Immediately After; 2. Terror Regime and
Resistance; 3. The Krishna Forest (Nallamala)
Region; 4. The Godavari Forest Region; 5. Action
of Guerilla Squads; 6. People's Upsurge in
Karimnagar and Other New Areas; 7. Movement
in Cities and of the Working Class; 8. Struggle
Inside Jails; 9. Women in the Telangana
Movement; 10. Brief Sketches of Some of the
Squad and Party Leaders After the Entry of the
Contents: Introduction Williamson Murray;
1. The strategic thought of Themistocles Victor
Davis Hanson; 2. The grand strategy of the
Roman Empire James Lacey; 3. Giraldus
Cembrensis, Edward I, and the conquest of
Wales Clifford J. Rogers; 4. Creating the British
way of war: English strategy in the War of the
Spanish Succession Jamel Otswald; 5. Failed,
broken, or galvanized? Prussia and 1806 Dennis
Showalter; 6. Victory by trial and error: Britain's
40
A History of
Modern India
Ishita Banerjee-Dube
A History of Modern India provides an
interpretive and comprehensive account of the
history of India between the eighteenth and
twentieth centuries, a crucial epoch
characterized by colonialism, nationalism and
the emergence of the independent Indian
Union. It explores significant historiographical
debates concerning the period while
highlighting important new issues, especially
those of gender, ecology, caste, and labour.The
work combines an analysis of colonial and
independent India in order to underscore
ideologies, policies, and processes that shaped
the colonial state and continue to mould the
Indian nation.
While it does not forego chronology, it does
away with the conventional demarcation of
political processes and socio-cultural histories
in order to portray the multi-faceted nature of
social worlds.This book, masterfully, provokes
readers to reflect and interrogate, and strive for
newer ways of understanding history.
Strikingly employed visual tools—historical
maps, old photographs, posters and
imaginative time-lines complement the core
narratives.This book will appeal to scholars
and students of history and general readers
alike.
Paperback | 978-1-107-65972-8 | ` 495.00
www.cambridge.org
Ishita Banerjee-Dube is Professor of History at the Center
for Asian and African Studies, El Colegio de México, Mexico.
Indian Army; 11. Withdrawal of Telangana Armed
Partisan Resistance; Epilogue; ; Part III;
Appendix I Martyrs of the Struggle, Nalgonda
District, Mahboobnagar District; Appendix II The
Conditions of Agricultural Workers and of the
Poor Peasantry; Appendix III Present Secret
Organisation - Our Tasks; Appendix IV Tales of
Telangana.
ISBN: 9789382993858
The Camera as
Witness
A Social History of
Mizoram, Northeast
India
Joy L. K. Pachuau and
Willem van Schendel
468pp
The Economy of
Modern India
From 1860 to the
Twenty-First Century
Second Edition
B. R. Tomlinson
PB ` 695.00
The Camera as Witness lifts the veil off the
little-known world of Mizoram and challenges –
through unpublished photographs – core
assumptions in the writing of India's national
history. The pictures in the book establish the
transformation of this society and the many forms
of modernity that have emerged in it. It
emphasizes how 'indigenous people' in Mizoram
used cameras to produce distinct modern
identities and represent themselves to
themselves, consistently contesting outsiders'
imaginations of them as isolated, backward and
in need of upliftment. The authors demonstrate
how mostly-amateur photographers used visual
images to document a historical trajectory of
heady change and continual reinvention,
producing distinct modern identities. By virtue of
its use of visual sources and its engagement with
a wide range of important discourses, this book is
relevant for students, historians, social scientists,
political activists and general readers looking for
a fresh approach to Northeast India.
Contents: Preface to the second edition; Preface
to the first edition; 1. Introduction: growth and
development in the long run; 2. Agriculture,
1860–1950: land, labour and capital; 3. Trade
and manufacture, 1860–1945: firms, markets and
the colonial state; 4. The state and the economy,
1939–1980; 5. Breaking the mould? Economic
growth since 1980; Index.
ISBN: 9781107660304
The Mutiny
Outbreak at Meerut
in 1857
J. A. B. Palmer
Contents: List of figures; List of maps; Glossary;
Acknowledgements; Part I. Becoming Mizo;
1. Introduction; 2. Coming into view: the first
images; 3. Adjusting Mizo culture;
4. Domesticating a new religion; 5. Getting
educated; 6. Controlling the hills; 7. The trouble
of travel; 8. First stirrings of the market economy;
9. Mizos in the World Wars; 10. Mizo visual
sensibilities; Part II. Mizoram in the New India;
11. The long goodbye; 12. The emergence of
popular politics; 13. Mizoram and the new Indian
order; 14. Mizoram comes to Delhi; 15. The
search for authenticity at home; 16. Mizo style:
cowboys at heart; Part III. Visions of
Independence; 17. Famine and revolt; 18. The
Mizoram government at home – and in East
Pakistan; 19. The Mizoram government – in
Burma, China and Bangladesh; 20. A state and
its minorities; Part IV. Mizo Modernities; 21.
Being cool: the music scene; 22. Being cool:
sharp dressers; 23. Studio modernity;
24. Conclusion; Acknowledgement of copyrights
and sources; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107073395
Rapid economic growth has put India at the
centre of current debates about the future of the
global economy. In this fully-revised and updated
text, B. R. Tomlinson provides a comprehensive
and wide-ranging account of the Indian economy
over the last 150 years. He sets arguments about
growth, development and underdevelopment,
and the impact of imperialism, against a detailed
history of agriculture, trade and manufacture, and
the relations between business, the economy and
the state. The new edition extends the coverage
right up to the present day, and explains how one
of the largest countries in the world has sought to
achieve economic progress and lasting
development, despite institutional weaknesses,
rigid structures of political and social hierarchy,
and the legacy of colonialism.
266pp
PB ` 495.00
The establishment in British India produced an
impressive number of scholars and scholarly
amateurs who pursued historical and other
studies and wrote books and articles of
distinction. Mr. Palmer has produced a work in
this tradition. His subject is the outbreak of the
Mutiny (as the Raj considered it) among the
native regiments (as the Raj called them) at
Meerut on the evening of Sunday 10 May 1857.
Was the outbreak planned in advance or did it
arise through chance circumstances on that
fateful evening? How badly was the situation
handled? Mr Palmer’s examination moves some
of the blame for handling of the incident from
General Hewitt to Brigadier Archdale Wilson. He
defends the failure to follow up the mutineers by
a march to Delhi and gives an interesting
analysis of the curious career and character of
Colonel Carmichael-Smyth. He re-examines the
evidence of premeditation for the outbreak and
treats meticulously the significance of arms and
equipment and loading drill.
Contents: Introduction; 1. Chapatis; 2. Greased
cartridges; 3. The Presidency division, February
to May; 4. Regiments and officers at Meerut;
5. Meerut Cantonment in 1857; 6. The firing
ISBN: 9780521058773
502pp HB ` 1195.00
42
192pp
PB ` 495.00
The Rani of Jhansi
Gender, History, and
Fable in India
Harleen Singh
Arguments in the South:; 8. Civil society in extraEuropean perspective Jack Goody; 9. On civil
and political societies in post-colonial
democracies Partha Chatterjee; 10. Civil society
and the fate of the modern Republic in Latin
America Luis Castro Leiva and Anthony Pagden;
11. The western concept of civil society in the
context of Chinese history Thomas Metzger;
12. Civil society, community and democracy in
the Middle East Sami Zubaida; 13. Mistaking
‘Governance’ for politics: Foreign aid, civil society
and democracy Rob Jenkins; 14. The promise of
‘civil society’ in the South Geoffrey Hawthorn;
15. In search of civil society Sudipta Kaviraj.
Rani Lakshmi Bai is an iconic figure of the
nationalist movement in India. Her fight against
the imperialist power has a significant place in
the cultural and feminist history of South Asia.
She is considered not only a heroine, and a great
warrior, but also a protector of her people in
Jhansi. Her pictures on horseback, with her son
tied to her back and a sword in one hand,
represent her as an embodiment of feminine
power or Shakti. This book uses fictional,
cinematic and popular representations of the
Rani to analyse the convergence of colonial and
postcolonial literary, historical, sexual and
cultural imperatives in the figure of this legendary
woman.This book also extends the discussion to
what constitutes the gendered subaltern historical
archive. By analysing a range of literary and
cinematic texts produced between 1857 and
2007, it tries to understand the various agendas
that are at stake in the use of the Rani as a figure
of nationalist Indian history and imperial British
narrative. There is also an attempt to compare
representations of the Rani in both these
contexts.
ISBN: 9788175961081
Gandhi as Disciple
and Mentor
Thomas Weber
Contents: List of Figures; Acknowledgements; I.
Introduction; II. Enslaving masculinity: Rape
scripts and the erotics of power; III. India’s aryan
queen: Colonial ambivalence and race in the
mutiny; IV. Coherent pasts in Hindi literature and
film; V. Unmaking the nationalist archive: Gender
and dalit historiography; Afterword; Bibliography;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107042803
Civil Society
History and Possibilities
Sudipta Kaviraj and
Sunil Khilnani
202pp
HB ` 795.00
Civil society is one of the most used – and
abused – concepts in current political thinking. In
this important collection of essays, the concept is
subjected to rigorous analysis by an international
team of contributors, all of whom seek to
encourage the historical and comparative
understanding of political thought. The volume is
divided into two parts: the first section analyses
the meaning of civil society in different theoretical
traditions of western philosophy. In the second
section, contributors consider the theoretical and
practical contexts in which the notion of civil
society has been invoked in Asia, Africa and
Latin America. These essays demonstrate how
an influential Western idea like civil society is
itself altered and innovatively modified by the
specific contexts of intellectual and practical life
in the societies of the South.
340pp
PB ` 595.00
Thomas Weber's 2004 book comprises a series
of biographical reflections about people who
influenced Gandhi, and those who were, in turn,
influenced by him. Whilst previous literature
tended to focus on Gandhi's political legacy,
Weber's book explores the spiritual, social and
philosophical resonances of these relationships,
and it is with these aspects of the Mahatma's life
in mind, that the author selects his central
protagonists. These include friends such as
Henry Polak and Hermann Kallenbach, who are
not as well known as those usually cited, but who
left a deep impression nevertheless, and
motivated some of Gandhi's major life changes.
Conversely, the work of luminaries such as E. F.
Schumacher and Gene Sharp reveal the
Mahatma's influence in arenas, which are not
traditionally associated with his thinking. Weber's
book offers intriguing insights into the life and
thought of one of the most significant figures of
the twentieth century.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction; 2. Gandhi
influenced; 3. Henry Polak and the setting up of
Phoenix settlement; 4. Hermann Kallenbach and
the move to Tolstoy Farm; 5. Maganlal Gandhi
and the decision to leave Sabarmati; 6. Jamnalal
Bajaj and the move to Sevagram; 7. The top of
the hourglass: Gandhi influenced; 8. Gandhi's
influence; 9. Arne Naess: the ecological
movement finds depth; 10. Johan Galtung: peace
research moves beyond war; 11. E. F.
Schumacher: economics as if people mattered;
12. Gene Sharp: nonviolent activism becomes a
political method; 13. The bottom of the hourglass:
Gandhi's influence.
Contents: Part I. Theoretical Traditions in the
West; 1. The development of civil society Sunil
Khilnani; 2. Concepts of civil society in premodern Europe Anthony Black; 3. The
contemporary political significance of John
Locke’s conception of civil society John Dunn;
4. Civil society in the Scottish Enlightenment
Fania Oz Salzberger; 5. Enlightenment and the
institution of society Keith Michael Baker;
6. Hegel and the economics of civil society
Gareth Stedman Jones; 7. Civil society in the
Marxist tradition Joseph Femia; Part II.
ISBN: 9788175964327
43
294pp
PB ` 495.00
Colonial Justice in
British India
White Violence and the
Rule of Law
Elizabeth Kolsky
Colonial Justice in British India describes and
examines the lesser-known history of white
violence in colonial India. By foregrounding
crimes committed by a mostly-forgotten cast of
European characters – planters, paupers,
soldiers and sailors – Elizabeth Kolsky argues
that violence was not an exceptional but an
ordinary part of British rule in the subcontinent.
Despite the pledge of equality, colonial legislation
and the practices of white judges, juries and
police placed most Europeans above the law,
literally allowing them to get away with murder.
The failure to control these unruly whites
revealed how the weight of race and the
imperatives of command imbalanced the scales
of colonial justice. In a powerful account of this
period, Kolsky reveals a new perspective on the
British Empire in India, highlighting the
disquieting violence that invariably accompanied
imperial forms of power.
The Female Voice
of Myanmar
Khin Myo Chit to Aung
San Suu Kyi
Nilanjana Sengupta
Contents: List of figures; List of maps; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Glossary; Introduction;
1. White peril: law and lawlessness in early
colonial India; 2. Citizens, subjects and
subjection to law: codification and the legal
construction of racial difference; 3. ‘Indian human
nature’: evidence, experts, and the elusive
pursuit of truth; 4. ‘One scale of justice for the
planter and another for the coolie’: law and violence
on the Assam tea plantations; 5. ‘A judicial
scandal’: the imperial conscience and the race
against empire; Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9780521190787
Memories of Postimperial Nations
The Aftermath of
Decolonization,
1945-2013
Dietmar Rothermund
266pp
Contents: List of figures; Glossary; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Introduction; Chapter 1. Khin
Myo Chit: The Voice of a Closet Feminist;
Chapter 2. Ludu Daw Amar: The Voice of Unity;
Chapter 3. Ma Thida: The Voice of Hidden Truths
and Changing Times; Chapter 4: Aung San Suu
Kyi: The Voice of a Pragmatic; Annexure I.
Chronology of Khin Myo Chit's publications;
Annexure II. Chronology of Ludu Daw Amar's
publications; Annexure III. Chronology of Ma
Thida's publications; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9781107117860
HB ` 895.00
Since the empires of the world crumbled, the
post-imperial nations have been struggling to
come to terms with the present, and as recall
sets in ‘wars of memory’ have arisen, leading to a
process of collective ‘editing’. Memories of Postimperial Nations presents the first transnational
comparison of Great Britain, the Netherlands,
Belgium, France, Portugal, Italy and Japan, all of
whom lost or ‘decolonized’ their overseas
empires after 1945.
Tracks of Change
Railways and Everyday
Life in Colonial India
Ritika Prasad
It brings together varying perspectives with
historians and political scientists of these nations
attempting to explore the role of memory in the
experience of post-imperial nations.
Contents: Preface; Introduction; 1. Memory of
Empire in Britain: A Preliminary View; 2.
Ruptures and Dissonance: Post-colonial
Migrations and the Remembrance of Colonialism
in the Netherlands; 3. A Distinctive Ugliness:
Colonial Memory in Belgium; 4. The Post-colonial
Encounter in France; 5. Ideologies of
Exceptionality and the Legacies of Empire in
Portugal; 6. Post-colonial Italy: The Case of a
Small and Belated Empire: From Strong
Emotions to Bigger Problems; 7. (Post) Imperial
Japan in Transnational Perspective; 8. A View
from the Gallery: Perspective of a ‘Colonized’ on
Post-imperial Memories; 9. Memories of Postimperial Nations; List of Contributors.
ISBN: 9781107102293
220pp
The Female Voice of Myanmar seeks to offer a
female perspective on the history and political
evolution of Myanmar. It delves into the lives and
works of four of Myanmar’s remarkable women
who set aside their lives to answer the call of
their country:Khin Myo Chit, who spoke about
latent sexual politics in pre-Independent Burma;
Ludu Daw Amar, who as the editor of the leftist
Ludu Daily, was deemed anti-establishment and
was witness to the socialist government’s
abortive efforts at ethnic reconciliation; Ma Thida,
whose writing bears testimony to the impact the
authoritative military rule had on the individual
psyche; and Aung San Suu Kyi, who has
rearticulated Burmese nationalism. This book
breaks new ground in exploring their writing, both
published and hitherto unexamined, some in
English and much in Burmese, while the intimate
biographical sketches offer a glimpse into the
Burmese home and the shifting feminine image.
421pp
HB ` 995.00
From the mid-nineteenth century onwards,
railways became increasingly important in the
lives of a growing number of Indians. While
allowing millions to collectively experience the
endemic discomforts of third-class travel, the
public opportunities for proximity and contact
created by railways simultaneously compelled
colonial society to confront questions about
exclusion, difference, and community. It was not
only passengers, however, who were affected by
the transformations that railways wrought. Even
without boarding a train, one could see railway
tracks and embankments reshaping familiar
landscapes, realize that train schedules
represented new temporal structures, fear that
spreading railway links increased the reach of
contagion, and participate in new forms of
popular politics focused around railway spaces.
Tracks of Change explores how railway
technology, travel, and infrastructure became
increasingly woven with everyday life in colonial
India, how people negotiated the growing
presence of railways, and how this process has
shaped India’s history.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures;
Acknowledgements; List of Abbreviations;
Introduction; 1. The Nature of the Beast? An
Elementary Logic for Third-class Travel; 2.
Demand and Supply? Railway Space and Social
HB ` 695.00
44
Taxonomy; 3. Crime and Punishment: In the
Shadow of Railway Embankments; 4. Railway
Time: Speed, Synchronization, and “Timesense”; 5. Contagion and Control: Managing
Disease, Epidemics, and Mobility; 6. Designing
Rule: Power, Efficiency, and Anxiety; 7. Marking
Citizen from Denizen: Dissent, “Rogues”, and
Rupture; Conclusion; Bibliography; Index; About
the Author.
ISBN: 9781107084216
Indigenous and
Western Medicine
in Colonial India
Madhuri Sharma
326pp
Indigo Plantations
and Science in
Colonial India
Prakash Kumar
HB ` 795.00
This book delves into the social history of
medicine and reflects on the complexity of social
interaction, between indigenous and western
medicine in colonial India. The book draws upon
a host of authentic sources such as tracts,
pamphlets, brochures, booklets of various
medicine shops and drug manufacturing
companies functioning in the colonial era. This
work analyses the medical market and
entrepreneurship in medicine in colonial India. It
deconstructs the-then prevalent ‘advertisements’,
treating them both as a reflection on the
contemporaneous values and lifestyles and as a
medium for the creation of medical consumers.
Emphasizing upon the question of class, gender
and racial discriminations, the book also
examines the interest generated by modern
medical equipment such as the stethoscope and
the thermometer, and the way in which these
were used to reinforce the norms of social
hierarchy and purdah system. This work also
focuses on several debated issues such as birth
control, sexuality, and the principles of
brahmacharya.The book would be a useful read
for sociology and history graduates, as well as
researchers and medical professionals.
Contents: Introduction: the odyssey of indigo;
1. The world of indigo plantations: diasporas and
knowledge; 2. The course of colonial modernity:
negotiating the landscape in Bengal; 3. Colony
and the external arena: seeking validation in the
market; 4. Local science: agricultural institutions
in the age of nationalism; 5. The last stand in
science and rationalization; 6. A lasting definition
of improvement in the era of world war.
ISBN: 9781107038004
The Government of
Social Life in
Colonial India
Liberalism, Religious
Law, and Women’s
Rights
Contents: List of Figures; List of Tables and
Graphs; Preface; List of Abbreviations;
Introduction; Chapter 1: Health and Healing
Practices in Banaras: Patterns of Patronage;
Chapter 2: Changing Perceptions of Health and
Medicine: Authority, Anxiety and Attraction;
Chapter 3: The Professionalization of Medicine:
Aspirations and Conflicts; Chapter 4:
Entrepreneurship in Medicine; Conclusion;
Glossary; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175968899
192pp
Prakash Kumar documents the history of
agricultural indigo, exploring the effects of
nineteenth-century globalization on this colonial
industry. Charting the indigo culture from the
early modern period to the twentieth century,
Kumar discusses how knowledge of indigo
culture thrived among peasant traditions on the
Indian subcontinent in the early modern period
and was then developed by Caribbean planters
and French naturalists who codified this
knowledge into widely-disseminated texts.
European planters who settled in Bengal with the
establishment of British rule in the late eighteenth
century drew on this information. From the
nineteenth century, indigo culture became more
modern, science-based and expert driven, and
with the advent of a cheaper, purer synthetic
indigo in 1897, indigo science crossed paths with
the colonial state's effort to develop a science for
agricultural development. Only at the end of the
First World War, when the industrial use of
synthetic indigo for textile dyeing and printing
became almost universal, did the indigo
industry's optimism fade away.
Rachel Sturman
HB ` 795.00
350pp HB ` 1295.00
From the early days of colonial rule in India, the
British established a two-tier system of legal
administration. Matters deemed secular were
subject to British legal norms, while suits relating
to the family were adjudicated according to Hindu
or Muslim law, known as personal law. This
important new study analyses the system of
personal law in colonial India through a reexamination of women’s rights. Focusing on
Hindu law in western India, it challenges existing
scholarship, showing how – far from being a
system based on traditional values – Hindu law
was developed around ideas of liberalism, and
that this framework encouraged questions about
equality, women’s rights, the significance of
bodily difference, and more broadly the
relationship between state and society. Rich in
archival sources, wide-ranging and theoretically
informed, this book illuminates how personal law
came to function as an organizing principle of
colonial governance and of nationalist political
imaginations.
Contents: Introduction; Part I. Economic
Governance; 1. Property between law and
political economy; 2. The dilemmas of social
economy; Part II. The Politics of Personal Law;
3. Hindu law as a regime of rights; 4. Custom and
human value in the debates on Hindu marriage;
5. Law, community, and belonging; Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107038196
45
310pp
HB ` 895.00
Journeys to
Empire
Enlightenment,
Imperialism, and the
British Encounter with
Tibet, 1774-1904
Gordon T. Stewart
A History of
Modern India
This fascinating study of two British missions to
Tibet in 1774 and 1904 provides a unique
perspective on the relationship between the
Enlightenment and European colonialism. Gordon
T. Stewart compares and contrasts the
Enlightenment era mission led by George Bogle
and the Edwardian mission of Francis
Younghusband as they crossed the Himalayas
into Tibet. Through the British agents' diaries,
reports, and letters and by exploring their
relationships with Indians, Bhutanese and
Tibetans, Stewart is able to trace the shifting
ideologies, economic interests and political
agendas that lay behind British empire-building
from the late eighteenth century to the early
twentieth century. This compelling account sheds
new light on the changing nature of British
imperialism, on power and intimacy in the
encounter between East and West, and on the
relationship of history and memory.
Ishita Banerjee-Dube
While it does not forego chronology, it does away
with the conventional demarcation of political
processes and socio-cultural histories in order to
portray the multi-faceted nature of social worlds.
This book, masterfully, provokes readers to
reflect and interrogate, and strive for newer ways
of understanding history.
Contents: Introduction; 1. An enlightenment
narrative 1774; 2. Wives, concubines and
‘Domestic Arrangements’; 3. Imperial eyes in ‘the
Golden Territories’; 4. Enter Younghusband;
5.From enlightenment to empire; 6. Tibet lessons.
ISBN: 9780521761338
Purifying Empire
Deana Heath
296pp
Strikingly employed visual tools — historical
maps, old photographs, posters and imaginative
time-lines complement the core narratives. This
book will appeal to the scholars, students of
history as well as the general readers alike.
HB ` 995.00
Contents: Photographs, Maps, Posters and
Figures • About the Author • Acknowledgements
• Prologue; 1. The Colourful World of the
Eighteenth Century; 2. Emergence of the
Company Raj; 3. An Inaugural Century;
4. Creating Anew; 5. Imagining India;
6. Challenge and Rupture; 7. The Mahatma
Phenomenon; 8. Difficulties and Initiatives;
9. Many Pathways of a Nation; 10. The
Tumultuous Forties; 11. 1947 and After; Index.
Purifying Empire explores the material, cultural
and moral fragmentation of the boundaries of
imperial and colonial rule in the British Empire in
the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.
It charts how a particular bio-political project,
namely the drive to regulate the obscene in late
nineteenth-century Britain, was transformed from
a national into a global and imperial venture and
then re-localized in two different colonial contexts,
India and Australia, to serve decidedly different
ends. While a considerable body of work has
demonstrated both the role of empire in shaping
moral regulatory projects in Britain and their
adaptation, transformation and, at times, rejection
in colonial contexts, this book illustrates that it is
in fact only through a comparative and
transnational framework that it is possible to
elucidate both the temporalist nature of
colonialism and the political, racial and moral
contradictions that sustained imperial and colonial
regimes.
ISBN: 9781107659728
Islamic Societies
to the Nineteenth
Century
A Global History
Ira M. Lapidus
Contents: Introduction: books, boundaries and
Britishness; 1. Colonialism and governmentality;
2. From sovereignty to governmentality: the
emergence of obscenity regulation as a biopolitical project in Britain; 3. Globalizing the local:
imperial hygiene and the regulation of the
obscene; 4. Localizing the global in settler
societies: regulating the obscene in Australia;
5. Localizing the global in exploitation colonies:
regulating the obscene in India; Conclusion:
retangling empire, nation, colony and globe;
Bibliography.
ISBN: 9780521189200
244pp
A History of Modern India provides an interpretive
and comprehensive account of the history of
India between the eighteenth and twentieth
centuries, a crucial epoch characterized by
colonialism, nationalism and the emergence of
the independent Indian Union. It explores
significant historiographical debates concerning
the period while highlighting important new
issues, especially those of gender, ecology,
caste, and labour. The work combines an
analysis of colonial and independent India in
order to underscore ideologies, policies, and
processes that shaped the colonial state and
continue to mould the Indian nation.
519pp
PB ` 495.00
First published in 1988, Ira M. Lapidus’ A History
of Islamic Societies has become a classic in the
field, enlightening students, scholars, and others
with a thirst for knowledge about one of the
world’s great civilizations. This book, based on
fully revised and updated parts one and two of
this monumental work, describes the
transformations of Islamic societies from their
beginning in the seventh century, through their
diffusion across the globe, into the challenges of
the nineteenth century. The story focuses on the
organization of families and tribes, religious
groups and states, showing how they were
transformed by their interactions with other
religious and political communities. The book
concludes with the European commercial and
imperial interventions that initiated a new set of
transformations in the Islamic world, and the
onset of the modern era. Organized in narrative
sections for the history of each major region, with
innovative, analytic summary introductions and
conclusions, this book is a unique endeavour.
Contents: Introduction to the history of Islamic
societies; Book I. Part I. The Beginnings of
Islamic Civilizations, The Middle East from c.600
to c.1000: 1. Middle Eastern societies before
Islam; 2. Historians and the sources; 3. Arabia;
HB ` 995.00
46
4. Muhammad: preaching, community, and state
formation; 5. Introduction; 6. The Arab-Muslim
conquests and the socio-economic bases of
empire; 7. Regional developments: economic and
social changes; 8. The caliphate to 750; 9. The
‘Abbasid empire; 10. Decline and fall of the
‘Abbasid empire; 11. Introduction: religion and
identity; 12. The ideology of imperial Islam;
13. The ‘Abbasids: caliphs and emperors;
14. Introduction; 15. Sunni Islam; 16. Shi’i Islam;
17. Muslim urban societies to the tenth century;
18. The non-Muslim minorities; 19. Continuity
and change in the historic cultures of the Middle
East; Book I. Part II. From Islamic Community to
Islamic Society: Egypt, Iraq and Iran, 945–
c.1500: 20. The post-’Abbasid Middle Eastern
state system; 21. Muslim communities and
Middle Eastern societies: 1000–1500 CE;
22. The collective ideal; 23. The personal ethic;
24. Conclusion: Middle Eastern Islamic patterns;
Book II. The Global Expansion of Islam from the
Seventh to the Nineteenth Century:
25. Introduction: Islamic institutions; 26. Islamic
north Africa to the thirteenth century;
27. Spanish-Islamic civilization; 28. Libya,
Tunisia, Algeria, and Morocco from the thirteenth
to the nineteenth centuries; 29. States and Islam:
North African variations; 30. Introduction: empires
and societies; 31. The Turkish migrations and the
Ottoman empire; 32. The post-classical Ottoman
empire: decentralization, commercialization,
incorporation; 33. The Arab regions of the Middle
East; 34. The Safavid empire; 35. The Indian
subcontinent: the Delhi sultanates and the
Mughal empire; 36. Islamic empires compared;
37. Inner Asia from the Mongol conquests to the
nineteenth century; 38. Islamic societies in
Southeast Asia; 39. The African context: Islam,
slavery, and colonialism; 40. Islam in Sudanic,
Savannah, and forest west Africa; 41. The West
African jihads; 42. Islam in East Africa and the
European colonial empires; 43. Conclusion: the
varieties of Islamic societies; 44. The global
context.
ISBN: 9781107619135
A History of
Prejudice
Race, Caste, and
Difference in India and
the United States
Gyanendra Pandey
788pp
the contradictory history of promise and denial
that is common to the official narratives of
nations such as India and the United States and
the ideologies of many opposition movements.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Prejudice as
difference; 3. Dalit conversion: the assertion of
sameness; 4. Double V: the everyday of race
relations; 5. An African-American autobiography:
re-locating difference; 6. Dalit memoirs:
re-scripting the body; 7. The persistence of
prejudice.
ISBN: 9781107685376
An Introduction to
the History of
America
Chittabrata Palit and
Jenia Mukherjee
255pp
PB ` 695.00
This textbook comprehensively captures the
historical sojourn of America from pre-colonial to
present times, covering every important aspect
with detailed historiography. It also sheds light on
new evolving themes like American
environmental history and American
‘exceptionalism’, to familiarize students and
readers with the current emerging trends and
approaches in American History.
The authors have attempted to radically explore
the development of America as a ‘Global
Hegemon’ at the cost of the underdevelopment of
her non-western/ non-American counterparts. A
detailed politico-economic and social narrative of
the American nation is given with facts and
interpretations, raising a number of conceptual
and methodological questions. This textbook also
brings out the often unaddressed tension
between America’s self-perception and the actual
reality, which can be mapped through crisis in the
domestic front as well as its impact on other
peoples, nations and cultures.The historiography
provided at the end of every relevant theme
would be immensely helpful for students and
readers pursuing further research.
Contents: Preface; Timeline of Events; 1. An
Early History: From Settlement to Colonization; 2.
The American War of Independence; 3. The
Formative Period: The Era of Solidarity and
Expansion; 4. ‘Two Americas’: Regional
Differences and Sectional Conflicts; 5. Agrarian
and Industrial Revolutions; 6. Resisting Voices;
7. American Foreign Policy: Post-Monroe
Doctrine to World War I; 8. The Great Crisis and
its Recovery; 9. The Rise of America: WWII and
After; 10. The Quest for Equality; 11. American
Environmentalism and Environmental History;
Epilogue: Perceiving American History beyond
the ‘exceptionalist’ framework; Index.
PB ` 995.00
This is a book about prejudice and democracy,
and the prejudice of democracy. In comparing the
historical struggles of two geographically disparate populations - Indian Dalits (once known
as Untouchables) and African Americans Gyanendra Pandey, the leading subaltern
historian, examines the multiple dimensions of
prejudice in two of the world’s leading
democracies. The juxtaposition of two very
different locations and histories, and within each
of them of varying public and private narratives of
struggle, allows for an uncommon analysis of the
limits of citizenship in modern societies and
states. Pandey probes the histories of his
protagonists to uncover a shadowy world where
intolerance and discrimination are part of both
public and private lives. This unusual and
sobering book is revelatory in its exploration of
ISBN: 9789382993186
47
302pp
PB ` 345.00
The Cambridge
Companion to
Gandhi
Judith Brown and
Anthony Parel
The Partition
of India
Six decades after his assassination in January
1948, Mahatma Gandhi is still revered as the
father of the Indian nation. His intellectual and
moral legacy, and the example of his life and
politics, serve as an inspiration to human rights
and peace movements, political activists and
students. This book, comprises essays by
renowned experts in the fields of Indian history
and philosophy and traces Gandhi’s
extraordinary story. The first part of the book
explores his transformation from a small-town
lawyer during his early life in South Africa into a
skilled political activist and leader of civil
resistance in India. The second part is devoted to
Gandhi’s key writings and his thinking on a broad
range of topics, including religion, conflict, politics
and social relations. The final part reflects on
Gandhi’s image and on his legacy in India, the
West, and beyond.
Ian Talbot and
Gurharpal Singh
Contents: 1. Understanding the partition
historiography; 2. The road to 1947; 3. Violence
and partition; 4. Migration and resettlement;
5. Partition legacies: ethnic and religious
nationalism; 6. An enduring rivalry: India and
Pakistan since 1947.
Contents: Introduction Judith M. Brown; Part I.
Gandhi: The Historical Life: 1. Gandhi’s world
Yasmin Khan; 2. Gandhi 1869–1915: the
transnational emergence of a public figure
Jonathan Hyslop; 3. Gandhi as nationalist leader,
1915–1948 Judith M. Brown; Part II. Gandhi:
Thinker and Activist: 4. Gandhi’s key writings
Tridip Suhrud; 5. Gandhi’s religion and its relation
to his politics Akeel Bilgrami; 6. Conflict and
nonviolence Ronald J. Terchek; 7. Gandhi’s
moral economics Thomas Weber; 8. Gandhi and
the state Anthony Parel; 9. Gandhi and social
relations Tanika Sarkar; Part III. The
Contemporary Gandhi: 10. Portrayals of Gandhi
Harish Trivedi; 11. Gandhi in independent India
Anthony Parel; 12. Gandhi’s global legacy David
Hardiman.
ISBN: 9781107602205
294pp
PB
224pp
HB
ISBN: 9780521761772 224pp
ISBN: 9781107633476
The Anglo-Maratha
Campaigns and
the Contest for
India
PB ` 495.00
Randolf G.S. Cooper
Nations and
Nationalism since
1780
E. J. Hobsbawm
Nations and Nationalism since 1780 is Eric
Hobsbawm's widely-acclaimed and highlyreadable enquiry into the question of nationalism.
Events in the late twentieth century in Eastern
Europe and the Soviet republics have since
reinforced the central importance of nationalism
in the history of the political evolution and
upheaval. This second edition has been updated
in light of those events, with a final chapter
addressing the impact of the dramatic changes
that have taken place. Also included are
additional maps to illustrate nationalities,
languages and political divisions across Europe
in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.
211p
` 495.00
` 895.00
This is a cross-cultural study of the political
economy of war in South Asia. Randolf G. S.
Cooper combines an overview of Maratha military
culture with a battle-by-battle analysis of the 1803
Anglo-Maratha campaigns. Building on that
foundation he challenges ethnocentric
assumptions about British superiority in
discipline, drill and technology. He argues that
these campaigns, in which Arthur Wellesley
served with distinction, represent the military
high-water mark of the Marathas who posed the
last serious opposition to the formation of the
British Raj. Dr Cooper asserts that the real
contest for India was never a single decisive
battle for the subcontinent. Rather it turned on a
complex social and political struggle for control of
the South Asian military economy.
Contents: Introduction; 1. Maratha military
culture; 2. British perceptions and the road to war
in 1803; 3. The Deccan campaign of 1803; 4. The
Hindustan campaign of 1803; 5. ‘Coming in’; 6.
The anatomy of victory; Appendix I: Anglo-South
Asian conflict chart; Appendix II: British troop
strengths and casualties for the Hindustan and
Deccan campaigns 1803; Appendix III: Governor
General Wellesley’s ‘Maratha’ proclamation of
1803; Appendix IV: Mercenary pension records;
Appendix V: The Marathas’ employment of
mercenaries in historic perspective; Bibliography.
Contents: Preface; Introduction; 1. The nation as
novelty: from revolution to liberalism; 2. Popular
proto-nationalism; 3. The government
perspective; 4. The transformation of nationalism,
1870–1918; 5. The apogee of nationalism, 1918–
1950; 6. Nationalism in the late twentieth century.
ISBN: 9781107632097
The British divided and quit India in 1947. The
partition of India and the creation of Pakistan
uprooted entire communities and left
unspeakable violence in its trail. This volume tells
the story of partition through the events that led
up to it, the terrors that accompanied it, to
migration and resettlement. In a new shift in the
understanding of this seminal moment, the book
also explores the legacies of partition, which
continue to resonate today in the fractured lives
of individuals and communities, and more
broadly in the relationship between India and
Pakistan and the ongoing conflict over contested
sites. In conclusion, the book reflects on the
general implications of partition as a political
solution to ethnic and religious conflict. The book
certains photographs, maps and a chronology of
major events.
PB ` 395.00
ISBN: 9788175962507
48
456pp
HB ` 895.00
A Concise History
of Modern India
Third Edition
Barbara D. Metcalf and
Thomas R. Metcalf
A Concise History of Modern India by Barbara D.
Metcalf and Thomas R. Metcalf, has become a
classic in the field since it was first published in
2001. As a fresh interpretation of Indian history
from the Mughals to the present, it has informed
students across the world. In the third edition of
the book, a final chapter charts the dramatic
developments of the last 20 years, from 1990
through the Congress electoral victory of 2009, to
the rise of the Indian high-tech industry in a
country still troubled by poverty and political
unrest. The narrative focuses on the
fundamentally-political theme of the imaginative
and institutional structures that have successively
sustained and transformed India, first under
British colonial rule and then, after 1947, as an
independent country. Woven into the larger
political narrative is an account of India’s social
and economic development and its rich cultural
life.
Forest Policy and
Ecological Change
Hyderabad State in
Colonial India
S. Abdul Thaha
Contents: 1. Sultans, Mughals, and pre-colonial
Indian society; 2. Mughal twilight: the emergence
of regional states and the East India Company;
3. The East India Company Raj, 1772–1850;
4. Revolt, the modern state, and colonized
subjects, 1848–1885; 5. Civil society, colonial
constraints, 1885–1919; 6. The crisis of the
colonial order, 1919–1939; 7. The 1940s: triumph
and tragedy; 8. Congress Raj: democracy and
development, 1950–1989; 9. Democratic India at
the turn of the millennium: prosperity, poverty,
power.
ISBN: 9781107619128
The Making of
Roman India
Grant Parker
360pp
Contents: Preface; Maps; Hyderabad State in
Pre-independence India; Political Map of
Hyderabad State; Geographical Locations of
Forest Types in Hyderabad State; Chapter 1;
Introduction; Chapter 2; History of Forests;
Chapter 3; Evolution of Forest Policy; Chapter 4;
Forest Administration and Management; Chapter
5; Development of Irrigation and its Influence on
Forests; Chapter 6; Famines vs. Forests; Chapter
7; Conclusion; Appendix; Bibliography; Index;
PB ` 495.00
Latin, and especially Greek, texts of the imperial
period contain a wealth of references to ‘India’.
Professor Parker offers a survey of such texts,
read against a wide range of other sources, both
archaeological and documentary. He emphasizes
the social processes whereby the notion of India
gained its exotic features, including the role of
the Persian empire and of Alexander's
expedition. Three kinds of social context receive
special attention: the trade in luxury commodities;
the political discourse of empire and its limits;
and India's status as a place of special
knowledge, embodied in ‘naked philosophers’.
Roman ideas about India ranged from the
specific and concrete to the wildly fantastic and
the book attempts to account for such variety. It
ends by considering the afterlife of such ideas
into late antiquity and beyond.
ISBN: 9788175966321
Contents: Introduction; Part I. Creation of a
Discourse: 1. Achaemenid India and Alexander;
Part II. Features of a Discourse: 2. India
Described; 3. India Depicted; Part III. Contexts of
a Discourse: 4. Commodities; 5. Empire;
6. Wisdom; Conclusion: Intersections of a
Discourse.
ISBN: 9780521193962
374pp
Forest Policy and Ecological Change is an
attempt to highlight the history of forestry in
colonial India in the context of the Nizam’s
Dominions, popularly called the Hyderabad State.
The ownership of forests by the State through
administrative authority and its monopoly over
the commercial exploitation of forest resources
were central to the history of state forestry in the
Hyderabad State. Since the government
categorized forests into reserved, protected and
open forests, the main objective for the forest
administration was to conserve the existing
forests and exploit them systematically. As in
other parts of colonial India, state management of
forest resources marked a watershed in the
Hyderabad State as well. It was from the second
half of the nineteenth century, under the influence
of the British, that the State evolved a sustained
policy of regulation and exploitation of forest
tracts. This new policy of forest management
came in the way of people’s access to the forest
and its natural resources. This book explains how
the State managed the pressures between the
conservation of forests on the one hand and
commercial exploitation on the other due to
agrarian expansion and introduction of
railways.The contents presented in jargon-free
language will be of interest to historians,
students, researchers and those interested in the
environmental history of India.
HB ` 995.00
49
174pp
HB ` 895.00
The Crisis of
Global Modernity
Asian Traditions and a
Sustainable Future
Prasenjit Duara
In this major new study, Prasenjit Duara expands
his influential theoretical framework to present
circulatory, transnational histories as an
alternative to nationalist history. Duara argues
that the present day is defined by the intersection
of three global changes: the rise of non-western
powers, the crisis of environmental sustainability
and the loss of authoritative sources of what he
terms transcendence - the ideals, principles and
ethics once found in religions or political
ideologies. The physical salvation of the world is
becoming - and must become - the transcendent
goal of our times, but this goal must transcend
national sovereignty if it is to succeed. Duara
suggests that a viable foundation for
sustainability might be found in the traditions of
Asia, which offer different ways of understanding
the relationship between the personal, ecological
and universal. These traditions must be
understood through the ways they have
circulated and converged with contemporary
developments.
Realigning India: Western military aid and the
threat from the north; 8. The other transfer of
power: Britain, the US and the Nehru-Shastri
Transition; 9. A bumpy ride: Harold Wilson,
Lyndon Johnson and South Asia; 10. Triumph
and tragedy: the Raan of Kutch and the 1965
Indo-Pakistani War; Conclusion: the erosion of
Anglo-American power in India and Pakistan;
Select bibliography.
ISBN: 9781107150560
Hyderabad, British
India, and the
World
Muslim Networks and
Minor Sovereignty, c.
1850-1950
Contents: Introduction; 1. Sustainability and the
crisis of transcendence; 2. Circulatory and
competitive histories; 3. The historical logics of
global modernity; 4. Dialogical and radical
transcendence; 5. Dialogical transcendence and
secular nationalism in the Sinosphere; 6. The
traffic between secularism and transcendence; 7.
Regions of circulation and networks of
sustainability in Asia; 8. Conclusion and epilogue:
of reason and hope; Index.
ISBN: 9781107571280
The Cold War in
South Asia
Paul M. McGarr
338pp
Eric Beverley
PB ` 695.00
The Cold War in South Asia provides the first
comprehensive and transnational history of
Anglo-American relations with South Asia during
a seminal period in the history of the Indian
Subcontinent, between independence in the late
1940s, and the height of the Cold War in the late
1960s. Drawing upon significant new evidence
from British, American, Indian and Eastern bloc
archives, the book re-examines how and why the
Cold War in South Asia evolved in the way that it
did, at a time when the national leaderships,
geopolitical outlooks and regional aspirations of
India, Pakistan and their superpower suitors were
in a state of considerable flux. The book probes
the factors which encouraged the governments of
Britain and the United States to work so closely
together in South Asia during the two decades
after independence, and suggests what benefits,
if any, Anglo-American intervention in South
Asia's affairs delivered, and to whom.
406pp
HB ` 950.00
This examination of the formally autonomous
state of Hyderabad in a global comparative
framework challenges the idea of the dominant
British Raj as the sole sovereign power in the late
colonial period. Beverley argues that
Hyderabad's position as a subordinate yet
sovereign 'minor state' was not just a legal
formality, but that in exercising the right to
internal self-government and acting as a conduit
for the regeneration of transnational Muslim
intellectual and political networks, Hyderabad
was indicative of the fragmentation of sovereignty
between multiple political entities amidst
Empires. By exploring connections with the
Muslim world beyond South Asia, law and policy
administration along frontiers with the colonial
state and urban planning in expanding
Hyderabad City, Beverley presents Hyderabad as
a locus for experimentation in global and regional
forms of political modernity. This book recasts
the political geography of late imperialism and
historicises Muslim political modernity in South
Asia and beyond.
Contents: Introduction: fragmenting sovereignty;
1. Minor sovereignties: Hyderabad among states
and empires; 2. The legal framework of
sovereignty; Part I. Ideas; 3. A passage to
another India: Hyderabad's discursive universe;
4. Hyderabad and the world: bureaucratintellectuals and Muslim modernist
internationalism; Part II. Institutions; 5. Moglai
temporality: institutions, imperialism and the
making of the Hyderabad frontier; 6. Frontier as
resource: law, crime and sovereignty on the
margins of empire; Part III. Urban Space; 7.
Remaking city, developing state: ethical
patrimonialism, urbanism and economic
planning; 8. Improvising urbanism: sanitation and
power in Hyderabad and Secunderabad;
Conclusion: fragmented sovereignty in a world of
nation-states.
Contents: Introduction; 1. India, Pakistan and
the early Cold War, 1947–57; 2. Eisenhower,
Macmillan and the 'New Look' at South Asia,
1958–60; 3. The best of friends: Kennedy,
Macmillan and Jawaharlal Nehru; 4. Upsetting
the apple cart: India's 'liberation' of Goa; 5. Allies
of a kind: Britain, the United States and the 1962
Sino-Indian War; 6. Quagmire: the AngloAmerican search for a Kashmir settlement; 7.
ISBN: 9781107150621
50
362pp
HB ` 995.00
Limits of Islamism
Jamaat-e-Islami in Contemporary
India and Bangladesh
Maidul Islam
This book focuses on Islamism as a political
ideology by taking up the case of Jamaat-eIslami in contemporary India and Bangladesh.
It probes at whether Islamism can articulate a
politics of alternative in a world marked by
capitalist globalization and neoliberal
consensus; what happens to the promise and
goal of Islamism in providing an alternative to
capitalism after the failure of twentieth-century
socialism; and if a religious ideology like
Islamism can represent a politics of social
transformation, or can it only limit itself as a
peculiar politics of resistance and critique to
neoliberal capitalism. This book addresses how,
in a contemporary globalized world, Islamists
construct an antagonistic frontier and try to
mobilize people behind the political project of
Islamism. It deals with the Islamist critique of
neoliberal economic policies and ‘western
cultural globalization’. Further, it analyzes why
Islamists are opposed to such issues as atheism,
blasphemy and sexual freedom. Finally, it
traces the contemporary crisis of Islamist
populism in providing an alternative to
neoliberalism.
Hardback | 978-1-107-08026-3 | ` 795.00
www.cambridge.org
Muslim Belonging
in Secular India
Negotiating Citizenship
in Postcolonial
Hyderabad
Taylor C. Sherman
Muslim Belonging in Secular India surveys the
experience of some of India's most prominent
Muslim communities in the early postcolonial
period. Muslims who remained in India after the
Partition of 1947 faced distrust and
discrimination, and were consequently compelled
to seek new ways of defining their relationship
with fellow citizens of India and its governments.
Using the forcible integration of the princely state
of Hyderabad in 1948 as a case study, Taylor C.
Sherman reveals the fragile and contested nature
of Muslim belonging in the decade that followed
independence. In this context, she demonstrates
how Muslim claims to citizenship in Hyderabad
contributed to intense debates over the nature of
democracy and secularism in independent India.
Drawing on detailed new archival research, Dr
Sherman provides a thorough and compelling
examination of the early governmental policies
and popular strategies that have helped to shape
the history of Muslims in India since 1947.
administrators, and vernacular as well as English
records, this book explores long term
relationships between mobility, martiality,
memory and identity in the desert expanses of
the Thar.
Contnets: 1. Introduction; 2. Moral economies of
communal violence and refugee rehabilitation; 3.
Unwinding Hyderabad's pan-Islamic networks; 4.
Majority rule versus Mulki Rule: government
service and the Hindu majority; 5. Secular
Muslim politics in a democratic age; 6. From the
language of the bazaar to a minority language:
linguistic reorganisation in Hyderabad state and
the fate of Urdu; 7. Conclusion; Bibliography;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107080317
ISBN: 9781316604304
Nomadic
Narratives
A History of Mobility
and Identity in the Great
Indian Desert
Tanuja Kothiyal
214pp
Contents: List of Tables; List of Abbreviations;
Preface; Acknowledgements; Glossary; Note on
Transliteration, Translation and Dates;
Contemporary Place Names and their Nineteenth
Century Spellings Introduction; 1. Geographical
Imagination and Narratives of a Region; 2.
Mobility, Polity, Territory ; 3. Itinerants of The
Thar: Mobility and Circulation; 4. Expanding
State Contracting Space: The Thar in the
Nineteenth Century; 5. Narratives of Mobility and
Mobility of Narratives; Conclusions: Nomadic
Narratives in the Frontiers; Bibliography;
Appendix I: Jodhpur King List; Appendix II:
Bikaner King List; Appendix III: Jaisalmer King
List; Index
The Indian Army
and the End
of the Raj
Daniel Marston
PB ` 500.00
The Thar, which is today divided by an
international boundary, has historically been a
frontier region connecting Punjab, Multan, Sindh,
Gujarat and Rajasthan. Nomadic Narratives looks
at the desert as a historical region shaped
through the mobility of its inhabitants, who were
warriors, pastoralists, traders, ascetics and
bards, often in overlapping capacities,
exchanging mobile wealth and equally mobile
narratives.
324pp
HB ` 850.00
The Partition of British India in 1947 resulted in
the establishment of the independent states of
India and Pakistan and the end of the British Raj.
The decision to divide British India along religious
lines led to widespread upheaval and communal
violence in the period leading up to and following
the official day of independence, 15 August 1947.
In this book, Daniel Marston provides a unique
examination of the role of the Indian army in postWorld War II India. He draws upon extensive
research into primary source documents and
interviews with veterans of the events of 1947 to
provide fresh insight into the vital part that the
Indian Army played in preserving law and order in
the region. This rigorous book fills a significant
gap in the historiography of the British in India
and will be invaluable to those studying the
British Empire and South Asia more generally.
Contents: Introduction; 1. The bedrock of the
Raj: the Indian Army before 1939; 2. The
performance of the Indian army in the Second
World War; 3. Question of loyalty? The Indian
National Army and the Royal Indian Navy mutiny;
4. The Indian Army in French Indo-China and the
Netherlands East Indies 1945–1946; 5. 1946, the
year of difficulty: internal security and the rise of
communal violence; 6. Demobilisation,
nationalisation and division of the army in the
midst of chaos; 7. 1947: the year of reckoning
and the end of the Raj; Conclusion: the end of
the British Indian Army; Bibliography; Index.
It challenges the frames of Mughal-Rajput
relationships generally employed to explore the
histories of the Thar, arguing that Rajputana
remains an inadequate category to explore
polities located in this frontier region, where along
with Rajputs, a range of groups like Charans,
Bhils, Meenas, Soomras, and Pathans controlled
circulation, and with whom the Rajput states had
to constantly negotiate.
The narratives that emerged from Rajput courts,
and later from British administrator-historians,
obfuscated the intertwined histories of Rajputs
and other groups, giving primacy to the former
and ascribing marginality and criminality to the
latter. It is only in the oral narratives of these
marginalized and criminalized groups that
references to shared histories and indeterminate
mixed identities are preserved.
ISBN : 9781107067578 397pp
Sifting through a wide range of Rajasthani written
and oral narratives, travelogues of British
52
HB` 1295.00
The Indian Army
on the Western
Front
India's Expeditionary
Force to France
and Belgium in the First
World War
George Morton-Jack
The Indian army fought on the western front with
the British Expeditionary Force (BEF) from 1914
to 1918. The traditional interpretations of its
performance have been dominated by ideas that
it was a failure. This book offers a radical
reconsideration by revealing new answers to the
debate's central questions, such as whether the
Indian army 'saved' the BEF from defeat in 1914,
or whether Indian troops were particularly prone
to self-inflicting wounds and fleeing the trenches.
It looks at the Indian army from top to bottom,
from generals at headquarters to snipers in no
man's land. It takes a global approach, exploring
the links between the Indian army's 1914–18
campaigning in France and Belgium and its pre1914 small wars in Asia and Africa, and
comparing the performance of the Indian
regiments on the western front to those in China,
East Africa, Mesopotamia and elsewhere.
The Indian Princes
and their States
Barbara N. Ramusack
Contents: Introduction; 1. The army in India; 2.
Small wars and regular warfare; 3. Strengths; 4.
Weaknesses; 5. To Flanders; 6. 'Saving' the
BEF; 7. Climate, casualty replacements and
departure; 8. Self-inflicted wounds and flights; 9.
Old tactics; 10. New tactics; 11. Commanders
and staff; 12. Administration; Conclusion;
Bibliography.
ISBN : 9781107117655 346pp
The Mughal
Empire
John F. Richards
Contents: List of illustrations; General editor’s
preface; Acknowledgements; List of
abbreviations; Map; 1. Introduction: Indian
princes and British imperialism; 2. Princely states
prior to 1800; 3. The British construction of
indirect rule; 4. The theory and experience of
indirect rule in colonial India; 5. Princes as men,
women, rulers, patrons and Oriental stereotypes;
6. Princely states: administrative and economic
structures; 7. Princely states: society and politics;
8. Federation or integration?; Epilogue;
Bibliographical essay; Glossary; Index.
HB ` 995.00
ISBN: 9780521670470
The Mughal empire was one of the largest
centralized states in the pre-modern world and
this new volume traces the history of this
magnificent empire from its creation in 1526 to its
breakup in 1720.
The Sikhs of the
Punjab
Contents: Introduction; 1. Conquest and stability;
2. The new Empire; 3. Autocratic centralism;
4. Land revenue and rural society; 5. Jahangir
1605–1627; 6. Shah Jahan 1628–1658; 7. The
war of succession; 8. Imperial expansion under
Aurangzeb 1658–1689; 9. The economy, societal
change and international trade; 10. Maratha
insurgency and Mughal conquest in the Deccan;
11. The Deccan war; 12. Decline and collapse,
1707–1720; Conclusion; Bibliographic essay.
ISBN: 9788185618494
368pp
Although the princes of India have been
caricatured as oriental despots and British
stooges, Barbara Ramusack’s study argues that
the British did not create the princes. On the
contrary, many were consummate politicians who
exercised considerable degrees of autonomy
until the disintegration of the princely states after
independence. Ramusack’s synthesis has a
broad temporal span, tracing the evolution of the
Indian kings from their pre-colonial origins to their
roles as clients in the British colonial system. The
book breaks new ground in its integration of
political and economic developments in the major
princely states with the shifting relationships
between the princes and the British. It represents
a major contribution, both to British imperial
history in its analysis of the theory and practice of
indirect rule, and to modern South Asian history,
as a portrait of the princes as politicians and
patrons of the arts.
Second Edition
J.S. Grewal
324pp
PB ` 695.00
A revised edition of the original book traces the
history of the Sikhs from the time of its founder,
Guru Nanak, right up to the present. It offers a
comprehensive statement on one of the largest
and most important communities in India today.
Contents: Introduction; 1. The Turko-Afghan
rule; 2. Foundation of the Sikh Panth;
3. Evolution of the Sikh Panth (1539–1606);
4. Transformation of the Sikh Panth (1606–1708);
5. Rise to political power (1708–1799); 6. The
Sikh empire (1799–1848); 7. Recession and
resurgence (1849–1919); 8. In the struggle for
freedom (1920–1947); 9. Towards the ‘PunjabProvince’ (1947–1966); 10. In the new Punjab
state (1966–1984); Epilogue; Appendices.
PB ` 395.00
ISBN: 9788175960701
53
277pp
PB ` 395.00
Bengal
The British Bridgehead
(New Cambridge
History of India)
P. J. Marshall
words; 6. Postpositions used in Bengali;
7. Compound nouns and adjectives; 8. Structure
of reduplicated forms in Bengali; 9. Lexical
naturalization in Bengali; Appendices;
Bibliography; Index.
The aim of Bengal is to explain how, in the
eighteenth century, Britain established her rule in
eastern India, the first part of the subcontinent to
be incorporated into the British Empire. Though
the British were not in firm control of Bengal,
Bihar and Orissa until 1765, to illustrate the
circumstances in which they gained power and
elucidate the Indian inheritance that so powerfully
shaped the early years of their rule. Professor
Marshall begins his analysis around 1740 with
the reign of Alivardi Khan, the last effective
Mughal ruler of eastern India. He then explores
the social, cultural and economic changes that
followed the imposition of foreign rule and seeks
to assess the consequences for the peoples of
the region; emphasis is given throughout as
much to continuities rooted deep in the history of
Bengal as to the more obvious effects of British
domination. The volume closes in the 1820s
when, with British rule firmly established, a new
pattern of cultural and economic relations was
developing between Britain and eastern India.
ISBN: 9781107064249
Butcher’s Copyediting
Fourth Edition
Judith Butcher,
Caroline Drake and
Maureen Leach
Contents: General editor's preface; Preface;
Maps; 1. The setting for empire; 2. Late Mughal
Bengal; 3. The crisis of empire, 1740–65; 4. The
new regime; 5. A new society?; 6. Conclusion;
Bibliographical essay; Index.
ISBN: 9780521056298
216pp
Niladri Sekhar Dash
HB ` 895.00
Since its first publication in 1975, Judith Butcher's
Copy-editing has become firmly established as a
classic reference guide. This fourth edition has
been comprehensively revised to provide an upto-date and clearly-presented source of
information for all those involved in preparing
typescripts and illustrations for publication. From
the basics of how to prepare text and illustrations
for the designer and typesetter, through the
ground rules of house style, to how to read and
correct proofs, Copy-editing covers all aspects of
the editorial process.
New and revised features: • up-to-date advice on
indexes, inclusive language, reference systems
and preliminary pages • a chapter devoted to onscreen copy-editing • guidance on digital coding
and publishing in other media such as e-books •
updated to take account of modern typesetting
and printing technology • an expanded section on
law books • an essential tool for new and
experienced copy-editors, working freelance or
in-house
PB ` 395.00
LANGUAGE AND LINGUISTICS
A Descriptive
Study of Bengali
Words
372pp
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction; 2. Preliminary
copy-editing, design and specimen pages;
3. Preparing the typescript for the typesetter;
4. Illustrations; 5. Proofs; 6. House style;
7. Preliminary pages; 8. Indexes; 9. Other parts
of a book; 10. Bibliographical references;
11. Literary material; 12. Multi-author and multivolume works; 13. Science and mathematics
books; 14. Other special subjects; 15. Reprints
and new editions; 16. On-screen editing Anne
Waddingham; Appendixes: 1. Checklist of copyediting; 2. Book sizes; 3. Abbreviations for states
in the USA; 4. Phonetic symbols; 5. The Russian
alphabet; 6. Old English and Middle English
letters; 7. French and German bibliographical
terms and abbreviations; 8. Mathematical
symbols; 9. Hebrew; 10. Arabic; 11. Islamic and
other calendars; 12. Countries of the former
USSR, Baltic States and former Yugoslavia;
13. Proof correction symbols; 14. How to check
that an ISBN is correct.
This book is a study of modern Bengali words
based on the data obtained from a corpus of
written texts. The author has used data,
information and examples from the Bengali
corpus to shape up this text. He has made an
empirical attempt to analyse Bengali words and
other lexical items from the perspective of their
surface orthographic representation to
understand the internal structure of their
composition with a focus on their functional roles
in various contexts of their usage within texts. In
order to achieve this goal, he has established a
link between the internal composition and
external representation of words within an
interface of usage and function of words in texts.
The issues addressed in the book include
decomposition of words, interpretation of function
of word-formative elements and analysis of
lexico-semantic identities of the word-formative
elements in relation to their function in words.
ISBN: 9780521719148
Contents: Acknowledgements; Bengali vowel
sounds in cardinal diagram; Roman and IPA
codes for Bengali vowels and allographs; Bengali
consonants; Roman and IPA codes for Bengali
consonants; Introduction; 1. Word: a conceptual
complexity; 2. Usage of some word formative
elements in Bengali; 3. Frequency of use of
words in Bengali; 4. Structural components of
Bengali words; 5. Use of affixes with Bengali
54
556pp
PB ` 795.00
English for the
Media
Latha Nair
English Syntax
English for the Media provides clear
understanding of the use of English in print,
visual and digital media, radio and advertising.
Writing for media involves special linguistic skills
and sensitization. The book primarily focuses on
sensitizing students about the need to use
polished and refined language. It also helps
learners to adopt the changing styles in media
writing. The chapters are designed with
interactive work sections and in-depth exercises
for intensive practice. There is an extensive
glossary that explains important terms used in
media and advertising. The authors have taken
special care to make the book student friendly
and enjoyable for all types of learners.
An Introduction
Andrew Radford
Contents:; Preface; Introduction; 1. Print Media;
Introduction; News Stories; Structure of a News
Story; Linking Ideas; The Passive; Task;
Indigenous (Desi) words in English Newspapers
in India; Writing the Headline; Writing the Lead;
Types of Leads; Body Paragraphs; Slant; The
Editing Process; Writing Editorials; Op-ed Pieces;
Letters to the Editor; Feature Writing; Book
Reviews; Film Reviews; Interviews for Print;
Writing for Magazines: Action – Angle – Anecdot;
2. Radio; Introduction; Radio Script; Techniques
of Writing for the Broadcast Media; Key Elements
in Radio Jockeying; Tenses; Topic Sentence;
Phrasal Verbs; Use of Language Debriefing;
Radio Presenter; Writing for Radio Programmes;
Interviews; Radio News; News Bulletins; Radio
Talk Show; Radio Reviews; Music Programmes;
Phone-in; Radio Plays; 3. Visual Media;
Introduction; Creating TV Programmes; Use of
Formal and Informal/Conversational Language;
Use of Collocations; Television News; Soaps;
Interviews and Talk Shows; Film-Based
Programmes; Documentaries; Programmes for
National and Rural Development; Roles of an
Editor and Output Editor; FILM; Features of
Dialogue; Language in Films; Film Themes;
4. Digital Media; Introduction; Digital Media –
Some Forms; Writing for the Web; Headlines and
Blurbs; Web Copy; Profi le Writing; Blogs; Editing
for Digital Media; Language Techniques for
Search Engine Optimization (SEO); Writing
Effectively for the Social Media; Podcasting;
5. Advertising; Introduction; Elements of
Advertising; Language Techniques; Creating a
Print Advertisement; Posters; The Usage of
English in Advertising in the Context of India: A
Quick Overview; Glossary; References.
ISBN: 9789382993490
149pp
This textbook provides a concise, clear, and
accessible introduction to current syntactic
theory, drawing on the key concepts of
Chomsky’s Minimalist Program. Assuming little or
no prior grammatical knowledge, Andrew Radford
takes students through a wide range of topics in
English syntax, beginning at an elementary level
and progressing in stages towards more
advanced material. There is an extensive
glossary of technical terms, and each chapter
contains a workbook section with ‘helpful hints’,
exercises and model answers, suitable for both
class discussion and self-study. This is an
abridged version of Radford’s major new
textbook Minimalist Syntax (also published by
Cambridge University Press), and will be
welcomed as a short introduction to current
syntactic theory.
Contents: 1. Principles, parameters and
universal grammar; 2. Categories and features;
3. Syntactic structure and merger; 4. Null
constituents; 5. Head movement; 6. Whmovement; 7. A-movement; 8. Case, agreement
and movement; 9. Split projections; 10. Phases.
ISBN: 9780521711524
Foreigners and
Foreign
Languages in India
Shreesh Chaudhary
398pp
PB ` 695.00
India’s natural wealth, knowledge, arts and crafts
have attracted foreigners throughout its long
history. It has had continuous cultural contact
and trade with other countries and, in all this,
India has been exposed to many foreign
languages such as Arabic, Bactrian, Chinese,
Dutch, English, French, Greek, Hebrew, Latin,
Persian, Portuguese, Turkish and in a certain
sense, Sanskrit. Each of these languages went
through a cycle, rising to the position of power
and prestige, and eventually declining and
yielding place to yet another language. In this
process, all these languages interacted with the
native languages of India and exchanged
sounds, words, sentences, idioms and
expressions, sometimes even giving birth to new
languages. Foreigners and Foreign Languages in
India: A Sociolinguistic History tells the story of
this long and continuous history of the advent,
learning, use, demise and debris of some foreign
languages in India.
Contents: Foreword; Preface;
Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction; 2. Greek,
Hebrew and Sanskrit; 3. Arabic, Persian and
Turkish; 4. Armenian, Portuguese, Dutch and
French; 5. East India Company and The Indian
Languages; 6. East India Company and The
English Language; 7. Conclusion; index; List of
Tables; Race and Religion of Aurangzeb’s
Nobility; European Population in Lucknow;
Christian Mission Institutions in India in 1851;
Sale of Books in 1834; Popularity of Some
Languages in a School Curriculum; Growth of
English Schools and Colleges in India;
Population of Calcutta in August 1822; Schools
and Colleges in India under the Imperial Govt.;
PB ` 195.00
55
Language History
of the Kamta and
Cooch Behar
Region
Newspapers in India, 1865 – 75; Medium of
Examination for Candidates Writing JEE; India’s
Top Ten Newspapers; Number of Speakers of
English as Mother Tongue; The Relative
Attractiveness of Countries for BPO; List of
Annexes; 1. Evolution of Indo-European Script;
2. An Ashokan Edict in Bactrian Language;
3. Examples of Magadhi in Kalidasa; 4. A
Specimen of Babar’s Poetry; 5. Extract from
Halhead’s Translation of Dara Shikoh’s Preface
to the Upanishad; 6. Extracts from Mazm-uIBabrain and Samudra Sangamah; 7. Dara
Shikoh’s Sanskrit Verse in Praise of Rudra; 8. A
Bengali Prayer Book Prepared by the
Portuguese; 9. Example of Portuguese Creole;
10. Extracts from Wood’s Despatch; 11. Charter
Act of 1813; 12. Raja Rammohun Roy’s Letter to
Lord Amherst; 13. Macaulay’s Minute on
Education for India; 14. William Bentinck’s
Resolution for Provision for English Education;
15. Growth of English Schools and Colleges in
India; 16. Population of Calcutta on 8 August,
1822.
ISBN: 9788175966284
Language Death
David Crystal
Matthew Toulmin
Contents: Acknowledgements; Linguistic
abbreviations and conventions used;
Abbreviations for languages, locations and social
groups; Chapter 1: Introduction; Chapter 2:
Research design; Chapter 3: Theory and method
of reconstruction; Chapter 4: Phonological
reconstruction; Chapter 5: Reconstruction of
nominal morphology; Chapter 6: reconstruction of
verbal morphology; Chapter 7: historical
sociolinguistic reconstruction; Chapter 8:
Conclusions and implications; References.
600pp HB ` 1295.00
The rapid endangerment and death of many
minority languages across the world is a matter
of widespread concern, not only among linguists
and anthropologists but among all concerned
with issues of cultural identity in an increasinglyglobalized culture. By some counts, only 600 of
the 6, 000 or so languages in the world are ‘safe’
from the threat of extinction. A leading
commentator and popular writer on language
issues, David Crystal asks the fundamental
question, ‘Why is language death so important?’,
reviews the reasons for the current crisis, and
investigates what is being done to reduce its
impact. The book contains intelligent argument,
and moving descriptions of the decline and
demise of particular languages, and practical
advice for anyone interested in pursuing the
subject further.
ISBN: 9788175968974
Language in
South Asia
Braj B. Kachru,
Yamuna Kachru and
S. N. Sridhar
Contents: Preface; 1. What is language death?;
2. Why should we care?; 3. Why do languages
die?; 4. Where do we begin?; 5. What can be
done?; List of organizations; Further reading;
Index of languages; Subject index.
ISBN: 9780521121750
271pp
The Indo –– Aryan languages and dialects
constitute a dialect continuum, characterized by
variable, non –– discrete boundaries between
speech communities. In order to reconstruct
linguistic history it is necessary to take stock of
this sociolinguistic context and adjust the
methods of reconstruction accordingly. This
study presents a theoretically-robust,
sociolinguistic framework for historical
reconstruction, which supplements a traditional
comparative reconstruction of phonology and
morphology. The language varieties examined in
this book are known by a number of names
including ‘Kamta’, ‘Rajbanshi, or simply the ‘deshi
bhasha’ of north Bengal and west Assam. This
study provides evidence for a protolanguage,
termed ‘proto Kamta’ (c. AD 13 –– 16 century),
which was the point of common origin for these
lects, and defines them as a subgroup within Indo
– Aryan.
PB ` 395.00
274pp
PB ` 695.00
South Asia is a rich and fascinating linguistic
area, its many hundreds of languages from four
major language families representing the
distinctions of caste, class, profession, religion,
and region. This comprehensive new volume
presents an overview of the language situation in
this vast subcontinent in a linguistic, historical
and sociolinguistic context. An invaluable
resource, it comprises authoritative contributions
from leading international scholars within the
fields of South Asian language and linguistics,
historical linguistics, cultural studies and area
studies. Topics covered include the ongoing
linguistic processes, controversies, and
implications of language modernization; the
functions of South Asian languages within the
legal system, media, cinema, and religion;
language conflicts and politics, and Sanskrit and
its long traditions of study and teaching.
Language in South Asia is an accessible
interdisciplinary book for students and scholars in
sociolinguistics, multilingualism, language
planning and South Asian studies.
Contents: Introduction: Languages, contexts and
constructs Braj B. Kachru; Part I. Language
History, Families and Typology: 1. Language in
historical context Ronald E. Asher; 2.Typological
characteristics of South Asian languages
Karumuri V. Subbarao; Part II. Languages and
their Functions: 3. Hindi, Urdu, Hindustani
56
Yamuna Kachru; 4. Persian in South Asia S. A.
H. Abidi and Ravinder Gargesh; 5. Major regional
languages Tej K. Bhatia; 6. Minority languages
and their status Rakesh M. Bhatt and Ahmar
Mahboob; 7. Tribal languages Anvita Abbi; Part
III. Sanskrit and Traditions of Language Study: 8.
Sanskrit in the South Asian sociolinguistics
Madhav Deshpande; 9. Traditions of language
study Ashok Aklujkar; Part IV. Multilingualism,
Contact and Convergence: 10. Contexts of
multilingualism E. Annamalai; 11. Language
contact and convergence S. N. Sridhar; 12.
Pidgins, creoles and bazaar Hindi Ian Smith; Part
V. Orality, Literacy, and Writing Systems:
13. Orality and literacy Rama Kant Agnihotri;
14. Writing systems Peter Daniels; Part
VI.Language, State and Education: 15. Language
politics and conflicts Robert L. King; Part VII.
Language Standardization and Modernization:
16. Language modernization S. N. Sridhar; Part
VIII. Language and Discourse: 17. Language in
social and ethnic interaction Yamuna Kachru;
18. Language and the legal system Vijay Bhatia
and Rajesh Sharma; 19. Language in media and
advertising Tej K. Bhatia and Robert
Baumgardner; 20. Language in cinema Wimal
Dissanayake; 21. Language of religion
Rajeshwari Pandharipande; Part IX. Language
and Identity: 22. Language and gender Tamara
Valentine; 23. Dalit literature, language, and
identity Eleanor Zelliot; 24. Language and youth
culture Rukmini Bhaya Nair; Part X. Languages
in Diaspora: 25. Languages in diaspora Rajend
Meshtrie; 26. South Asian diaspora in Europe
and the US Kamal K. Sridhar.
ISBN: 9781107602212
Sociolinguistics
Second Edition
R. A. Hudson
632pp
Sounds and their
patterns in Indic
languages
(Volume 1)
Sound Patterns
Pramod Pandey
Features • Presents the phonological facts of
Indic languages around topics that are of interest
in linguistics and allied disciplines • Presents a
general as well as comparative account of the
word phonological features of the different
linguistic groups of India • Includes exhaustive
lists of the phonological inventories and the
languages in which they occur • Gives an
overview of studies carried out on sound patterns
of Indic languages by providing an up-to-date
bibliography
PB ` 995.00
Contents: Acknowledgements; Prefatory;
1. Introduction to sound patterns in Indic
languages; 2. Indic languages and language
groups; 3. Segments: Consonants; 4. Segments:
vowels; 5. Above segments; maps of the various
Indic language groups; Bibliography.
This new edition of R. A. Hudson's widelyacclaimed textbook Sociolinguistics will be
welcomed by students and teachers alike. To
reflect changes in the field since publication of
the first edition in 1980, the author has added
new sections on politeness, accommodation and
prototypes; and he has expanded discussion of
sex differences in language use, and the
relationship between language and thought. Over
a third of the second edition is completely new,
and there is one new chapter, and ample
coverage of classic topics such as varieties of
language, speech as social interaction, the
quantitative study of speech and linguistic and
social inequality, and remains. Like the first, the
second edition of Sociolinguistics is an
exceptionally-clear and helpful overview of the
relationship of language and society.
ISBN: 9789382993926
Contents: Preface to the second edition; Preface
to the first edition; 1. Introduction; 2. Varieties of
language; 3. Language, culture and thought;
4. Speech as social interaction; 5.The
quantitative study of speech; 6. Linguistic and
social inequality; 7. Theoretical summary;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9780521543071
296pp
Sounds and their patterns in Indic languages
presents the phonological properties of Indic
languages at the word level including inventories
and distribution of phonemes, allophones,
syllable structures and tones. The general
properties of the sound patterns of 148
languages from a total of eight groups as well as
their phonological sketches are presented
keeping the interest of these fields in view. The
description of the languages is complemented
with an exhaustive bibliography that lends the
two volumes the character of a handbook on the
phonology of Indic languages. Volume I: Sound
Patterns contains five chapters that address five
main topics – the descriptive and analytical
issues relating to the presentation of the
phonological sketches, the complex linguistic
situation in India; a classification of Indic
languages is based on internal relations among
them; facts and generalizations relating to
consonantal segments and their patterns and
vowel segments and their patterns; and, lastly,
the main aspects of phonology above the
segment, counting syllable structure, permissible
segment sequences, stress, tone and
phonological cues for grammatical structure.
PB ` 595.00
57
432pp
PB ` 795.00
Sounds and their
patterns in Indic
languages
(Volume 2)
Phonological Sketches
Pramod Pandey
Studies • Performance studies • Film Studies •
Media Studies • Dalit Studies • Women’s Writing •
Comparative Poetics • Cartoon Art • Folklore
Sounds and their patterns in Indic languages
presents the phonological properties of Indic
languages at the word level including inventories
and distribution of phonemes, allophones,
syllable structures and tones. The general
properties of the sound patterns of 148
languages from a total of eight groups as well as
their phonological sketches are presented
keeping the interest of these fields in view. The
description of the languages is complemented
with an exhaustive bibliography that lends the
two volumes the character of a handbook on the
phonology of Indic languages. Volume II:
Phonological Sketches presents the phonological
sketches of 148 languages organized into seven
main groups, namely, Austro-Asiatic, Dravidian,
Indo-Aryan, Tibeto-Burman, Tai-Kadai, Andaman
group, Contact Languages and an eighth group
of Historical Varieties. The sketches are based
on a critical evaluation of published work on the
languages, with a few original contributions.This
book • presents the phonological facts of Indic
languages around topics that are of interest in
linguistics and allied disciplines • presents a
general as well as comparative account of the
word phonological features of the different
linguistic groups of India • includes exhaustive
lists of the phonological inventories and the
languages in which they occur • gives an
overview of studies carried out on sound patterns
of Indic languages by providing an up-to-date
bibliography
Contents: List of Contributors;
Acknowledgements; Prologue to the ‘Quest’;
Introduction; PART I: Traditions and Manifestoes:
Reflecting on Perspectives; Introduction; 1 The
Comparatist as Teacher: Teaching Indian
Literatures through a Comparative Methodology;
2 Comparative Literature: Methodology and
Challenges in Europe with Special Reference to
the French and German Contexts; 3 ‘Lone
Starring’ Comparative Literature in US English
Departments; vi Quest of a Discipline; PART II:
The Quest Motif: Redefining the Scope of
ComparativeLiterature; Introduction; 4 Beyond
‘Other Words’: The ‘Relevance’ of Translatology
as Comparative Literature; 5 Intertextual Lores
and the Play of Language: Folklore/Orality in the
Comparative Context of Literature; 6 Towards a
Comparative Performance Studies; 7 Media
Studies and the Academic Elite; 8 Comparative
Film Studies: The Culture Studies Turn in
Comparative Literature; 9 Finding Space in the
Margin: Teaching Women’s Literature ina
Comparative Perspective; PART III: The
Dynamics of Exchange: Genres, Areas and
Disciplines; Introduction; 10 Text and
Performance: A Study in Cultural Symbiosis with
Special Reference to Kathakali; 11 The Indian
Cartoon Art: A Paradigm for the Emerging
Textand Image Experience; Contents vii; 12 Text
and Alter Text: Chinese Literature in Indian
Translations; 13 Arabic Literature in Diaspora: An
Example from South Asia; 14 Literature, Arts and
Social Sciences: Interdisciplinary; Comparative
Advantage; PART IV: India: A Curious
Comparative Space; Introduction; 15 Towards a
Compoetics in India: Alternative Frameworks for
the Comparative Study of Poetics; 16 The
Relevance of Dalit Studies in the Creation of an
Interdiscipline; 17 Mother Tongue, The Other
Tongue: Indianising English; Afterword:
Comparative? Literature?; Index.
Contents: Introductory Remarks; 1. AustroAsiatic; 2. Dravidian; 3. Indo-Aryan; 4. TibetoBurman; 5. Tai-Kadai; 6. The Andaman Group;
7. Contact Varieties; 8. Historical Varieties;
Bibliography.
ISBN: 9789382993933
Quest of a
Discipline
Rizio Yohannan Raj
604pp PB ` 1195.00
From the days of René Wellek’s Crisis of
Comparative Literature (1959) through the
beginning of the twenty-first century that saw
Gayatri Spivak’s provocative Death of a
Discipline (2003), Comparative Literature as an
academic discipline has endured like no other.
This pioneering volume, Quest of a Discipline,
offers challenging new directions to this field
urging the readers to see the practice of
Comparative Literature as a quest. It showcases
the multicultural, multilingual India as the most
potential site of quest today for the discipline of
Comparative Literature. The deliberations are
divided into sections that deal with traditions,
manifestoes of survival, the latest methodologies,
and perspectives that comparatists from India,
China, the Near West, Europe and America have
brought into the discipline. Each section is
prefaced with a short introduction that locates the
interdisciplinary articles within the paradoxical
wholeness of Comparative Literature.
Challenging and unsettling many basic premises
of comparative studies, the essays explore the
possibility of redefining the scope of Comparative
Literature by forging meaningful interfaces
between the following fields: • Translation
ISBN: 9788175969339
58
328pp
PB ` 495.00
Translating India
Rita Kothari
English as a Unifying Agency- Unification and
Destruction- The Government of India Resolution
of 1913- Calcutta University Commission ( 191719)- The Swadeshi Movement- The Two World
Wars- Reports and More Reports- During the
Struggle for Independence- English Becomes a
Second Language; 4. The Identity Phase: The
White Ruler Departs- Reverence and
Abhorrence- Lessons from History- More
Commissions and Committees- Other
Developments in English Teaching- National
Policy on Education 1968- The Study Group
Report on the Teaching of English (1969-71) National Policy on Education 1986- Acharya
Ramamurti Commission 1990- Curiculum
Development Centre 1989 - The English Boom in
India - The English of Indians or 'Indians'
English'; 5. The Globalization Phase: From
Agrarian Life to IT Revolution- English as a
Global Language- The Changing Role of EnglishIndia at Peace with English - Indians' English: An
Outline- English and Indian Languages- Neocolonialism, Globalization and English- Teaching
English in Post-Independence India: A Search for
Alternatives- Appendices- Further Reading Index.
Post 1980s, what made English translation from
Indian languages a culturally-desirable activity?
This question leads Kothari to examine the
changing cultural universe of urban, Englishspeaking middle class in India. She examines in
detail readership patterns, attitudes to English
and the course of translation studies in general.
The comfort with which English is used with an
Indian language as in ‘Yeh Dil Maange More’ or
‘Hungry Kya’ reflects a sense of familiarity that
has been made with English. From this broader
context of bilingualism in the first part of the
book, Kothari moves on to the state of Gujarat.
Taking up the case of Gujarati, she demonstrates
the micro issues involved in translation and
politics of language
Contents: Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction; 2.
Recalling: English Translations in Colonial India;
3. The Two-Worlds Theory; 4. Within Academia;
5. Outside the Discipline Machine; 6. Publishers'
Perspective; 7. The Case of Gujarati; 8.
Summing Up; Appendix 1; Appendix 2;
Bibliography; Works Cited; Index
ISBN: 9788175963054
138pp
PB ` 295.00
ISBN: 9788175963122
The Story of
English in India
N. Krishnaswamy and
Lalitha Krishnaswamy
With globalization, English has become an
economic necessity and Indians have realized
that they have the ‘English advantage’ over many
other countries like China and Japan. India has
shed its colonial complex towards English and
come to terms with the language; Indians have
separated the English language from the English.
The Story of English in India presents historical
facts in a socio-cultural framework. The book is a
must for all teachers and students of English; it
will be useful for all those interested in the politics
of language and education in India. Key issues
discussed: - Are we indebted to the British for
introducing English in India? - What was the role
of English during India's struggle for freedom? Has English united India? - Has English divided
India into two - the English knowing classes who
govern and the non-English knowing masses
who are governed? - Will English ever become
an Indian tongue spoken in the great Indian
language bazaar? - What will be the future of
major Indian languages in the wake of the
English onslaught? Will it end in linguistic
imperialism and cultural colonialism?
South Asian
Languages
Karumuri V. Subbarao
Contents: Introduction; Acknowledgements; 1.
The Exploration and Transportation Phase- The
Pre-Transportation and Exploration Phase (up to
1813) - The Transportation Phase (1813-30); 2.
The Consolidation Phase: The Grand DesignRenewal of the Charter- Comes MacaulayMacaulay's Minute- The Aftermath of the MinuteWood's Despatch- In Theory and Practice- India:
A Trial Ground- The Indian Education
Commission of 1882; 3. The Dissemination
Phase- Then Came Lord Curzon- The Indian
Universities Commission- The Government of
India Resolution of 1904- The Indian Universities
Act- The Growing Demand and Uniformity-
236pp
PB ` 295.00
South Asian languages are rich in linguistic
diversity and number. This book explores the
similarities and differences of about 40
languages from four different language families
(Austro-Asiatic, Dravidian, Indo-Aryan [IndoEuropean] and Tibeto-Burman [Sino-Tibetan]. It
focuses on the syntactic typology of these
languages and the high degree of syntactic
convergence, with special reference to the notion
of 'India as a linguistic area'. Several areas of
current theoretical interest such as anaphora,
control theory, case and agreement, relative
clauses and the significance of thematic roles in
grammar are discussed. The analysis presented
has significant implications for current theories of
syntax, verbal semantics, first and second
language acquisition, structural language
typology and historical linguistics. The book will
be of interest to linguists working on the
description of South Asian languages, as well as
syntacticians wishing to discover more about the
common structure of languages within this
region.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. South Asian
languages: a preview; 3. Lexical anaphors and
pronouns in South Asian languages; 4. Case and
agreement; 5. Non-nominative subjects;
6. Complementation; 7. Backward control;
8. Noun modification: relative clauses.
ISBN: 9781107035331
59
400pp
HB ` 995.00
Translation
Studies
Alessandra Riccardi
Introducing
Second Language
Acquisition
The study of translation is constantly expanding
in a world that is experiencing a flourish of
translated texts unparalleled in human history.
Courses on translation, theory of translation and
translation studies are being introduced at
university level all over the world. This book
provides a panorama of the many ways in which
the complex phenomenon of translation is
analysed. The contributions to this volume, by a
group of leading international scholars, include
traditional and new approaches in an
interdisciplinary perspective and are
representative of the multiplicity of approaches to
translation studies, from the literary to the
linguistic, from the cognitive to the cross-cultural,
from the descriptive to the applied and to the
psychoanalytical. The range of topics covered
and the exhaustive bibliography make this book a
useful introduction and also provide new and
stimulating readings for those already acquainted
with the discipline.
Muriel Saville-Troike
Contents: 1. Introducing second language
acquisition; 2. Foundations of second language
acquisition; 3. The linguistics of second language
acquisition; 4. The psychology of second
language acquisition; 5. Social contexts of
second language acquisition; 6. Acquiring
knowledge for L2 use; 7. L2 learning and teaching.
Contents: List of figures and tables; Notes on
contributors; Acknowledgements; Introduction
Alessandra Riccardi; 1. Paradoxes and aporias in
translation and translation studies Theo
Hermans; 2. The translator in between texts: on
the textual presence of the translator as an issue
in the methodology of comparative translation
description Cees Koster; 3. Aspects of a theory
of norms and some issues in teaching translation
Rita D. Snel Trampus; 4. Translation as
interpretation Axel Buhler; 5. Translation and
interpretation Alessandra Riccardi; 6. Universality
versus culture specificity in translation Juliane
House; 7. Translation and linguistics: what does
the future hold? Kirsten Malmkjær; 8. Text
linguistics and literary translation Lavinia Merlini
Barbaresi; 9. Closer and closer apart?
Specialized translation in a cognitive perspective
Federica Scarpa; 10. Knowing translation:
cognitive and experiential aspects of translation
expertise from the perspective of expertise
studies Gregory M. Shreve; 11. Towards
characterizing translator expertise, knowledge
and know-how: some findings using TAPs and
experimental methods Robert J. Jarvella, Astrid
Jensen, Elisabeth Halskov Jensen and Mette
Skovgaard Andersen; 12. An evidence-based
approach to applied translation studies
Margherita Ulrych; 13. The difference that
translation makes: the translator's unconscious
Lawrence Venuti; Index.
ISBN: 9780521188456
260pp
Written for students encountering the topic for the
first time, this is a clear and practical introduction
to second language acquisition (SLA). It explains
in non-technical language how a second
language is acquired; what the second language
learner needs to know; and why some learners
are more successful than others. The textbook
introduces in a step-by-step fashion a range of
fundamental concepts – such as SLA in adults
and children, in formal and informal learning
contexts, and in diverse socio-cultural settings –
and takes an interdisciplinary approach,
encouraging students to consider SLA from
linguistic, psychological and social perspectives.
Each chapter contains a list of key terms, a
summary, and a range of graded exercises
suitable for self-testing or class discussion.
Providing a solid foundation in SLA, this book is
set to become the leading introduction to the field
for students of linguistics, psychology, and
education, and trainee language teachers.
ISBN: 9780521188449
English Phonology
An Introduction
Heinz J. Giegerich
214pp
PB ` 595.00
This is an introduction to the phonology of
present-day English. It deals principally with three
varieties of English: 'General American',
Southern British 'Received Pronunciation' and
'Scottish Standard English'. It offers a systematic
and detailed discussion of the features shared by
these major accents, and explains some major
differences. Other varieties of English –
Australian and New Zealand English, South
African English and Hiberno-English – are also
discussed briefly. Without focusing on current
phonological theory and its evolution, the author
demonstrates the importance of 'theory', in
whatever shape or form, in phonological
argumentation. The book also includes a helpful
introductory section on speech sounds and their
production, and detailed suggestions for further
reading follow each chapter. This clear and
helpful textbook will be welcomed by all students
of English language and linguistics.
Contents: Preface; 1. Speech sounds and their
production; 2. Towards a sound system for
English: consonant phonemes; 3. Some vowel
systems of English; 4. Phonological features, part
I: the classification of English vowel phonemes;
5. Phonological features, part II: the consonant
system; 6. Syllables; 7. Word stress; 8. Phonetic
representations: the realisations of phonemes;
9. Phrases, sentences and the phonology of
connected speech; 10. Representations and
derivations; References; Index.
PB ` 495.00
ISBN: 9780521144322
60
349pp
PB ` 495.00
Semantics
A coursebook
Second Edition
James R. Hurford,
Brendan Heasley
and Michael B. Smith
This practical coursebook introduces all the
basics of semantics in a simple, step-by-step
fashion. Each unit includes short sections of
explanation with examples, followed by
stimulating practice exercises to complete in the
book. Feedback and comment sections follow
each exercise to enable students to monitor their
progress. No previous background in semantics
is assumed, as students begin by discovering the
value and fascination of the subject and then
move through all key topics in the field, including
sense and reference, simple logic, word meaning
and interpersonal meaning. New study guides
and exercises have been added to the end of
each unit to help reinforce and test learning. A
completely new unit on non-literal language and
metaphor, plus updates throughout the text
significantly expand the scope of the original
edition to bring it up-to-date with modern teaching
of semantics for introductory courses in
linguistics as well as intermediate students.
Introducing
Phonetic Science
Michael Ashby
and John Maidment
Contents: 1. Introduction to speech; 2. Voice;
3. Place of articulation; 4. Manner of articulation;
5. Vowels; 6. Voice II; 7. Airstream mechanisms;
8. Speech sounds and speech movements;
9. Basic phonological concepts;
10. Suprasegmentals; 11. Speaker and hearer.
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements; Part I.
Basic Ideas in Semantics: Unit 1. About
semantics; Unit 2. Sentences, utterances, and
propositions; Unit 3. Reference and sense; Part
II. From Reference …: Unit 4. Referring
expressions; Unit 5. Predicates; Unit 6.
Predicates, referring expressions, and universe
of discourse; Unit 7. Deixis and definiteness; Unit
8. Words and things. Extensions and prototypes;
Part III. To Sense: Unit 9. Sense properties and
stereotypes; Unit 10. Sense relations (1); Unit 11.
Sense relations (2); Part IV. Logic: Unit 12. About
logic; Unit 13. A notation for simple propositions;
Unit 14. Connectives. And and or; Unit 15. More
connectives; Part V. Word Meaning: Unit 16.
About dictionaries; Unit 17. Meaning postulates;
Unit 18. Properties of predicates; Unit 19.
Derivation; Unit 20. Participant roles; Part VI.
Interpersonal and Non-Literal Meaning: Unit 21.
Speech acts; Unit 22. Perlocutions and
illocutions; Unit 23. Felicity conditions; Unit 24.
Direct and indirect illocutions; Unit 25.
Propositions and illocutions; Unit 26.
Conversational implicature; Unit 27. Non-literal
meaning: idioms, metaphor, and metonymy;
Selected references and recommendations for
further study; Index.
ISBN: 9780521141765
364pp
This accessible new textbook provides a clear
and practical introduction to phonetics, the study
of speech. Assuming no prior knowledge of the
topic, it introduces students to the fundamental
concepts in phonetic science, and equips them
with the essential skills needed for recognizing,
describing and transcribing a range of speech
sounds. Numerous graded exercises enable
students to put these skills into practice, and the
sounds introduced are clearly illustrated with
examples from a variety of English accents and
other languages. As well as looking at traditional
articulatory description, the book introduces
acoustic and other instrumental techniques for
analysing speech, and covers topics such as
speech and writing, the nature of transcription,
hearing and speech perception, linguistic
universals, and the basic concepts of phonology.
ISBN: 9780521733151
Introducing
Phonology
David Odden
230pp
PB ` 595.00
This accessible textbook provides a clear and
practical introduction to phonology, the study of
sound patterns in language. Designed for
students with only a basic knowledge of
linguistics, it teaches in a step-by-step fashion
the logical techniques of phonological analysis
and the fundamental theories that underpin it.
Through more than 60 graded exercises,
students are encouraged to make their own
analyses of phonological patterns and processes,
based on extensive data and problem sets from a
wide variety of languages. Introducing Phonology
equips students with the essential analytical skills
needed for further study in the field, such as how
to think critically and discover generalizations
about data, how to formulate hypotheses, and
how to test them.
Contents: 1. What is phonology?; 2. Phonetic
transcriptions; 3. Allophonic relations;
4. Underlying representations; 5. Interacting
processes; 6. Feature theory; 7. Doing an
analysis; 8. Phonological typology and
naturalness; 9. Abstractness and psychological
reality; 10. Nonlinear representations.
PB ` 495.00
ISBN: 9780521733090
62
360pp
PB ` 595.00
Language and
Linguistics
An Introduction
John Lyons
A general introduction to linguistics and the study
of language, intended particularly for beginners
and readers with no previous knowledge or
training in the subject. There is first a general
account of the nature of language and of the
aims, methods and basic principles of linguistic
theory. John Lyons then introduces in turn each
of the main sub-fields of linguistics: the sounds of
language, grammar, semantics, language
change, psycholinguistics, language and culture.
Pragmatics
Stephen Levinson
Contents: Preface; 1. Language; 2. Linguistics;
3. The sounds of language; 4. Grammar;
5. Semantics; 6. Language-change; 7. Some
modern schools and movements; 8. Language
and mind; 9. Language and society;
10. Language and culture; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9780521540889
357pp
Those aspects of language use that are crucial to
an understanding of language as a system, and
especially to an understanding of meaning, are
the acknowledged concern of linguistic
pragmatics. Yet until now much of the work in this
field has not been easily accessible to the
student, and was often written at an intimidating
level of technicality. In this textbook, however,
Dr. Levinson has provided a lucid and integrative
analysis of the central topics in pragmatics –
deixis, implicature, presupposition, speech acts,
and conversational structure.
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements; Notation
conventions; 1. The scope of pragmatics;
2. Deixis; 3. Conversational implicature;
4. Presupposition; 5. Speech acts;
6. Conversational structure; 7. Conclusions;
Bibliography; Subject index; Index of names.
PB ` 500.00
ISBN: 9780521540896
Linguistics
An Introduction
Andrew Radford,
Martin Atkinson,
David Britain,
Harald Clahsen
and Andrew Spencer
Language, Culture,
and Society
A self-contained introduction to language and
linguistics, this book offers a unified approach to
language from several perspectives. It provides
the tools necessary for understanding the
complex structure of a language. The book is
divided into three sections – sounds, words, and
sentences – which address both foundational
concepts and linguistic applications.
Key Topics in Linguistic
Anthropology
Christine Jourdan and
Kevin Tuite
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
maps; List of appendices; A note for course
organisers and class teachers on the use of this
book; Contents; Introduction; Part I. Sounds:
1. Introduction; 2. Sounds and suprasegmentals;
3. Sound variation; 4. Sound change;
5. Phonemes, syllables and phonological
processes; 6. Child phonology; 7. Processing
sounds; Part II. Words: 8. Introduction; 9. Word
classes; 10. Building words; 11. Morphology
across languages; 12. Word meaning;
13. Children and words; 14. Lexical processing
and the mental lexicon; 15. Lexical disorders;
16. Lexical variation and change; Part III.
Sentences: 17. Introduction; 18. Basic
terminology; 19. Sentence structure; 20. Empty
categories; 21. Movement; 22. Syntactic
variation; 23. Logical form; 24. Children’s
sentences; 25. Sentence processing;
26. Syntactic disorders; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9780521544887
454pp
735pp
PB ` 495.00
Language, our primary tool of thought and
perception, is at the heart of who we are as
individuals. Languages are constantly changing,
sometimes into entirely new varieties of speech,
leading to subtle differences in how we present
ourselves to others. This revealing account
brings together eleven leading specialists from
the fields of linguistics, anthropology, philosophy
and psychology, to explore the fascinating
relationship between language, culture, and
social interaction. A range of major questions are
discussed: How does language influence our
perception of the world? How do new languages
emerge? How do children learn to use language
appropriately? What factors determine language
choice in bi- and multilingual communities? How
far does language contribute to the formation of
our personalities? And finally, in what ways does
language make us human? Language, Culture
and Society will be essential reading for all those
interested in language and its crucial role in our
social lives.
Contents: Introduction: Walking through wallsChristine Jourdan and Kevin Tuite; 1. An issue
about language- Charles Taylor; 2. Linguistic
relativities- John Leavitt; 3. Benjamin Lee Whorf
and the boasian foundations of contemporary
ethnolinguistics- Regna Darnell; 4. Cognitive
anthropology- Penelope Brown; 5.
Methodological issues in cross-language colour
naming- Paul Kay; 6. Pidgins and creoles
genesis: an anthropological offering- Christine
Jourdan; 7. Bilingualism- Monica Heller; 8. The
impact of language socialization on grammatical
development- Elinor Ochs and Bambi Schieffelin;
9. Intimate grammars: anthropological and
psychoanalytic accounts of language, gender,
and desire- Elizabeth Povinelli; 10. Maximizing
ethnopoetics: toward the fine-tuning
(anthropological) experience- Paul Friedrich;
11. Of phonemes, fossils and webs of meaning:
the interpretation of language variation and
change- Kevin Tuite
PB ` 495.00
ISBN: 9781316604342
63
322pp
PB ` 495.00
Sociolinguistic
Variation
Theories, Methods, and
Applications
Robert Bayley
and Ceil Lucas
The Study of
Langugage
Why does human language vary from one
person, or one group, to another? In what ways
does it vary? How do linguists go about studying
variation in, say, the sound system or the
sentence structure of a particular language? Why
is the study of language variation important
outside the academic world, in say education, the
law, employment or housing? This book provides
an overview of these questions, bringing together
a team of experts to survey key areas within the
study of language variation and language
change. Covering both the range of methods
used to research variation in language, and the
applications of such research to a variety of
social contexts, it is essential reading for
advanced students and researchers in
sociolinguistics, communication, linguistic
anthropology and applied linguistics.
George Yule
Contents: Introduction- Robert Bayley and Ceil
Lucas; Part I. Theories:; 1. Variation and
phonological theory- Gregory R. Guy; 2. Variation
and syntactic theory- Lisa Green; 3. The
psycholinguistic unity of inherent variability: old
Occam whips out his razor- Ralph W. Fasold and
Dennis R. Preston; 4. The study of variation in
historical perspective- Kirk Hazen; 5. Style in
dialogue: Bakhtin and sociolinguistic theoryAllan Bell; 6. Variation and historical linguisticsMichael Montgomery; 7. Second language
acquisition: a variationist perspective- Robert
Bayley; 8. Variation and modality- Ceil
Lucas;Part II. Methods; 9. Fieldwork- Natalie
Schilling-Estes; 10. Quantitative analysis- Sali A.
Tagliamonte; 11. Sociophonetics- Erik R.
Thomas; Part III. Applications; 12. Sociolinguistic
variation and education- Carolyn Temple Adger
and Donna Christian; 13. Lessons learned from
the Ebonics controversy: implications for
language assessment- Anna F. Vaughn-Cooke;
14. Variation and versatility in the classroom:
contrastive analysis revisited- Angela E. Rickford
and John R. Rickford; 15. Social-political
influences on research practices: examining
language acquisition by African American
children- Ida J. Stockman; 16. Sociolinguistic
variation and the law- Ronald R. Butters;
17. Attitudes towards variation and ear-witness
testimony- John Baugh; Afterword- Roger W.
Shuy.
ISBN: 9781316604366
422pp
This bestselling textbook provides an engaging
and user-friendly introduction to the study of
language. Assuming no prior knowledge of the
subject, Yule presents information in bite-sized
sections, clearly explaining the major concepts in
linguistics – from how children learn language to
why men and women speak differently, through
all the key elements of language. This fifth edition
has been revised and updated with new figures
and tables, additional topics, and numerous new
examples using languages from across the world.
To increase student engagement and to foster
problem-solving and critical thinking skills, the
book includes thirty new tasks. An expanded and
revised online study guide provides students with
further resources, including answers and tutorials
for all tasks, while encouraging lively and
proactive learning. This is the most fundamental
and easy-to-use introduction to the study of
language.
Contents: 1. The origins of language; 2. Animals
and human language; 3. The sounds of
language; 4. The sound patterns of language; 5.
Word-formation; 6. Morphology; 7. Grammar; 8.
Syntax; 9. Semantics; 10. Pragmatics; 11.
Discourse analysis; 12. Language and the brain;
13. First language acquisition; 14. Second
language acquisition/learning; 15. Gestures and
sign languages; 16. Written language; 17.
Language history and change; 18. Regional
variation in language; 19. Social variation in
language; 20. Language and culture; Glossary.
ISBN: 9781316606377
334pp
PB ` 525.00
LAW
Corporate
Governance
The Indian Scenario
Vasudha Joshi
PB ` 895.00
Corporate governance is part of an economy's
system, which has today become the most
important mechanism for resource allocation. It is
affected by capital market, block holders,
institutional investors, proxy wars, company law
and capital market regulations, and many other
macro-economic as well as political factors.
Historical evolution of corporate governance
naturally has a bearing on current developments.
This book is an attempt to weave these factors
together coherently.
Contents: Preface; 1 Corporate Governance:
Placing the Issues; Introduction; Backdrop:
change in ‘real’ factor; Importance of Corporate
Governance; Some Definitions; Principles of
Corporate Governance; Part I; 2 Major Corporate
Governance Systems; American Corporate
Governance Systems - Brief Historical
Background; British Corporate Governance
System-Brief Historical Background; German
Corporate Governance System-Brief Historical
Background; Japanese Corporate Governance
System-Brief Historical Background; Conclusion;
3 Anglo-American Corporate Governance
System; Board of Directors Structure; Executive
Compensation; Ownership Structure; Financial
64
Structure; Institutional Framework; Disclosure of
Information; Voting Rights of Shareholders;
Voting by Proxy and Proxy Contests; Takeovers
and Takeover Defenses; Appendix I: History of
Voting Rights of Shareholders; Appendix II:
Shareholders’ Voting Rights in USA in Twentieth
Century; 4 Perspectives and Models of Corporate
Governance; Three Perspectives; Important
Questions; Theory of Corporate Governance Insights from Transaction Cost Economics;
Insights from Contract Theory; Models of
Corporate Governance - Principal-agent model; Myopic Market Model; - Political Economy Model;
Conclusion; 5 Indian Corporate Governance: A
Review; Historical Heritage: the beginning;
Historical Heritage: Independence to 1980s;
From 1990 till date; Changes in Company
Finance; Indian Corporate Governance System
Today; Appendix I: Some Data on Equity
Ownership; Part II; 6 Board of Directors: The
Topmost Internal Governance Mechanism;
Introduction; Functions of the Board; Role and
Working; Election and Composition; Size of the
Board; Board Chairman; Term of Office;
Compensation of Directors; Board Committees Audit Committee; - Nomination Committee; Remuneration/ Compensation Committee;
Evaluation of Board Performance; Some
Suggestions for Improvement; Indian Boards;
Nominee Directors; Current Changes; Appendix:
Kumar Managalam Birla Committee on Corporate
Governance; 7 Institutional Investors: Much Ado
About Nothing?; The Issue; Structure and
Investment Policies of Institutional Investors;
Intervention by Institutional Investors; Forms of
Intervention; A Brief Review of Development in
the USA and the UK; - The USA; - The UK;
CalPERS in Corporate Governance Movement;
Situation in India; Unit Trust of India (UTI);
Appendix: Mutual Funds and Corporate
Governance; 8 Political Economy of Indian
Corporate Governance; Understanding Indian
Reality; Response of Indian Business Houses; Articulation of Interest; - Business Restructuring;
Changes in Capital Market; Coming Back to
Corporate Governance in India; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9788175962040
173pp
Paper Tiger
Law, Bureaucracy and
the Developmental
State in Himalayan
India
Nayanika Mathur
A big cat overthrows the Indian state and
establishes a reign of terror over the residents of
a Himalayan town. A developmental legislation
aimed at providing employment and commanding
a huge budget becomes ‘unimplementable’ in a
region bedeviled by high levels of poverty and
unemployment. Paper Tiger provides a lively
ethnographic account of how such seeminglybizarre scenarios come to be in present day
India. This book presents a unique explanation
for why and how progressive laws in India can do
what they do and not, ever-so-often, what they
are supposed to do. On the basis of a meticulous
detailing of everyday bureaucratic life on India’s
Himalayan borderland, it proposes an
ethnographically-derived concept – paper tiger –
as a modality for the study of the state. It shifts
the very frames of thought through which we will
henceforth understand the implementation of law
and the workings of the developmental Indian
state.
Contents: Acknowledgements: Glossary;
Acronyms; Prologue; Introduction; Chapter 1. A
Remote Town: The Paper State; Chapter 2. The
State Life of Law; Chapter 3. The Material
Production of Transparency; Chapter 4. The
Letter of the State; Chapter 5. Meeting one
another: Paper Tiger?; Chapter 6. The Reign of
Terror of the Big Cat; Conclusion; The State as a
Paper Tiger; References; Index.
ISBN: 9781107106970
Human Rights
under StateEnforced Religious
Family Laws in
Israel, Egypt and
India
Yüksel Sezgin
PB ` 595.00
214pp
HB ` 795.00
About one-third of the world's population
currently lives under pluri-legal systems where
governments hold individuals subject to the
purview of ethno-religious rather than national
norms in respect to family law. How does the
state-enforcement of these religious family laws
impact fundamental rights and liberties? What
resistance strategies do people employ in order
to overcome the disabilities and limitations these
religious laws impose upon their rights? Based
on archival research, court observations and
interviews with individuals from three countries,
Yüksel Sezgin shows that governments have
often intervened in order to impress a particular
image of subjectivity upon a society, while people
have constantly challenged the interpretive
monopoly of courts and state-sanctioned
religious institutions, re-negotiated their rights
and duties under the law, and changed the
system from within. He also identifies key
lessons and best practices for the integration of
universal human rights principles into religious
legal systems.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Personal status,
nation-building, and the postcolonial state; 3. The
impact of state-enforced personal status laws on
human rights; 4. A fragmented confessional
system: state-enforced religious family laws and
human rights in Israel; 5. A unified confessional
system: state-enforced religious family laws and
human rights in Egypt; 6. A unified semi-
65
confessional system: state-enforced religious
family laws and human rights in India;
7. Conclusion: upholding human rights under
religious legal systems.
ISBN: 9781107104761
International Law
Sixth Edition
Malcolm N. Shaw
322pp
Toppling Qaddafi
Libya and the Limits of
Liberal Intervention
Christopher S. Chivvis
HB ` 995.00
Malcolm Shaw’s engaging and authoritative
International Law has become the definitive
textbook for instructors and students alike, in this
increasingly popular field of academic study. The
hallmark writing style provides a stimulating
account, motivating students to explore the
subject more fully, while maintaining detail and
academic rigour. The analysis integrated in the
textbook challenges students to develop critical
thinking skills. The sixth edition is
comprehensively updated throughout and is
carefully constructed to reflect current teaching
trends and course coverage. The International
Court of Justice is now examined in a separate
dedicated chapter and there is a new chapter on
international criminal law.
Contents: 1.Libya and the light footprint;
2. Precipitous crisis; 3. The pivots of war;
4. Crippling Qaddafi and infighting over NATO;
5. Stalemate; 6. Grinding away; 7. Sudden
success; 8. The impact of the war and its
implications.
ISBN:9781107451544
Contents: 1. The nature and development of
international law; 2. International law today; 3.
Sources; 4. International law and municipal law;
5. The subjects of international law; 6. The
international protection of human rights; 7. The
regional protection of human rights; 8. Individual
criminal responsibility in international law; 9.
Recognition; 10. Territory; 11. The law of the sea;
12. Jurisdiction; 13. Immunities from jurisdiction;
14. State responsibility; 15. International
environmental law; 16. The law of treaties; 17.
State succession; 18. The settlement of disputes
by peaceful means; 19. The International Court of
Justice; 20. International law and the use of force
by states; 21. International humanitarian law; 22.
The United Nations; 23. International institutions.
ISBN: 9781107008328
Toppling Qaddafi is a carefully-researched and
highly readable look at the role of the United
States and NATO in Libya's war of liberation and
its lessons for future military interventions. Based
on extensive interviews within the US
Government, this book recounts the story of how
the United States and its European allies went to
war against Muammar Qaddafi in 2011, why they
won the war, and what the implications for NATO,
Europe, and Libya will be. This was a war that
few saw coming, and many worried would go
badly awry, but in the end the Qaddafi regime fell
and a new era in Libya's history dawned.
Whether this is the kind of intervention that can
be repeated, however, remains an open question
- as does Libya's future and that of its
neighbours.
Decolonising
International Law
Development,
Economic Growth and
the Politics of
Universality
Sundhya Pahuja
1708pp HB ` 1295.00
264pp
PB ` 495.00
The universal promise of contemporary
international law has long inspired countries of
the Global South to use it as an important field of
contestation over global inequality. Taking three
central examples, Sundhya Pahuja argues that
this promise has been subsumed within a
universal claim for a particular way of life by the
idea of ‘development’. As the horizon of the
promised transformation and concomitant
equality has receded ever further, international
law has legitimized an ever-increasing sphere of
intervention in the Third World. The post-war
wave of decolonization ended in the creation of
the developmental nation-state, the claim to
permanent sovereignty over natural resources in
the 1950s and 1960s was transformed into the
protection of foreign investors, and the promotion
of the rule of international law in the early 1990s
has brought about the rise of the rule of law as a
development strategy in the present day.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Inaugurating a new
rationality; 3. From decolonisation to
developmental nation state; 4. From permanent
sovereignty to investor protection; 5. From the
rule of international law to the internationalisation
of the rule of law; 6. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107027367
66
318pp
HB ` 995.00
An Introduction to
International
Criminal Law and
Procedure
Second Edition
Robert Cryer, Hakan
Friman, Darryl
Robinson and
Elizabeth Wilmshurst
This market-leading textbook gives an
authoritative account of international criminal law,
and focuses on what the student needs to know –
the crimes that are dealt with by international
courts and tribunals as well as the procedures
that police follow for the investigation and
prosecution of those crimes. The reader is guided
through controversies with an accessible, yet
sophisticated, approach by the author team of
four international lawyers, with experience both of
teaching the subject, and as negotiators at the
foundation of the International Criminal Court and
the Rome conference. It is an invaluable
introduction for all students of international
criminal law and international relations, and now
covers developments in the ICC, victims’ rights,
and alternatives to international criminal justice,
as well as including extended coverage of
terrorism. Short, well chosen excerpts allow
students to familiarize themselves with primary
material from a wide range of sources. An
extensive package of online resources is also
available.
International Law
from Below
Development, Social
Movements and Third
World Resistance
Balakrishnan Rajagopal
Contents: Part I. Introduction; 1. Introduction:
what is international criminal law?; 2. The
objectives of international criminal law; Part II.
Prosecutions in National Courts; 3. Jurisdiction;
4. National prosecutions of international crimes;
5. State cooperation with respect to national
proceedings; Part III. International Prosecutions;
6. The history of international criminal
prosecutions: Nuremberg and Tokyo; 7. The ad
hoc international criminal tribunals; 8. The
International Criminal Court; 9. Other courts with
international elements; 10. Genocide; 11. Crimes
against humanity; 12. War crimes;
13. Aggression; 14. Transnational crimes,
terrorism and torture; Part IV. Principles and
Procedures of International Prosecutions;
15. General principles of liability; 16. Defences/
grounds for excluding criminal responsibility;
17. Procedures of international criminal
investigations and prosecutions; 18. Victims in
the international criminal process; 19. Sentencing
and penalties; Part V. Relationship between
National and International Systems; 20. State
cooperation with the international courts and
tribunals; 21. Immunities; 22. Alternatives and
complements to criminal prosecution; 23. The
future of international criminal law.
ISBN: 9781107655386
684pp
The emergence of transnational social
movements as major actors in international
politics – as witnessed in Seattle in 1999 and
elsewhere – has sent shockwaves through the
international system. Many questions have arisen
about the legitimacy, coherence and efficiency of
the international order in the light of the
challenges posed by social movements. This
ground-breaking book offers a fundamental
critique of twentieth-century international law
from the perspective of Third World social
movements – the first ever to do so. It examines
in detail the growth of core key components of
modern international law – international
institutions and human rights – in the context of
changing historical patterns of Third World
resistance. Using a historical and interdisciplinary
approach, Rajagopal presents compelling
evidence challenging current debates on the
evolution of norms and institutions, the meaning
and nature of the Third World, as well as the
political economy of its involvement in the
international system.
Contents: Abbreviations; Preface and
acknowledgements; Introduction; Part I.
International Law, Development and Third World
Resistance; 1. Writing Third World resistance into
international law; 2. International law and the
development encounter; Part II. International
Law, Third World Resistance and the
Institutionalization of Development: the Invention
of the Apparatus; 3. Laying the groundwork: the
Mandate system; 4. Radicalizing institutions and/
or institutionalizing radicalism? UNCTAD and the
NIEO debate; 5. From resistance to renewal:
Bretton Woods institutions and the emergence of
the ‘new’ development agenda; 6. Completing a
full circle: democracy and the discontent of
development; Part III. Decolonizing Resistance:
Human Rights and the Challenge of Social
Movements; 7. Human rights and the Third
World: constituting the discourse of resistance;
8. Recoding resistance: social movements and
the challenge to international law; 9. Markets,
gender and identity: a case study of the Working
Women’s Forum as a social movement; Part IV.
Epilogue; References; Index.
ISBN: 9788175962545
PB ` 995.00
67
360pp
PB ` 595.00
International
Human Rights Law
Cases, Materials,
Commentary
Olivier De Schutter
How do you keep students motivated when their
perception of a subject conflicts with the reality of
its academic study? International human rights
law, unquestionably an exciting field, is also
complex and demanding. With his breakthrough
textbook, De Schutter focuses on international
human rights law as global legal system, rather
than as a collection of different (though related)
rights, giving it relevance and immediacy.
Drawing on cases and materials from a wide
range of sources, it shows how human rights law
is used as a tool to address contemporary issues
such as counter-terrorism, global poverty and
religious diversity. Materials are organized
thematically, allowing readers to make
comparisons and connections between different
legal treaties and systems. Students can also
easily assess how human rights are protected
under domestic and international laws. The law is
placed in context throughout, ensuring full
understanding of why laws exist and how they
work.
Bondage during Post-Independence Period:
Policy Developments; 4. Problems in the
Implementation of Bonded Labour System
(Abolition) Act; 5. Rehabilitation of Released
Bonded Labour; 6. Judicial Intervention;
Conclusion; Appendices; Glossary; Biographical
Notes; Bibliographical Essay; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967465
Inside Lawyers’
Ethics
Christine Parker
and Adrian Evans
Contents: Part I. The Sources: Introduction;
1. The origins; 2. Human rights as part of public
international law; 3. State responsibility and
‘jurisdiction’; Part II. The Substantive Obligations:
Introduction; 4. The obligation to respect; 5. The
obligation to protect; 6. The obligation to fulfil; 7.
Derogations in times of public emergency; 8. The
prohibition of discrimination; Part III. Mechanisms
of Protection: 9. Ensuring compliance with
international human rights law: the role of
national authorities; 10. The United Nations
human rights treaties system; 11. The United
Nations Charter-based monitoring of human
rights; 12. Regional mechanisms of protection.
ISBN: 9781107641556
Human Rights
and Law
Bonded Labour in India
Ramesh Kumar Tiwari
187pp
HB ` 595.00
Legal ethics is often described as an oxymoron
or contradiction in terms – lay people find the
concept amusing and lawyers can find ethics
impossible. The best lawyers are those who have
come to grips with their own values and actively
seek to improve their ethical practice. This book
is designed to help law students and new lawyers
understand and modify their own ethical
priorities, not just because this knowledge makes
it easier to practice law and earn an income, but
because self-aware, ethical legal practice is right
and feels better than anything else. Packed with
case studies of ethical scandals and dilemmas
from real life legal practice in Australia, each
chapter delves into the most difficult issues
lawyers face. From lawyers’ part in corporate
fraud to the ethics of time-based billing, Parker
and Evans expose the values that underlie
current practice and set out the alternatives
ethical lawyers might follow.
Contents: 1. Introduction: values in practice;
2. Alternative to adversarial advocacy; 3. The
responsibility climate: regulation of lawyers’
ethics; 4. Civil litigation and excessive
adversarialism; 5. Ethics in criminal justice: proof
and truth; 6. Ethics in negotiation and alternative
dispute resolution; 7. Conflicting loyalties;
8. Lawyers’ fees and costs: billing and overcharging; 9. Corporate lawyers and corporate
misconduct; 10. Conclusion - personal
professionalism: personal values and legal
professionalism.
1152pp PB ` 1295.00
Human Rights and Law deals with the problem of
debt bondage and the way it has been treated
during the British as well as in the postindependence period. Analysis has been made of
the motivations for carrying out the reform; the
processes involved in formulating the legislation,
contributions by different agencies, discussion in
the parliament, etc. The two legislations: the
Indian Slavery Act, 1843 and bonded labour
system (Abolition) Act, 1976 provide a
comparative perspective in the making of social
legislation in two different historical settings and
different political systems.The statute on debt
and its enforcement has been carried out by four
distinct political authorities. India under the
Company, India under the Crown; Provincial
Governments (1937–1939); and Independent
India. The problems in the enforcement of the
statutes have been analysed drawing evidence
from modern Indian history, state-society
relationship, motivations of the officials and the
political context of administration.
ISBN: 9781107606197
Contents: List of Tables; Foreword; Preface;
1. Introduction; 2. Slavery and Debt Bondage in
British India : Policy and Implementation; 3. Debt
68
288pp
PB ` 395.00
Modern Legal
Drafting
A Guide to Using
Clearer Language
Second Edition
Peter Butt and
Richard Castle
In the second edition of this highly-regarded text,
the authors show how and why traditional legal
language has developed the peculiar
characteristics that make legal documents
inaccessible to the end users. Incorporating
recent research and case law, the book provides
a critical examination of case law and the rules of
interpretation. Detailed case studies illustrate
how obtuse or outdated words, phrases and
concepts can be rewritten, reworked or removed
altogether. Particularly useful is the step-by-step
guide to drafting in the modern style, using
examples from four types of common legal
documents: leases, company constitutions, wills
and conveyances. Readers will gain an
appreciation of the historical influences on
drafting practice and the use of legal terminology.
They will learn about the current moves to reform
legal language, and receive clear instruction on
how to make their writing clearer and their legal
documents more useful.
unconscionability; Part VI. Terms and
Interpretation; 12. Terms in general; 13. Implied
terms; 14. Interpretation and rectification of written
contracts; 15. Exclusion clauses; Part VII.
Breakdown and Liability; 16. Frustration;
17. Breach and performance; Part VIII. Remedies
for Breach; 18. Judicial remedies for breach of
contract; 19. Consensual remedies for breach of
contract: liquidated damages and deposits; Part
IX. Illegality and Public Policy; 20. Illegality and
public policy; Part X. The Future; 21. International
and European ‘soft law codes’: lessons for English
law?
ISBN: 9781107662810
Presidential
Legislation in India
Contents: Introduction; 1. What influences the
legal drafter; 2. How legal documents are
interpreted; 3. The move towards Modern English
in legal drafting; 4. Some benefits of drafting in
plain English; 5. What to avoid when drafting
modern documents; 6. How to draft modern
documents; 7. Using the modern style; Further
reading.
ISBN: 9781107688322
Contract Law
Neil Andrews
272pp
The Law and Practice
of Ordinances
Shubhankar Dam
PB ` 395.00
This textbook takes a fresh approach to contract
law; as a first edition it reflects the subject in the
twenty-first century more accurately than other
texts. Comprehensive and scholarly, it maps the
curriculum perfectly but detailed references and
further reading sections encourage students to
explore the subject further. Understanding is
paramount and chapter introductions clearly
guide students through the material. The
textbook takes an innovative approach to case
law: breaking down and discussing individual
elements of a case and selecting short key
extracts it gives students the tools to read cases
independently and with confidence. An
examination of the historical and theoretical
foundations of the subject and a concluding
chapter tracking emerging fields ensure the
broadest possible perspective. Discussion of key
recent cases such as Durham Tess Valley Airport
(2010) and Chartbrook (2009) make this
important new text a must for contract law
students.
798pp
PB ` 895.00
India has a parliamentary system. Yet the
president has authority to occasionally enact
legislation (or ordinances) without involving
parliament. This book is a study of ordinances at
the national level in India, centred around three
themes. First, it tells the story of how an artifact
of British constitutional history, over time,
became part of India’s legislative system.
Second, it offers an empirical account of the
ways in which presidents have resorted to
ordinances in post-independence India. Third, the
book analyses a range of ordinance-related
questions, including some that are yet to be
judicially adjudicated. In the process, the book
explains why much of the Indian Supreme
Court’s jurisprudence is mistaken and what
should take its place. Overall, the book explains
why the fate of parliamentary reforms in India
may be tied to the reform of the provision for
ordinances. Standing at the intersection of
constitutional law and political science,
Presidential Legislation in India offers a new
frame through which to assess executives’
legislative powers in both parliamentary and
presidential systems.
Contents: List of Tables; List of Abbreviations;
Acknowledgements; Introduction: Alternatives to
Parliamentary Legislation; Part I: Origins and
Practice; 1. The Transplant Effect: Early Origins
of Ordinances in England and India; 2.
Legislative Surrogacy: Cabinets and Ordinances,
1952-2009; Part II: Law and Interpretation;
3. Negotiating the Text: Ordinances, Article 123
and the Interpretative Deficit; 4. Reading Minds:
Presidential Satisfaction and Judicial Review of
Ordinances; 5. The Power of No: Presidents,
Cabinets and the Making of Ordinances;
Conclusion: ‘Edwardian’ Reading of Ordinances;
Bibliography; Index.
Contents: Part I. Introduction; 1. Main features of
contract law; Part II. Formation; 2. The precontractual phase; 3. Offer and acceptance;
4. Certainty; Part III. Consideration and Intent to
Create Legal Relations; 5. Consideration and
estoppel; 6. Intent to create legal relations; Part
IV. Third Parties and Assignment: 7. Third
parties; 8. Assignment; Part V. Vitiating
Elements: 9. Misrepresentation; 10. Mistake;
11. Duress, undue influence, and
ISBN: 9781107444348
69
278pp
PB ` 495.00
Piracy in the Indian
Film Industry
Copyright and Cultural
Consonance
Arul George Scaria
This book sheds light on how copyright law works
at the grassroots level in India, by exploring the
social, cultural, historical, legal and economic
dimensions of piracy in one of the biggest
copyright-based industries: the Indian film
industry. Based on extensive fieldwork, this book
provides novel and insightful findings on the
complexity and diversity of perceptions regarding
piracy within Indian society. The bottom-up
approach analysis adopted in the book elucidates
how local factors influence copyright enforcement
and the book proposes a mix of positive and
negative incentives to increase the voluntary
compliance of copyright law in India.
Cartel Regulation
India in an International
Perspective
Lovely Dasgupta
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgments; List of
Abbreviations; 1. Introduction; 2. Piracy and the
Indian Film Industry; 3. Copyright Law in India: A
Historical, Cultural and Legal Analysis;
4. Copyright Piracy and Consumers: Insights
from an Empirical Survey; 5. In Search of
Optimal Legal and Policy Options; 6. Conclusion;
Appendix 1: Detailed Description of the
Methodology Used in the Study; Appendix 2:
Questionnaire Used for the Empirical Survey;
Appendix 3: Tables; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107065437
The Electronic
Silk Road
How the Web Binds the
World Together in
Commerce
Anupam Chander
338pp
The book also compares the Indian regulator’s
approach vis-à-vis the approach taken by the fair
trade regulators in more advanced jurisdictions
like the EU, the US and the UK. Importantly, it
introduces readers to a developing country
perspective by bringing forth the impact of cartels
on bargaining power of both end consumer as
well as intermediaries. It also provides workable
solutions to enhance the efficacy of anti-cartel
provisions.
HB ` 795.00
Contents: Preface; Abbreviations;
1. Introduction; 2. Cartels: Understanding the
Sum and Substance of the Concept; 3. Cartels
and Consumer Interests in the US; 4. EU, Cartels
and Consumer Interests; 5. India, Cartels and
Consumer Interests: The MRTP Phase;
6. Cartels, Consumer Interests and India PostMRTP Phase; Conclusion; Appendix 1; Appendix
2; Bibliography; Index.
On the ancient Silk Road, treasure-laden
caravans made their arduous way through
deserts and mountain passes, establishing trade
between Asia and the civilizations of Europe and
the Mediterranean. Today’s electronic Silk Roads
ferry information across continents, enabling
individuals and corporations anywhere to provide
or receive services without obtaining a visa. But
the legal infrastructure for such trade is yet
rudimentary and uncertain. If an event in
cyberspace occurs at once everywhere and
nowhere, what law applies? How can consumers
be protected when engaging with companies
across the world? In this accessible book, cyberlaw expert Anupam Chander provides the first
thorough discussion of the law that relates to
global e-commerce. Addressing up-to-the-minute
examples, such as Google’s struggles with
China, the Pirate Bay’s skirmishes with
Hollywood, and the outsourcing of services to
India, the author insightfully analyses the
difficulties of regulating Internet trade. Chander
then lays out a framework for future policies,
showing how countries can dismantle barriers
while still protecting consumer interests.
ISBN: 9789382993759
Theory and
Practice of
Corporate
Governance
An Integrated Approach
Stephen Bloomfield
Contents: Acknowledgments; Introduction:
Tracing a Silk Road Through Cyberspace; 1. The
New Global Division of Labor; 2. Western
Entrepot: Silicon Valley; 3. Eastern Entrepot:
Bangalore; 4. Pirates of Cyberspace; 5.
Facebookistan; 6. Freeing Trade in Cyberspace;
7. Handshakes Across the World; 8.
Glocalization and Harmonization; 9. Last Stop:
Middle Kingdom; Afterword • Glossary: A Cheat
Sheet for Global E-Commerce • Notes • Index.
ISBN: 9789382993223
302pp
The recent decision of the Competition
Commission of India imposing ` 60 billion as
penalties on the cement cartels exemplifies the
extent to which cartelization affects the Indian
consumers. The book looks into the law, policy
and practice that inform the anti-cartel provisions
within the Indian Competition Act 2002. In the
process, it tries to establish that even though the
anti-cartel provisions of the Indian Competition
Act are ambiguous on their support or opposition
to cartels, the primary purpose of the Act is
protection of the interest of consumers.
Therefore, the Competition Commission of India
and the Central Government are expected to
come up with such regulations and notifications
that help in clarifying the scope of the anti-cartel
provisions in the interest of consumers.
384pp
HB ` 995.00
Theory and Practice of Corporate Governance
explains how the real world of corporate
governance works. It offers new definitions of
governance and new conceptual models for
investigating governance and corporate
behaviour, based on both practical experience
and academic investigation. In examining the
historical development of corporate governance,
it integrates issues of company law, regulatory
practice and company administration with
contemporary corporate governance policies and
structures. An extensive range of international
examples, both recent and historical, is used to
compare theoretical explanations of governance
behaviour with practical outcomes. The book will
be particularly suitable for students taking an
ICSA-accredited course – giving a necessary
critical view on governance, law and regulation –
and through utilizing new conceptual models, it
will stimulate debate among both theorists and
practitioners.
Contents: List of Figures and Tables;
Introduction; Part 1: The Discipline of
Governance; Part 2: The Relationship Between
Law and Governance; Part 3: Governance and
PB ` 795.00
70
Reverence, Resistance
and Politics of Seeing the
Indian National Flag
Sadan Jha
This book studies the politics that make the
tricolour flag possibly the most revered
among symbols, icons and markers associated
with nation and nationalism in twentieth
century India. The emphasis on the flag as a
visual symbol aims to question certain
dominant assumptions about visuality.
Anchored on Mahatma Gandhi’s ‘believing
eye’, this study reveals specificities of visual
experience in the South Asian milieu. This
account begins with a survey of the precolonial period, focuses on colonial lives of
the flag and moves ahead to explain
contemporary dynamics of seeing the flag in
India. The Flag Satyagraha of Jubblepore and
Nagpur in 1922-23, the adoption of Congress
Flag in 1931, the resolution for the future flag
in the Constituent Assembly of India in 1947,
history of the colour saffron, codes governing
the flag as well as legal cases are few such
examples explored in depth in this book.
Sadan Jha is Associate Professor at the Centre
for Social Studies, Surat. His research
interests are history of visuality, history of
symbols and icons like spinning wheel and
Bharat Mata, history of colours, and the
contemporary urban experiences of Surat.
Hardback | 978-1-107-11887-4 | ` 790.00
www.cambridge.org
the Listed Company; Part 4: Governance and
Regulation; Part 5: Counter-Governance:
Failures of Governance and Corporate Failure •
Bibliography • Index.
ISBN: 9781107667297
The Logic of Law
Making in Islam
Women and Prayer in
the Legal Tradition
Behnam Sadeghi
384pp
Cyber Warfare and
the Laws of War
Heather Harrison
Dinniss
PB ` 895.00
This pioneering study examines the process of
reasoning in Islamic law. Some of the key
questions addressed here include whether
sacred law operates differently from secular law,
why laws change or stay the same and how
different cultural and historical settings impact the
development of legal rulings. In order to explore
these questions, the author examines the
decisions of 30 jurists from the largest legal
tradition in Islam: the Hanafi school of law. He
traces their rulings on the question of women and
communal prayer across a very broad period of
time – from the eighth to the eighteenth century –
to demonstrate how jurists interpreted the law
and reconciled their decisions with the scripture
and the sayings of the Prophet. The result is a
fascinating overview of how Islamic law has
evolved and the thinking behind individual
rulings.
Contents: 1. The world in which we live and
fight; 2. Computer network attacks as a use of
force in international law; 3. Armed attack and
response in the digital age; 4. The applicability of
the laws of armed conflict to computer network
attacks; 5. Participants in conflict: combatant
status, direct participation and computer network
attack; 6. Targeting and precautions in attack;
7. Measures of special protection; 8. Means and
methods of warfare.
Contents: 1. A general model; 2. Preliminaries;
3. Women praying with men: adjacency; 4.
Women praying with women; 5. Women praying
with men: communal prayers; 6. The historical
development of Hanafi reasoning; 7. From laws
and values; 8. The logic of law making.
ISBN: 9781107051850
The Law-Making
Process
Sixth Edition
Michael Zander
234pp
ISBN: 9781107682283
The Cambridge
Companion to
Comparative Law
Mauro Bussani
and Ugo Mattei
PB ` 795.00
We can only claim to understand another legal
system when we know the context surrounding
the positive law in which lawyers are trained. To
avoid ethnocentricity and superficiality, we must
go beyond judicial decisions, doctrinal writings
and the black-letter law of codes and statutes
and probe the ‘deeper structures’ where law
meets cultural, political, socio-economic factors.
It is only when we acquire such awareness and
knowledge of the critical factors affecting both the
backgrounds and implications of rules that it
becomes possible to control the present and
possibly future developments of the world’s legal
institutions. This collection of essays aims to
provide the reader with a fundamental
understanding of the dynamic relationship
between the law and its cultural, political and
socio-economic context.
Contents: Editors’ preface. Diapositives v.
movies: the inner dynamics of the law and its
comparative account: a companion; Part I.
Knowing Comparative Law; 1. Comparative law
and neighbouring disciplines; 2. Political ideology
and comparative law; 3. Economic analysis and
comparative law; 4. Comparative law and
anthropology; 5. Comparative law and language;
Part II. Comparative Law Fields: 6. Comparative
studies in private law (insights from a European
point of view); 7. Comparative administrative law;
8. Comparative constitutional law;
9. Comparative criminal justice; 10. Comparative
Contents: Preface to the sixth edition; Preface to
the first edition; Acknowledgments; Books,
pamphlets, memoranda and articles excerpted;
Table of cases; 1. Legislation - the Whitehall
stage; 2. Legislation - the Westminster stage; 3.
Statutory interpretation; 4. Binding precedent the doctrine of stare decisis; 5. How precedent
works; 6. Law reporting; 7. The nature of the
judicial role in law-making; 8. Other sources of
law; 9. The process of law reform.
554pp
358pp
HB ` 995.00
As a critical analysis of the law-making process,
this book has no equal. For more than two
decades it has filled a gap in the requirements of
law students and others taking introductory
courses on the legal system. It deals with every
aspect of the law-making process, the
preparation of legislation, its passage through
Parliament, statutory interpretation, binding
precedent; how precedent works, law reporting;
the nature of the judicial role, European Union
law, and the process of law reform. It presents a
large number of original texts from a variety of
sources – cases, official reports, articles, books,
speeches and empirical research studies – laced
with the author’s informed commentary and
reflections on the subject. This book is a mine of
information dealing with both the broad sweep of
the subject and with all its detailed ramifications.
ISBN: 9781107669406
Information revolution has transformed both
modern societies and the way in which they
conduct warfare. Cyber Warfare and the Laws of
War analyses the status of computer network
attacks in international law and examines their
treatment under the laws of armed conflict. The
first part of the book deals with the resort to force
by states and discusses the threshold issues of
force and armed attack by examining the
permitted responses against such attacks. The
second part offers a comprehensive analysis of
the applicability of international humanitarian law
to computer network attacks. By examining the
legal framework regulating these attacks,
Heather Harrison Dinniss addresses the issues
associated with this method of attack in terms of
the current law and explores the underlying
debates which are shaping the modern laws
applicable in armed conflict.
PB ` 695.00
72
Pakistan’s
Experience
with Formal Law
civil justice; 11. Comparative law and the
international organizations; Part III. Comparative
Law in the Flux of Civilizations; 12. The EastAsian legal tradition; 13. The Jewish legal
tradition; 14. The Islamic legal tradition; 15. The
Sub-Saharan legal tradition; 16. The Latin
American and Caribbean legal tradition
(repositioning Latin America and the Caribbean in
the contemporary maps of comparative law);
17. Mixed legal systems; 18. Democracy and the
Western legal tradition.
ISBN: 9781107687769
Race, Religion
and Law in
Colonial India
Trials of an Interracial
Family
Chandra Mallampalli
422pp
An Alien Justice
Osama Siddique
PB ` 595.00
How did British rule in India transform persons
from lower social classes? Could Indians from
such classes rise in the world by marrying
Europeans and embracing their religion and
customs? This book explores such questions by
examining the intriguing story of an interracial
family who lived in southern India in the midnineteenth century. The family, which consisted
of two untouchable brothers, both of whom
married Eurasian women, became wealthy as
distillers in the local community. A family dispute
resulted in a landmark court case, Abraham v.
Abraham. Chandra Mallampalli uses this case to
examine the lives of those involved, and shows
that far from being products of a ‘civilizing
mission’ who embraced the ways of Englishmen,
the Abrahams were ultimately – when faced with
the strictures of the colonial legal system –
obliged to contend with hierarchy and racial
difference.
Contents: List of abbreviations • List of figures •
Acknowledgements • Introduction; 1. The
hegemony of heritage: the “narratives of colonial
displacement” - the absence of the past in
Pakistani reform narratives; 2. Law in practice:
the Lahore District Courts Survey (2010-2011); 3.
Law, crime, context, and vulnerability: the Punjab
Crime Perception Survey (2009-2010); 4.
Approaches to legal and judicial reform in
Pakistan: post-colonial inertia and paucity of
imagination in times of turmoil and change; 5.
Reform on paper: a post-mortem of justice sector
reform in Pakistan 1998-2010; 6. Reform
nirvanas and reality checks: justice sector reform
in Pakistan in the twenty-first century and the
monopoly of the “experts”; 7. Toward a new
approach; Appendices; Index.
Contents: Introduction; 1. Remembering family;
2. Embodying ‘Dora-hood’: the brothers and their
business; 3. A crisis of trust: sedition and the sale
of arms in Kurnool; 4. Letters from Cambridge; 5.
The path to litigation; 6. Litigating gender and
race: Charlotte sues at Bellary; 7. Francis
appeals: the case for continuity; 8. Choice,
identity, and law: the decision of London’s Privy
Council.
ISBN: 9781107026988
280pp
Law reform in Pakistan attracts such disparate
champions as the Chief Justice of Pakistan,
USAID, and the Taliban. Common to their equally
obsessive pursuit of ‘speedy justice’ is a
remarkable obliviousness to the historical,
institutional and sociological factors that alienate
Pakistanis from their formal legal system. This
pioneering book highlights vital and widelyneglected linkages between the ‘narratives of
colonial displacement’ resonant in the literature
on South Asia’s encounter with colonial law and
the region’s post-colonial official law reform
discourses. Against this backdrop, it presents a
typology of Pakistani approaches to law reform
and critically evaluates the IFI-funded,
single-minded pursuit of ‘efficiency’ during the
last decade. Employing diverse methodologies it
proceeds to provide empirical support for a
widening chasm between popular, at times
violently expressed, aspirations for justice and
democratically-deficient reform designed in
distant IFI headquarters that is entrusted to the
exclusive and unaccountable Pakistani ‘reform
club’.
ISBN: 9781107636279
HB ` 995.00
73
485pp
PB ` 795.00
Jurisprudence
Suri Ratnapala
Jurisprudence is about the nature of law and
justice. It embraces studies and theories from a
range of disciplines such as history, sociology,
political science, philosophy, psychology and
even economics. Why do people obey the law?
How does law serve society? What is law’s
relation to morality? What is the nature of rights?
This book introduces and critically discusses the
major traditions of jurisprudence. Written in a
lucid and accessible style, Suri Ratnapala
considers a wide range of views, bringing
conceptual clarity to the debates at hand. From
Plato and Aristotle to the medieval scholastics,
from Enlightenment thinkers to postmodernists
and economic analysts of law, this important
volume examines the great philosophical debates
and gives insight into the central questions
concerning law and justice.
presence; 15. National electronic surveillance;
16. Cybercrime; 17. Evidence of electronic
records; 18. Censorship - broadcast and online
content regulation; 19. An international
perspective; Appendices.
ISBN: 9781107606258
The Health of
Nations
Society and Law
Beyond the State
Philip Allott
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. British legal
positivism; 3. Germanic legal positivism: Hans
Kelsen’s quest for the pure theory of law; 4.
Realism in legal theory; 5. Natural law tradition in
jurisprudence; 6. Separation of law and morality;
7. Sociological jurisprudence and the sociology of
law; 8. Radical jurisprudence: challenges to
liberal legal theory; 9. Economic analysis of law;
10. Evolutionary jurisprudence; 11. Fundamental
legal conceptions: the building blocks of legal
norms; 12. Justice.
ISBN: 9781107606203
The Law of
Electronic
Commerce
Alan Davidson
390pp
438pp
PB ` 595.00
The human world is changing. Old social
structures are being overwhelmed by forces of
social transformation, which are sweeping across
political and cultural frontiers. A social animal is
becoming the social species. The animal that
lives in packs and herds (family, corporation,
nation, state...) is becoming a member of a
human society, which is the society of all human
beings, the society of all societies.
The age-old problems of social life – religious,
philosophical, moral, political, legal, economic –
must now be addressed at the level of the whole
species, at the level where all cultures and
traditions meet and will contribute to an
exhilarating and hazardous new form of human
self-evolving.
Contents: Preface; Part I. Society and Law; 1.
The will to know and the will to power: theory and
moral responsibility; 2. The phenomenon of law;
3. Globalization from above: actualizing the ideal
through law; 4. The nation as mind politic: the
making of the public mind; 5. New enlightenment:
the public mind of all-humanity; Part II. European
Society and its Law; 6. European governance
and the re-branding of democracy; 7. The crisis
of European constitutionalism: reflections on a
half-revolution; 8. The concept of European
Union: imagining the unimagined; 9. The
conversation that we are: the seven lamps of
European unity; Part III. International Society and
its Law; 10. The concept of international law; 11.
International law and the idea of history; 12.
Intergovernmental societies and the idea of
constitutionalism; 13. International law and the
international Hofmafia: towards a sociology of
diplomacy; 14. International law and international
revolution: re-conceiving the world; Index.
PB ` 595.00
Written specifically for legal practitioners and
students, this book examines the concerns, laws
and regulations involved in e-Commerce. In just a
few years, commerce via the World Wide Web
and other online platforms has boomed, and a
new field of legal theory and practice has
emerged. Legislation has been enacted to keep
pace with commercial realities, cyber-criminals
and unforeseen social consequences, but the
ever-evolving nature of new technologies has
challenged the capacity of the courts to respond
effectively. This book addresses the legal issues
relating to the introduction and adoption of
various forms of electronic commerce. From
intellectual property, to issues of security and
privacy, Alan Davidson looks at the practical
changes for lawyers and commercial parties
whilst providing a rationale for the underlying
legal theory.
ISBN: 9788175962866
Contents: 1. The law of electronic commerce; 2.
The rule of cyberspace; 3. Electronic commerce
and the law of contract; 4. Shrinkwrap, Clickwrap
and Browsewrap contracts; 5.
Electronicsignatures; 6. Copyright issues in
electronic commerce; 7. Electronic commerce –
trade marks, patents and circuit layouts; 8.
Domain names; 9. Domain name disputes; 10.
Uniform domain name dispute resolution policies;
11. Jurisdiction in cyberspace; 12. Defamation in
cyberspace; 13. Privacy and data protection in
cyberspace; 14. Electronic mail and online
74
452pp
PB ` 695.00
Trade Marks
and Brands
An Interdisciplinary
Critique
Lionel Bently,
Jennifer Davis and
Jane C. Ginsburg
Developments in trade marks law have called
into question a variety of basic features, as well
as bolder extensions, of legal protection. Other
disciplines can help us think about fundamental
issues such as: what is a trade mark? What does
it do? What should be the scope of its protection?
This volume assembles essays examining trade
marks and brands from a multiplicity of fields:
from business history, marketing, linguistics,
legal history, philosophy, sociology and
geography. Each chapter pairs lawyers’ and nonlawyers’ perspectives, so that each commentator
addresses and critiques his or her counterpart’s
analysis. The perspectives of non-legal fields are
intended to enrich legal academics’ and
practitioners’ reflections about trade marks, and
to expose lawyers, judges and policymakers to
ideas, concepts and methods that could prove to
be of particular importance in the development of
positive law.
The Spirit of
Hindu Law
Donald R. Davis, Jr.
Contents: Part I. Legal and Economic History; 1.
The making of modern trade mark law: the
construction of the legal concept of trade mark
(1860–1980); 2. The Making of modern trade
mark law: the UK, 1860–1914. A business history
perspective; Part II. Current Positive Law in the
E.U. and the US; 3. Between a sign and a brand:
mapping the boundaries of a registered trade
mark in European Union trade mark law; 4. “See
me, feel me, touch me, hea[r] me” (and maybe
smell and taste me too): I am a trademark - a US
perspective; Part III. Linguistics; 5. ‘How can I tell
the trade mark on a piece of gingerbread from all
the other marks on It?’ Naming and meaning in
verbal trade mark signs; 6. What linguistics can
do for trade mark law; Part IV. Marketing; 7.
Brand culture: trade marks, marketing and
consumption; 8. Images in brand culture:
responding legally to Professor Schroeder’s
paper; Part V. Sociology; 9. Trade mark style as
a way of fixing things; 10. The irrational lightness
of trade marks: a legal perspective; Part VI. Law
and Economics; 11. A law and economics
perspective on trade marks; 12. The economic
rationale of trademarks: an economist’s critique;
Part VII. Philosophy: 13. Trade marks as
property: a philosophical perspective; 14. An
alternative approach to dilution protection: a
response to Scott, Oliver and Ley Pineda; Part
VIII. Anthropology; 15. An anthropological
approach to transactions involving names and
marks, drawing on Melanesia; 16. Traversing the
cultures of trade mark sphere: observations on
the anthropological approach of James Leach;
Part IX. Geography; 17. Geographical
indications: not all champagne and roses;
18. (Re)locating geographical indications: a
response to Bronwyn Parry.
ISBN: 9780521259309
480pp
Law is too often perceived solely as state-based
rules and institutions that provide a rational
alternative to religious rites and ancestral
customs. The Spirit of Hindu Law uses the Hindu
legal tradition as a heuristic tool to question this
view and reveal the close linkage between law
and religion. Emphasizing the household, the
family, and everyday relationships as additional
social locations of law, it contends that law itself
can be understood as a theology of ordinary life.
An introduction to traditional Hindu law and
jurisprudence, this book is structured around key
legal concepts such as the sources of law and
authority, the laws of persons and things,
procedure, punishment and legal practice. It
combines investigation of key themes from
Sanskrit legal texts with discussion of Hindu
theology and ethics, as well as thorough
examination of broader comparative issues in law
and religion.
Contents: List of tables; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Abbreviations; Introduction
(dharmasâstra); 1. Sources and theologies
(pramâna); 2. Hermeneutics and ethics
(mîmâmsâ); 3. Debt and meaning (rna);
4. Persons and things (svatva); 5. Doubts and
disputes (vyavahâra); 6. Rectitude and
rehabilitation (danda); 7. Law and practice
(âcâra); Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107005617
Hinduism and Law
An Introduction
Timothy Lubin, Donald
R. Davis Jr. and
Jayanth K. Krishnan
206pp
HB ` 795.00
Covering the earliest Sanskrit rulebooks through
to the codification of ‘Hindu law’ in modern times,
this interdisciplinary volume examines the
interactions between Hinduism and the law. The
authors present the major transformations to
India’s legal system in both the colonial and post
colonial periods and their relation to recent
changes in Hinduism. Thematic studies show
how law and Hinduism relate and interact in
areas such as ritual, logic, politics, and literature,
offering a broad coverage of South Asia’s
contributions to religion and law at the
intersection of society, politics and culture. In
doing so, the authors build on previous
treatments of Hindu law as a purely text-based
tradition, and in the process, provide a
fascinating account of an often neglected social
and political history.
Contents: Foreword; List of contributors;
Chronology; Map; Introduction; Part I. Hindu Law:
1. An historical overview of Hindu law; 2.
Dharmaωstra: a textual history; 3. Hindu legal
practice in premodern India; 4. The creation of
Anglo-Hindu law; 5. Marriage and family in
colonial Hindu law; 6. Hindu law as personal law;
Part II. Law in Ancient and Medieval Hindu
Traditions: 7. Hindu jurisprudence and scriptural
hermeneutics; 8. Indic conceptions of authority;
9. Sûdra Dharma and legal treatments of caste;
PB ` 595.00
75
10. Law, literature, and the problem of politics in
medieval India; 11. Hindu law as performance:
ritual and poetic elements in Dharmasâstra; Part
III. Law and Modern Hinduism; 12. Temples,
deities, and the law; 13. In the divine court of
appeals: vows before the God of justice; 14.
Contemporary caste discrimination and
affirmative action; 15. Law and Hindu nationalist
movements; 16. Legally and politically layered
identities: a thumbnail survey of selected Hindu
migration patterns from South Asia; Appendices;
Glossary; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9781107012493
Adjudication in
Religious Family
Laws
Cultural
Accommodation, Legal
Pluralism, and Gender
Equality in India
Gopika Solanki
320pp
Shari‘a
Theory, Practice,
Transformations
Wael B. Hallaq
HB ` 895.00
How do multireligious and multiethnic societies
construct accommodative arrangements that can
both facilitate cultural diversity and ensure
women’s rights? Based on a rich ethnography of
adjudication of marriage and divorce across
formal and informal areas in Mumbai, this book
argues that the shared adjudication model in
which the state splits its adjudicative authority
with religious groups and other societal sources
in the regulation of marriage can potentially
balance cultural rights and gender equality. In
this model, the ideologically-diverse lay, civic,
and religious sources of legal authority construct,
transmit, and communicate heterogeneous
notions of the conjugal family, gender relations,
and religious membership within the interstices of
state and society. In so doing, they fracture the
homogenized religious identities grounded in
hierarchical gender relations within the conjugal
family. The shared adjudication model facilitates
diversity as it allows the construction of hybrid
religious identities, creates fissures in ossified
group boundaries, and provides institutional
spaces for ongoing intersocietal dialog. In this
pluralized legal sphere, individual and collective
legal mobilization by women spurs law reform
and paves the way toward formal and substantive
gender equality.
Contents: Part I. The Pre-Modern Tradition: 1.
The formative period; 2. Legal theory:
epistemology, language, and legal reasoning; 3.
Legal education and the politics of law; 4. Law
and society; 5. The circle of justice and later
dynasties; Part II. The Law: An Outline: 6. Legal
pillars of religion; 7. Contracts and other
obligations; 8. Family law and succession; 9.
Property and ownership; 10. Offenses; 11. Jihad;
12. Courts of justice, suits and evidence; Part III.
The Sweep of Modernity: 13. The conceptual
framework: an introduction; 14. The jural
colonization of India and South-East Asia; 15.
Hegemonic modernity: the Middle East and North
Africa during the nineteenth and early twentieth
century; 16. Modernizing the law in the age of
nation-states; 17. In search of a legal
methodology; 18. Repercussions: concluding
notes.
ISBN: 9780521180337
Indigeneity and
Legal Pluralism in
India
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. The shared
adjudication model: theoretical framework and
arguments; 3. State law and the adjudication
process: marriage, divorce, and the conjugal
family in Hindu and Muslim personal law;
4. Making and unmaking the conjugal family: the
administration of Hindu law in society; 5. Juristic
diversity, contestations over ‘Islamic law’ and
women’s rights: regulation of matrimonial matters
in Muslim personal law; 6. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107023895
In recent years, Islamic law, or Shari’a, has been
appropriated as a tool of modernity in the Muslim
world and in the West and has become highly
politicized as consequence. Wael Hallaq’s
magisterial overview of Shari’a sets the record
straight by examining the doctrines and practices
of Islamic law within the context of its history, and
by showing how it functioned within pre-modern
Islamic societies as a moral imperative. In so
doing, Hallaq takes the reader on an epic journey
tracing the history of Islamic law from its
beginnings in seventh-century Arabia, through its
development and transformation under the
Ottomans, and across lands as diverse as India,
Africa and South-East Asia, to the present. In a
remarkably-fluent narrative, the author unravels
the complexities of his subject to reveal a love
and deep knowledge of the law, which will inform,
engage and challenge the reader.
Claims, Histories,
Meanings
Pooja Parmar
403pp HB ` 1495.00
76
624pp
PB ` 795.00
As calls for reparations to indigenous peoples
grow on every continent, issues around resource
extraction and dispossession raise complex legal
questions. What do these disputes mean to those
affected? How do the narratives of indigenous
people, legal professionals, and the media
intersect? In this richly layered and nuanced
account, Pooja Parmar focuses on indigeneity in
the widely publicized controversy over a CocaCola bottling facility in Kerala, India. Juxtaposing
popular, legal, and Adivasi narratives, Parmar
examines how meanings are gained and lost
through translation of complex claims into the
languages of social movements and formal legal
systems. Included are perspectives of the diverse
range of actors involved, based on interviews
with members of Adivasi communities, social
activists, bureaucrats, politicians, lawyers, and
judges. Presented in clear, accessible prose,
Parmar's account of translation enriches debates
in the fields of legal pluralism, indigeneity, and
development.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Locating a dispute;
3. A people's movement; 4. Litigants, lawyers,
and the questions of law; 5. Claims and
meanings; 6. Law, history, justice; 7. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107142169
262pp
MANAGEMENT
Brand Society
How brands transform
management of lifestyle
HB ` 550.00
Martin Kornberger
Preventive
Detention and the
Democratic State
Hallie Ludsin
Preventive Detention and the Democratic State
tracks the transformation of preventive detention
from an emergency measure into an ordinary law
enforcement tool in the democratic world.
Historically, democracies used preventive
detention only in the extraordinary circumstance
in which the criminal justice system was
impotent. They preferred criminal prosecution
and its strict due process requirements to
detaining people for a crime they may never
commit. This book shows that major democracies
have begun using detention as an insurance
policy against dangerous people. In the process,
they have embarked on a slippery slope that
allows them to use preventive detention to
bypass the criminal justice system. Already,
detention has established a separate, inferior
legal system for certain suspected criminals.
Comparing preventive detention in India, England
and the United States, the book brings to light its
potentially dire consequences for the rule of law,
due process rights and democratic principles
based on the very real experiences of these
countries.
Contents: Foreword; Acknowledgements; Part I.
Brands and Branding: 1. Introduction; 2. Making
sense of brands; 3. The making of brands; Part II.
How Brands Transform Management: 4. Identity;
5. Culture; 6. Innovation; Part III. How Brands
Transform Lifestyle: 7. Politics; 8. Ethics;
9. Aesthetics; Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
Contents: Acknowledgements; List of Acronyms
and Abbreviations; Introduction; Chapter 1. The
Theoretical Framework; Chapter 2. The Policy
Debates; Chapter 3. Preventive Detention under
International Law; Chapter 4. The History of
Preventive Detention in India; Chapter 5. India's
Current Preventive Detention Legislation;
Chapter 6. India: Preventive Detention and Due
Process; Chapter 7. India: The Risk Society and
the Slippery Slope; Chapter 8. Preventive
Detention in England; Chapter 9. England:
Preventive Detention and Due Process; Chapter
10. Preventive Detention in the United States;
Chapter 11. The United States: Preventive
Detention and Procedural Due Process; Chapter
12. Preventive Detention's Slippery Slope;
Chapter 13. Preventive Detention and Liberal
Democracy; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107056060
Brands are fait accompli: they represent a
mountain range of evidence in search of a theory.
They are much exploited, but little explored. In
this book, Martin Kornberger sets out to rectify
the ratio between exploiting and exploring
through sketching out a theory of the Brand
Society. Most attempts to explain the role of
brands focus on brands either as marketing and
management tools (business perspective) or a
symptoms of consumerism (sociological
perspective). Brand Society combines these
perspectives to show how brands have the power
to transform both the organizations that develop
them and the lifestyles of the individuals who
consume them. This holistic approach shows
how brands function as a medium between
producers and consumers in a way that is rapidly
transforming our economy and society. That's the
bottom line of Brand Society: brands are a new
way of organizing production and managing
consumption. Using an array of practical case
studies from a diverse set of organizations, this
book provides a fascinating account of the way in
which brands influence the lives of individuals
and the organizations they work in.
ISBN: 9781107674875
Building
Respected
Companies
Jordi Canals
432pp HB ` 1200.00
328pp
PB ` 595.00
The current financial crisis has deep
macroeconomic roots, but the dominant view of
the firm has made the crisis deeper and more
devastating. Over the past few decades,
maximizing shareholder value has become the
main objective of the firm. Chief executives have
been keen on this objective because their
economic incentives have been clearly
associated with stock market performance.
Unfortunately, this has driven many CEOs to
make terrible decisions based on short-termism
and greed. In this way, the firm has become the
object of anger, criticism and cynicism. In
Building Respected Companies, Jordi Canals
argues that we must address this problem by
developing companies that serve society, not just
their shareholders. This requires a new
perspective of what a firm is, what the purpose of
the firm in society should be and what the role of
the board of directors and senior executives
should be.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Part I. Corporate Crisis,
Leadership and Governance; 1. Financial crisis.
Leadership crisis?; Part II. Rethinking the
77
Purpose of the Firm; 2. The firm's mission and
purpose; 3. The firm as a respected institution;
Part III. The Role of Corporate Governance in
Developing a Respected Company; 4. Nature,
goals and models of corporate governance;
5. Responsible firms; Part IV. Leading and
Growing a Respected Company; 6. The board of
directors at work: impact beyond regulation;
7. The chief executive: reputation beyond
charisma; 8. The role of the chief executive in
developing the company as a respected
institution; Index.
ISBN: 9781107621015
Business Ethics
and Continental
Philosophy
Mollie Painter-Morland
and René ten Bos
282pp
The State and
Land Records
Modernisation
Pradeep Kumar Nayak
PB ` 595.00
By looking at the progress of initiatives in the
states of Karnataka and Odisha, this book argues
that the computerization of land records
programme cannot be understood or
implemented in isolation from the specific political
and economic context of the reform process.
Business ethics has largely been written from the
perspective of analytical philosophy with very
little attention paid to the work of continental
philosophers. Yet although very few of these
philosophers directly discuss business ethics, it is
clear that their ideas have interesting applications
in this field. This innovative textbook shows how
the work of continental philosophers – Deleuze
and Guattari, Foucault, Levinas, Bauman,
Derrida, Levinas, Nietzsche, Zizek, Jonas, Sartre,
Heidegger, Latour, Nancy and Sloterdijk – can
provide fresh insights into a number of different
issues in business ethics. Topics covered include
agency, stakeholder theory, organizational
culture, organizational justice, moral decisionmaking, leadership, whistle-blowing, corporate
social responsibility, globalization and
sustainability. The book includes a number of
features designed to aid comprehension,
including a detailed glossary of key terms, text
boxes explaining key concepts, and a wide range
of examples from the world of business.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures;
Abbreviations; Foreword; Preface and
Acknowledgements; 1. The State, ICTs and
Governance: A Theoretical Exploration; 2. EGovernance in Public Policy Discourse in India;
3. The State and the Policy of Land Records
Management; 4. The Computerisation of Land
Records Programme in Odisha; 5. The
Computerisation of Land Records Programme in
Karnataka; 6. The Computerisation of Land
Records Programme in Karnataka and Odisha: A
Comparative Study; Conclusion: Beyond TechnoManagerial Governance; Select Bibliography.
ISBN: 9789382993469
Cambridge
Handbook of
Culture,
Organizations,
and Work
Contents: List of figures; List of boxes; List of
contributors; Foreword; Acknowledgements;
Introduction: critical crossings Mollie PainterMorland and René ten Bos; 1. Agency in
corporations Mollie Painter-Morland;
2. Stakeholder theory David Bevan and Patricia
Werhane; 3. Organizational culture Hugh
Willmott; 4. ENRON narrative Hugh Willmott;
5. Moral decision-making Mollie Painter-Morland;
6. Organizational justice Carl Rhodes; 7. Reward,
incentive, and compensation Mollie PainterMorland; 8. Leadership Sverre Spoelstra and
René ten Bos; 9. Whistle-blowing Mollie PainterMorland and René ten Bos; 10. Marketing, bad
faith, and responsibility Janet Borgerson;
11. Corporate social responsibility René ten Bos
and Stephen Dunne; 12. Corporate responsibility
standards Andreas Rasche; 13. Sustainability
René ten Bos and David Bevan;
14. Globalization René ten Bos; Glossary; Name
index; Subject index.
ISBN: 9781107608702
388pp
Today, when land record management is
regarded as one of the indices of a nation’s
developmental status, India is in the midst of its
land records modernization programme, which is
the world’s largest e-governance exercise and
India’s first successful e-governance
implementation for the common man. This book
studies the land records modernization
programme in India and how it has modernized
management of land records, minimized scope of
land disputes, enhanced transparency in the land
records maintenance system, and facilitated
moving towards guaranteed conclusive titles to
immovable properties in the country.
Rabi S. Bhagat and
Richard M. Steers
378pp
HB ` 995.00
It is now widely recognized that countries around
the world are becoming increasingly
interconnected, and that both public and private
organizations are of necessity becoming
increasingly global. As political, legal, and
economic barriers recede in this environment,
cultural barriers emerge as a principal challenge
to organizational survival and success. It is not
yet clear whether these global realities will cause
cultures to converge, harmonize, and seek
common ground or to retrench, resist, and
accentuate their differences. In either case, it is
of paramount importance for both managers and
organizational scholars to understand the cultural
crosscurrents underlying these changes. With
contributions from an international team of
scholars, the Handbook of Culture,
Organizations, and Work reviews, analyses, and
integrates available theory and research to give
the best information possible concerning the role
of culture and cultural differences in
organizational dynamics.
Contents: Figures; Tables; Preface; Part I.
Cultural Foundations: 1. The culture theory
jungle: divergence and convergence in models of
national culture Luciara Nardon and Richard M.
Steers; 2. Culture, organizations, and institutions:
PB ` 695.00
78
an integrative review Kwok Leung and Soon Ang;
3. When does culture matter? Cristina B. Gibson,
Martha L. Maznevski and Bradley L. Kirkman;
Part II. Culture and Organization Theory:
4. Culture and organization design: strategy,
structure, and decision-making Richard M.
Steers, Luciara Nardon and Carlos SanchezRunde; 5. Cross-cultural perspectives on
international mergers and acquisitions GÃœnter
K. Stahl and Mansour Javidan; 6. Global culture
and organizational processes Miriam Erez and
Gili S. Drori; 7. Cultural variations in the creation,
diffusion and transfer of organizational
knowledge Rabi S. Bhagat, Annette S. McDevitt
and Ian McDevitt; 8. Cultural variations and the
morphology of innovation John R. Kimberly and
Colleen Beecken Rye; ; 9. Understanding
leadership across cultures Marcus W. Dickson,
Deanne N. Den Hartog and Nathalie Casta; 10.
Global leadership: progress and challenges
Joyce S. Osland, Sully Taylor and Mark E.
Mendenhall; 11. The role of cultural elements in
virtual teams Taryn L. Stanko and Cristina B.
Gibson; 12. Cultural drivers of work behavior:
personal values, motivation, and job attitudes
Carlos Sanchez-Runde, Sang Myung Lee and
Richard M. Steers; 13. Interdisciplinary
perspectives on culture, conflict, and negotiation
Lynn Imai and Michele J. Gelfand; 14. The
complexity of trust: cultural environments, trust,
and trust development Nancy R. Buchan;
15. Cultural variations in work stress and coping
in an era of globalization Rabi S. Bhagat, Pamela
K. Steverson and Ben C. H. Kuo; 16. Cultural
values and women's work and career
experiences Ronald J. Burke; 17. Intercultural
training for the global workplace: review,
synthesis, and theoretical explorations Dharm P.
S. Bhawuk; Part IV. Future Directions in Theory
and Research: 18. Improving methodological
robustness in cross-cultural organizational
research Fons J. R. Van De Vijver and Ronald
Fischer; 19. Culture, work, and organizations: a
future research agenda Rabi S. Bhagat.
ISBN: 9781107662902
560pp
Cambridge
Handbook of
Strategy as
Practice
Damon Golsorkhi, Linda
Rouleau, David Seidl
and Eero Vaara
The Cambridge Handbook of Strategy as
Practice provides a comprehensive overview of
an emerging and growing stream of research in
strategic management. An international team of
scholars has been assembled to produce a
systematic introduction to the various
epistemological, methodological and theoretical
aspects of the strategy-as-practice approach.
This perspective explores and explains the
contribution that strategizing makes to daily
operations at all levels of an organization. Moving
away from a disembodied and asocial study of
firm assets, technologies and practices, the
strategy-as-practice approach breaks down many
of the traditional paradigmatic boundaries in
strategy to investigate who the strategists are,
what strategists do, how they do it, and what the
consequences or outcomes of their actions are.
Including a number of detailed empirical studies,
the handbook will be an essential guide for future
research in this vibrant field.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
contributors; Introduction: What is strategy-aspractice? Damon Golsorkhi, Linda Rouleau,
David Seidl and Eero Vaara; Part I.
Epistemological Streams; 1. Practice in research:
phenomenon, perspective and philosophy Wanda
Orlikowski; 2. Epistemological alternatives for
researching strategy-as-practice: building and
dwelling worldviews Robert Chia and Andreas
Rasche; 3. Practice, strategy making and
intentionality: a Heideggerian onto-epistemology
for strategy-as-practice Haridimos Tsoukas;
4. Constructivist epistemologies in strategy-aspractice research Simon Grand, Johannes
Rüegg-Stürm and Widar von Arx; 5. Constructing
contribution in 'strategy-as-practice' research
Karen Golden-Biddle and Jason Azuma; 6. The
challenge of developing cumulative knowledge
about strategy-as-practice Ann Langley; Part II.
Theoretical Directions; 7. Giddens, structuration
theory and strategy-as-practice Richard
Whittington; 8. An activity-theory approach to
strategy-as-practice Paula Jarzabkowski; 9. A
Wittgensteinian perspective on strategizing Saku
Mantere; 10. A Bourdieusian perspective on
strategizing Marie-Léandre Gomez; 11. A
Foucauldian perspective on strategic practice:
strategy as the art of (un)folding Florence AllardPoesi; 12. A narrative approach to strategy-aspractice: strategy-making from texts and
narratives Valérie-Inés de La Ville and Eléonore
Mounoud; Part III. Methodological Tracks;
13. Broader methods to support new insights into
strategizing Anne Sigismund Huff, Anne-Katrin
Neyer and Kathrin Möslein; 14. Critical discourse
analysis as methodology in strategy-as-practice
research Eero Vaara; 15. Researching everyday
practice: the ethnomethodological contribution
Dalvir Samra-Fredericks; 16. Researching
strategists and their identity in practice: building
close-with relationships Phyl Johnson, Julia
Balogun and Nic Beech; 17. Studying
strategizing through narratives of practice Linda
Rouleau; Part IV. Application Variations;
18. Institutional change and strategic agency: an
empirical analysis of managers' experimentation
with routines in strategic decision-making Gerry
PB ` 795.00
79
Creating New
Markets in the
Digital Economy
Johnson, Stuart Smith and Brian Codling;
19. Unpacking the effectivity paradox of strategy
workshops: do strategy workshops produce
strategic change? Robert MacIntosh, Donald
MacLean and David Seidl; 20. Struggling over
subjectivity: a critical discourse analysis of
strategic development Pikka-Maaria Laine and
Eero Vaara; 21. Strategizing and history Mona
Ericson and Leif Melin; Index.
ISBN: 9781107619982
Crafting Strategy
Loizos Heracleous and
Claus D. Jacobs
366pp
Irene C. L. Ng
PB ` 595.00
The rationalist approach to strategizing
emphasizes analytical and convergent thinking.
Without denying the importance of this approach,
this book argues that strategists must learn to
complement it with a more creative approach to
strategizing that emphasizes synthetic and
divergent ways of thinking. The theoretical
underpinnings of this approach include embodied
realism, interpretivism, practice theory, theory of
play, design thinking, as well as discursive
approaches such as metaphorical analysis,
narrative analysis, dialogical analysis and
hermeneutics. The book includes in-depth
discussions of these theories and shows how
they can be put into practice by presenting
detailed analyses of embodied metaphors built
by groups of agents with step-by-step
explanations of how this process can be
implemented and facilitated. The link between
theory and practice is further supported by the
inclusion of several vignettes that describe how
this approach has been successfully employed in
a number of organizations, including BASF and
UNICEF.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction and impact of
digitisation on markets; 2. Back to basics - what
is value?; 3. Value and context; 4. Lifting the lid
off context: the contextual experience; 5. Value
and exchange; 6. Rise of the digital economy;
7. Back to basics in value creation - a theory of
latent demand; 8. Value propositions and new
business models; 9. Creating viability and worth;
10. Markets, digital labour and new economic
models; Postscript; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107461703
Decision
Behaviour,
Analysis and
Support
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Preface; Vignette A: BASF;
1. Strategizing out of the box; Vignette B:
UNICEF; 2. Metaphor and embodied realism; 3.
Analyzing embodied metaphors as an
interpretive, hermeneutic endeavour; Vignette C:
Voltigo (Fribourg); 4. Crafting strategy as a
practice of embodied recursive enactment; 5.
Play, analogical reasoning and dialogue in the
crafting of strategy; Vignette D: Hephata; 6.
Understanding organizations through embodied
metaphors; 7. Sensemaking through embodied
metaphors in organization development; Vignette
E: Privatbank; 8. Strategy as a crafting practice;
Vignette F: Worldvision New Zealand; 9. The
process of strategizing through crafting embodied
metaphors; Glossary; Index.
ISBN: 9781107664531
260pp
Creating New Markets in the Digital Economy
looks at how digitization is radically changing the
way we buy and experience products and
services. Sharing her unique perspective of both
business and academia, Irene Ng examines the
implications of digital connectivity, including the
need to design and scale future business models
to better fit 'lived lives', creating value as well as
increasing worth so that new markets can
emerge. The book provides a conceptual
framework and practical advice to equip readers
with the knowledge they need to develop future
products and services that take advantage of
connectivity and serve contexts better. With its
accessible language, numerous case examples
and illustrations to illuminate challenging
concepts, this book is an important resource for
business leaders, entrepreneurs and policy
makers, as well as students of service science,
business and engineering.
Simon French, John
Maule and Nadia
Papamichail
PB ` 395.00
260pp
PB ` 595.00
Behavioural studies have shown that while
humans may be the best decision-makers on the
planet, we are not quite as good as we think we
are. We are regularly subject to biases,
inconsistencies and irrationalities in our decision
making. Decision Behaviour, Analysis and
Support explores perspectives from many
different disciplines to show how we can help
decision-makers deliberate and make better
decisions. It considers both the use of computers
and databases to support decisions as well as
human aids to building analyses and some fast
and frugal tricks to aid more consistent decisionmaking. In its exploration of decision support it
draws together results and observations from
decision theory, behavioural and psychological
studies, artificial intelligence and information
systems, philosophy, operational research and
organizational studies. This provides a valuable
resource for managers with decision-making
responsibilities and students from a range of
disciplines, including management, engineering
and information systems.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
case vignettes; List of abbreviations and notation;
Preface; Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction;
2. Behavioural decision studies; 3. Decision
analysis and support; 4. Information and
knowledge management; 5. Artificial intelligence
and expert systems; 6. Operational research and
optimisation; 7. Decision analysis and multiple
80
The Logic of Sharing
Indian Approach to South–South Cooperation
Sachin Chaturvedi
India’s development cooperation programmes
reflect the broad principles that inform Indian
foreign policy in general. In essence, they reflect
sovereign equality and belief in friendly relations
with all countries, particularly India’s neighbours
coupled with opposition to colonialism and a
continued commitment to the amplification of
human freedom. Mahatma Gandhi underlined that
while the juxtaposition of peace and prosperity is
not a contrivance for establishing moral prospects,
the two conditions are indissolubly linked. Such
pragmatism is evident in the genesis and evolution
of India’s development cooperation policy. The
extension of Indian resources and expertise to the
global South, which dates back to the early 1950s,
became institutionalised under the Indian
Technical and Economic Cooperation Programme
(ITEC) established in 1964. Although the scale of
India’s development cooperation has been modest,
it has expanded along with the country’s
emergence as a rapidly growing economy.
Sachin Chaturvedi is Professor and Director
General at the Research and Information System
for Developing Countries (RIS), a New Delhi-based
autonomous Think-Tank. He was Global Justice
Fellow at the MacMillan Center for International
Affairs, Yale University. Chaturvedi works on issues
related to development cooperation policies and
South-South cooperation. He has also worked on
trade and innovation linkages with special focus on
WTO.
Hardback | 978-1-107-12792-0 | ` 895.00
www.cambridge.org
objectives; 8. Decision analysis and uncertainty;
9. Issue formulation and problem structuring;
10. Strategic decision analysis; 11. Groups of
decision makers; 12. Organisational decision
support; 13. Societal decision making;
14. Decision support systems; 15. Conclusions;
Index; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9780521255165
Explaining the
Performance of
Human Resource
Management
Anthony Hesketh and
Steve Fleetwood
502pp
Global
Outsourcing and
Offshoring
An Integrated Approach
to Theory and Corpora
Arok J. Contractor,
Vikas Kumar,
Sumit K. Kundu
and Torben Pedersen
PB ` 595.00
Human resource departments increasingly use
the statistical analysis of performance indicators
as a way of demonstrating their contribution to
organizational performance. In this book, Steve
Fleetwood and Anthony Hesketh take issue with
this ‘scientific' approach by arguing that its
preoccupation with statistical analysis is
misplaced because it fails to take account of the
complexities of organizations and the full range
of issues that influence individual performance.
The book is split into three parts. Part I
deconstructs research into the alleged link
between people and business performance by
showing that it cannot explain the associations it
alleges. Part II attributes these shortcomings to
the importation of spurious ‘scientific' methods,
before going on to suggest more appropriate
methods that might be used in future. Finally,
Part III explores how HR executives and
professionals understand their work and shows
how a critical realist stance adds value to this
understanding through enhanced explanation.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
contributors; Preface; Part I. Conceptual
Frameworks and Theories; 1. Global outsourcing
and offshoring: in search of the optimal
configuration for a company Farok J. Contractor,
Vikas Kumar, Torben Pedersen and Sumit
Kundu; 2. Globalization of R&D: offshoring
innovative activity to emerging economies Ashok
Bardhan and Dwight Jaffee; 3. A theory of the
outsourcing firm Dave Luvison and Mike
Bendixen; Part II. The Offshoring and
Outsourcing of R&D and Innovative Activities:
4. Blurring firm R&D boundaries: integrating
transaction costs and knowledge-based
perspectives Andrea Martinez-Noya and Esteban
Garcia-Canal; 5. Outsourcing, fragmentation and
integration: the pharmaceutical industry Janis K.
Kapler and Kimberly A. Puhala; 6. Towards a
better understanding of multinational enterprises'
R&D location choices Ana Colovic; 7. Does R&D
offshoring displace or strengthen knowledge
production at home? Evidence from OECD
countries Lucia Piscitello and Grazia D.
Santangelo; 8. Innovation across firm
boundaries: a knowledge based view Salma
Alguezaui and Raffaele Filieri; 9. Suitable
organization forms for knowledge management at
various R&D functions in decentralized and
cooperative R&D networks Hsing Hung Chen;
Part III. Management Issues in Offshoring and
Virtual Teamwork: 10. Changing work practices:
acceptance of virtual work among knowledge
professionals engaged in offshoring activities
Elisa Mattarelli and Maria Rita Tagliaventi;
11. Managing globally disaggregated teams: the
role of organizational politics Shahzad M. Ansari,
Jatinder S. Sidhu, Henk W. Volberda and Ilan
Oshri; Part IV. Empirical Analyses and Case
Studies of Outsourcing and Offshoring;
12. Offshoring of high-value functions: a case
study of US-India trade in medical transcription
services Nir Kshetri and Nikhilesh Dholakia;
13. Offshoring of IT and business, professional
and technical services: the recent experience of
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Preface; Part I. HRM and
Organisational Performance Today; 1. Crisis?
What crisis?; 2. Tracking the emergence of the
human resource management-performance link
paradigm; Part II. Meta-Theorising the HRM-P
Link: 3. The state of contemporary research on
the HRM-performance link: a technical analysis;
4. Scientism: the meta-theory underlying
empirical research on the HRM-P link;
5. Prediction, explanation and theory; 6. Critical
realism: a meta-theory for analyzing HRM and
performance; Part III. Reflexive Performance:
7. Putting critical realism to work; Index.
ISBN: 9780521263382
362pp
Companies are increasingly asking which of their
value chain activities are best performed within
their own company and which may be
outsourced. In addition, they are also considering
which pieces of their value chain may be better
performed abroad. These interrelated decisions
concerning outsourcing and offshoring have not
only changed entire industries, they have also
transformed the lives of people across the world.
Hundreds of millions of jobs in emerging nations
have been the direct result of outsourcing and
offshoring decisions. At the same time, many
people in the developed world have lost their jobs
because a company has been able to find a
cheaper alternative. Featuring contributions from
scholars in 11 different countries, this book is the
first to examine the theory and practice of
outsourcing and offshoring simultaneously. It
includes studies of a variety of different
industries, including pharmaceuticals,
automobiles, medical records, appliances,
human resource management and
telecommunications.
PB ` 495.00
82
the United States Thomas J. Norman and
Mahmood A. Zaidi; 14. Outsourcing human
resource activities Thomas J. Norman;
15. Managing core outsourcing to address fast
market growth: a study of an Indian mobile
telecom service provider Raghunath
Subramanyam; 16. Imitative offshoring
strategies: lessons learnt from Italian small
domestic appliance industry Gabriella Lojacono
and Olga Annushkina; Index.
ISBN: 9781107647657
Global Services
Outsourcing
Ronan McIvor
496pp
India`s Healthcare
Industry
Innovation in
Healthcare Delivery,
Financing, and
Manufacturing
Lawton Robert Burns
PB ` 495.00
Services outsourcing is an increasingly-attractive
option for firms seeking to reduce costs and
achieve service improvements. Many
organizations now choose to transfer
responsibility for entire functions such as human
resources, finance and information technology
services to both local and global vendors. Yet
outsourcing such functions is a complex process,
one that is driven by factors that transcend cost
considerations alone. Issues such as service
design, unbundling processes, managing work
across different cultures and time zones, and
business process redesign have all become
important elements of managing services
outsourcing arrangements. This book uses tools
and techniques from a variety of disciplines to
show how to successfully plan, implement and
manage services outsourcing arrangements.
Based on in-depth analysis of large-scale
outsourcing arrangements across a wide range of
sectors, this is an excellent resource for both
academics and practitioners who wish to
understand more about this complex
phenomenon.
Contents: List of Figures; Preface;
Acknowledgments; Section I; Introduction;
Lenses and Frameworks for Analyzing India’s
Healthcare System; 1. India’s Healthcare
Industry: A System Perspective; 2. Innovative
Responses to the Healthcare Challenges
Confronting India ; 3. India’s Healthcare Industry:
An Overview of the Value Chain; Section II;
Providers: Delivery of Healthcare Services;
4. The Medical Profession in India; 5. India’s
Hospital Sector: The Journey from Public to
Private Healthcare Delivery; 6. Medical Tourism:
Opportunities and Challenges; 7. The Aravind
Eye Care System; 8. Excellence and Equity in
Healthcare: The Real Deal at L V Prasad Eye
Institute; 9. Vaatsalya Healthcare: Promoting
Access to Healthcare in Rural and Semi-Urban
India; Section III; Payers: Financing of
Healthcare Services; 10. The Health Insurance
Sector in India: History and Opportunities;
11. Providing Care to the Bottom of the Pyramid;
12. Opportunities in Healthcare Private Equity in
India; Section IV; Producers: Manufacturers of
Healthcare Technology; 13. The Indian
Pharmaceutical Sector: The Journey from
Process Innovation to Product Innovation;
14. India’s Biotechnology Sector; 15. The
Medical Device Sector in India; 16. Balancing
Access and Innovation in Developing Countries;
Contributors; Index.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
illustrations; Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction;
2. Global services outsourcing overview;
3. Making the services outsourcing decision;
4. Location and sourcing model choice in global
services outsourcing; 5. Managing global
services outsourcing arrangements; 6. Creating
shared services arrangements; 7. Services
outsourcing and performance management;
8. Services outsourcing and the spin-off
arrangement; 9. Learning from failure and
strategies for recovery in business process
outsourcing; 10. Conclusions; Glossary; Index.
ISBN: 9781107670174
298pp
This book analyses the historical development
and current state of India’s healthcare industry. It
describes three sets of institutions that deliver
healthcare services, finance these services, and
manufacture products used in these services.
These institutions provide healthcare (hospitals,
physicians, pharmacies, and diagnostic
laboratories), pay for healthcare (individuals who
pay out-of-pocket, insurance companies,
community insurance schemes, government
ministries), and produce the technology used in
healthcare delivery (pharmaceuticals,
biotechnology, and medical devices). The volume
also discusses innovative efforts to raise capital
for the development of these sectors. Finally, it
includes three interesting case studies of
innovative models of healthcare delivery (L. V.
Prasad, Aravind, and Vaatsalya), as well as
analyses of other innovative organizations like
Narayana Hrudayalaya and the hospital chains.
The contributors to the volume include Wharton
faculty members, graduates of Wharton’s
healthcare MBA programme, and executives and
consultants from India.
PB ` 495.00
ISBN: 9781107044371
83
600pp HB ` 1295.00
Indian Business
Groups
Strategy and
Performance
Ram Kumar Kakani,
Santosh Sangem and
Madhvi Sethi
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Preface: The Maharaj and
the Saffron; 1. Vent for growth; 2. Industrial
revolutions; 3. Aspects of Indian enterprise
history; 4. Emergence of modern industry;
5. Asian late industrialization; 6. Democratizing
entrepreneurship; 7. Contemporary India; 8. The
services sector debate; 9. A paean for
manufacturing; 10. Reindustrializing India;
Appendices; Notes; References; Index.
The uniqueness of the Indian context lies in the
fact that during the post-liberalization period of
the 1990s, most business groups encountered
severe financial difficulties to the extent of
struggle for survival and ultimately lost their
former dominant presence. The 2000s have been
witness to the revival of some of these business
groups whereas many others are still in search of
the suitable strategic response to the new
economic and institutional environment. The
book explores the forces of product
diversification strategy of Indian business groups
through a conglomeration of empirical analysis
as well as the case study approach. Overall, the
authors cover a period exceeding 25 years of
business group activity in the Indian context, and
attempts to relate the performance of Indian
business groups to their diversification strategies
juxtaposed against the context of institutional
change in the Indian economy. The case studies
of select business groups help us bring out more
clearly the underlying factors that have been
influential in the success or failure of the
unrelated diversification strategy of Indian
business groups. The combination of these
underlying factors and the new institutional
features of the Indian economy bring out some
hitherto unexplored perspectives with their
implications for management of unrelated
diversified enterprises.
ISBN: 9781107032996
International
Business Strategy
Second Edition
Alain Verbeke
Contents: List of Tables and Figures ; Preface;
Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction to Business
Groups and their Strategies; 2. Business Groups
across the Globe; 3. Product Diversification and
Performance: Measurement and Historical
Relationship; 4. Conceptual Framework and
Research Methodology; 5. Empirical Results and
Managerial Implications; 6. Case Analysis of
Business Group's Strategies; 7. Summary of the
Work; References; Index; About the Authors.
ISBN: 9789384463373
India’s Late, Late
Industrial
Revolution
Democratizing
Entrepreneurship
Sumit K. Majumdar
293pp
472pp
HB ` 895.00
Verbeke provides a new perspective on
international business strategy by combining
analytical rigour and true managerial insight on
the functioning of large multinational enterprises
(MNEs). With unique commentary on 48 seminal
articles published in the Harvard Business
Review, the Sloan Management Review and the
California Management Review over the past
three decades, Verbeke shows how these can be
applied to real businesses engaged in
international expansion programmes, especially
as they venture into high-distance markets. The
second edition has been thoroughly updated and
features greater coverage of emerging markets
with a new chapter and seven new cases. Suited
for advanced undergraduates and graduate
courses, students will benefit from updated case
studies and improved learning features, including
'management takeaways', key lessons that can
be applied to MNEs and a wide range of online
resources.
Contents: List of figures; List of case studies;
About the author; Foreword Jean-François
Hennart; Acknowledgements; List of
abbreviations; Walkthrough; Introduction and
overview of the book's framework; Part I. Core
Concepts; 1. Conceptual foundations of
international business strategy; 2. The critical
role of firm-specific advantages; 3. The nature of
home country location advantages; 4. The
problem with host country location advantages;
5. Combining firm-specific advantages and
location advantages in a multinational framework;
Part II. Functional Issues; 6. International
innovation; 7. International sourcing and
production; 8. International finance; 9.
International marketing; 10. Managing managers
in the multinational enterprise; Part III. Dynamics
of Global Strategy; 11. Entry mode dynamics 1:
foreign distributors; 12. Entry mode dynamics 2:
strategic alliance partners; 13. Entry mode
dynamics 3: mergers and acquisitions; 14. The
role of emerging economies; 15. Emerging
economy multinational enterprises; 16A.
International strategies of corporate social
responsibility; 16B. International strategies of
HB ` 695.00
There is a paradox at the heart of the Indian
economy. Indian businessmen and traders are
highly-industrious and ingenious people, yet for
many years Indian industry was sluggish and
slow to develop. One of the major factors in this
sluggish development was the command and
control regime known as the License Raj. This
regime has gradually been removed and, after
two decades of reform, India is now awakening
from its slumber and is experiencing a late, late
industrial revolution. This important new book
catalogues and explains this revolution through a
combination of rigorous analysis and entertaining
anecdotes about India's entrepreneurs, Indian
firms' strategies and the changing role of
government in Indian industry. This analysis
shows that there is a strong case for a
manufacturing focus so that India can replicate
the success stories of Asian countries such as
Japan, South Korea and China.
84
Leading the Sales
Force
corporate environmental sustainability;
Conclusion. The true foundations of global
corporate success; Appendix; Suggested
additional readings.
ISBN: 9781107055438
Leading Strategic
Change
Eric Flamholtz and
Yvonne Randle
611pp
René Y. Darmon
PB ` 695.00
Why do some companies continue to be
successful while others experience difficulties
and even failure? In Leading Strategic Change,
Eric Flamholtz and Yvonne Randle demonstrate
that the key to long-term organizational success
is the ability to adapt to and manage different
types of change. Drawing on over 30 years’
consultancy experience within major firms, they
combine theoretical and practical models of
organizational change, together with a new
theory of leadership, to build a framework for
understanding, planning, and leading change.
The scope and value of this framework is then
shown in relation to nine real-world case studies,
ranging from relatively-small companies
(IndyMac Bank, Infogix) to large multinationals
(Starbucks, Westfield). The focus throughout is to
provide practical guidance to those concerned
with managing and leading change in
organizations. This book is an excellent guide to
the many lessons to be learned about successful
organizational change.
Contents: Figures; Tables; Preface;
1. Introduction to the dynamic sales force
management process; Part I. The Actors Of The
Process And Their Roles; 2. Buyers: key actors
of the process; 3. Dynamic customer relationship
management processes; 4. Salespeople:
intermediaries in the dynamic management
process; 5. Sales managers: leaders of the
dynamic management process; 6. The changing
environment of the dynamic management
process; Part II. Tools For Implementing The
Process: The Command Center; 7. Controlling
the overall selling effort; 8. Tools for controlling
centralized processes: specific objective
programs; 9. Tools for controlling decentralized
processes: directional objective programs;
10. Controlling effort quality improvement
programs; 11. Using dashboards and organizing
information flows; Conclusion; References; Index.
Contents: List of exhibits; Preface; Part I. An
Integrative Framework for Leading Strategic and
Organizational Change; 1. Understanding
organizational change; 2. A framework for
planning strategic and organizational change;
3. Leading change; Part II. Leading Strategic
Change in Actual Organizations; 4. Leading
strategic and organizational change at
Countrywide Financial Corporation; 5. Starbucks
Coffee Company; 6. Strategic marketing through
HR interventions: a case study of Indian Oil
Corporation; 7. The evolution of Stan Tashman
and Associates; 8. Leading strategic and
organizational change at IndyMac Bank;
9. Leading strategic and organizational change at
Infogix; 10. Leading strategic and organizational
change: the transformation of structure at Pardee
Homes; 11. Leading strategic and organizational
change at Tata Steel: the role of culture;
12. Leading strategic and organizational change
at Westfield: transformation to a global
enterprise; Part III. Leading Strategic Change:
Lessons Learned from Practice; 13. Lessons and
insights from case studies of change; Appendix
A. References for further reading on leading
change; Index.
ISBN: 9780521263597
288pp
How should a sales force be managed
effectively? Like aircraft pilots, managers must
analyse information and make interconnected
decisions in order to accomplish their missions.
This book provides an integrative vision of a
sales manager's function, using the concept of a
dynamic sales force management process. This
process adds a new dimension to the 'classical'
conception of sales force management, showing
how sales managers can be more effective when
they develop and maintain a holistic vision. The
first part of the book describes the key actors and
their roles, while the second part examines the
tools used to implement the dynamic sales force
management process. René Y. Darmon shows
how this process relies on a clear vision of
successive sales missions to be accomplished
over time by all members of a sales team, as
they develop strategies and tactics, which
contribute to fulfilling the firm's overall aims.
ISBN: 9781107470323
PB ` 495.00
85
398pp
PB ` 695.00
Leveraging
Corporate
Responsibility
The Stakeholder Route
to Maximizing Business
and Social Value
C. B. Bhattacharya,
Sankar Sen and
Daniel Korschun
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
1. Global e-commerce opportunities and
challenges; 2. International e-business expansion
and market entry strategies; 3. Global online
consumer segmentation; 4. Web globalization
strategies; 5. Developing international websites:
internationalization (I18n); 6. Effectively localizing
international websites; 7. Managing a web
globalization value chain; 8. Optimizing
international websites; 9. Assessing web
globalization efforts; 10. Strategic industry
insights into emerging localization trends;
Resources; Index.
The corporate social and environmental
responsibility movement, known more generally
as corporate responsibility (CR), shows little sign
of waning. Almost all large corporations now run
some form of corporate responsibility
programme. Despite this widespread belief that
CR can simultaneously improve societal welfare
and corporate performance, most companies are
largely in the dark when it comes to
understanding how their stakeholders think and
feel about these programmes. This book argues
that all companies must understand how and why
stakeholders react to such information about
companies and their actions. It examines the two
most important stakeholder groups to companies
– consumers and employees – to comprehend
why, when and how they react to CR. Armed with
this insight, it shows how companies can
maximize the value of their CR initiatives by
fostering strong stakeholder relationships to
develop, implement and evaluate compelling
social responsibility programs that generate
value for both the company and its stakeholders.
ISBN: 9781107682009
Management
Across Culture
Richard M. Steers,
Carlos J. SanchezRunde and Luciara
Nardon
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
exhibits; 1. The long and winding road to CR
value; Part I. Deconstructing CR Value;
2. Viewing stakeholders as individuals; 3. How
stakeholders respond to CR; Part II. Inside the
Mind of the Stakeholder; 4. What stakeholders
see and hear; 5. The psychological engine that
drives CR reactions; 6. How context influences
the process; Part III. Putting Insight into Action;
7. Co-creating CR strategy; 8. Communicating
CR strategy; 9. Calibrating CR strategy;
10. Putting the framework to work; 11.
Conclusion: the long and winding road revisited;
Appendix: our research program.
ISBN: 9781107652385
Localization
Strategies for
Global E-Business
Nitish Singh
340pp
PB ` 595.00
The acceleration of globalization and the growth
of emerging economies present significant
opportunities for business expansion. One of the
quickest ways to achieve effective international
expansion is by leveraging the web, which allows
for technological connectivity of global markets
and opportunities to compete on a global basis.
To systematically engage and thrive in this
networked global economy, professionals and
students need a new skill set; one that can help
them develop, manage, assess and optimize
efforts to successfully launch websites for
tapping global markets. This book provides a
comprehensive, non-technical guide to
leveraging website localization strategies for
global e-commerce success. It contains a wealth
of information and advice, including strategic
insights into how international business needs to
evolve and adapt in light of the rapid proliferation
of the ‘Global Internet Economy’. It also features
step-by-step guidelines to developing, managing
and optimizing international-multilingual websites
and insights into cutting-edge web localization
strategies.
346pp
PB ` 695.00
Management practices and processes frequently
differ across national and regional boundaries.
What may be acceptable managerial behaviour in
one culture may be counterproductive or even
unacceptable in another. As managers
increasingly find themselves working across
cultures, the need to understand these
differences has become increasingly important.
This book examines why these differences exist
and how global managers can develop strategies
and tactics to deal with them. The text draws on
recent research in anthropology, psychology, and
management, to explain the cultural and
psychological underpinnings that shape
managerial attitudes and behaviours, whilst
introducing a learning model to guide in the
intellectual and practical development of
managers seeking enhanced global expertise. It
offers user-friendly conceptual models to guide
understanding and exploration of topics and
summarizes and integrates the lessons learned
in each chapter in applications-oriented
'Manager's Notebooks'. A companion website
featuring comprehensive chapter-by-chapter PPT
slides is available at www.cambridge.org/
management_across_cultures.
Contents: List of exhibits; Preface; 1. Global
realities and management challenges;
2. Developing global management skills;
3. Culture, values, and worldviews; 4. Inside the
managerial mind: culture, cognition, and action;
5. Inside the organizational mind: stakeholders,
strategies, and decision-making; 6. Organizing
frameworks: a comparative assessment;
7. Communication across cultures; 8. Leadership
and global teams; 9. Work and motivation;
10. Negotiation and global partnerships;
11. Managing in an imperfect world; 12. Epilogue:
the journey continues; Appendix A. Models of
national cultures; Appendix B. OECD guidelines
for global managers; Index.
ISBN: 9781107606210
86
458pp
PB ` 795.00
Managing Change
Enquiry and Action
Nic Beech and
Robert MacIntosh
The ability to manage change successfully is an
essential part of business. It is a skill that is much
valued by employers, and it is therefore one of
the most commonly-delivered courses. This book
helps you understand three key activities for
managing change: diagnosing, explaining and
enacting. Both practical and action-oriented, it
gives students and managers the tools they need
to deal with the messy reality of change. It
combines theory and diagnostic tools with
practical examples that focus on actions and
outcomes. It also includes short vignettes and
longer cases, from a range of international
contexts, for classroom study or for use on
distance learning courses. Managing Change is
wr itten for advanced undergraduates and
graduate students taking modules on change
management, strategy and organizations. Its
class-tested approach has been successfully
delivered in a wide variety of settings, including
over fifty executive short courses with FTSElisted businesses.
Managing
Customer Value
Dilip Soman and
Sara N-Marandi
Contents: Part I. Foundations; 1. Approaches to
practising change management; 2. Current
perspectives and classic ideas; Part II.
Diagnosing; 3. Clarity and ambiguity;
4. Engagement and vitality; 5. Stakeholder
positioning and dynamics; 6. Culture, habits and
unlearning; Part III. Enacting Change;
7. Changing structure; 8. Identity and change;
9. Choosing customers and competitors;
10. Changing processes; 11. Aligning people and
activities; 12. Learning and developing;
13. Change through dialogue; Part IV.
Explaining; 14. Developing and interpreting
evidence and reflexive learning; 15. Accounting
for change; 16. Conclusions; Part V. Extended
Cases; Case 1 - ABB; Case 2 - ITS Canada;
Case 3 - Island Opera; Case 4 - Oticon; Case 5 Admiral Insurance; Case 6 - Power Provision;
Case 7 - Nokia; Case 8 - Her Majesty's Revenue
and Customs; Case 9 - Apple; Index.
ISBN: 9781107610705
288pp
How do you take individuals who have never
done business with your organization and work
on them till some of them eventually become the
best possible customers that you have? How do
you decide how much to spend on various
marketing tactics? How do you think about the
pricing decision with a view to optimizing the
value of your customers as assets? Where do
you start — what tools do you use — what
heuristics are useful in making these decisions?
This book attempts to answer questions such as
these. The one-sentence summary of the
answer, though, is simple — hold the individuals,
hands and walk them through a value chain, one
stage at a time. This book is written for an
advanced student of business, as well as for the
practicing manager, and presents an integrated
view of the marketing function. In particular, it
focuses on all the activities that a firm engages in
to create and manage value, and not just the
customer-facing activities. In that sense, it links
the traditional views of customer value with the
finance, accounting, human resources,
organizational behaviour, information technology
and operations functions. The content is meant to
be prescriptive — it describes a process for value
creation and management, and is yet analytical;
It is theoretical and is yet empirically driven. It
urges the reader to think about the customer
value function to be organized along activities
that the firm would like the customers to engage
in, not activities that the firm engages in. It
presents a framework that is not only
conceptually driven but also has a sound
mathematical basis.
Contents: • Managing Customer Value One
Stage at a Time; • Value; • Decomposing Metrics;
• Stages in the Customer Value Chain; •
Customers as Gambles; • Loyalty; • Harnessing
Customer Intelligence; • Pricing and Customer
Psychology; • Aligning the Organization; •
Customer Intelligence at the Trillium Gift of Life
Network; • Octopus: Making Everyday Life
Easier; • Get Smart.
PB ` 595.00
ISBN: 9788175967977
87
416pp
PB ` 695.00
Marketing Strateg
A life Cycle approach
and Marketing Strategy
Case Book (Set)
Alvin Lee and
Mark Edwards
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; List of
boxes; Six insights to achieve the unexpected;
1. Rethink organisation design; 2. Appreciate
imperfect opportunities; 3. Remodel for
coherence; 4. Build bridges; 5. Inspire the
narrative; 6. Embrace the unexpected
opportunity; 7. Hindsight; Index.
This pack contains both the textbook and
casebook. Marketing Strategy: A Life-Cycle
Approach takes a fresh approach to teaching
students how to devise, implement and monitor
strategies for superior performance in the market
with a focus on themes of sustainability and
ethics. The concepts and principles of strategic
marketing are introduced from a product and
business life-cycle perspective. Within that
framework, the book explains the nature of
strategic thinking, covers the theory and practical
application of analytics, explores the
considerations, constraints and possible strategic
marketing choices available at each stage of the
product life-cycle and outlines how to monitor and
modify the performance of strategies. With a
matching structure and topical emphasis, the
accompanying Marketing Strategy Casebook is a
collection of contemporary case studies designed
to develop students' capacity to analyse
challenging situations and implement strategies
to overcome them. The case studies are based
on real-world scenarios and are drawn from
diverse regions, industries and technologies.
ISBN: 9781107644526
Operations
Management
An Integrated Approach
Danny Samson and
Prakash J. Singh
Contents: This pack contains both the textbook
and casebook. Marketing Strategy: A Life-Cycle
Approach teaches students how to devise,
implement and monitor strategies for superior
performance in the market. With a matching
structure, Marketing Strategy Casebook is a
collection of contemporary case studies designed
to develop students' capacity to analyse
challenging situations and to implement
strategies to overcome them.
ISBN: 9781107427150
Models of
Opportunity
Gerard George and
Adam J. Bock
304pp
PB ` 795.00
Entrepreneurship is changing. Technology and
social networks create a smaller world, but widen
the opportunity horizon. Today's entrepreneurs
build organizations and create value in entirely new ways and with entirely-new tools. Rather
than just exploit new ideas, innovative
entrepreneurs design organizations to make
sense of unlikely opportunities. The time has
come to overhaul what we know about
entrepreneurship and business models. Models
of Opportunity links scholarly research on
business models and organizational design to the
reality of building entrepreneurial firms. It
provides actionable advice based on a deeper
understanding of how business models function
and change. The six insights extend corporate
strategy and entrepreneurship in a completely
new direction. Case studies of innovative
companies across industries demonstrate how
visionary entrepreneurs achieve unexpected
results. The insights, tools and cases, provide a
fresh perspective on emerging trends in
entrepreneurship, organizational change and
high-growth firms.
320pp
PB ` 595.00
Operations Management: An Integrated
Approach provides a state-of-the-art account of
the systems, processes, people and technology
that determine an organization’s strategy and
success. With contributions from leading experts
internationally, the text takes a comprehensive,
comparative, and best practice approach and
applies this specifically to the Asia-Pacific region.
Rigorous in scholarship yet eminently accessible
in style, Operations Management is replete with
pedagogical features – figures and tables,
discussion exercises, ‘Learnings from the
Internet’, and a diversity of long and short case
studies from around the world. Students are
taken on a seamless journey from the
fundamentals of operations management,
through to the multiple approaches, the various
innovations, challenges and risks, and ultimately
to models of sustainability and evaluative tools
and techniques. The text effectively prepares
future managers across every sector of the
economy – whether in services, manufacturing,
profit or non-profit environments – to lead,
organize, plan and control a set of resources, in
pursuit of identified goals. The book will be
supported by an extensive companion website
featuring PowerPoint slides for each chapter,
sample answers, teaching notes and figures/
images for presentations.
Contents: Part I. Operations within
Organisations - Building Blocks; Part II.
Approaches to Understanding OM; Part III.
Moving Forward with OM - Creating Competitive
Advantage; Part IV. Challenges and
Opportunities in Operations; Part V. Case
Studies; Index.
ISBN: 9780521258944
88
578pp
PB ` 695.00
Performance
at the Limit
Second Edition
Mark Jenkins, Ken
Pasternak, Richard
West
Can you imagine your organization as a Ferrari
or a McLaren, a Toyota or a Force India? Your
management team as a pit crew? Your sales
force as the race team and your marketing and
research department as the design studio
creating a Formula 1 car? Formula 1 has an
estimated turnover of $4bn, employs 50, 000
people in more than 30 countries and has a
foothold in every major and developing economy.
With performance as the central focus of every
organization, Performance at the Limit uses the
case of Formula 1 motorsport as an example of
how business can achieve optimal performance
in highly-competitive environments where dealing
with change effectively is paramount. This
second edition builds on the success of the first
and contains a wealth of new material, including
many more interviews with Formula 1 drivers and
other key executives active in the sport.
4. Advocacy and environmental change;
5. Principles of communication and persuasion;
6. Models of attitude and behaviour change;
7. Research and evaluation; 8. Ethical issues in
social marketing; 9. The competition;
10. Segmentation and targeting; 11. The
marketing mix; 12. Using media in social
marketing; 13. Using sponsorship to achieve
changes in people, places and policies;
14. Planning and developing social marketing
campaigns and programmes; 15. Case study: the
Act-Belong-Commit Campaign promoting positive
mental health; Index.
ISBN: 9781107644328
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Acknowledgements; Note on the reference
system; The Grand Prix experience; 1.
Introduction; 2. Why Formula 1 motor racing?;
3. The performance framework; 4. The war for
talent: the people in Formula 1; 5. Winning
through teamwork; 6. Capability through
partnerships; 7. The high performance
organisation; 8. Integrating: effective leadership
brings it all together; 9. Innovating: the drive for
continual change; 10. Transforming: breaking out
of the old ways; 11. Achieving and sustaining
performance; 12. Twelve business lessons from
Formula 1 motor racing; Appendix A: Grand Prix
champions 1950-2007; Appendix B: Grand Prix
graveyard 1950-2008; Appendix C: Interview
respondents; References; Index.
ISBN: 9781107627284
Principles and
Practice of Social
Marketing
Rob Donovan and
Nadine Henley
272pp
Problem Solving
in Organizations
Joan Ernst van Aken,
Hans Berends and
Hans van der Bij
PB ` 595.00
524pp
PB ` 695.00
This concise introduction to the methodology of
Business Problem Solving (BPS) is an
indispensable guide to the design and execution
of practical projects in real organizational
settings. The methodology is both result-oriented
and theory-based, encouraging students to use
the knowledge gained on their disciplinary
courses, and showing them how to do so in a
fuzzy, ambiguous and politically-charged real-life
business context. The book provides in-depth
discussion of the various steps in the process of
business problem solving. Rather than presenting
the methodology as a recipe to be followed, the
authors demonstrate how to adapt the approach
to specific situations and to be flexible in
scheduling the work at various steps in the
process. It will be indispensable to MBA students
who are undertaking their own field work.
Contents: Preface; Part I. Fundamentals;
1. Scope and nature of this book; 2. The
business problem solving project; 3. Designfocused business problem solving; 4. Theorydriven business problem solving; Part II. The
Business Problem Solving Project; 5. Intake and
orientation; 6. Theory-driven diagnosis of
performance-related business problems;
7. Solution design; 8. Change plan design and
the actual change process; 9. Termination,
evaluation and reflection; Part III. On Methods;
10. Qualitative research methods; 11. Searching
and using scientific literature; 12. Quality criteria
for analysis results; Part IV. Conclusion:
13. Concluding remarks; References; Index.
This fully updated-edition combines the latest
research with real-life examples of social
marketing campaigns the world over to help you
learn how to apply the principles and methods of
marketing to a broad range of social issues. The
international case studies and applications show
how social marketing campaigns are being used
across the world to influence changes in
behaviour, and reveal how those campaigns may
differ according to their cultural context and
subject matter. Every chapter is fully illustrated
with real-life examples, including campaigns that
deal with racism, the environment and mental
health. The book also shows how social
marketing influences governments, corporations
and NGOs, as well as individual behaviour. The
author team combines research and teaching
knowledge with hands-on experience of
developing and implementing public health,
social welfare and injury prevention campaigns to
give you the theory and practice of social
marketing.
ISBN: 9781107606180
Contetns: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
Acknowledgements; 1. Social marketing and
social change; 2. Principles of marketing;
3. Social marketing and the environment;
89
198pp
PB ` 495.00
Public
Management
Organizations,
Governance, and
Performance
Laurence J. O'Toole, Jr.
and Kenneth J. Meier
Reference Process Building Blocks; • Diagnosing
Process Design; • Unit of Analysis; • Electronic
Commerce; • Object-Oriented Models; • Public
Sector Experience; • Singapore's Public Sector; •
US Department of Defense; • Extensions of IDEF
Methodology; • Civil Services in Taiwan; •
Customer Participation and Commitment; • YinYang Balanced Approach; • Private Sector
Experience; • IT Dimensions and
Interdependencies; • HR Development Systems;
• End-User Support; • BPR in India; • Textile
Manufacturing; • A Scientific Approach; • Future
Prospects; • Managing Risks; • Into the 3rd
Millennium.
How effective are public managers as they
seek to influence how public organizations
deliver policy results? How, and how much, is
management related to the performance of public
programmes? What aspects of management can
be distinguished? Can their separable
contributions to performance be estimated? The
fate of public policies in today's world lies in the
hands of public organizations, which, in turn, are
often intertwined with others in latticed patterns of
governance. Collectively, these organizations are
expected to generate performance in terms of
policy outputs and outcomes. In this book, two
award-winning researchers investigate the
effectiveness of management in the public
sector. Firstly, they develop a systematic theory
on how effective public managers are in shaping
policy results. The rest of the book then tests this
theory against a wide range of evidence,
including a data set of 1,000 public organizations.
ISBN: 9788175967878
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
1. Public management and performance: an
evidence-based perspective; 2. A model of public
management and a source of evidence; 3. Public
management in interdependent settings:
networks, managerial networking and
performance; 4. Managerial quality and
performance; 5. Internal management and
performance: stability, human resources and
decision making; 6. Nonlinearities in public
management: the role of managerial capacity and
organizational buffering; 7. Public management
in intergovernmental networks: matching
structural networks and managerial networking;
8. Public management and performance: what
we know, and what we need to know; Glossary;
References; Index.
ISBN: 9781107606234
Reengineering
in Action
Chan Meng Khoong
332pp
Short Introduction
to Strategic Human
Resource
Management
Wayne F. Cascio and
John W. Boudreau
476pp
PB ` 395.00
The Short Introduction to Strategic Human
Resource Management provides a concise
treatment of the key elements of strategic HRM
using an innovative risk-management approach.
It emphasizes the importance of the decisions,
processes and choices organizations make about
managing people and shows how workforce
management directly affects strategic
organizational outcomes. It provides guidance for
managers on how to make better human capital
decisions in order to achieve strategic success
more effectively. Reflecting an increasing
uncertainty in global business, Cascio and
Boudreau consider ways of dealing with risk in
managing human capital. Numerous examples in
every chapter illustrate key points with real
business cases from around the world.
Contents: 1. What is strategy?; 2. The external
environment; 3. HR strategy in context:
environmental, organizational, and functional
elements; 4. HR strategy through a riskoptimization framework; 5. HR strategy: linkages,
anchor points, and outcomes; 6. HR strategy:
communication and engagement; 7. Outcomes of
successful business and HR strategies; 8. Future
forces and trends driving HR strategy.
PB ` 595.00
Business process reengineering is arguably the
management paradigm of the decade. No other
paradigm for organizational innovation and
improvement has achieved a stronger presence
and impact in corporate boardrooms around the
world. In recent years reengineering has also
moved away from the hype into real-world
application, and there is now a vast pool of
techniques and experience ready to be tapped by
organizational-change advocates. This book
provides an international showcase of
reengineering in action, with contributions from
more than 40 experts spanning five continents.
Besides prescriptions of concepts and tools, it
presents case studies of public sector as well as
private sector reengineering experience, and
visions of the future of reengineering practice.
ISBN: 9781107674295
Contents: • Introduction; • Reengineering for
World-Class Excellence; • Concepts and Tools;
• Workflow Management Technology; • The
RARE System; • Integrated Business Process
Management; • BPR-Enabled Systems
Engineering; • Supply Chain Management; •
90
232pp
PB ` 495.00
PREVENTIVE DETENTION
and the Democratic State
Hallie Ludsin
Preventive Detention and the Democratic State
tracks the transformation of preventive detention
from an emergency measure into an ordinary law
enforcement tool in the democratic world.
Historically, democracies used preventive
detention only in the extraordinary circumstance
in which the criminal justice system was impotent.
They preferred criminal prosecution and its strict
due process requirements to detaining people for
a crime they may never commit. This book shows
that major democracies have begun using
detention as an insurance policy against dangerous
people. In the process, they have embarked on a
slippery slope that allows them to use preventive
detention to bypass the criminal justice system.
Already, detention has established a separate,
inferior legal system for certain suspected
criminals. Comparing preventive detention in
India, England and the United States, the book
brings to light its potentially dire consequences for
the rule of law, due process rights and democratic
principles based on the very real experiences of
these countries.
Hallie Ludsin is a human rights lawyer and adjunct
professor at Emory University School of Law. She
recently completed her Democracy Research
Fellowship at Harvard’s Ash Center for Democratic
Government and Innovation. She is the co-author
of Spiral of Entrapment: Abused Women in
Conflict with the Law.
Hardback | 978-1-107-05606-0 | ` 1200.00
www.cambridge.org
Stakeholders
Matter
A New Paradigm for
Strategy in Society
Sybille Sachs and
Edwin Rühli
The dominant shareholder-value model has led
to mismanagement, market failure and a boost to
regulation, as spectacularly demonstrated by the
events surrounding the recent financial crisis.
Stakeholders Matter challenges the basic
assumptions of this model, in particular traditional
economic views on the theory of the firm and
dominant theories of strategic management, and
develops a new understanding of value creation
away from pure self-interest toward mutuality.
This new 'stakeholder paradigm' is based on a
network view, whereby mutuality enhances
benefits and reduces risks for the firm and its
stakeholders. The understanding of mutual value
creation is operationalized according to the
license to operate, to innovate and to compete.
The book develops a vision for a strategy in
society in which, rather than the invisible hand of
the market, it the visible hands of the firm and the
stakeholders that lead to an overall increase in
the welfare of society.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction - what are
strategic conversations?; 2. The strategic
conversations imperative; 3. Strategic
conversations in the wild; 4. Engaging employees
in management's agenda; 5. Strategizing and the
leaders' role; 6. Putting strategic conversations
into practice - innovation communities;
7. Conversation trumps structure - new norms for
dialog; 8. Strategic conversations across
geographies, generations, and the multitude;
9. Engaging the world outside in the
conversation; 10. Creating a self-reinforcing
innovation platform - collateral benefits;
11. Measuring the future; 12. Epilogue - on
managing; Further reading; Index.
ISBN: 9781107518834
Strategic
Customer
Management
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Foreword
Edward Freeman; 1. Challenges for a new
paradigm in strategic management; Part I.
Development of the Basic Assumptions of a New
Stakeholder Paradigm; 2. The economic
paradigm and its basic assumptions;
3. Contribution of stakeholder theory to our
understanding of the stakeholder paradigm;
4. The stakeholder paradigm; Part II. Our
Understanding of the Stakeholder Paradigm and
its Operationalization; 5. Our understanding of
the stakeholder paradigm operationalized in the
three licenses; 6. License to operate; 7. License
to innovate; 8. License to compete; 9. Challenges
resulting from a paradigm shift; Appendix;
Glossary; Notes; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9781107608672
Strategic
Conversations
Creating and Directing
the Entrepreneurial
Workforce
J. C. Spender and
Bruce A. Strong
298pp
Integrating Relationship
Marketing and CRM
Adrian Payne and
Pennie Frow
PB ` 495.00
253pp
PB ` 595.00
Relationship marketing and customer relationship
management (CRM) can be jointly utilized to
provide a clear roadmap to excellence in
customer management: this is the first textbook
to demonstrate how it can be done. Written by
two acclaimed experts in the field, it shows how
an holistic approach to managing relationships
with customers and other key stakeholders leads
to increased shareholder value. Taking a
practical, step-by-step approach, the authors
explain the principles of relationship marketing,
apply them to the development of a CRM
strategy and discuss key implementation issues.
Its up-to-date coverage includes the latest
developments in digital marketing and the use of
social media. Topical examples and case studies
from around the world connect theory with global
practice, making this an ideal text for both
students and practitioners keen to keep abreast
of changes in this fast-moving field.
Contents: Part I. Introduction; 1. Strategic
customer management; Part II. Relationship
Marketing; 2. Relationship marketing:
development and key concepts; Case study 2.1.
Myspace – the rise and fall; Case study 2.2.
Placemakers – success factors in the building
supplies sector; 3. Customer value creation;
Case study 3.1. BT (British Telecommunications)
– creating new customer value propositions;
Case study 3.2. Zurich Financial Services –
building value propositions; 4. Building
relationships with multiple stakeholders; Case
study 4.1. AirAsia spreads its wings; Case study
4.2. The City Car Club, Helsinki – driving
sustainable car use; 5. Relationships and
technology: digital marketing and social media;
Case study 5.1. Hippo in India – using Twitter to
manage the supply chain; Case study 5.2.
Blendtec – the 'will it blend' viral marketing
initiative; Part III. Customer Relationship
Management: Key Processes; 6. Strategy
development; Case study 6.1. Tesco – the
relationship strategy superstar; Case study 6.2.
Samsung – from low-cost producer to product
leadership; 7. Enterprise value creation; Case
study 7.1. Coca-Cola in China – bringing fizz to
Most organizations fail to take full advantage of
their employees' knowledge, initiative, and
imagination. In this accessible and practical
book, J. C. Spender and Bruce Strong provide a
guide for building entrepreneurial workforces
through carefully-designed conversations
between management and employees. These
'strategic conversations' make employees
partners in the strategy development process,
engaging them to help shape the organization's
future. The result is transformational: instead of
strategy being a dry, periodic planning exercise
for the few, it becomes a dynamic and continuous
act of co-creation enriched by the many. Case
studies illustrate how leading organizations have
used strategic conversations to build sustained
competitive advantage, create innovative
business models, make better decisions under
uncertainty, reduce the need for change
management, and enhance employee
engagement. The book will appeal to managers,
entrepreneurs of all stripes, and teachers and
students in schools of business and public
administration.
92
Strategic
Management
the Chinese beverages market; Case study 7.2.
Sydney Opera House – exploring value creation
strategies; 8. Multi-channel integration; Case
study 8.1. TNT – creating the perfect customer
experience; Case study 8.2. Guinness –
delivering the 'Perfect Pint'; 9. Information and
technology management; Case study 9.1. Royal
Bank of Canada – building client service
commitment; Case study 9.2. The DVLA –
innovating with CRM in the public sector; 10.
Performance assessment; Case study 10.1.
Sears – the service profit chain and the Kmart
merger; Case study 10.2. The Multinational
Software Company – driving results with a
metrics dashboard; Part IV. Strategic Customer
Management Implementation: 11. Organising for
implementation; Annex: the comprehensive CRM
audit; Case study 11.1. Nationwide Building
Society fulfilling a CRM vision; Case study 11.2.
Mercedes-Benz – building strategic customer
management capability; Index.
ISBN: 9781107687325
Strategic
Intelligence
A Handbook for
Practitioners,
Managers, and Users
Don McDowell
542pp
A Stakeholder
Approach
R. Edward Freeman
Contents: Part I. The Stakeholder Approach;:
1. Managing in turbulent times; 2. The
stakeholder concept and strategic management;
3. Stakeholder management: framework and
philosophy; Part II. Strategic Management
Processes: 4. Setting strategic direction;
5. Formulating strategies for stakeholders;
6. Implementing and monitoring stakeholder
strategies; Part III. Implications for Theory and
Practice: 7. Conflict at the board level; 8. The
functional disciplines of management; 9. The role
of the executive.
PB ` 795.00
Strategic Intelligence: A Handbook for
Practitioners, Managers, and Users is a primer
for analysts involved in conducting strategic
intelligence research. Don McDowell begins with
an overview of strategic intelligence and analysis
– its functions and its outcomes. He then outlines
a proven methodological approach for planning
and implementing a strategic research project for
any setting. Strategic Intelligence explains in
detail the steps involved in strategic analysis and
includes examples, guidelines, and standards to
further illustrate the process. Each step
corresponds with a chapter in the book,
describing the appropriate doctrine and/or theory,
as well as applications of the theory, and
practical hints for its implementation. Additionally,
holistic and creative thinking about the problem is
stressed in order to avoid narrow, biased
analysis.
ISBN: 9781107618510
Strategic Risk
Management
Practice
Torben Juul Andersen
and Peter Winther
Schrøder
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgments; PART I:
General Concepts; PART II: Critical
Observations; PART III: Issues for Clients and
Managers; PART IV: Processes and Techniques;
PART V: The Analyst ; 17 The Role,
Responsibilities, and Functions of the Analyst;
About the Author.
ISBN: 9788175967441
281pp
A Stakeholder Approach was first published in
1984 as a part of the Pitman series in Business
and Public Policy. Its publication proved to be a
landmark moment in the development of
stakeholder theory. Widely acknowledged as a
world leader in business ethics and strategic
management, R. Edward Freeman's foundational
work continues to inspire scholars and students
concerned with a more practical view of how
business and capitalism actually work. Business
can be understood as a system of how we create
value for stakeholders. This worldview connects
business and capitalism with ethics once and for
all.
HB ` 595.00
292pp
PB ` 495.00
At a time when corporate scandals and major
financial failures dominate newspaper headlines,
the importance of good risk management
practices has never been more obvious. The
absence or mismanagement of such practices
can have devastating effects on exposed
organizations and the wider economy (Barings
Bank, Enron, Lehmann Brothers, Northern Rock,
to name but a few). Today's organizations and
corporate leaders must learn the lessons of such
failures by developing practices to deal
effectively with risk. This book is an important
step towards this end. Written from a European
perspective, it brings together ideas, concepts
and practices developed in various risk markets
and academic fields to provide a much-needed
overview of different approaches to risk
management. It critiques prevailing enterprise
risk management frameworks (ERMs) and
proposes a suitable alternative. Combining
academic rigour and practical experience, this is
an important resource for graduate students and
professionals concerned with strategic risk
management.
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
1. The strategic nature of corporate risk
management; 2. Economic exposures in
corporate risk management; 3. Managing marketrelated business exposures; 4. Extending the risk
management perspective; 5. Integrative risk
management perspectives; 6. Current risk
management practice and the rise of ERM;
93
Strong Managers,
Strong Owners
7. Strategic risk analyses; 8. Strategic risk
management - amendments to the ERM
framework; 9. Strategic risk management;
10. Postscriptum; Appendix; Index.
ISBN: 9781107601901
Strategy and
Organization
Loizos Heracleous
268pp
Corporate Governance
and Strategy
Harry Korine and
Pierre-Yves Gomez
PB ` 495.00
Examining some of the new and emerging issues
in strategic management, Loizos Heracleous
offers a fresh approach to the established ideas
of strategy. Beginning with the historical
development of the strategy field, including the
influence of industrial organization and the
resource-based view, he develops a new
perspective labelled an ‘organisational action’
view of strategy. This approach is theoretically
underlain by organisation theory and takes
seriously such issues as the role of agency, the
need for a longitudinal focus on process, the
complexities of strategy implementation, and
organizational facets such as strategic choice,
organizational culture, organizational discourses
and learning. Combining theoretical subtlety with
an applied orientation, Heracleous examines
topical areas such as corporate governance,
inter-organizational networks, and organizing for
the future. With original research and extensive
surveys of the strategy literature, combined with
a strong practical orientation, this book is ideal
for MBA students, strategy researchers and the
more thoughtful practitioner.
Contents: Foreword Hwee Hua Lim;
Introduction; Part I. Changes in the Identity of
Ownership and Management; 1. Change in
ownership; 2. Change in management;
Concluding remarks; Part II. Changes in the
Form of Ownership and Organization; 3. Change
of legal structure; 4. Change of organizational
structure; Concluding remarks; Part III. Changes
in Strategy; 5. Corporate and business strategies;
6. Despite failure, NO change in ownership,
management, or strategy; 7. Because of
success, reinforcement of ownership,
management, and strategy; Concluding remarks;
Part IV. Implications for Corporate Governance;
8. The board of directors; Conclusion – strategy
for whom?; Index.
Contents: Part I. Bases of Strategic
Management; 1. The strategic management field;
2. An organizational action view of strategic
management; 3. Strategic thinking or strategic
planning?; 4. Leadership and the board of
directors; Part II. Realising Strategy; 5. The
complexities of strategy implementation; 6.
Organizational culture and strategic change
processes; 7. The role of organizational
discourse in understanding and managing
strategic change; 8. Strategic change processes:
an organization development approach; Part III.
Current Themes and Applications; 9. State
ownership, privatization and performance;
10. Does corporate governance make a
difference to organizational performance?;
11. Types of inter-organizational networks and
the strategic roles of directors; 12. Organizing for
the future.
ISBN: 9780521258579
256pp
The family firm preparing generational change,
the partnership that welcomes new partners, and
the shareholders of a firm that chooses to go
public are making decisions that will have an
impact on strategy and management.
Conversely, a change in strategy such as a move
to diversify or a decision to take on more risk in a
business can make the firm more attractive to
some shareholders and less attractive to others
and is therefore not ownership neutral. Opening
the black box of agency theory, Korine and
Gomez show how management and ownership
interact to shape the strategy of the firm. In their
view, the critical question to ask is not what is the
best strategy, but rather, who is the strategy for?
With numerous detailed examples, Strong
Managers, Strong Owners is an invaluable
resource for company owners, board members
and executives, as well as their advisors in
strategy and governance.
ISBN: 9781107518766
Teaching
Management
James G. S. Clawson
and Mark E. Haskins
PB ` 395.00
228pp
PB ` 595.00
How can every management class be a dynamic,
unforgettable experience? This much-needed
book distils over half a century of the authors'
combined experience as university professors,
consultants, and advisors to corporate training
departments. In a lively, hands-on fashion, it
describes the fundamental elements in every
learning situation, allowing readers to adapt the
suggestions to their particular teaching context. It
sparks reflection on what we do in the classroom,
why we do it, and how it might be done more
effectively. The chapters are broadly organized
according to things you do before class, things
you do during class, and things you do in
between and after class, so that every instructor,
whether newly-minted PhDs facing their first
classroom experience, experienced faculty
looking to polish their teaching techniques,
consultants who want to have more impact, or
corporate trainers wishing to develop in-house
teaching skills, can benefit from the invaluable
advice given.
Contents: Figures; Why this book on teaching
management?; 1. Fundamental elements in
teaching; 2. Levels of learning: one, two and
three; 3. Adult learning theory: it matters;
94
4. Planning a course: trips and tips; 5. Planning a
class: no detail is too small; 6. Lecturing: the
possibilities and the perils; 7. Managing
discussions; 8. Case method: fostering
multidimensional learning; 9. Role-playing;
10. Case writing: crafting a vehicle of interest and
impact; 11. Case teaching notes: getting from
here to there; 12. Action learning;
13. Experiential methods; 14. Enhancing the
conversation: audiovisual tools and techniques;
15. Executive education: contributing to
organizational competitive advantage; 16. Using
technology to teach management;
17. Counseling students; 18. Evaluating
students: the twin tasks of certification and
development; 19. Teaching evaluations:
feedback that can help and hurt; 20. Research
presentations; 21. Managing a degree program:
behind the ‘glory’; 22. Managing a nondegree
client program: an overview; 23. Dealing with the
press; 24. Managing yourself and your time;
Index.
ISBN: 9780521735834
The Business
School in the
Twenty - First
Century
Howard Thomas
Peter Lorange and
Jagdish Sheth
510pp
Thought
Leadership Meets
Business
Peter Lorange
Contents: List of figures; List of tables;
Foreword; Preface; 1. Background and
conceptual framework; 2. Key academic
programs and academic value-creation; 3. The
critical role of R and D; 4. Marketing strategy;
5. Institutional learning; 6. Human resources
strategy; 7. The learning partner perspective;
8. Business school leadership issues;
9. Conclusion: so, what are the key success
factors?; Appendices; Index.
PB ` 795.00
Questions about the status, identity and
legitimacy of business schools in the modern
university system continue to stimulate debate
amongst deans, educational policy makers and
commentators. In this book, three world experts
share their critical insights on management
education and new business school models in
the USA, Europe and Asia, on designing the
business school of the future, and how to make it
work. They look at how the business school is
changing and focus in particular on emergent
global challenges and innovations in curricula,
professional roles, pedagogy, uses of technology
and organizational delineations. Set within the
context of a wider discussion about management
as a profession, the authors provide a
systematic, historical perspective, analysing
major trends in business school models, and
reviewing a wealth of current literature, to provide
an informed and unique perspective that is firmly
grounded in practical and experimental analysis.
ISBN: 9780521263375
292pp
262pp
PB ` 595.00
PHILOSOPHY/ RELIGION
Practical Ethics
Third Edition
Peter Singer
Contents: Preface: tipping or tripping? The
business school and its dilemmas; 1. The
business school: history, evolution and the
search for legitimacy; 2. Business school identity
and legitimacy: its relationship to the modern
university and society; 3. Rethinking
management education and its models: a critical
examination of management and management
education; 4. A framework for re-evaluating
paradigms of management education;
5. Evaluating new and innovative models of
management education; 6. Is the business
school a professional firm? Lessons learned;
7. Enhancing dynamic capabilities in the
business school: improving leadership
capabilities in curricula and management;
8. Afterword: business school futures; Index.
ISBN: 9781107692268
For leading corporations, talent is perhaps the
only truly sustainable competitive advantage. In
light of this, leading international corporations
need to be staffed by the best-possible executive
talent from around the world. This talent
revolution places a burden on business schools
to offer highly-focused learning, based on
practical research. In addition, business schools
face fierce competition in this sector, not least
from the rapid growth in management education
in India and South East Asia. Thought
Leadership Meets Business, first published in
2008, offers significant insights into the factors
that have led to the delivery of high-quality
executive education at the top-ranking
International Institute for Management
Development (IMD). Drawing on the experience
and wisdom gained by IMD President Peter
Lorange over a distinguished career of more than
twenty years, this book offers a powerful model
for business school success.
For 30 years, Peter Singer’s Practical Ethics has
been the classic introduction to applied ethics.
For this third edition, the author has revised and
updated all the chapters and added a new
chapter addressing climate change, one of the
most important ethical challenges of our
generation. Some of the questions discussed in
this book concern our daily lives. Is it ethical to
buy luxuries when others do not have enough to
eat? Should we buy meat from intensively-reared
animals? Am I doing something wrong if my
carbon footprint is above the global average?
Other questions confront us as concerned
citizens: equality and discrimination on the
grounds of race or sex; abortion, the use of
embryos for research and euthanasia; political
violence and terrorism; and the preservation of
our planet’s environment. This book’s lucid style
and provocative arguments make it an ideal text
for university courses and for anyone willing to
think about how she or he ought to live.
Contents: 1. About ethics; 2. Equality and its
implications; 3. Equality for animals?; 4. What’s
wrong with killing?; 5. Taking life: animals;
PB ` 595.00
95
6. Taking life: the embryo and the fetus; 7. Taking
life: humans; 8. Rich and poor; 9. Climate
change; 10. The environment; 11.Civil
disobedience, violence and terrorism; 12. Why
act morally?
ISBN: 9781107602571
Mortal Questions
(Canto Classics)
Thomas Nagel
356pp
Beyond the fleeting moment; 13.Cosmic desire;
14. Love abiding in stone; 15. The melting of the
heart; 16. Return to the world Part III. Wisdom:
Commuting within One World; 17. All the valleys
filled with corpses; 18. Strategic initiatives; 19.
Encompassing the galaxies; 20.The all-pervasive
mind; 21.Striking a balance; 22. Beyond prosaic
words; 23. Irreducible particulars; 24. The head in
the world Notes; Index.
PB ` 595.00
Thomas Nagel’s Mortal Questions explores some
fundamental issues concerning the meaning,
nature and value of human life. Questions about
our attitudes to death, sexual behaviour, social
inequality, war and political power are shown to
lead to more obviously-philosophical problems
about personal identity, consciousness, freedom
and value. This original and illuminating book
aims at a form of understanding that is both
theoretical and personal in its lively engagement
with what are literally issues of life and death.
ISBN: 9780521055949
The Dance of Siva
David Smith
Contents: Preface; Sources; 1. Death; 2. The
absurd; 3. Moral luck; 4. Sexual perversion;
5. War and massacre; 6. Ruthlessness in public
life; 7. The policy of preference; 8. Equality;
9. The fragmentation of value; 10. Ethics without
biology; 11.Brain bisection and the unity of
consciousness; 12. What is it like to be a bat?;
13. Panpsychism; 14.Subjective and objective;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107669321
The Religious
Culture of India
Friedhelm Hardy
224pp
PB ` 395.00
628pp
PB ` 995.00
This is a full account of Siva’s Dance of Bliss,
which has become a popular symbol in the West
for Hinduism and Eastern Mysticism. Siva is one
of the two main gods of Hinduism, and his
worshippers comprise half of all Hindus. Siva’s
Dance of Bliss is based on a remarkable Sanskrit
poem written by Umapati Sivacarya, Saiva
theologian and temple priest in Cidambaram,
South India, in the fourteenth century. Starting
with the bronze image of Nataraja, King of
Dancers, thereafter the Cidambaram temple, its
myth and its priests are viewed in the light of the
poem. Umapati’s Saiva theology is discussed in
relation to his life and also in relation to Vedanta
and yoga. The iconography and mythology of the
Goddess and of other forms of Siva provide
necessary perspective. Art from Cidambaram
and neighbouring sites illuminates the text.
Contents: List of illustrations;
Acknowledgements; Introduction; 1. The Natarâja
bronze; 2. The Cidambaram myth; 3. Temple,
priests and ritual; 4. The Hall of Consciousness,
the Heart of the Universe; 5. ÚaivaSiddhânta and
Vedânta; 6. The Goddess; 7. Bhiksâtana;
8. Bhairava the Terrible and other forms of Úiva;
9. Saints, dancing girls, ganas and Apasmâra;
10. Last words; Notes; Bibliography; Index and
glossary.
This study conducts a lively and innovative
exploration of the traditional Indian religions and
cultures – an area that has both fascinated and
puzzled the West for centuries. Friedhelm Hardy
aims at presenting the widest possible range of
themes that have preoccupied traditional Indian
culture. He uses a great variety of sources, in
various languages, and listens not only to what
the learned philosopher or theologian in the
classical Sanskrit texts has to say, but also to
what folk and regional cults and cultures express
in stories, myths and poetry. The result is a
personal and entertaining portrayal of the
colourful world of India, which will have great
appeal for the non-specialist. By making the
three universal human drives of power, love and
wisdom his focal points, Hardy seeks to guide the
reader through an alien world, which is
nevertheless recognizably human. This book will
be required reading for all those interested in
India and its culture.
ISBN: 9788175960428
Rethinking the
Buddha
Early Buddhist
Philosophy as
Meditative Perception
Eviatar Shulman
Contents: Preface; Part I. Power: the Challenges
of the External World; 1. Consulting the oracle
once again; 2. Oceans of milk and treacle 3.
Navigating the sea of earthly existence;4. Safe
havens; 5. Violence, aggression and heroism6.
Manipulating space, time and matter; 7. Entering
forbidden realms; 8. Unleashing the powers of
the self; Part II. Love: the Rhythms of the Interior
World; 9. The missing colour; 10. The landscape
of the heart; 11.The deadly weapons of Mara; 12.
96
316pp
PB ` 495.00
A cornerstone of Buddhist philosophy, the
doctrine of the four noble truths maintains that life
is replete with suffering, desire is the cause of
suffering, nirvana is the end of suffering, and the
way to nirvana is the eightfold noble path.
Although the attribution of this seminal doctrine to
the historical Buddha is ubiquitous, Rethinking
the Buddha demonstrates through a careful
examination of early Buddhist texts that he did
not envision them in this way. Shulman traces
the development of what we now call the four
noble truths, which in fact originated as
observations to be cultivated during deep
meditation. The early texts reveal that other
central Buddhist doctrines, such as dependentorigination and selflessness, similarly derived
from meditative observations. This book
challenges the conventional view that the
Islamic Extremism
Buddha’s teachings represent universal themes
of human existence, allowing for a fresh,
compelling explanation of the Buddhist theory of
liberation.
Causes, Diversity, &
Challenges
Monte Palmer and
Princess Palmer
Contents: Preface; 1. The structural relation
between philosophy and meditation; 2. A
philosophy of being human; 3. Mindfulness, or
how philosophy becomes perception; 4. The four
noble truths as meditative perception;
5. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107525542
Political Thought
in Action
Shruti Kapila
and Faisal Devji
221pp
PB ` 395.00
This volume brings together a group of
intellectual and social historians to discuss the
way in which modern interpretations of the Gita
have focused on war and violence, rather than
peace and stability, as a site for thinking about
politics. The essays gathered here look at the
Gita as a philosophical and ethical text both
within South Asia and also on its ‘outward
journey’ into western political debate. Though
part of an ancient epic tradition, the Gita did not
achieve its current eminence until very recently.
Its resurgence and reinterpretation, in short, is
coterminous with the formation of modern life and
politics. But if modern commentaries on the
Bhagavad Gita cannot be described simply as
participating in some ancient and continuing
tradition, neither should they be seen merely as
the epiphenomena of an abstraction like
capitalism that supposedly constitutes the true
reality of Indian society. This set of essays seeks
to intervene in current debates within political
thought and intellectual history and to offer new
perspectives on both. They do so with the
presumption that the place of India and its
political thought is instructive for and foundational
in the making of the national and post-national
global order.The book would be of interest to
academic researchers as well as general readers
interested in South Asian History, Indian
philosophy and religion.
Contents: Chapter 1: America ‘s Struggle
against Terror: Who is the Enemy?; Chapter 2:
Islam, Muslim Extremism, and Anti-Americanism;
Chapter 3: The Muslim Brotherhood and the
Origin of the Radical-Moderates; Chapter 4:
Hamas: The Ascendance of Religious Extremism
in the Arab Israeli Conflict; Chapter 5: Hizbullah:
A Tale of Three Countries; Chapter 6: Iraqi
Hizbullah; Chapter 7: Turkey : A Model for
Democratic Islamic Rule?; Chapter 8: The
Jihadist Movement and How it Evolved; Chapter
9: The Jihadist War Plan; Chapter 10: The
Jihadist War Machine; Chapter 11: The Allies of
the Jihadists: Those Who Make Terror Possible;
Chapter 12: The Israeli Struggle against Terror
and Islamic Extremism: A Guide for the United
States; Chapter 13: How America’s Allies in the
Islamic World Fight Terror; Chapter 14: America,
Islamic Extremism and Jihadist Terror.
ISBN: 9788175967717
Contents: List of contributors; Introduction;
Chapter 1: India, the Bhagavad Gita and
theWorld; Chapter 2: The Transnational Gita;
Chapter 3: The Transfiguration of Duty in
Aurobindo’s Essays on the Gita; Chapter 4:
Gandhi’s Gita and Politics as Such; Chapter 5:
Gandhi on Democracy, Politics and the Ethics of
Everyday Life; Chapter 6: Morality in the Shadow
of Politics; Chapter 7: Ambedkar’s Inheritances;
Chapter 8: Rethinking Knowledge with Action: V.
D. Savarkar, the Bhagavad Gita, and Histories of
Warfare; Chapter 9: A History of Violence; Index.
ISBN: 9781107033955
220pp
Islamic Extremism : Causes Diversity &
Challenges is a deeply informed book which
examines the threat that Islamic extremists pose
to America and provides a balanced and
nuanced discussion of the link between Iraq and
the war on terror. Explaining the basics of Islam
and guiding the reader through the intricacies of
each significant fundamentalist group the
Palmers answer key questions: Who are the
Muslim extremists and how do they fit within the
broader context of the Islamic religion? What is
their war plan and how do they operate? Who are
their allies and what are their weaknesses? What
is the experience of Israel the Islamic world and
the United States in fighting Muslim extremists?
How can they be defeated? The book includes
detailed analyses of Hizbullah and the Muslim
Brotherhood Hamas the Iraqi clones of Hizbullah
and the Islamic government in Turkey.
HB ` 645.00
97
302pp
PB ` 595.00
Hinduism and the
Ethics of Warfare
in South Asia
Kaushik Roy
This book challenges the view, common among
Western scholars, that precolonial India lacked a
tradition of military philosophy. It traces the
evolution of theories of warfare in India from the
dawn of civilization, focusing on the debate
between Dharmayuddha (Just War) and
Kutayuddha (Unjust War) within Hindu
philosophy. This debate centre around four
questions: What is war? What justifies it? How
should it be waged? And what are its potential
repercussions? This body of literature provides
evidence of the historical evolution of strategic
thought in the Indian subcontinent that has
heretofore been neglected by modern historians.
Further, it provides a counterpoint to scholarship
in political science that engages solely with
Western theories in its analysis of independent
India’s philosophy of warfare. Ultimately, a better
understanding of the legacy of ancient India’s
strategic theorizing will enable more accurate
analysis of modern India’s military and nuclear
policies.
Elements of
Tibetan Buddhism
Richard E. Farkas
Contents: Foreword by His Holiness the 14th
Dalai Lama; Preface; Acknowledgments; 1. It
Started with Buddha; 2. And Then It Came to
Tibet; 3. Tibetan Buddhist Vows and Practices;
4. Rituals / Ritual Objects / Symbols; 5. Deities
and Other Manifestations; 6. Buddhist Profiles;
7. Significant Buddhist Sites; 8. The Dalai,
Panchen, and Karmapa Lamas; 9. Monasteries,
Nunneries, Oracles, and Demoness-Subduing
Temples; 10. Sacred Lakes and Mountains;
11. Language and Literature; 12. Tibetan Names;
13. Quotations / Tibetan sayings;
14. Buddhism by the Numbers; 15. Tibetan
Holidays, Festivals, and Calendar; 16. Sources /
Bibliography / References; 17. Glossary;
Appendix 1: Chronology; Appendix 2: Schools
and Sub-Schools; Appendix 3: Buddhism Around
the World; Appendix 4: The Tibetan Diaspora;
Appendix 5: Unifying Beliefs Among Buddhist
Traditions; Photography / Illustration credits;
About the author; Index.
Contents: Introduction; 1. Religious ethic and the
philosophy of warfare in vedic and epic India:
1500 BCE–400 BCE; 2. Buddhism, Jainism, and
Asoka’s Ahimsa; 3. Kautilya’sKutayuddha: 300
BCE–300 CE; 4. Dharmayuddha and
Kutayuddha from the Common Era till the advent
of the Turks; 5. Hindu militarism under Islamic
Rule: 900 CE–1800 CE; 6. Hindu militarism and
anti-militarism in British India: 1750–1947; 7.
Hindu military ethos and strategic thought in postcolonial India; Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107043855
305pp
The mysteries of Tibetan Buddhism have
fascinated people for centuries. This book is
aimed at those who have an interest in the
rituals, traditions, practices, and little-known facts
and culture of Tibetan Buddhism. Among the
many elements one will find in this book are:
what makes up a person’s practice; what the
eight auspicious symbols mean; what etiquette
should be followed while in a shrine room or
temple setting; who are the major Tibetan
Buddhist deities; what do Tibetan names mean;
what are the major Tibetan holidays; what are
some good movies to watch about Tibetan
Buddhism.
HB ` 995.00
ISBN: 9789382993445
Fate and Fortune
in the Indian
Scriptures
Sukumari Bhattacharji
Fatalism is a philosophical doctrine, which states
that an individual does not have full control over
the events that happen in his life. There is no
trace of fatalism in the early Indian literature —
Samhitas, Brahmanas and Upanisads; it surged
in the succeeding period. This book argues that
the predominance of the priestly class after the
revival of Brahminism, as an aftermath of the
decline of Buddhism, ushered in conspicuous
changes in people’s attitude to life. The new
modifications helped entrench fate as a
formidable force. It explains that the natural
factors, which led to the rise of fatalism were
observation of the inexorability of death. The
author has referred to a splendid array of
scriptures ranging from the early and late Vedic
literature, Ramayana, Mahabharata to Buddhist
and Jain texts, Bible and other old western texts
to establish her erudite findings.
An Introduction
to Islam
David Waines
328pp
HB ` 495.00
For this revised and updated second edition,
David Waines has added a long section tackling
head-on the issues arising from Islam’s place in
the changing world order at the turn of the new
millennium. This new section offers thoughtprovoking reflections on the place of religion in
the current conflicts.
Contents:Introduction; Part I. Foundations;
1. ‘There is no god but Allah; 2. Tradition in the
making; Part II. Islamic Teaching and Practice;
3. Divine will and the law; 4. Theology: faith,
justice, and last things; 5. The way of the Sufi;
6. The way of the Imams; Part III. Islam in the
Modern World; 7. The heartlands and beyond;
8.Issues in contemporary Islam; Excursus on
Islamic origins; Glossary; Notes; Further reading;
Index.
Contents: Preface; Introduction; Chapter 1.
Inception; Chapter 2. Rebirth and transmigration;
Chapter 3. Karman and its consequences;
Chapter 4. Karman, fate and free will; Chapter 5.
Fate, eschatology and liberation; Chapter 6.
Premonitions and presages; Chapter 7.
Deflection: Remedial measures; Chapter 8.
Vicarious deflection; Chapter 9. Fate and human
endeavour; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993889
296pp
ISBN: 9788175961890
HB ` 895.00
98
368pp
PB ` 495.00
A New
Anthropology
of Islam
John R. Bowen
In this powerful, but accessible new study,
John R. Bowen draws on a full range of work in
social anthropology to present Islam in ways that
emphasise its constitutive practices, from praying
and learning to judging and political organizing.
Starting at the heart of Islam – revelation and
learning in Arabic lands – Bowen shows how
Muslims have adapted Islamic texts and
traditions to ideas and conditions in the societies
in which they live. Returning to key case studies
in Asia, Africa and Western Europe, to explore
each major domain of Islamic religious and social
life, Bowen also considers the theoretical
advances in social anthropology that have come
out of the study of Islam.
An Introduction to
Hinduism
Gavin D. Flood
Contents: 1. Points of departure; 2. Ancient
origins; 3. Dharma; 4. Yoga and renunciation;
5. Narrative traditions and early Vaisnavism;
6. The love of Visnu; 7. Saiva and tantric religion;
8. The Goddess and Sákta traditions; 9. Hindu
ritual; 10. Hindu theology and philosophy;
11.Hinduism and the modern world.
Contents: 1. How to think about religions –
Islam, for example; 2. Learning; 3. Perfecting
piety through worship; 4. Reshaping sacrifice;
5. Healing and praying; 6. Pious organizing;
7. Judging; 8. Migrating and adapting;
9. Mobilizing.
ISBN: 9781107615755
230pp
ISBN: 9788175960282
Michael Cook
What kind of duty do we have to try to stop other
people from doing something wrong? The
question is intelligible in just about any culture,
but few of them seek to answer it in a rigorous
fashion. The most striking exception is found in
the Islamic tradition, where ‘commanding right’
and ‘forbidding wrong’ is a central moral tenet
already mentioned in the Koran. As an historian
of Islam whose research has ranged widely over
space and time, Michael Cook is well placed to
interpret this complex subject. His book
represents the first sustained attempt to map the
history of Islamic reflection on this obligation. It
covers the origins of Muslim thinking about
‘forbidding wrong’, the relevant doctrinal
developments over the centuries, and its
significance in Sunni and Shi’ite thought today. In
this way the book contributes to the
understanding of Islamic thought, its relevance to
contemporary Islamic politics and ideology, and
raises fundamental questions for the comparative
study of ethics.
Mona Siddiqui
720pp
PB ` 495.00
In this thought-provoking book, Mona Siddiqui
reflects upon key themes in Islamic law and
theology. These themes, which range through
discussions about friendship, divorce,
drunkenness, love, slavery and ritual slaughter,
offer fascinating insights into Islamic ethics and
the way in which arguments developed in
medieval juristic discourse. Pre-modern religious
works contained a richness of thought, hesitation
and speculation on a wide range of topics, which
were socially relevant and also presented
intellectual challenges to the scholars for whom
God's revelation could be understood in diverse
ways. These subjects remain relevant today, for
practising Muslims and scholars of Islamic law
and religious studies. Mona Siddiqui is an astute
and articulate interpreter who relays complex
ideas about the Islamic tradition with great clarity.
Her book charts her own journey through the
classical texts and reflects upon how the
principles expounded there have guided her own
thinking, teaching and research.
Contents: 1. Spoken, intended and problematic
divorce in Hanafi Fiqh; 2. Between person and
property – slavery in Quduri's Mukhtasar; 3. Pig,
purity and permission in Maliki slaughter; 4.
Islamic and other perspectives on evil; 5. The
language of love in the Qur'an; 6. Virtue and
limits in the ethics of friendship; 7. Drinking and
drunkenness in Ibn Rushd.
Contents: Part I. Introduction; 1. The goldsmith
of Marw; 2. Koran and Koranic exegesis;
3. Tradition; 4. Biographical literature about early
Muslims; Part II. The Hanbalites; 5. Ibn Hanbal;
6. The Hanbalites of Baghdad; 7. The Hanbalites
of Damascus; 8. The Hanbalites of Najd; Part III.
The Mu’tazilities and Shi’ites: 9. The Mu’tazilites;
10. The Zaydis; 11. The Imamis; Part IV. Other
Sects and Schools; 12. The Hanafis; 13. The
Shafi’ites; 14. The Malikis; 15. The Ibadis;
16. Ghazzali; 17. Classical Islam in retrospect;
Part V. Beyond Classical Islam; 18. Modern
Islamic developments; 19. Origins and
comparisons; 20. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9788175963207
341pp
PB ` 495.00
The Good Muslim
Commanding
Right and
Forbidding Wrong
in IslamicThought
This book provides a much-needed thematic and
historical introduction to Hinduism, the religion of
the majority of people in India. Dr Flood traces
the development of Hindu traditions from their
ancient origins and the major deities to the
modern world. Hinduism is discussed as both a
global religion and a form of nationalism.
Emphasis is given to the tantric traditions, which
have been so influential; to Hindu ritual, more
fundamental than beliefs or doctrines; and to
Dravidian influencesn. Some debates within
contemporary scholarship are introduced.
ISBN: 9781107610699
PB ` 695.00
99
240pp
PB ` 595.00
The Power of
Oratory in the
Medieval Muslim
World
Linda G. Jones
the circle of justice; Part II. Modernity and
Ruptures: 7. Colonizing the Muslim world and its
Shari’a; 8. Modernizing the law in the age of
nation states; 9. State, ulama and Islamists;
10. Shari’a then and now: Concluding notes.
Oratory and sermons had a fixed place in the
religious and civic rituals of pre-modern Muslim
societies and were indispensable for transmitting
religious knowledge, legitimizing or challenging
rulers and inculcating the moral values
associated with being part of the Muslim
community. While there has been abundant
scholarship on medieval Christian and Jewish
preaching, Linda G. Jones's book is the first to
consider the significance of the tradition of pulpit
oratory in the medieval Islamic world. Traversing
Iberia and North Africa from the twelfth to the
fifteenth centuries, the book analyses the power
of oratory, the ritual juridical and rhetorical
features of pre-modern sermons and the social
profiles of the preachers and orators who
delivered them. The biographical and historical
sources, which form the basis of this remarkable
study, shed light on different regional practices
and the juridical debates between individual
preachers around correct performance.
ISBN: 9780521127943
An Introduction to
Buddhism
Teachings, History
and Practices
Second Edition
Peter Harvey
Contents: Introduction; 1. Laying the
foundations; 2. The khutba: the 'central jewel' of
medieval Arab-Islamic prose; 3. The khutba:
rhetorical and discursive strategies of
persuasion; 4. Putting it all together: the khutba,
texts, and contexts; Part I. Canonical Questions;
5. Putting it all together: the khutba, texts, and
contexts; Part II. Thematic and Occasional
Orations; 6. Homiletic exhortation and
storytelling: challenging the 'popular'; 7. 'The
good eloquent speaker': profiles of pre-modern
Muslim preachers; 8. The audience responds:
participation, reception, contestation; Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107039438
An Introduction to
Islamic Law
Wael B. Hallaq
208pp
PB ` 395.00
In this new edition of the best-selling An
Introduction to Buddhism, Peter Harvey provides
a comprehensive introduction to the development
of the Buddhist tradition in both Asia and the
West. Extensively revised and fully updated, this
new edition draws on recent scholarship in the
field, exploring the tensions and continuities
between the different forms of Buddhism. Harvey
critiques and corrects some common
misconceptions and mistranslations, and
discusses key concepts that have often been
over-simplified and over-generalized. The volume
includes detailed references to scriptures and
secondary literature, an updated bibliography and
a section on web resources. Key terms are given
in Pali and Sanskrit, and Tibetan words are
transliterated in the most easily pronounceable
form, making this is a truly accessible account.
Contents: Introduction; 1. The Buddha and his
Indian context; 2. Early Buddhist teachings:
rebirth and karma; 3. Early Buddhist teachings:
the four true realities for the spiritually ennobled;
4. Early developments in Buddhism;
5. Mahayana philosophies: the varieties of
emptiness; 6. Mahayana holy beings, and Tantric
Buddhism; 7. The later history and spread of
Buddhism; 8. Buddhist practice: devotion;
9. Buddhist practice: ethics; 10. Buddhist
practice: the Sangha; 11. Buddhist practice:
meditation and cultivation of experience-based
wisdom; 12. The modern history of Buddhism in
Asia; 13. Buddhism beyond Asia; Appendix on
canons of scriptures; Web resources;
Bibliography; Index.
3108pp HB ` 895.00
The study of Islamic law can be a forbidding
prospect for those entering the field for the first
time. Wael Hallaq, a leading scholar and
practitioner of Islamic law, guides students
through the intricacies of the subject in this
absorbing introduction. The first half of the book
is devoted to a discussion of Islamic law in its
pre-modern natural habitat. The second part
explains how the law was transformed and
ultimately dismantled during the colonial period.
In the final chapters, the author charts recent
developments and the struggles of the Islamists
to negotiate changes-which have seen the law
emerge as a primarily-textual entity focused on
fixed punishments and ritual requirements. The
book, which includes a chronology, a glossary of
key terms, and lists of further reading, will be the
first stop for those who wish to understand the
fundamentals of Islamic law, its practices and
history.
ISBN: 9781107669703
Contents: Introduction; Part I. Tradition and
Continuity: 1. Who’s who in the Shari’a; 2. The
law: how is it found?; 3. The legal schools;
4. Jurists, legal education and politics;
5. Shari’a’s society; 6. Pre-modern governance:
100
548pp
PB ` 695.00
Communal Violence, Forced
Migration and the State
Gujarat Since 2002
Sanjeevini Badigar Lokhande
When violence occurs in democracies it is
often characterized as an aberration. The
state that saw human rights violations and
failure of law and order in Gujarat in 2002
emerged, even if by its own admission, as
a model for good governance. Communal
Violence, Forced Migration and the State,
through an account of displaced Muslims,
challenges this notion. Through the
unlikely yet probing lens of displacement,
it offers fresh insight into communal
violence and is an important resource for
the emerging domain of forced migration
and changing nature of the state in a
globalized world.
Sanjeevini Badigar Lokhande teaches at
the Department of Civics and Politics,
University of Mumbai, India.
Hardback | 978-1-107-06544-4 | ` 525.00
www.cambridge.org
The Cambridge
Companion to
The Qur'an
Jane Dammen
McAuliffe
As the living scriptural heritage of more than a
billion people, the Qur'an (Koran) speaks with a
powerful voice. Just as other scriptural religions,
Islam has produced a long tradition of
interpretation for its holy book. Nevertheless,
efforts to introduce the Qur'an and its intellectual
heritage to English-speaking audiences have
been hampered by the lack of available
resources. The Cambridge Companion to the
Qur'an seeks to remedy that situation. In a
discerning summation of the field, Jane McAuliffe
brings together an international team of scholars
to explain its complexities. Comprising 14
chapters, each devoted to a topic of central
importance, the book is rich in historical, linguistic
and literary detail, while also reflecting the
influence of other disciplines.
The Cambridge
Companion to Life
and Death
Steven Luper
Contents: Introduction Steven Luper; Part I. The
Metaphysics of Life and Death; 1.The nature of
life Mark A. Bedau; 2. The nature of people Eric
T. Olson; 3. Persistence and time Katherine
Hawley; 4. The malleability of identity Marya
Schechtman; 5. The nature of human death
David DeGrazia; Part II. The Significance of Life
and Death; 6. Assessing lives Noah Lemos;
7. On the length of a good life Eyjólfur K.
Emilsson; 8. Mortal harm John Martin Fischer;
9. When do we incur mortal harm? Jens
Johansson; 10. The symmetry problem James
Warren; 11. Posthumous harm Simon Keller;
12. Life's meaning Steven Luper; Part III. The
Ethics of Life and Death; 13. Enhancing humanity
Nicholas Agar; 14. Procreating David Archard;
15. Abortion Michael Tooley; 16. Killing ourselves
Thomas Hill, Jr; 17. Killing in self-defense Kadri
Vihvelin; 18. Imperfect aiding Matthew Hanser;
19. Killing and extinction Krister Bykvist.
Contents: List of figures; Notes on contributors;
Introduction Jane Dammen McAuliffe; Part I.
Formation of the Qur'anic Text; 1. The historical
context Fred M. Donner; 2. Creation of a fixed
text Claude Gilliot; 3. Alternative accounts of the
Qur'an's formation Harald Motzki; Part II.
Description and Analysis; 4. Themes and topics
Daniel A. Madigan; 5. Structural, linguistic and
literary features Angelika Neuwirth; 6. Recitation
and aesthetic reception William A. Graham and
Navid Kermani; Part III. Transmission and
Dissemination; 7. From palm leaves to the
Internet Fred Leemhuis; 8. Inscriptions in art and
architecture Sheila Blair and Jonathan Bloom;
Part IV. Interpretations and Intellectual
Traditions; 9. The tasks and traditions of
interpretation Jane Dammen Mcauliffe;
10. Multiple areas of influence Alexander Knysh;
11. Western scholarship and the Qur'an Andrew
Rippin; Part V. Contemporary Readings;
12. Women's readings of the Qur'an Asma
Barlas; 13. Political interpretation of the Qur'an
Stefan Wild; 14. The Qur'an and other religions
Abdulaziz Sachedina; Qur'an citation index;
General index.
ISBN: 9781107461673
352pp
This volume meets the increasing interest in a
range of philosophical issues connected with the
nature and significance of life and death, and the
ethics of killing. What is it to be alive and to die?
What is it to be a person? What must time be like
if we are to persist? What makes one life better
than another? Do death or posthumous events
harm the dead? The chapters in this volume
address these questions, and also discuss
topical issues such as abortion, euthanasia, and
suicide. They explore the interrelation between
the metaphysics, significance, and ethics of life
and death, and they discuss the moral
significance of killing both people and animals,
and the extent to which death harms them.
ISBN: 9781107461666
Modern Islamic
Thought in a
Radical Age
PB ` 495.00
Religious Authority and
Internal Criticism
Muhammad
Qasim Zaman
366pp
PB ` 595.00
Among traditionally-educated scholars in the
Islamic world there is much disagreement on the
crises that afflict modern Muslim societies and
how best to deal with them, and the debates
have grown more urgent since 9/11. Through an
analysis of the work of Muhammad Rashid Rida
and Yusuf al-Qaradawi in the Arab Middle East
and a number of scholars belonging to the
Deobandi orientation in colonial and
contemporary South Asia, this book examines
some of the most important issues facing the
Muslim world since the late nineteenth century.
These include the challenges to the binding
claims of a long-established scholarly consensus,
evolving conceptions of the common good, and
discourses on religious education, the legal rights
of women, social and economic justice and
violence and terrorism. This wide-ranging study
by a leading scholar provides the depth and the
comparative perspective necessary for an
understanding of the ferment that characterizes
contemporary Islam.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Rethinking
consensus; 3. The language of Ijtihad; 4.
102
Contestations on the common good; 5. Bridging
traditions: madrasas and their internal critics;
6. Women, law, and society; 7. Socioeconomic
justice; 8. Denouncing violence: the ambiguities
of a discourse; 9. Epilogue: the paradoxes of
internal criticism.
ISBN: 9781107619180
The Origins of
Yoga and Tantra
Indic Religions to the
Thirteenth Century
Geoffrey Samuel
372pp
POLITICS, SOCIAL THEORY
Votes and Violence
Steven I. Wilkinson
PB ` 895.00
Yoga, tantra and other forms of Asian meditation
are practised in modernized forms throughout the
world today, but most introductions to Hinduism
or Buddhism tell only part of the story of how they
developed. This book is an interpretation of the
history of Indic religions up to around 1200 CE,
with particular focus on the development of yogic
and tantric traditions. It assesses how much we
really know about this period, and asks what
sense we can make of the evolution of yogic and
tantric practices, which were to become such
central and important features of the Indic
religious scene. Its originality lies in seeking to
understand these traditions in terms of the total
social and religious context of South Asian
society during this period, including the religious
practices of the general population with their
close engagement with family, gender, economic
life and other pragmatic concerns.
Contents; List of figures; List of tables;
Acknowledgments; 1. The electoral incentives for
ethnic violence; 2. Explaining town-level variation
in Hindu-Muslim violence; 3. State capacity
explanations for Hindu-Muslim violence; 4. The
consociational explanation for Hindu-Muslim
violence; 5. The electoral incentives for HinduMuslim violence; 6. Party competition and HinduMuslim violence; 7. The electoral incentives for
ethnic violence in comparative perspective;
8. Democracy and ethnic violence; Appendices;
References; Index.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Stories and
sources; Part I. Meditation and Yoga: 3. The
second urbanisation of South Asia; 4. Two worlds
and their interactions; 5. Religion in the early
states; 6. The origins of the Buddhist and Jain
orders; 7. The Brahmanical alternative;
8. Interlude: asceticism and celibacy in Indic
religions; Part II. Tantra: 9. The classical
synthesis; 10. Tantra and the wild goddesses;
11. Subtle bodies, longevity and internal
alchemy; 12. Tantra and the state; 13. The later
history of yoga and tantra; 14. Postlude.
PB
432pp
HB
ISBN: 9780521118682 432pp
ISBN: 9781107678972
Why do ethnic riots break out when and where
they do? Why do some governments try to
prevent ethnic riots while others do nothing or
even participate in the violence? In this book,
Steven I. Wilkinson uses collected data on
Hindu-Muslim riots, socio-economic factors and
competitive politics in India to test his theory that
riots are fomented in order to win elections and
that governments decide whether to stop them or
not based on the likely electoral cost of doing so.
He finds that electoral factors account for most of
the state-level variation in Hindu-Muslim riots:
explaining for example why riots took place in
Gujarat in 2002 but not in many other states
where militants tried to foment violence. The
general electoral theory he develops for India is
extended to Ireland, Malaysia and Romania as
Wilkinson shows that similar political factors
motivate ethnic violence in many different
countries.
ISBN: 9780521672818
` 595.00
` 995.00
103
312pp
PB ` 695.00
Vortex of Conflict
U.S. Policy Toward
Afghanistan, Pakistan,
and Iraq
Dan Caldwell
Varieties of
Federal
Governance
More than two million Americans have now
served in Afghanistan or Iraq; more than 5, 000
Americans have been killed; and more than 35,
000 have been grievously wounded. The war in
Afghanistan has become America’s longest war.
Despite these facts, most Americans do not
understand the background of, or reasons for, the
United States’ involvement in these two wars.
Utilizing an impressive array of primary and
secondary sources, author Dan Caldwell
describes and makes sense of the relevant
historical, political, cultural, and ideological,
elements related to the wars in Iraq and
Afghanistan. Perhaps most importantly, he
demonstrates how they are interrelated in a
number of important ways. Beginning with a
description of the history of the two conflicts
within the context of U.S. policies toward
Afghanistan, Iraq, and Pakistan — because
American policy toward terrorism and
Afghanistan cannot be understood without some
consideration of Pakistan — he outlines and
analyses the major issues of the two wars. These
include intelligence quality, war plans, postwar
reconstruction, inter-agency policymaking, U.S.
relations with allies, and the shift from a
conventional to counterinsurgency strategy. He
concludes by capturing the lessons learned from
these two conflicts and points to their application
in future conflict. Vortex of Conflict is the first,
accessible, one-volume resource for anyone who
wishes to understand why and how the U.S.
became involved in these two wars — and in the
affairs of Pakistan — concurrently. It will stand as
the comprehensive reference work for general
readers seeking a road map to the conflicts, for
students looking for analysis and elucidation of
the relevant data, and for veterans and their
families seeking to better understand their own
experience.
Major Contemporary
Models
Rekha Saxena
Contents: List of Contributors; Foreword;
Acknowledgements; Introduction; I. Theoretical
and Comparative Dimensions; 1. Federalism: An
Alternative Category in Political Thought?;
2. Governance of Capital Cities in Federal
Countries: Comparative Perspectives; II.
Presidential Federal Systems; 3. Political
Coercion and Administrative Cooperation in U.S.
Intergovernmental Relations; 4. What Makes the
Swiss Multicultural Federalism Work; 5. Local
Governments in the Brazilian Federation;
6. Russian Federalism: Does it Work?;
7. Federalism in Pakistan; III. Commonwealth
Parliamentary Federations; 8. Constitutional
Normalization in Canada: The Significance of
Failure of the Charlottetown Agreement; 9. The
Australian Senate: Form, Function and
Effectiveness; 10. Federalizing India’s Political
Parties: National All-India and National Interstate
Parties; 11. Malaysia: Centralized Federalism in
an Electoral One-Party State; 12. Promises
Unmet: Multi-level Government in South Africa;
IV. Non-Commonwealth Parliamentary
Federations in Afro-Asia; 13. Multi-ethnicity and
Federalism: Constitutional Provisions in the
Federal Democratic Republic of Ethiopia;
14. Federalism and Political Inclusion: Choices
facing Nepal ; V. European Parliamentary
Federations; 15. The German Federal System
and its Reforms: Structures, Taboos and the
‘Shylock Principle’; 16. The Belgian Federation:
Tools of Appeasement, Instruments of
Confrontation; 17. Federalism as Ideology and as
Institutional Form in the Spanish Estado de
lasAutonomías (1977–2004); VI. Devolutionary
Systems; 18. The Union’s Place: Scottish-English
Relations after Devolution; 19. The Federal
Debate in Sri Lanka ; VII. Supranational
Confederalism/Federalism?; 20. The European
Union and the Competence Catalogue after the
Lisbon Treaty: Insights from Comparative
Federalism
Contents: Preface and Acknowledgments; Part I
History; 1. From Cold War to War on Terror;
2. The United States and Islamic Countries;
3. Afghanistan, Pakistan, and the United States;
4. Iraq: From Cradle of Civilization to Republic of
Fear; 5. The Development of Terrorism, 1991–
2001 ; 6. The Bush Doctrine; Part II Issues;
7. Assumptions; 8. Intelligence; 9. War Plans;
10. Postwar Reconstruction; 11. Policymaking;
12. Allies; 13. Strategy; Part III Conclusion;
14. Lessons and Legacies: Twenty-Six Articles;
Appendixes; A Maps of Afghanistan, Pakistan,
Iraq, and the Middle East Region; B Chronology;
C Bibliography; Notes; Index
ISBN: 9788175969278
408pp
Towards the end of the Second World War, there
were only four functioning federations in the
world – the United States, Switzerland, Canada
and Australia. Today, 24 countries in the world
follow the federal form of government. Varieties
of Federal Governance presents a global
analytical survey of contemporary federations.
The book highlights distinctive features and
contemporary issues in the typology of major
federal systems in terms of presidential
federations (USA, Switzerland, Brazil, Russia,
Pakistan), Commonwealth parliamentary
federations (Canada, Australia, India, Malaysia,
South Africa), Non Commonwealth parliamentary
federations in Afro-Asia (Ethiopia, Nepal), and
European parliamentary federations (Germany,
Belgium, Spain). The book also includes
analyses of prefederal devolutionary models in
the UK and Sri Lanka, and supranational
federative tendencies in the European Union.This
book will serve as a useful reference book for
graduate students and academic researchers.
HB ` 895.00
ISBN: 9788175967991
104
534pp
HB ` 895.00
Timepass
Youth, Class, and the
Politics of Waiting in
India
Craig Jeffrey
Contents: List of Figures; List of Tables;
Preface; Acknowledgments; List of
Abbreviations; 1. Rising Powers; 2. Insights from
History of Power Shifts and Growing
Interdependence; 3. Understanding the Rapid
Rise of China and India; 4. Positive Growth
Prospects for China and India; 5. Growing
Economic and Geopolitical Impact;
6. Environmental and Natural Resource Impact;
7. Power Shifts and Rising Frictions Have
Implications for the Global System and the
United States; 8. How Will the World Adjust to the
Swift Ascent of China and India?; • Alternative
Scenarios; Notes; References; Index.
Social and economic changes around the globe
have propelled increasing numbers of people into
situations of chronic waiting, where promised
access to political freedoms, social goods, or
economic resources is delayed, often indefinitely.
But there have been few efforts to reflect on the
significance of "waiting" in the contemporary
world.
Timepass fills this gap by offering a captivating
ethnography of the student politics and youth
activism that lower middle class young men in
India have undertaken in response to pervasive
underemployment. It highlights the importance of
waiting as a social experience and basis for
political mobilization, the micro-politics of class
power in north India, and the socio-economic
strategies of lower middle classes. The book also
explores how this north Indian story relates to
practices of waiting occurring in multiple other
contexts, making the book of interest to scholars
and students of globalization, youth studies, and
class across the social sciences.
ISBN: 9789382264644
The US–India
Nuclear Agreement
Contents: Acknowledgments; Chapter 1. India
Waiting; Chapter 2. Cultivating Fields: The Rise
and Resilience of a Rural Middle Class; Chapter
3. Life at the Crossroads: Timepass; Chapter 4.
Collective Student Protest ; Chapter 5. Fixing
Futures: Improvised Politics; Chapter 6.
Conclusions; Bibliography; Index
ISBN: 9788175969261
The World under
Pressure
How China and India
are Influencing the
Global Economy and
Environment
Carl J. Dahlman
232pp
Dinshaw Mistry
HB ` 895.00
The rapid rise of China and India is reshaping our
global economic and environmental systems,
raising major issues of stability, governance, and
sustainability. This book develops a framework
that shows the interdependence between
economic size, trade, finance, technology,
environment, security, and global governance.
The author uses this framework to provide data
on the speed of global power shifts and to trace
the implications for nations worldwide.
Specifically, as the book shows, China and
India’s unchecked growth has the potential to
ignite trade, resource, cold, and conventional
wars. Moreover, these nations could set in
motion monumental challenges related to climate
change. The author argues that the current
international governance system is not actively
trying to defuse the challenges of these frictions.
The major powers, including China and India,
must do more to address the gathering storm.
Developing sustainable economic and social
relationships will be a most difficult charge, but
the cost of putting off reforms will be lower global
welfare. The author discusses the starting points
for initiating these changes. The book will be of
interest to students and researchers of
Development Economics, International Relations
and Asian Politics.
326pp
HB ` 795.00
From 2005 to 2008, the United States and India
negotiated a pathbreaking nuclear agreement
that recognized India’s nuclear status and lifted
longstanding embargoes on civilian nuclear
cooperation with India. This book offers the most
comprehensive account of the diplomacy and
domestic politics behind this nuclear agreement.
Domestic politics considerably impeded — and
may have entirely prevented — US nuclear
accommodation with India; when domestic
obstacles were overcome, US–India negotiations
advanced; and even after negotiations advanced,
domestic factors placed conditions on and
affected the scope of US–India nuclear
cooperation. Such a study provides new insights
into this major event in international politics, and
it offers a valuable framework for analysing
additional US strategic and nuclear dialogues
with India and with other countries.
Contents: List of Figures and Tables;
Abbreviations; Preface; 1. The Argument;
2. Diplomacy and Domestic Politics; 3. Getting
to July 2005; 4. Separating India’s Nuclear
Facilities ; 5. Persuading Congress;
6. Negotiating the Section 123 Agreement;
7. India’s Domestic Politics; 8. Negotiating IAEA
Safeguards; 9. Convincing Nuclear Supplier
Countries; 10. Persuading Congress, Again;
11. Reprocessing and Liability; 12. Conclusions;
Appendix: Energy, Military, and Non-proliferation
Issues in the Nuclear Agreement ; References;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107073418
105
294pp
HB ` 695.00
The Tradition of
Non-Use of
Nuclear Weapons
T. V. Paul
Since the Hiroshima and Nagasaki attacks, no
state has unleashed nuclear weapons. What
explains this? According to the author, the
answer lies in a prohibition inherent in the
tradition of non-use, a time-honoured obligation
that has been adhered to by all nuclear states –
thanks to a consensus view that use would have
a catastrophic impact on humankind, the
environment, and the reputation of the user.The
book offers an in-depth analysis of the nuclear
policies of the U.S., Russia, China, the UK,
France, India, Israel, and Pakistan and assesses
the contributions of these states to the rise and
persistence of the tradition of nuclear non-use. It
examines the influence of the tradition on the
behaviour of nuclear and non-nuclear states in
crises and wars, and explores the tradition’s
implications for nuclear non-proliferation regimes,
deterrence theory, and policy. And it concludes
by discussing the future of the tradition in the
current global security environment.
Institutionalisation and Issues; China’s Military
Modernization: Dragon Fire on India; Part II:
China’s Foreign Policy; China in the Asia-Pacific:
A State of Flux; China and the United States:
Jostling Begins; China’s Resource Diplomacy:
India Struggles to Catch-Up; Part III: China’s
India Policy; Sino-Indian Territorial Issues: The
“Razor’s Edge”?; The Tibet Conundrum in SinoIndian Ties; China in South Asia: A Tightening
Embrace.
ISBN: 9788175968950
The Promise
of Power
The Origins of
Democracy in India and
Autocracy in Pakistan
Contents: Acknowledgements; • Introduction;
• Bases of the Tradition of Non-Use; • The United
States and the Tradition I: The Truman and
Eisenhower Years (1945–1961); • The United
States and the Tradition II: Kennedy to Clinton
(1961–2001); • Russia, Britain, France, China,
and the Tradition; • The Second-Generation
Nuclear States: Israel, India, Pakistan, and the
Tradition; • Nonnuclear States, the Tradition, and
Limited Wars; • The Tradition and the
Nonproliferation Regime; • Changing U.S.
Policies and the Tradition; • Conclusions; Notes;
Select Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967724
The Rise of China
Implications for India
Harsh V. Pant
329pp
Maya Tudor
HB ` 695.00
The rise of China as an emerging power and as
the most likely challenger to the global
preponderance of the US is already having a
significant impact across the globe. This
phenomenon is being debated and analysed at
various levels. In India too, it is generating a lot of
excitement. On the one hand, it is considered to
be an opportunity and on the other, a challenge.
This book is an attempt at exploring the
multidimensional nature of the rise of China and
its implications for India. The contributors in this
volume have examined various aspects of
China’s rise such as domestic developments,
foreign policy agenda, and its position on issues
related to India from an Indian perspective. The
book will appeal to undergraduate and graduate
students of International Relations across the
world. Foreign policy experts, and anyone
interested in China-India relations should also
find the book to be of interest.
272pp
HB ` 795.00
Under what conditions are some developing
countries able to create stable democracies while
others have slid into instability and
authoritarianism? To address this classic
question at the centre of policy and academic
debates, The Promise of Power investigates a
striking puzzle: why, upon the 1947 Partition of
British India, was India able to establish a stable
democracy while Pakistan created an unstable
autocracy? Drawing on interviews, colonial
correspondence, and early government records
to document the genesis of two of the twentieth
century’s most-celebrated independence
movements, Maya Tudor refutes the prevailing
notion that a country’s democratization prospects
can be directly attributed to its levels of economic
development or inequality. Instead, she
demonstrates that the differential strengths of
India’s and Pakistan’s independence movements
directly account for their divergent
democratization trajectories. She also
establishes that these movements were initially
constructed to pursue historically-conditioned
class interests. By illuminating the source of this
enduring contrast, The Promise of Power offers a
broad theory of democracy’s origins that will
interest scholars and students of comparative
politics, democratization, state-building, and
South Asian political history.
Contents: 1. How India institutionalised
democracy and Pakistan promoted autocracy;
2. The social origins of pro- and anti- democratic
movements (1885–1919); 3. Imagining and
institutionalizing new nations (1919–1947);
4.Organizing alliances (1919–1947); 5.Freedom
at midnight and divergent democracies (1947–
1958); 6.The institutionalization of alliances in
India, Pakistan, and beyond.
ISBN: 9781107046061
Contents: List of Contributors; Preface;
Introduction; Part I: Domestic Developments in
China; China’s Economic Rise: From Hindi-Chini
Bhai Bhai to Hindi-Chini Buy-Buy?; Domestic
Politics in Contemporary China: Ideas,
106
254pp
HB ` 795.00
The Muslims Are
Coming!
Islamophobia,
Extremism, and the
Domestic War on Terror
Arun Kundnani
The new front in the War on Terror is the
‘homegrown enemy’, domestic terrorists who
have become the focus of sprawling
counterterrorism structures of policing and
surveillance in the United States and across
Europe. Domestic surveillance has mushroomed
– at least 100, 000 Muslims in America have
been secretly under scrutiny. British police
compiled a secret suspect list of more than
8,000 al-Qaeda ‘sympathizers’, and in another
operation included almost 300 children 15 and
under among the potential extremists
investigated. Based on several years of research
and reportage, in locations as disparate as
Texas, New York, and Yorkshire, and written in
engrossing, precise prose, this is the first
comprehensive critique of counter-radicalization
strategies. The new policy and policing
campaigns have been backed by an industry
of freshly-minted experts and liberal
commentators. This book looks at the way these
debates have been transformed by the embrace
of a narrowly-configured and ill-conceived antiextremism.
5. New Vigour in Africa: Ethiopia and
Mozambique; 6. Entrepreneurship Development
in Laos and Cambodia; 7. Exploring Niches in
CIS: Experiences in Tajikistan and Kyrgyzstan;
Section III: Summing Up; 8. The SSC and Global
Imperatives; 9. Expanding Frontiers, New Trends
and the Way Forward; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107127920
The International
Ambitions of Mao
and Nehru
Andrew B. Kennedy
Contents: Introduction; 1. An Ideal Enemy;
2. The Politics of Anti-Extremism; 3. The Roots of
Liberal Rage; 4. The Myth of Radicalization;
5. Hearts and Minds; 6. No Freedom;
7. Postboom; 8. Twenty-First-Century Crusaders;
9. Dream Not of Other Worlds;
Acknowledgments; Notes.
ISBN: 9789382993513
The Logic of
Sharing
Sachin Chaturvedi
336pp
PB ` 495.00
248pp
HB ` 895.00
Why do leaders sometimes challenge, rather
than accept, the international structures that
surround their states? In The International
Ambitions of Mao and Nehru, Andrew Kennedy
answers this question through in-depth studies of
Chinese foreign policy under Mao Zedong and
Indian foreign policy under Jawaharlal Nehru.
Drawing on international relations theory and
psychological research, Kennedy offers a new
theoretical explanation for bold leadership in
foreign policy, one that stresses the beliefs that
leaders develop about the ‘national efficacy’ of
their states. He shows how this approach
illuminates several of Mao and Nehru’s most
important military and diplomatic decisions,
drawing on archival evidence and primary source
materials from China, India, the United States
and the United Kingdom. A rare blend of
theoretical innovation and historical scholarship,
The International Ambitions of Mao and Nehru is
a fascinating portrait of how foreign policy
decisions are made.
Contents; 1. Introduction; 2. National efficacy
beliefs and foreign policy; Part I. Mao’s China;
3. Same revolution, different dreams; 4. Mao’s
adventure in Korea; 5. Persistent pugnacity; Part
II. Nehru’s India; 6. Gandhi’s dissimilar disciples;
7. Nehru’s misstep in Kashmir; 8. Determined
diplomacy; 9. Conclusion.
India’s development cooperation programmes
reflect the broad principles that inform Indian
foreign policy in general. In essence, they reflect
sovereign equality and belief in friendly relations
with all countries, particularly India’s neighbours
coupled with opposition to colonialism and a
continued commitment to the amplification of
human freedom. Mahatma Gandhi underlined
that while the juxtaposition of peace and
prosperity is not a contrivance for establishing
moral prospects, the two conditions are
indissolubly linked. Such pragmatism is evident
in the genesis and evolution of India’s
development cooperation policy. The extension
of Indian resources and expertise to the global
South, which dates back to the early 1950s,
became institutionalised under the Indian
Technical and Economic Cooperation
Programme (ITEC) established in 1964. Although
the scale of India’s development cooperation has
been modest, it has expanded along with the
country’s emergence as a rapidly growing
economy
ISBN: 9781107029200
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Foreword;
Preface; List of Abbreviations; Section I: Policy
and Institutional Framework; 1. Genesis and
Evolution; 2.The Development Compact;
3. Institutional Framework; Section II: Country
and Regional Case Studies; 4. Nepal: Evolving
Framework and the Success of Communities;
107
272pp
HB ` 895.00
The Engagement
of India
Strategies and
Responses
Ian Hall
As India emerges as a significant global actor,
diverse states have sought to engage India with
divergent agendas and interests. Some states
aspire to improve their relations with New Delhi,
while others pursue the transformation of Indian
foreign policy – and even India itself – to suit their
interests. The Engagement of India explores the
strategies that key states have employed to
engage and shape the relationship with a rising
and newly vibrant India, their successes and
failures, and Indian responses – positive,
ambivalent, and sometimes hostile – to
engagement. A multinational team of contributors
examine the ways in which Australia, China,
Japan, Russia, and the United States have each
sought to engage India for various purposes,
explore the ways in which India has responded,
and assess India’s own strategies to engage with
Singapore, Vietnam, Indonesia, and the Central
Asian republics.
The Challenge of
Democracy
Citizenship, Rights, and
Ethnic Conflicts in India
and Israel
Ayelet Harel-Shalev
Contents: Preface; Abbreviations; 1. The
Engagement of India; Ian Hall; 2. The US
Engagement of India after 1991: Transformation;
Daniel Twining; 3. Japan’s India Engagement:
From Different Worlds to Strategic Partners; H.
D. P. Envall; 4. Russia’s Engagement of India:
Securing the Longevity of a ‘‘Special and
Privileged’’ Strategic Partnership; Lavina Lee;
5. India and China: Strategic Engagements in
Central Asia; Louise Merrington; 6. China’s HalfHearted Engagement and India’s Proactive
Balancing; Harsh V. Pant; 7. Australia’s Fitful
Engagements of India; Ian Hall; 8. India’s
Engagements with Southeast Asia: Singapore,
Vietnam, and Indonesia; David Brew;
9. Paradigm Shift: India during and after the Cold
War; Rajesh Basrur; 10. Conclusion:
Engagement, India, and the Changing
International Order; Nick Bisley; List of
Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9789384463427
228pp
This book analyses public policy and
governmental features in procedurally-democratic
states that govern deeply-divided societies. It
traces the political formula that enables such
states to survive while sustaining a democratic
process in the face of religious, ethnic, and
national conflicts. It investigates citizenship
discourses, analyses the mechanisms political
regimes use to give rights to minorities while
simultaneously limiting their power, and
illustrates how this unique political formula can
be applied in two case studies of vastly - different
countries – Israel and India. The analogous
conflicts in India and Israel that threaten the
survival of democracy – the ethno-religious
conflict between Hindus and Muslims in India and
the ethno-national conflict between Jews and
Arab-Palestinians in Israel – are analysed in
depth. In addition, the core cases of India and
Israel, states in which democracy has survived
for over 60 years, are compared with two
additional countries where democracy was shortlived.
Contents: Foreword; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Part I – A Conceptual
Framework; 1. Democracy in deeply divided
societies: Theoretical and comparative aspects;
Part II – Disaggregating Citizenship in Deeply
Divided Societies: Empirical and Analytical
findings; 2. The Formative Years: A Base to
Majority-Minority Relations in Deeply Divided
Societies; 3. Public and Judicial Policy toward the
Minority throughout 60 years of Independence;
4. Placing the Comparison in a Broader Context
– Democracies that did not Survive; Part III –
Comparative and Theoretical Findings;
5. Conclusions: The Fate of Democracy in
Deeply Divided Societies; Bibliography; Index;
About the Author.
ISBN: 9789382264576
HB ` 625.00
108
516pp
HB ` 895.00
Tensions in Rural
Bengal
Chittabrata Palit
State-Directed
Development
This book is a comprehensive study of the period
of agrarian changes in colonial Bengal. It deals
with an era which witnessed the first conflict
between two alien systems of political economy.
The British rule wanted to monetize and
commercialize the more or less subsistence
economy by various agencies of improvement
and by linking it to the international market. But
its revenue system, administrative policies, the
introduction of indigo planters and tenancy laws
failed to transform the agrarian economy through
the agency of landlords, planters and rich
peasants. This was because of the colonial policy
of maximizing profits with minimum
administration, leaving feudal forces to prevail
upon meagre experiments in commercial
agriculture. It only agitated the economy, creating
tension and spurring revolt, which finally led to
the decline of the zamindari, and resulted in
famine and depeasantization, without any visible
improvement. The book delves into the
confrontation between two alien political
economies since the advent of colonial rule and
its aftermath of tension, resistance and revolt. It
illustrates how the contrived policy of converting
a petite economy into the capitalist mode of
production ultimately died down to a semi-feudal,
semi-capitalist equilibrium. Since then it has been
caught in the throes of an unfinished
transformation. In the process several
experiments were attemptedby the British rule –
permanent settlement of revenue with a landlord
class, resumption of rent-free tenures,
introduction of indigo planters into the hinterland,
regulation of rent and tenancy rights, but all these
only led up to agricultural contortions.The book
would be of interest to students and scholars of
Modern History of India and Bangladesh.
Atul Kohli
Contents: Introduction: states and
industrialization in the global periphery; Part I.
Galloping Ahead: Korea; 1. The colonial origins
of a modern political economy: the Japanese
lineage of Korea’s cohesive-capitalist state;
2. The rhee interregnum: saving South Korea for
cohesive capitalism; 3. A cohesive-capitalist state
reimposed: Park Chung Hee and rapid
industrialization; Part II. Two Steps Forward, One
Step Back: Brazil; 4. Invited dependency:
fragmented state and foreign resources in
Brazil’s early industrialization; 5. Grow now, pay
later: state indebted industrialization in modern
Brazil; Part III. Slow but Steady: India; 6. Origins
of a fragmented-multiclass state and a sluggish
economy: colonial India; 7. India’s fragmentedmulticlass state and protected industrialization;
Part IV. Dashed Expectations: Nigeria;
8. Colonial Nigeria: origins of a neopatrimonial
state and a commodity-exporting economy;
9. Sovereign Nigeria: neopatrimonialism and
failure of industrialization; Conclusion:
understanding states and state intervention in the
global periphery.
Contents: Preface Abbreviations; Introduction;
Chapter 1: Landlords after the Permanent
Settlement; Chapter 2: Land Resumption and
landlord Resistance; Chapter 3: Justice and
police in the Interior and the Conflict over Local
Authority; Chapter 4: Landlords and Planters:
The uneasy Collaboration (1830–1850); Chapter
5: Landlords and Planters: The growing
Confrontation (1850–1860); Chapter 6:
Resistance to Rent Control: The Genesis of Act X
of 1859 and its Aftermath; Chapter 7: Conclusion;
Glossary; Bibliography; Appendix A; Appendix B;
Index.
ISBN: 9788175968080
230pp
Why have some developing country states been
more successful at facilitating industrialization
than others? An answer to this question is
developed by focusing both on patterns of state
construction and intervention aimed at promoting
industrialization. Four countries are analysed in
detail - South Korea, Brazil, India, and Nigeria over the twentieth century. The states in these
countries varied from cohesive-capitalist (mainly
in Korea), through fragmented-multiclass (mainly
in India), to neo-patrimonial (mainly in Nigeria). It
is argued that cohesive-capitalist states have
been most effective at promoting industrialization
and neo-patrimonial states the least. The
performance of fragmented-multiclass states falls
somewhere in the middle. After explaining in
detail as to why this should be so, the study
traces the origins of these different state types
historically, emphasizing the role of different
types of colonialisms in the process of state
construction in the developing world.
ISBN: 9780521672825
HB ` 695.00
109
480pp
PB ` 895.00
Speaking Like
a State
Alyssa Ayres
Alyssa Ayres’ fascinating study examines
Pakistan’s troubled history by exploring the
importance of culture to political legitimacy. Early
leaders selected Urdu as the natural symbol of
the nation’s great cultural past, but due to its
limited base great efforts would be required to
make it truly national. This paradox underscores
the importance of cultural policies for national
identity formation. By comparing Pakistan’s
experience with those of India and Indonesia, the
author analyses how their national language
policies led to very different outcomes. The
lessons of these large multiethnic states offer
insights for the understanding of culture, identity,
and nationalism throughout the world. The book
is aimed at scholars in the fields of history,
political theory, and South Asian studies, as well
as those interested in the history of culture and
nationalism in one of the world’s most complex,
and challenging, countries.
Capacity for Multilateralism; 7. India’s Regional
Disputes; 8. From an Ocean of Peace to a Sea of
Friends; 9. Dilemmas of Sovereignty and Order:
India and the UN Security Council; 10. India and
UN Peacekeeping: The Weight of History and a
Lack of Strategy; 11. From Defensive to
Pragmatic Multilateralism and Back: India’s
Approach to Multilateral Arms Control and
Disarmament; 12. Security in Cyberspace: India’s
Multilateral Efforts; 13. India and International
Financial Institutions and Arrangements; 14. Of
Maps and Compasses: India in Multilateral
Climate Negotiations; 15. India’s Energy, Food,
and Water Security: International Cooperation for
Domestic Capacity; 16. India and International
Norms: R2P, Genocide Prevention, Human
Rights, and Democracy; 17. From Pluralism to
Multilateralism? G-20, IBSA, BRICS, and BASIC
Contributors; Index.
Contents: List of illustrations; List of tables;
Acknowledgments; Note on transliteration;
Introduction; 1. Articulating a new nation; 2. Urdu
and the nation; 3. The nation and its margins;
4. The case of Punjab, part I: elite efforts; 5. The
case of Punjab, part II: popular culture; 6. History
and local absence; 7. Bringing back the local
past; 8. Speaking like a state: language planning;
9. Religion, nation, language; 10. Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993544
Principles of
Politics
A Rational Choice
Theory Guide to Politics
and Social Justice
Joe Oppenheimer
ISBN: 9780521762892
Shaping the
Emerging World
India and the
Multilateral Order
Waheguru Pal Singh
Sidhu, Pratap Bhanu
Mehta and Bruce Jones
230pp
HB ` 795.00
The five major emerging national economies
known as the BRICS – Brazil, Russia, India,
China and South Africa – have gained on the
world stage. For BRICS watchers, and anyone
interested in the future of India’s burgeoning
economy, twenty-two scholars have developed
one of the most comprehensive volumes on
India: Shaping the Emerging World. India faces a
defining period. Its status as a global power is not
only recognized but increasingly institutionalized,
even as geopolitical shifts create both
opportunities and challenges. The country
experienced rapid growth through participation in
the existing multilateral order – now its
development strategy makes it dependent on this
order. Despite limitations, India increasingly has
the ideas, people, and tools to shape the global
order, in the words of Jawaharal Nehru, ‘not
wholly or in full measure, but very substantially.’
Will India keep its ‘tryst with destiny’ and emerge
as one of the shapers of the emerging
international order? This volume seeks to answer
that question.
368pp
HB ` 895.00
Modern rational choice and social justice theories
allow scholars to develop new understandings of
the foundations and general patterns of politics
and political behaviour. In this book, Joe
Oppenheimer enumerates and justifies the
empirical and moral generalizations commonly
derived from these theories. In developing these
arguments, Oppenheimer gives students a
foundational basis of both formal theory and
theories of social justice, and their related
experimental literatures. He uses empirical
findings to evaluate the validity of the claims.
This basic survey of the findings of public choice
theory for political scientists covers the problems
of collective action, institutional structures, citizen
well-being and social welfare, regime change and
political leadership. Principles of Politics
highlights what is universal to all of politics and
examines both the empirical problems of political
behavior and the normative conundrums of social
justice.
Contents: Introduction: politics, universals,
knowledge claims, and methods; Part I. The
Logic of Collective Action: 1. Voluntary
contributions and collective action; 2. Going
beyond the prisoner dilemma; 3. Collective action
applications to and beyond democratic politics;
Part II. Collective Choice: 4. Individual to
collective choice in one dimensional politics;
5. Individual to collective choice more generally;
Part III. Political Institutions and Quality
Outcomes: 6. Political necessity and the tethering
of leaders; 7. A few institutional pitfalls; Part IV.
Social Justice, Choice, and Welfare: 8. The
general problem of collective welfare and choice;
9. Voting rules; 10. Social welfare and social
justice: a partial integration; Conclusion:
11. Questions and lessons.
Contents: Acknowledgements; Part I.
Introduction; 1. A Hesitant Rule Shaper?; Part II.
Perspectives on Multilateralism; 2. The Changing
Dynamics of India’s Multilateralism; 3. India and
Multilateralism: A Practitioner’s Perspective;
4. India as a Regional Power; Part III. Domestic
and Regional Drivers; 5. The Economic
Imperative for India’s Multilateralism; 6. What in
the World Is India Able to Do? India’s State
ISBN: 9781107658448
110
306pp
PB ` 495.00
Poverty Amid
Plenty in the New
India
Atul Kohli
India has one of the fastest growing economies
on earth. Over the past three decades, Socialism
has been replaced by pro-business policies as
the way forward. And yet, in this ‘new’ India,
grinding poverty is still a feature of everyday life.
Some 450 million people subsist on less than
$1.25 per day and nearly half of India’s children
are malnourished. In his latest book, Atul Kohli, a
seasoned scholar of Indian politics and
economics, blames this discrepancy on the
narrow nature of the ruling alliance in India that,
in its new-found relationship with business, has
prioritized economic growth above all other social
and political considerations. This thoughtful and
challenging book affords an alternative vision of
India’s rise in the world that its democratic rulers
will be forced to come to grips with in the years
ahead.
Nation-Building
and Foreign Policy
in India
Identity–Strategy
Conflict
Tobias Engelmeier
Contents: Introduction; 1. Political change:
illusions of inclusion; 2. State and economy: want
amid plenty; 3. Regional diversity: to him who
hath; Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781107644441
Political Theory
And Power
Second Edition
Sarah Joseph
272pp
Contents: Preface; Chapter 1: Introduction –
Identity, Values and Indian Foreign Policy;
Chapter 2: Reason and Culture; Chapter 3:
Nation-Building and International Relations
Theory; Chapter 4: Nationalism in India; Chapter
5: Gandhi, Nehru and Ideological Politics;
Chapter 6: Foreign Policy and National Identity
under Nehru; Chapter 7: Foreign Policy and
National Identity Today; Chapter 8: Conclusion –
The Identity–Strategy Conflict; Bibliography;
Index; List of Figures.
PB ` 595.00
This book draws attention to certain significant
changes in the way in which power has been
defined and it also examines some of the critical
responses, which those changes have evoked.
The objective is not to try and evolve a
universally - acceptable and comprehensive
definition of power, and of related terms like
authority, and influence. The book argues is that,
that would be an impossible project since social
and political theories themselves constitute an
intervention into political discourse of a society
and they may implicity or explicitly, embody a
political perspective. The basic assumptions
about society embodied in a theory may be
expressed through certain ordering concepts and
a particular mode of theorizing.
ISBN: 9788175966352
Mobilizing
Restraint
Democracy and
Industrial Conflict in
Post-Reform South Asia
Contents: 1 Preface; 2. Chapter 1; Introduction;
3. Chapter 2; Power and Rational Choice;
4. Chapter 3. Power, System and Empirical
Theory; 5 Chapter 4. Power and Social Structure;
6. Chapter 5. Power and Domination; 7 Chapter 6
JurgenHabermas: from ideology to
communicative rationality; 8. Chapter 7
Conclusion; 9. Bibliography.
ISBN: 9788175962033
173pp
Nation-Building and Foreign Policy in India
presents an evaluation of Indian foreign policy. It
analyses the unusual concern of Indian strategic
thinking about political values. The book argues
that in Indian foreign policy, there has been a
shift from a strict concern for national interest
towards idealist considerations. Thus creating
what the author calls an ‘idealist inflection’. This
inflection does not have its roots in cultural
aspects or grand strategy. Instead, it is best
understood with reference to the political process
of nationbuilding, characterized by the specific
choices and decisions taken by the two leading
protagonists of the Indian National Movement –
Mohandas Karamchand Gandhi and Jawaharlal
Nehru. The values they chose to place at the
heart of India’s national identity have spilt into the
country’s foreign policy. The book then goes on
to study the changes in India’s foreign policy and
national identity since Nehru’s time until today.
Emmanuel Teitelbaum
HB ` 695.00
312pp
HB ` 895.00
Based on the recent history of industrial conflict
and industrial peace in South Asia, Emmanuel
Teitelbaum argues that the political exclusion and
repression of organized labour commonly
witnessed in authoritarian and hybrid regimes
has extremely deleterious effects on labour
relations and ultimately economic growth. To test
his arguments, Teitelbaum draws on an array of
data, including his original qualitative interviews
and survey evidence from Sri Lanka and three
Indian states – Kerala, Maharashtra, and West
Bengal. He also analyses panel data from 15
Indian states to evaluate the relationship between
political competition and worker protest and to
study the effects of protective labour legislation
on economic performance. In Teitelbaum’s view,
countries must undergo further political
liberalization before they are able to replicate the
success of the sophisticated types of growthenhancing management of industrial protest seen
throughout many parts of South Asia.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Preface;
Acknowledgments; Abbreviations; 1. Introduction:
The Political Management of Industrial Conflict;
Part I. A Puzzle and an Argument; 2. Industrial
Relations in the Context of Economic Change; 3.
A Political Theory of Industrial Protest Part II. The
Evidence; 4. Democracy, Union-Party Ties, and
111
Insurgency and
Counterinsurgency
in South Asia
Industrial Conflict; 5. Labor Institutions, FACB
Rights, and Economic Performance in India; 6.
The Deleterious Effects of Labor Repression in
Sri Lanka; 7. Conclusion: Theoretical and Policy
Implications; Appendix A. Survey Methods and
Response Rates; Appendix B. Labor Law
Coding; Notes; Works Cited; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264088
Limits of Islamism
Jamaat-e-Islami in
Contemporary India and
Bangladesh
Maidul Islam
244pp
Moeed W. Yusuf
HB ` 895.00
This book focuses on Islamism as a political
ideology by taking up the case study of Jamaate-Islami in contemporary India and Bangladesh.
The book will address how, in a contemporary
globalized world, Islamism constructs an
antagonistic frontier and how it mobilizes people
behind its political project. The book also deals
with the Islamist critique of neoliberal economic
policies and ‘western cultural globalization’. The
book examines the dynamics from the formation
of Islamist politics for the struggle for hegemony
to failure to become a hegemonic force in
Bangladesh. The contradiction between Islamic
universalism/Islamist populism, on one hand, and
a politics of Muslim particularism in India, on the
other, is revealed in this study. Finally, this book
traces the contemporary crisis of Islamist
populism in providing an alternative to
neoliberalism.
Contents: Acknowledgments; Introduction;
Insurgency and Counterinsurgency in South
Asia- Moeed Yusuf; Part I. India; 1. Conflict in
Kashmir: An Insurgency with Long Roots Happymon Jacob; 2. India’s Response to the
Kashmir Insurgency: A Holistic Perspective Rekha Chowdhary; 3. Peace Process with India:
A Pakistani Perspective; Khalid Mahmood; Part
II. Pakistan; 4. Taliban Insurgency in FATA:
Evolution and Prospects - Muhammad Amir
Rana; 5. The State’s Response to the Pakistani
Taliban Onslaught - Shaukat Qadir; Part III.
Nepal; 6. Anatomy of a South Asian Revolt:
Nepal’s Maoist Insurgency in Perspective - S. D.
Muni; 7. Nepal’s Response to the Armed
Insurgency, and Its Political Settlement - Bishnu
Raj Upreti; Part IV. Sri Lanka; 8. From
Postindependence Ethnic Tensions to
Insurgency: Sri Lanka’s Many Missed
Opportunities - Chalinda D. Weerasinghe; 9. Sri
Lanka: Tackling the LTTE - Kumar Rupesinghe;
Conclusion: Lessons for Peacebuilders - Moeed
Yusuf; Index; About the Contributors.
Contents: 1. Islamism and ideology:
philosophical issues and analytical categories;
2. Islamism in neoliberal India; 3. Ideological
articulations of Jamaat-e-Islam Hind; 4. Islamism
in a Muslim majority context: the case of
Bangladesh; 5. The crisis of Islamist population
of Bangladesh Jamaat-e-Islami; 6. Islamism in
contemporary India and Bangladesh:
comparative overview of the politics of
alternative.
ISBN: 9781107080263
340pp
This book underscores the need for South Asian
decision-makers and relevant actors around the
world to systematically examine the nature of
intrastate insurgent movements. Using the
‘conflict curve’ theory of conflict evolution, 10
experts native to South Asia consider the
trajectories of four of the most salient armed
insurgencies in a region that has experienced
many such sustained conflicts and the
counterinsurgent response to each. Case studies
on India, Pakistan, Nepal and Sri Lanka lend
important lessons on the dynamics of each
conflict while collectively offering insights into
how and why insurgencies occur and transform
as well as how they can be prevented or
resolved.Through a peacebuilding lens, the
contributors ask what incentives led resentful
groups to resort to armed insurgency and once
insurgency was under way, how it was managed.
While many studies of insurgency and
counterinsurgency emphasize military tactics and
terrorism responses, this volume hones in on
policy-relevant conclusions pertinent to the
peacebuilding field. Detailed maps created
especially for this volume illustrate the conflict
regions. Emphasizing nonviolent means to
prevent or mitigate conflict, the book highlights
the opportunities and constraints in applying
peacebuilding approaches across the conflict
curve, identifying recommendations for the
disputing parties as well as for peacebuilders.
HB ` 795.00
ISBN: 9789384463038
112
326pp
PB ` 595.00
India’s Foreign
Policy
The Democracy
Dimension
S. D. Muni
India Since 1980
In the new millennium, India has joined global
initiatives like the Community of Democracies
(2000) and the UN Democracy Fund (2005) for
promoting democracy. This marks a significant
shift in India ‘s foreign policy as never earlier had
India claimed or committed itself to playing a
proactive role in promoting and protecting
democracy in other countries. India has always
remained engaged with the democracy question,
particularly in its immediate neighbourhood.
India’s Foreign Policy is a study of India‘s
responses to the challenge of democracy in other
countries before and after its participation in the
global democratic initiatives. India ‘s similar
responses in the past have been dictated and
defined by its perceived vital strategic and
political interests, and this continues to be so.
The newly-acquired obligations for promoting
democracy may have tempered its foreign policy
rhetoric and style on the democracy question but
it has not, and will not, override India’s critical
strategic concerns and interests.
Sumit Ganguly
and Rahul Mukherji
Contents: 1. Four revolutions and India’s future;
2. The transformation of India’s foreign policy;
3. India’s economic transformation; 4. Political
mobilization in India; 5. Indian secularism since
1980; 6. India’s trajectory: promises and
challenges.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction ; Democracy
in Foreign Policy: Theoretical Parameters; India
and Democracy; India ‘s Neighbourhood Policy;
Evolving Stakes and Interests; 2. The Nehruvian
Phase: Ideology under Realpolitik; Himalayan
Kingdoms; Fading Away of the Rana Oligarchy;
The King’s Takeover; Bhutan and Sikkim;
Myanmar (Burma) Pakistan; Appraisal; 3.
Nehru’s Successors: Realism in Command;
Nepal; Pakistan; Bangladesh; Integration of
Sikkim; Myanmar; China; Appraisal; 4.
Imperatives of the New Millennium; Nepal;
Myanmar; Afghanistan; China; Pakistan, Bhutan
and Maldives; Appraisal; 5. An Overview;
Appendices; Appendix I; Warsaw Declaration on
Community of Democracies, June 2000;
Appendix II; Santiago Commitment; Community
of Democracies, April 2005; Appendix III; PM’s
Address to Joint Session of the US Congress,
July 2005; Appendix IV; PM’s Speech at the
Foundation Stone Laying Ceremony of Afghan
Parliament, August 2005; Appendix V; PM’s
Speech at the UN Democracy Fund, September
2005; Appendix VI; PM’s Speech at the
Conference on Democracy, Development and
Social Inclusion December, 2005; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967137
190pp
This book considers the remarkable
transformations that have taken place in India
since 1980, a period that began with the
assassination of the formidable Prime Minister
Indira Gandhi. Her death, and that of her son
Rajiv seven years later, marked the end of the
Nehru-Gandhi era. Although the country remains
one of the few democracies in the developing
world, many of the policies instigated by these
earlier regimes have been swept away to make
room for dramatic alterations in the political,
economic and social landscape. Sumit Ganguly
and Rahul Mukherji, two leading political
scientists of South Asia, chart these
developments with particular reference to social
and political mobilization, the rise of the BJP and
its challenge to Nehruvian secularism and the
changes to foreign policy that, in combination
with its meteoric economic development, have
ensured India a significant place on the world
stage.
ISBN: 9781107020276
India in the World
Order
Searching for
Major - Power Status
Baldev Raj Nayar
and T. V. Paul
HB ` 495.00
214pp
HB ` 395.00
Two highly regarded scholars come together to
examine India's relationship with the world's
major powers and its own search for a significant
role in the international system. Central to the
argument is India's belief that the acquisition of
an independent nuclear capability is key to
obtaining such status. The book details the major
constraints at the international, domestic and
perceptual levels that India has faced in this
endeavor. It concludes, through a detailed
comparison of India's power capabilities, that
India is indeed a rising power, but that significant
systemic and domestic changes will be
necessary before it can achieve its goal. The
book examines the prospects and implications of
India's integration into the major-power system in
the twenty-first century. This book's incisive
analysis will be illuminating for students, policy
makers, and for anyone wishing to understand
the region in greater depth.
Contents: 1. Introduction: India and its search for
a major power role; 2. Major power status in the
modern world: India in comparative perspective;
3. The constraints on India: international and
domestic; 4. India‘s quest for a major power role
under Nehru: the formative grand strategy of a
new state, 1947–1964; 5. Strategy in hard times:
the long march to building capabilities after
Nehru, 1964–1990; 6. After the Cold War:
adaptation, persistence, and assertion, 1991–
2001; 7. Conclusions: India and the emerging
international order.
ISBN: 9788175962316
113
302pp
PB ` 595.00
India and the
Nuclear
Non-proliferation
Regime
The Perennial Outlier
A. Vinod Kumar
environmental policy in a theoretically rigorous
way, providing a significant contribution to the
theory of the firm. It will be valuable for students
of business and environmental studies, as well
as political economy and public policy.
Numerous behavioural and systemic factors have
been cited to explain India’s nuclear decisions,
though the influence of normative instruments of
non-proliferation and the overarching regime on
its nuclear policies has not received sufficient
attention. This book seeks to address this gap
through a holistic examination of India’s
relationship with the non-proliferation regime and
its dominant structures. The study explores the
complexities of the regime as a functional
system, and applies the Indian case study to
understand the dynamics of state – regime
interplays. By dissecting its core frameworks like
non-proliferation and counterproliferation, A.
Vinod Kumar highlights the conceptual opacities
that drive the structural crises of the regime, and
the paradigm shifts that characterize its current
churning. The book describes India as a unique
case of an outlier surviving outside the regime’s
overarching system, as a nuclear-capable state
with prolonged record of resistance (and
selective adherence), but ending up seeking
opportunities to engage with its normative
structures. The ideological and policy shifts that
had shaped India’s transformative journey from a
perennial outlier to one seeking greater
integration with the regime, though, also
exemplifies the underlying strategic paradoxes
and dogmatic incongruities. The book assesses
how these dynamics will determine India’s role in
global anti-proliferation and its status in the
emerging global nuclear order.
Contents: 1. Greening the firm: an introduction;
2. Environmental policymaking within firms;
3. Baxter and Lilly: evolution of environmental
programs; 4. Baxter and Lilly: case studies;
5. Beyond compliance: findings and conclusions.
ISBN: 9780521664875
Fates of Political
Liberalism in the
British
Post-Colony
The Politics of the Legal
Complex
Terence C. Halliday,
Lucien Karpik and
Malcolm M. Feeley
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction; 2. From Nonproliferation to Counterproliferation: The
Regime’s Conceptual Crisis; 3. The State and the
Regime: The Complex Interplay of Actors, Norms
and Interests; 4. India, NPT and the Nonproliferation Regime; 5. The Routes to Nuclear
Disarmament: An Indian Perspective; 6. Counterproliferation: The Quest for an Indian Strategy;
7. India’s Participation in the Proliferation
Security Initiative: The Counter-proliferation Case
Study; 8. India’s Role in Global Anti-proliferation:
The Post Nuclear Deal Agenda; 9. Conclusion;
Select Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107056626
Greening the Firm
Aseem Prakash
251pp
196pp
PB ` 595.00
What explains divergences in political liberalism
among new nations that shared the same
colonial heritage? This book assembles exciting
original essays on former colonies of the British
Empire in South Asia, Africa and Southeast Asia
that gained independence after World War II. The
interdisciplinary country specialists reveal how
inherent contradictions within British colonial rule
were resolved after independence in contrasting
liberal-legal, despotic and volatile political orders.
Through studies of the longue durée and
particular events, this book presents a theory of
political liberalism in the post-colony and
develops rich hypotheses on the conditions
under which the legal complex, civil society and
the state shape alternative postcolonial
trajectories around political freedom. This
provocative volume presents new perspectives
for scholars and students of postcolonialism,
political development and the politics of the legal
complex, as well as for policymakers and publics
who struggle to construct and defend basic legal
freedoms.
Contents: Part I. Liberal-Legal Orders;
1. Emasculating the executive: the federal court
and civil liberties in late colonial India: 1942–4;
2. The legal complex in the struggle to control
police brutality in India; 3. Priests in the temple of
justice: the Indian legal complex and the basic
structure doctrine; Part II. Despotic Orders;
4. Lawyers, politics and publics: state
management of lawyers and legitimacy in
Singapore; 5. Lawyers and the disintegration of
the legal complex in Sudan; 6. The Sri Lankan
legal complex and the liberal project: only thus
far and no more; Part III. Volatile Orders;
7. ‘Custodian of civil liberties and justice in
Malaysia’: the Malaysian bar and the moderate
state; 8. Liberal protagonists? The lawyers’
movement in Pakistan; 9. Miscarriage of chief
justice: judicial power and the legal complex in
Pakistan under Musharraf; 10. From judicial
autonomy to regime transformation: the role of
the lawyers’ movement in Pakistan; 11.
Postcolonial liberalism and the legal complex in
Zambia: elegy or triumph?; 12. Legal complexes
and the fight for political liberalism in new African
democracies: comparative insights from Malawi,
Zambia and Namibia; 13. Judge and company:
courts, constitutionalism and the legal complex.
HB ` 895.00
Over the last two decades environmental issues
have become important in public and business
policy. This book asks why firms sometimes
voluntarily adopt environmental policies, which
go beyond legal requirements. It employs a newinstitutionalist perspective, and argues that
existing explanations, especially from
neoclassical economics, concentrate on external
factors at the expense of internal dynamics.
Prakash argues that ‘beyond-compliance’
policies are due to two types of intra-firm
processes, which he describes as power- and
leadership-based. His argument is supported by
analysis of 10 cases within two firms - Baxter
International Inc. and Eli Lilly and Company including interviews with managers, and access
to meetings and documents. This book therefore
examines the internal working of firms’
ISBN: 9781107031975
114
570pp HB ` 1495.00
Globalization and
India’s Economic
Integration
Baldev Raj Nayyar
This book shows how globalization’s pressures
favouring efficiency paradoxically induced the
state to push for consolidation on a pan-Indian
scale in the area of fiscal federalism and to
advance the cause of the common market
through reforming the indirect tax system;
meanwhile, the state has pressed forward with
social inclusiveness as never before in its
economic planning. For another, the market, too,
has been instrumental, because of its widened
scope and its inherently-expanding character, in
strengthening economic integration through trade
expansion, diffusion of industry, and increased
inter-state migration. Nayar’s groundbreaking
work will interest students, scholars, and
specialists of India, South Asia, globalization, and
political economy.
3 Terrorist Networks Phil Williams; 4 Terrorist
Financing Phil Williams; 5 Cyber Terrorism
Timothy J. Doorey; 6 Maritime Terrorism Peter
Chalk; 7 Weapons of Mass Destruction and
Terrorism Edward E. Hoffer; Part II:
Comprehensive Government Responses; 8 Risk
Assessment James Petroni; 9 Tools and
Strategies for Combating Terrorism Paul
Shemella; 10 Building Effective Counterterrorism
Institutions Paul Shemella;11 Interagency
Decision Making Lawrence E. Cline; 12 Defusing
Terrorist Ideology Paul Shemella; 13 Intelligence
and Combating Terrorism Lawrence E. Cline;
14 Consequence Management Edward E.
Hoffer; 15 Ethics and Combating Terrorism
Robert Schoultz; 16 Measuring Effectiveness
Paul Shemella; Part III: Selected Case Studies;
17 Somalia Lawrence E. Cline; 18 The Tokyo
Subway Attack Edward E. Hoffer; 19 The Madrid
Train Bombings Phil Williams; 20 The Mumbai
Attacks Thomas R. Mockaitis; 21 The Irish
Republican Army Thomas R. Mockaitis; 22 Al
Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula Lawrence E.
Cline; 23 Conclusion Paul Shemella; About the
Authors; Index
Contents: List of Figures and Tables; Preface;
Acknowledgments; Abbreviations; I. Introduction;
1. Economic Globalization, Segmentation, and
Integration; 2. India and Globalization:
Performance, Perceptions, and Policy;
3. Economic Integration Prior to Liberalization; II.
The State after Economic Liberalization;
4. Continuity and Change in Economic Planning;
5. Fiscal Federalism: Finance Commission’s
Adaptation to New Challenges; 6. India’s Halting
March to Common Market: Reforming the Indirect
Tax System; III. The Market after Economic
Liberalization; 7. Trade and Its Integrative Impact;
8. Investment and Integration: Polarization
versus Diffusion; 9. Are We All Vaishyas Now?
The Indian Capitalist Class as an Integrative
Factor; 10. Migration and Integration; IV. Summing
Up; 11. Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789384463441
Fighting Back
What Governments Can
Do about Terrorism
Paul Shemella
316pp
ISBN: 9789382993070
Empowering
Society
Usha Jumani
HB ` 695.00
Since terrorism became a global national security
issue in the new millennium, all governments
have wrestled with its effects. Yet strong
measures against terrorism have often made the
root causes of the problem worse, while weak
responses have invited further attack. In
response, this book explains how governments
can construct and execute the most effective
strategies to combat terrorism—and how they
can manage the consequences of those acts of
terrorism they cannot prevent.
416pp
HB ` 895.00
Empowerment is an integral element of a
democratic system. The maturity of a democracy
is directly related to the level of empowerment its
citizens and institutions experience. The term
‘empowerment’ is used in different contexts and
this book addresses this problem through a
comparative analysis of three major
organizational systems – business, government
and social development. The book presents a
new conceptual framework for understanding the
process of empowerment. It combines case
studies specially for this volume, with secondary
data and the author’s first-hand experience of
working with development organizations. The
differential understanding of empowerment in
various organizational contexts helps to promote
cross-sectoral learning, and contributes to a
qualitative shift in empowering society as a whole.
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements; Part I:
The Setting; 1. The Context of Empowerment; 2.
The Indian Realities; 3. Empowerment and
Corporate Social Responsibility; Part II Nature of
Empowerment in Three Different Organisational
Systems; 1. Business Organisation; 2.
Government and Governance; 3. Social
Development Organisations; Part III Towards a
Framework for Empowerment, Strand; 1. Process
Orientation, Strand; 2. Bases of Power, Strand;
3. Organising and Organisation, Strand;
4. Mainstreaming, Strand; 5. Representative
Organisations, Empowering Society; Appendix I Cross Section of Views on Empowerment;
Appendix II - Perceptions of Empowerment;
Appendix III - Case Studies: Excel Industries
It provides an overview of the complex problem
of terrorism and offers a guide to shaping
solutions to fit the unique structures and
processes of governments. These issues and
their solutions are demonstrated in six case
studies. The book’s value lies in its holistic
treatment of what governments can do to protect
their societies, with the ultimate goal of reducing
terrorism from the global security threat it is today
to a national-level criminal problem. Written by a
team of experts, the book offers a concise but
complete course on the most important national
security challenge of our time.
Contents: Preface; 1 Introduction Paul
Shemella; Part I: The Complex Problem of
Terrorism; 2 Terrorism, Insurgency, and
Organized Crime Thomas R. Mockaitis;
115
Ltd., Gujarat Ambuja Cements Ltd.; Tata
Chemicals Ltd.; Gujarat Cooperative Milk
Marketing Federation Ltd.; Indian Farmers
Fertliser Cooperative Ltd; Select; Bibliography;,
Index.
ISBN: 9788175963177
Eating Grass
The Making of the
Pakistani Bomb
Feroz Hassan Khan
263pp
Corruption and
Reform in India
Public Services
in the Digital Age
Jennifer Bussell
HB ` 595.00
Written by a professional in the Pakistani Army
who played a senior role formulating and
advocating Pakistan’s security policy on nuclear
and conventional arms control, this book tells the
compelling story of how and why Pakistan’s
government, scientists, and military, persevered
in the face of a wide array of obstacles to acquire
nuclear weapons. It lays out the conditions that
sparked the shift from a peaceful quest to acquire
nuclear energy into a full-fledged weapons
programmes details how the nuclear programme
was organized, reveals the role played by outside
powers in nuclear decisions, and explains how
Pakistani scientists overcome the many technical
hurdles they encountered. Furthermore, the book
reveals how international opposition to the
programme only made it an even more significant
issue of national resolve.
Contents: Preface and acknowledgments;
1. Introduction; 2. The politics of reform in the
digital age; 3. Do reforms affect the quality of
services?; 4. Timing of reform: policy initiation in
the Indian states; 5. Scope of reform I: patterns of
policy implementation; 6. Scope of reform II:
coalition governments; 7. Scale and
management of reform: from ‘petty’ to ‘grand’
corruption; 8. Technology-enabled administrative
reform in cross-national perspective;
9. Conclusion.
Contents: Preface; Pakistan: Key Characters;
Abbreviations 1. Introduction; Part I: The
Reluctant Phase; 2. Atoms for Peace at the
Crossroads of History; 3. Ayub’s Non-Decision
and the Nuclear Bomb Option ; 4. Never Again;
Part II: The Secret Nuclear R&D Program; 5. The
Route to Nuclear Ambition; 6. Punishing Pakistan
; 7. Mastery of Uranium Enrichment ; 8.
Procurement Network in the Grey Market ; 9.
Building the Bomb; 10. Mastery of Plutonium
Production; Part III: Covert Arsenal and delivery
means; 11. Military Crises and Nuclear Signaling;
12. Pakistan’s Missile Quest ; 13. The Grazing
Horse in the Meadows; 14. The Nuclear Test
Decision; Part IV: Toward an Operational
Deterrent; 15 The Dawn of a Nuclear Power; 16.
A Shaky Beginning: Kargil and Its Aftermath; 17.
Establishment of Robust Command and Control;
18. Testing the Deterrent; Part V: Meeting New
Challenges; 19. The Unraveling of the Khan
Network; 20. Nuclear Pakistan and the World;
Epilogue; Notes; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264620
552pp
Why do some governments improve public
services more effectively than others? Through
the investigation of a new era of administrative
reform, in which digital technologies may be used
to facilitate citizens’ access to the state, Jennifer
Bussell’s analysis provides unanticipated insights
into this fundamental question. In contrast to
factors such as economic development or
electoral competition, this study highlights the
importance of access to rents, which can
dramatically shape the opportunities and threats
of reform to political elites. Drawing on a subnational analysis of 20 Indian states, a field
experiment, statistical modeling, case studies,
interviews of citizens, bureaucrats and politicians,
and comparative data from South Africa and
Brazil, Bussell shows that the extent to which
politicians rely on income from petty and grand
corruption is closely linked to variation in the
timing, management and comprehensiveness of
reforms.
ISBN: 9781107030343
Complex
Deterrence
Strategy in the Global
Age
T. V. Paul, Patrick M.
Morgan and James J.
Wirtz
HB ` 595.00
346pp
HB ` 795.00
Moving beyond the precepts of traditional
deterrence theory, this ground-breaking volume
offers insights for the use of deterrence in the
modern world, where policy makers may
encounter irrational actors, failed states, religious
zeal, ambiguous power relationships, and other
situations where long-established rules of
statecraft do not apply. A distinguished group of
contributors here examines issues such as
deterrence among the great powers; the
problems of regional and non-state actors; and
actors armed with chemical, biological, and
nuclear weapons. Complex deterrence will be a
valuable resource for anyone facing the
considerable challenge of fostering security and
peace in the twenty-first century.
Contents: List of Figures and Tables;
Acknowledgements; I Introduction; 1. Complex
Deterrence: An Introduction; IIDeterrence and its
Challenges; 2. Three Items in One: Deterrence
as Concept, Research Program, and Political
Issue; 3. Rational Deterrence against “Irrational”
Adversaries? No Common Knowledge;
IIIDeterrence and Nonstate Actors; 4. Complex
Deterrence in the Asymmetric-Warfare Era;
5. Deterring Nuclear Terrorists; IV Deterrence
and Smaller Powers; 6. Deterrence, Rogue
States, and the U.S. Policy; 7. Collective-Actor
Deterrence; 8. Complexity of Deterrence among
New Nuclear States: The India-Pakistan Case;
116
Asian Rivalries
9. Unconventional Deterrence: How the Weak
Deter the Strong; 10. Deterrence and
Compellence in Iraq, 1991–2003: Lessons for a
Complex Paradigm; VDeterrence and Major
Powers; 11. Deterrence among Great Powers in
an Era of Globalization; 12. The Endurance of
Extended Deterrence: Continuity, Change, and
Complexity in Theory and Policy; 13. The
Revolution in Military Affairs: Impact of Emerging
Technologies on Deterrence; Conclusions; List of
Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967816
Between the State
and Islam
Charles E. Butterworth
and I. William Zartman
357pp
Conflict, Escalation, and
Limitations on Two-level
Games
Sumit Ganguly and
William R. Thompson
HB ` 795.00
Until recently, the study of the Middle East has
focused almost exclusively on Islam and on the
regime, especially on its non-democratic aspects.
It has done so at the expense of accounting fully
for the forces of scepticism, liberty, and creativity
that struggle against Islamic conformism and
state hegemony. Strangely, there seems to be no
scholarly awareness of the simple fact that
however influential religion appears in word and
deed, however evident the trappings of state
authority, people come into being, thrive, marry,
raise families, think, laugh, and cry without regard
to – indeed, sometimes in utter defiance of – the
strictures of religious or state authority. This
volume examines how Middle Eastern peoples in
the nineteenth and twentieth centuries lived and
flourished while trying to shape their political and
religious surroundings outside the formal
structures of established religion and the state.
Contents: List of Contributors; 1 Conflict
Propensities in Asian Rivalries; 2 China and
Taiwan: Balance of Rivalry with Weapons of
Mass Democratization; 3 Domestic Politics and
the U.S.-China Rivalry; 4 Peace and Conflict in
the Indo-Pakistani Rivalry: Domestic and
Strategic Causes; 5 Instability in Tibet and the
Sino-Indian Strategic Rivalry: Do Domestic
Politics Matter?; 6 The Sino-Russian Strategic
Partnership: The End of Rivalry?; 7 The Rivalry
Between the Two Koreas; 8 Asymmetric Rivals:
China and Vietnam; 9 Two-level Games in Asian
Rivalries; Notes; Index.
Contents: Introduction: between the State and
Islam Charles E. Butterworth and I. William
Zartman; Part I. The Nineteenth Century: Preface
Charles E. Butterworth; 1. On what is between,
even beyond, the paradigms of the State and
Islam Charles E. Butterworth; 2. The impact of
technology change on the nineteenth-century
Arab world Antoine B. Zahland; 3. An Islamic
political formula in transformation: Islam, identity,
and nationalism in the history of the Volga Tatars
Serif Mardin; 4. Muslim opposition thinkers in the
nineteenth century Said Bensaid Alaoui; Part II.
The Twentieth-Century: Preface I. William
Zartman; 5. Against the taboos of Islam: anticonformist tendencies in contemporary Arab/
Islamic thought As’ad Abu Khalil; 6. Democratic
thought in the Arab world: an alternative to the
patron state Iliya Harik; 7. Political parties
between state power and Islamist opposition
Ibrahim A. Karawan; 8. Liberal professionals in
the contemporary Arab world Timothy J. Piro;
9. Daniel Lerner revisited, the audio-visual media
and its reception: two North African cases Jean
Leca, Meriem Verges and Mounia BennaniChraibi; 10. Islam, the state, and democracy: the
contradictions I. William Zartman.
ISBN: 9780521789721
272pp
The most typical treatment of international
relations is to conceive it as a battle between two
antagonistic states volleying back and forth. In
reality, interstate relations are often at least twolevel games in which decision-makers operate
not only in an international environment but also
in a competitive domestic context. Given that
interstate rivalries are responsible for a
disproportionate share of discord in world politics,
this book sets out to explain just how these twolevel rivalries really work. By reference to specific
cases, specialists on Asian rivalries examine
three related questions: what is the mix of
internal (domestic politics) and external
(interstate politics) stimuli in the dynamics of their
rivalries; in what types of circumstances do
domestic politics become the predominant
influence on rivalry dynamics; when domestic
politics become predominant, is their effect more
likely to lead to the escalation or de-escalation of
rivalry hostility? By pulling together the threads
laid out by each contributor, the editors create a
‘grounded theory’ for interstate rivalries that
breaks new ground in international relations
theory.
ISBN: 9789382264095
PB ` 695.00
117
268pp
HB ` 695.00
Communal
Violence, Forced
Migration and the
State
Gujarat since 2002
Sanjeevini Badigar
Lokhande
Reverence,
Resistance and
Politics of Seeing
the Indian National
Flag
When violence occurs in democracies it is often
characterized as an aberration. The state that
saw human rights violations and failure of law
and order in Gujarat in 2002 emerged, even if by
its own admission, as a model for good
governance. Communal Violence, Forced
Migration and the State, through an account of
displaced Muslims, challenges this notion.
Through the unlikely yet probing lens of
displacement, it offers fresh insight into
communal violence and is an important resource
for the emerging domain of forced migration and
changing nature of the state in a globalized
world.
Sadan Jha
Contents: Acknowledgements; Selected
Glossary of Terms; Abbreviations; Introduction;
Chapter 1- Demography and Population
Movements in Gujarat; Chapter 2- Vatani to
Visthapit: Violence and Displacement in 2002;
Chapter 3- Relief instead of Rights: The
Governance of Communal Violence; Chapter 4Reconstruction and Rights through Self Help;
Chapter 5- Violence and Good Governance;
Bibliography; Index; About the Author.
ISBN: 9781107065444
228pp
This book studies the politics that make the
tricolour flag possibly the most revered among
symbols, icons and markers associated with
nation and nationalism in twentieth century India.
The emphasis on the flag as a visual symbol
aims to question certain dominant assumptions
about visuality. Anchored on Mahatma Gandhi’s
‘believing eye’, this study reveals specificities of
visual experience in the South Asian milieu. This
account begins with a survey of the pre-colonial
period, focuses on colonial lives of the flag and
moves ahead to explain contemporary dynamics
of seeing the flag in India. The Flag Satyagraha
of Jubblepore and Nagpur in 1922-23, the
adoption of Congress Flag in 1931, the resolution
for the future flag in the Constituent Assembly of
India in 1947, history of the colour saffron, codes
governing the flag as well as legal cases are few
such examples explored in depth in this book.
Contents: List of Figures; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Introduction; 1. Rise of the
Flag; 2. Flag on the Hut: Totem and a Political
Symbol; 3. The Indian National Flag as a Site of
Daily Plebiscite; 4. Shades of History: A Case of
Saffron Colour; 5. Visualizing an Ideal Political
Order; 6. A Post Colonial Symbol; 7. Gendered
Symbol, Communal Politics; Epilogue: The Flag
as a Sacred Political Symbol; Bibliography; Index
HB ` 525.00
ISBN: 9781107118874
Government as
Practice
Democratic Left in a
Transforming India
Dwaipayan
Bhattacharyya
The democratic left in India is in deep crisis.
During the first decade of the century it has slid
from its highest parliamentary presence to virtual
irrelevance. A key to its retrieval, this book
argues, lies in its ability to imagine a new popular
politics for reinventing its democratic credentials
beyond mere electoral posturing. In this respect,
much can be learnt from the left’s own
governmental practices as they evolved since the
late 1960s, crafting a unique blend of politics,
policy, idealism, practicality, vision and delivery.
By looking at the problematic of government from
the days of deft land reforms to messy land
acquisition, the book situates ‘government as
practice’ as a prism for critical thinking on
democratic politics in postcolonial India.
Grounded in empirical and archival research, the
book is useful for those passionate as well as
sceptical about the revival potentials of a new left
in India’s fast-changing political economy.
Afghan Endgames
Strategy and Policy
Choices for America’s
Longest War
Hy Rothstein and
John Arquilla
Contents: Preface; Abbreviations; 1. Inception:
Government as Practice; 2. Consolidation: Land
Reforms; 3. Agency: School Teachers;
4. Machinery: Party Society; 5. Implosion: Singur,
Nandigram; Appendix I: The Left through
Elections; Appendix II: Local Governance and
Electability; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9781107102262
294pp
HB ` 750.00
296pp
HB ` 790.00
The United States and its allies have been
fighting the Taliban and Al-Qaeda in Afghanistan
for a decade in a war that either side could still
win. While a gradual drawdown has begun,
significant numbers of US combat troops will
remain in Afghanistan until at least 2014,
perhaps longer, depending on the situation on
the ground. Given the realities of the Taliban’s
persistence and the desire of US policymakers —
and the public — to find a way out, what can and
should be the goals of the US and its allies in
Afghanistan? Afghan Endgames boldly pursues
several strands of thought suggesting that a
strong, legitimate central government is far from
likely to emerge in Kabul; that fewer coalition
forces, used in creative ways, may have better
effects on the ground than a larger, more
conventional presence; and that, even though
Pakistan should not be pushed too hard, so as to
avoid sparking social chaos there, Afghanistan’s
other neighbours can and should be encouraged
to become more actively involved. The volume’s
editors conclude that while there may never be
complete peace in Afghanistan, a self-sustaining
security system able to restore order swiftly in the
wake of violence is attainable.
Contents: Acknowledgments; Preface; Part I:
Overview; 1. Understanding the Afghan
Challenge; 2. A Familiar Western Experience in
Ancient Afghanistan; 3. Afghan Paradoxes;
4. America’s Longest War; Part II: Strategic
Alternatives; 5. A Case for Withdrawal; 6. A Case
for Staying the Course; 7. Afghanistan: A Third
118
Way ; 8. Beyond Victory and Defeat; ; Part III:
Other Perspectives; 9. The Ethics of Exit: Moral
Obligation in the Afghan Endgame; 10. Shaping
Strategic Communication; 11. Civil and Uncivil
Society ; ; Part IV: Conclusion; 12. Conclusion:
Assessing the Strategic Alternatives;
Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993025
Nepal in Transition
From People’s War
to Fragile Peace
Sebastian
von Einsiedel, David
M. Malone and
Suman Pradhan
248pp
The History of
Peace-Building in
East Timor
Katsumi Ishizuka
HB ` 695.00
Since emerging in 2006 from a 10 year Maoist
insurgency, the ‘People’s War’, Nepal has
struggled with the difficult transition from war to
peace, from autocracy to democracy, and from
an exclusionary and centralized state to a more
inclusive and federal one. The present volume,
drawing on both international and Nepali scholars
and leading practitioners, analyses the context,
dynamics and key players shaping Nepal’s
ongoing peace process. While the peace process
is largely-domestically driven, it has been
accompanied by wide-ranging international
involvement, including initiatives in peacemaking
by NGOs, the United Nations and India, which,
throughout the process, wielded considerable
political influence; significant investments by
international donors; and the deployment of a
Security Council-mandated UN field mission. This
book shines a light on the limits, opportunities
and challenges of international efforts to assist
Nepal in its quest for peace and stability and
offers valuable lessons for similar endeavors
elsewhere.
Contents: 1. Introduction; Part I. The Context; 2.
The making of the Maoist insurgency;
3. State power and the security sector: ideologies
and interests; 4. Nepal’s failed development; 5.
Ethnic politics and the building of an inclusive
state; Part II. Critical Transition and the Role of
Outsiders; 6. Masala peacemaking; 7. A
comprehensive peace? International human
rights monitoring in Nepal; 8. Support to Nepal’s
peace process: the role of the UN mission in
Nepal; 9. Electing the constituent assembly; 10.
Revolution by other means: the transformation of
Nepal’s Maoists; Part III. Regional Dynamics; 11.
A yam between two boulders: Nepal, India and
China; 12. Bringing the Maoists down from the
hills: India’s role; 13. A Nepali perspective on
international involvement; Part IV. Conclusions:
ISBN: 9781107659711
416pp
East Timor, (renamed Timor-Leste after
independence in 2002) a small tropical country
northwest of Australia, is one of the newest
members of the United Nations. There are
several reasons for East Timor having been in
focus in international affairs. Firstly, it was its
occupation by Indonesia and its brutal rule since
1975 and the country’s achievement of
independence in 2002. Secondly, East Timor
illustrates a case of realpolitik by the
superpowers in international relations, as was
evident from their support to Indonesia, or their
complete indifference to the issue.The History of
Peace-building in East Timor: The Issues of
International Intervention comprehensively
analyses various international responses during
its pre- and post-independence eras and
examines the process of peace-building after the
referendum in the country. The book assesses
the legitimacy of each response and policy, how
these influenced East Timor as a newly
independent state, and what the international
society expects in the future from the country that
was in turmoil for so long. The book consists of
three sections detailing the history of the crisis,
policy analysis and comparative analysis with
peace-building initiatives by the UN in Cambodia.
The book updates the study on East Timor by
also discussing the state-building process such
as the UNDP organised Recovery, Employment
and Stability Programme for Ex-Combatants and
communities, the Serious Crimes Unit and the
Commission for Reception, Truth and
Reconciliation in East Timor. The book would be
of interest to policy makers, practitioners and
academics specialising in East Timor and other
countries in the process of peace-building.
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements;
Acronyms; Introduction; Section 1: History
Background; Section 2: Policy Analyses; Section
3: Comparative Analysis; Conclusion;
Bibliography; Index
ISBN: 9788175967359
PB ` 445.00
119
304pp
HB ` 995.00
Rural Politics in
India
Political Stratification
and Governance in
West Bengal
Dayabati Roy
Contents: Maps; Acknowledgements; 1. No Exit;
2. The Four Faces of Pakistan; 3. Why Do They
Hate Us?; 4. U-Turn to Drift: U.S.-Pakistan
Relations during the Musharraf Era; 5. Great
Expectations to Greater Frustrations: U.S.Pakistan Relations after Musharraf; 6. From the
Outside-In: U.S.-Pakistan Relations in the
Regional Context; 7. America’s Options; Index.
This book discusses the forms and dynamics of
political processes in rural India with a special
emphasis on West Bengal, the nation’s fourthmost populous state. West Bengal’s political
distinction stems from its long legacy of a Left-led
coalition government for more than 30 years and
its land reform initiatives. The book closely looks
at how people from different castes, religions,
and genders represent themselves in local
governments, political parties, and in the social
movements in West Bengal. At the same time it
addresses some important questions: Is there
any new pattern of politics emerging at the
margins? How does this pattern of politics
correspond with the current discourse of
governance? Using ethnographic techniques, it
claims to chart new territories by not only
examining how rural people see the state, but
also conceiving the context by comparing the
available theoretical frameworks put forward to
explain the political dynamics of rural India.
ISBN: 9781107414624
The Cambridge
Companion to
Nelson Mandela
Rita Barnard
Contents: List of Tables; List of Abbreviations;
Acknowledgements; 1. Introduction; 2. Land,
Development and Politics in West Bengal;
3. Changing Landscape of Two Villages in West
Bengal; 4. Seeing the State and Governance in
the Grassroots; 5. Party and Politics at the
Margin; 6. A Narrative of Peasant Resistance:
Land, Party and the State; 7. Caste and Power in
Rural Context; 8. Women and Caste: In Struggle
and in Governance; 9. Conclusion: A New Kind of
Peasant Mobilization?; Glossary; References;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107042353
No Exit from
Pakistan
America’s Tortured
Relationship with
Islamabad
Daniel S. Markey
289pp
HB ` 895.00
260pp
PB ` 495.00
Nelson Mandela was one of the most revered
figures of our time. He committed himself to a
compelling political cause, suffered a long prison
sentence, and led his violent and divided country
to a peaceful democratic transition. His legacy,
however, is not uncontested: his decision to
embark on an armed struggle in the 1960s, his
solitary talks with apartheid officials in the 1980s,
and the economic policies adopted during his
presidency still spark intense debate, even after
his death. The essays in this Companion, written
by experts in history, anthropology,
jurisprudence, cinema, literature, and visual
studies, address these and other issues. They
examine how Mandela became an icon during his
lifetime and consider the meanings and uses of
his internationally-recognizable image. Their
overarching concerns include Mandela's relation
to 'tradition' and 'modernity', the impact of his
most famous public performances, the oscillation
between Africanist and non-racial positions in
South Africa, and the politics of gender and
national sentiment. The volume concludes with a
meditation on Mandela's legacy in the twenty-first
century and a detailed guide to further reading.
Contents: Introduction; Part I. The Man, the
Movement, and the Nation: 1. The antinomies of
Nelson Mandela; 2. Mandela, the emotions, and
the lessons of prison; 3. 'Madiba magic': politics
as enchantment; 4. Nelson, Winnie, and the
politics of gender; Part II. Reinterpreting
Mandela: 5. Mandela and tradition; 6. Mandela
and the law; 7. Mandela on war; 8. Mandela's
presidential years: an Africanist view; Part III.
Representing Mandela: 9. Mandela writing/writing
Mandela; 10. Mandela in film and television;
11. The visual Mandela: a pedagogy of
citizenship; 12. Mandela's mortality; Guide to
further reading; Index.
This book tells the story of the tragic and often
tormented relationship between the United States
and Pakistan. Pakistan’s internal troubles have
already threatened U.S. security and international
peace, and Pakistan’s rapidly-growing
population, nuclear arsenal, and relationships
with China and India will continue to force it upon
America’s geostragetic map in new and important
ways over the coming decades. This book
explores the main trends in Pakistani society that
will help determine its future; traces the
wellsprings of Pakistani anti-American sentiment
through the history of U.S. Pakistan relations
from 1947 to 2001; assesses how Washington
made and implemented policies regarding
Pakistan since the terrorist attacks on the United
States on September 11, 2001; and analyses
how regional dynamics, especially the rise of
China, will likely shape U.S.-Pakistan relations. It
concludes with three options for future U.S.
strategy, described as defensive insulation,
military-first cooperation, and comprehensive
cooperation. The book explains how Washington
can prepare for the worst, aim for the best, and
avoid past mistakes.
ISBN: 9781107440005
120
349pp
PB ` 395.00
Informal Labor,
Formal Politics
and Dignified
Discontent in India
Rina Agarwala
Since the 1980s, the world’s governments have
decreased state welfare and thus increased the
number of unprotected ‘informal’ or ‘precarious’
workers. As a result, more and more workers do
not receive secure wages or benefits from either
employers or the state. This book offers a fresh
and provocative look into the alternative social
movements informal workers in India are
launching. It also offers a unique analysis of the
conditions under which these movements
succeed or fail. Drawing from 300 interviews with
informal workers, government officials and union
leaders, Rina Agarwala argues that Indian
informal workers are using their power as voters
to demand welfare benefits from the state, rather
than demanding traditional work benefits from
employers. In addition, they are organizing at the
neighbourhood level, rather than the shop floor,
and appealing to ‘citizenship’, rather than labour
rights.
Western Realism
and International
Relations
A Non-Western View
Aswini K. Ray
Contents: Preface; 1 National Security and the
International System; 2 Emergence of the PostWar Global System of Security; 3 Myths and
Reality of Realism; 4 Western Realism in South
Asia; 5 Hegemony of Realism; 6 Globalisation
and the Crisis of Realism; 7 Justice as Realism in
International Relation; Bibliography; Index.
Contents: 1. Introduction: informal workers’
movements and the state; 2. Struggling with
informality; 3. The success of competitive
populism; 4. Communism’s resistance to change;
5. Why accommodation leads to minimal gains;
6. Conclusion: dignifying discontent.
ISBN: 9781107059733
Chinese and Indian
Strategic Behavior
Growing Power
and Alarm
George J. Gilboy and
Eric Heginbotham
264pp
ISBN: 9788175962187
Democracy and
Decentralisation in
South Asia and
West Africa
Participation,
Accountability and
Performance
Richard C. Crook
and James Manor
HB ` 895.00
This book examines whether setting up
democratic local councils in four developing
countries (Ghana, Cote d’Ivoire, Bangladesh and
India) enhances the popularity, responsiveness
and effectiveness of administration. The authors
make an important contribution to current
debates about ‘good governance’, asking
whether the poor and disadvantaged benefit from
decentralization.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. India (Karnataka);
3. Bangladesh; 4. Cote d‘Ivoire; 5. Ghana;
6. Conclusions.
ISBN: 9780521636476
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Strategic culture:
unique paths to veiled realpolitik; 3. Foreign
policy, use of force, and border settlements;
4. Military modernization: defense spending;
5. Military doctrine: towards emphasis on
offensive action; 6. Military force modernization
and power projection; 7. Economic strategic
behavior: trade and energy; 8. India, China, and
democratic peace theory; 9. Meeting the dual
challenge: a U.S. strategy for China and India.
376pp
244pp
HB ` 995.00
This book offers an empirical comparison of
Chinese and Indian international strategic
behaviour. It is the first study of its kind, filling an
important gap in the literature on rising Indian
and Chinese power and American interests in
Asia. The book creates a framework for the
systematic and objective assessment of Chinese
and Indian strategic behaviour in four areas: (1)
strategic culture; (2) foreign policy and use of
force; (3) military modernization (including
defense spending, military doctrine, and force
modernization); and (4) economic strategies
(including international trade and energy
competition). The utility of democratic peace
theory in predicting Chinese and Indian
behaviour is also examined. The findings
challenge many assumptions underpinning
western expectations of China and India.
ISBN: 9781107031982
This book pleads for democracy among the
states as a component of justice as a substitute
for power as the organizing principle of the global
system within a reformed UN system as the
‘centre for harmonizing the actions of humanity’
as envisaged in the Charter. In this task
scholarship must be inspired to be the catalytic
agent by reversing its present role as a policyscience of power policies to perpetuate
domination and servitude and legitimizing it as
‘interdependence’ of the ‘global village’. It must
liberate itself to become the harbinger of human
emancipation as in other fields of creative
scholarship.
PB ` 795.00
121
348pp
PB ` 895.00
China and India in
the Age of
Globalization
Shalendra D. Sharma
The rise of China and India is the story of our
times. The unprecedented expansion of their
economic and power capabilities raises profound
questions for scholars and policymakers. What
forces propelled these two Asian giants into
global pacesetters, and what does their
emergence mean for the United States and the
world? With intimate detail, Shalendra D.
Sharma’s China and India in the Age of
Globalization explores how the interplay of sociohistorical, political, and economic forces has
transformed these once poor agrarian societies
into economic powerhouses. Yet, globalization is
hardly a seamless process, as the vagaries and
uncertainties of globalization also present risks
and challenges. This book examines the
challenges both countries face and what each
must do to strike the balance between reaping
the opportunities and mitigating the risks. For the
United States, assisting a rising China to become
a responsible global stakeholder and fostering
peace and stability in the volatile subcontinent
will be paramount in the coming years.
Why Ethnic Parties
Succeed
Patronage and Ethnic
Head Counts in India
Kanchan Chandra
Contents: 1. Introduction; Part I. Theory; 2.
Limited information and ethnic categorization; 3.
Patronage-democracy, limited information, and
ethnic favoritism; 4. Counting heads: why ethnic
parties succeed in patronage-democracies; 5.
Why parties have different headcounts; Part II.
Data; 6. India as a patronage-democracy; 7. The
Bahujan Samaj Party (BSP) and the scheduled
castes (SCs); 8. Counting heads and party
formation: why SC elites join the BSP; 9.
Counting heads and preference formation: why
SC voters prefer the BSP; 10. Counting heads
and strategic voting: why SC voter preferences
translate into BSP votes; 11. Explaining different
headcounts in the BSP and congress; 12.
Extending the argument to other ethnic parties in
India: BJP, JMM, DMK; 13. Conclusion.
Contents: Introduction: China and India in the
age of globalization; 1. Prelude to globalization:
China (1949–78) and India (1947–91); 2. China
and India embrace globalization; 3. China:
strategies and patterns of global integration;
4. India: strategies and patterns of global
integration; 5. Sino-Indian relations: partners,
friends or rivals?; 6. India and the United States:
from estrangement to engagement; 7. The rise of
China and its implications for the United States;
8. China and India: future challenges and
opportunities.
ISBN: 9780521198936
Gandhi
‘Hind Swaraj’ and
Other Writings
Centenary Edition
Anthony J. Parel
336pp
HB ` 795.00
ISBN: 9780521608374
Hind Swaraj is Mahatma Gandhi’s fundamental
work. It is key to understanding not only his life
and thoughts, but also the politics of South Asia
in the first half of the twentieth century.
Celebrating 100 years since Hind Swaraj was
first published in a newspaper, this centenary
edition includes a new Preface and Editor’s
Introduction, as well as a new chapter on ‘Gandhi
and the ‘Four Canonical Aims of Life’. The
volume presents a critical edition of the 1910 text
of Hind Swaraj, fully annotated and including
Gandhi’s own Preface and Foreword (not found
in other editions). Anthony J. Parel sets the work
in its historical and political contexts and
analyses the significance of Gandhi’s
experiences in England and South Africa. The
second part of the volume contains some of
Gandhi’s other writings, including his
correspondence with Tolstoy and Nehru.
Elite Parties, Poor
Voters
How Social Services
Win Votes in India
Tariq Thachil
Contents: Preface to the centenary edition;
Acknowledgements; Editor’s introduction to the
centenary edition; Editor’s introduction to the
1997 edition; A note on the history of the text;
Principal events in Gandhi’s life; Biographical
synopses; Guide to further reading; Glossary and
abbreviations; Hind Swaraj; Supplementary
writings.
ISBN: 9780521149143
294pp
Why do some ethnic parties succeed in attracting
the support of their target ethnic groups while
others fail? In a world in which ethnic parties
flourish in established and emerging
democracies alike, understanding the conditions
under which such parties succeed or fail is of
critical importance to both political scientists and
policy makers. This book builds a theory of ethnic
party performance in ‘patronage-democracies.’
Chandra shows why voters in such democracies
choose between parties by conducting ethnic
head counts rather than by comparing policy
platforms or ideological positions. She argues
that an ethnic party is likely to succeed when it
has competitive rules for intraparty advancement
and when the size of the group it seeks to
mobilize exceeds the threshold of winning or
leverage imposed by the electoral system.
368pp
PB ` 695.00
Why do poor people often vote against their
material interests? This puzzle has been
famously studied within wealthy Western
democracies, yet the fact that the poor voter
paradox also routinely manifests within poor
countries has remained unexplored. This book
studies how this paradox emerged in India, the
world's largest democracy. Tariq Thachil shows
how arguments from studies of wealthy
democracies (such as moral values voting) and
the global south (such as patronage or ethnic
appeals) cannot explain why poor voters in poor
countries support parties that represent elite
policy interests. He instead draws on extensive
survey data and fieldwork to document a novel
strategy through which elite parties can recruit
the poor, while retaining the rich. He shows how
these parties can win over disadvantaged voters
by privately providing them with basic social
services via grassroots affiliates. Such
outsourcing permits the party itself to continue to
represent the policy interests of their privileged
base.
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. An elite party's
struggles with poor voters; 3. Why rich and poor
voters support an elite party in India; 4. Why an
elite party turned to service; 5. How service wins
votes; 6. When service fails: the impact of rival
PB ` 495.00
122
strategies; 7. The argument in comparative
perspective; 8. Conclusion; Appendix A.
Variables, sources, and summary statistics;
Appendix B. Additional tables and figures;
Appendix C. Supplemental survey information;
Appendix D. List of information in online
supplement.
ISBN: 9781107570771
Violent
Conjunctures in
Democratic India
Amrita Basu
352pp
Mao’s Little Red
Book
Alexander C. Cook
PB ` 795.00
This book is a pioneering study of when and why
Hindu Nationalists have engaged in
discrimination and violence against minorities in
contemporary India. Amrita Basu asks why the
incidence and severity of violence differs
significantly across Indian states, within states,
and through time. Contrary to many predictions,
the Hindu nationalist Bharatiya Janata Party
(BJP) has neither consistently engaged in antiminority violence nor been compelled by the
centrifugal pressures of democracy to become a
centrist party. Rather, the national BJP has
alternated between moderation and militancy.
Hindu nationalist violence has been conjunctural,
determined by relations among its own party,
social movement organization, and state
governments, and on the character of opposition
states, parties and movements. This study
accords particular importance to the role of social
movements in precipitating anti-minority violence.
It calls for a broader understanding of social
movements and a greater appreciation of their
relationship to political parties.
Contents: Preface; 1. Introduction: the spiritual
atom bomb and its global fallout Alexander C.
Cook; 2. A single spark: origins and spread of the
Little Red Book in China Daniel Leese; 3.
Quotations songs: portable media and the Maoist
pop song Andrew F. Jones; 4. Mao quotations in
factional battles and their afterlives: episodes
from Chongqing Guobin Yang; 5. Translation and
internationalism Lanjun Xu; 6. Maoism in
Tanzania: material connections and shared
imaginaries Priya Lal; 7. Empty symbol: the Little
Red Book in India Sreemati Chakrbarti; 8. The
influence of Maoism in Peru David Scott Palmer;
9. The book that bombed: Mao's Little Red Thing
in the Soviet Union Elizabeth McGuire; 10. Mao
and the Albanians Elidor Mëhilli; 11. Partisan
legacies and anti-imperialist ambitions: the Little
Red Book in Italy and Yugoslavia Dominique
Kirchner Reill; 12. Badge books and brand
books: the Mao bible in East and West Germany
Quinn Slobodian; 13. Principally contradiction:
the flourishing of French Maoism Julian Bourg;
14. By the book: Quotations from Chairman Mao
and the making of Afro-Asian Radicalism, 1966–
75 Bill V. Mullen; 15. Conclusion: in the
beginning is the word - popular democracy and
Mao's Little Red Book Ban Wang; Index.
Contents: Introduction; Part I. The Pillars of
Hindu Nationalism; 1. The state: dialectics of
states, parties, and movements; 2. Party politics:
disrupting party-movement boundaries; 3.
Movements politics: globalized markets and
sacred spaces; Part II. Extensive Violence; 4.
When local violence is not merely local: a tale of
two towns; 5. Gujarat: the perfect storm; Part III.
Episodic Violence; 6. Uttar Pradesh: movements
and counter movements; 7. Himachal Pradesh:
the party rules; 8. Rajasthan: two phases of
party-movement relations; 9. Conclusion.
ISBN: 9781316603918
364pp
Mao’s Little Red Book (Quotations from
Chairman Mao) – a compilation of the Chinese
leader's speeches and writings – is one of the
most visible and ubiquitous symbols of twentiethcentury radicalism. Published for the first time in
1964, it rapidly became the must-have accessory
for Red Guards and revolutionaries from
Berkeley to Bamako. Yet, despite its worldwide
circulation and enduring presence there has, until
now, been no serious scholarly effort to
understand this seminal text as a global historical
phenomenon. Mao's Little Red Book brings
together a range of innovative scholars from
around the world to explore the fascinating
variety of uses and forms that Mao's Quotations
has taken, from rhetoric, art and song, to
talisman, badge, and weapon. The authors of this
pioneering volume use Mao's Quotations as a
medium through which to re-examine the history
of the twentieth-century world, challenging
established ideas about the book to reveal its
remarkable global impact.
PB ` 700.00
ISBN: 9781107461680
123
299pp
PB ` 595.00
Patronage as
Politics in
South Asia
Anastasia Piliavsky
Western policymakers, political activists and
academics alike see patronage as the chief
enemy of open, democratic societies. Patronage,
for them, is a corrupting force, a hallmark of failed
and failing states, and the obverse of everything
that good, modern governance ought to be.
Healthy democracies stamp out patronage. South
Asia poses a frontal challenge for this
consensus. Here the world’s most populous,
pluralist and animated democracy is also a
hotbed of corruption with persistently - startling
levels of inequality. Patronage as Politics in
South Asia confronts this paradox with calm
erudition: 16 essays by anthropologists,
historians and political scientists show, from a
wide range of cultural and historical angles, that
in South Asia patronage is no feudal residue or
retrograde political pressure, but a political form
vital in its own right. This volume suggests that
patronage is no foe to South Asia’s burgeoning
democratic cultures, but may in fact be their main
driving force. The landmark volume is essential
reading for students of South Asia, political
scientists, economists, policymakers and anyone
interested in the politics of the Indian
subcontinent and the wider world.
PSYCHOLOGY
How Children
Learn to Be
Healthy
Barbara J. Tinsley
Contents: 1. Mechanisms and consequences of
socializing children to be healthy; 2. Children’s
health understanding and behavior; 3. Parents’
health beliefs: 4. Parents’ promotion of children’s
health; 5. Parents’ promotion of children’s sexual
health; 6. Peers, schools, and children’s health;
7. How television viewing and other media use
affects children’s health; 8. The social ecology of
children’s health socialization; 9. Summary and
conclusions.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Foreword – John
Dunn; Acknowledgements; IntroductionAnastasia Piliavsky; Part I: The Idea of
Patronage in South Asia; 1.The Political
Economy of Patronage, Preeminence and the
State in Chennai - Mattison Mines; 2. The
Temporal and the Spiritual, and the So-called
Patron–client Relation in the Governance of Inner
Asia and Tibet - D. Seyfort Ruegg;
cambridgeindia.org/9781107056084 Due to an
error, an incorrect version of chapter 2appears in
the book. Please click here to see the correct
chapter.; 3. Remnants of Patronage and the
Making of Tamil Valaiyar Pasts - Diane Mines;
4. Patronage and State-making in Early Modern
Empires in India and Britain - Sumit Guha; Part II:
Democracy as Patronage; 5. The Paradox of
Patronage and the People’s Sovereignty - David
Gilmartin; 6. India’s Demotic Democracy and Its
‘Depravities’ in the Ethnographic Longue Durée Anastasia Piliavsky; 7. ‘Vote Banking’ as Politics
in Mumbai - Lisa Björkman; 8. Political Fixers in
India’s Patronage Democracy - Ward
Berenschot; 9. Patronage and Autonomy in
India’s Deepening Democracy - Pamela Price,
with Dusi Srinivas; 10. Police and Legal
Patronage in Northern India ; Beatrice Jauregui;
11. Patronage Politics in Post-Independence
India - Steven I. Wilkinson; Part III: Prospects
and Disappointments; 12. Kingship without Kings
in Northern India - Lucia Michelutti; 13. The
Political Bully in Bangladesh - Arild Engelsen
Ruud; 14. The Dark Side of Patronage in the
Pakistani Punjab - Nicolas Martin; 15. Patronage
and Printing Innovation in Fifteenth-century Tibet
- Hildegard Diemberger; 16. The Im(morality) of
Mediation and Patronage in South India and the
Gulf - Filippo Osella; Contributors; Bibliography;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107056084
486pp
The goal of this book is to explore the ways in
which health behaviour develops in childhood, in
the context of childhood socialization processes.
The book reviews the historical and
contemporary perspectives utilized in portraying
the dynamics of children’s physical health, a
developmental analysis of children’s and parents’
attitudes and behaviour concerning children’s
health, the role of parents, schools, and the
media in influencing children’s health attitudes
and behaviour, and how health attitudes,
behaviours, and outcomes are affected by the
social ecology of children’s rearing environments.
ISBN: 9780521524186
Development of
Geocentric Spatial
Language and
Cognition
Pierre R. Dasen and
Ramesh C. Mishra
198pp
PB ` 925.00
Egocentric spatial language uses coordinates in
relation to our body to talk about small-scale
space (‘put the knife on the right of the plate and
the fork on the left’), while geocentric spatial
language uses geographic coordinates (‘put the
knife to the east, and the fork to the west’). How
do children learn to use geocentric language?
And why do geocentric spatial references sound
strange in English when they are standard
practice in other languages? This book studies
child development in Bali, India, Nepal, and
Switzerland and explores how children learn to
use a geocentric frame both when speaking and
performing non-verbal cognitive tasks (such as
remembering locations and directions). The
authors examine how these skills develop with
age, look at the socio-cultural contexts in which
the learning takes place, and explore the
ecological, cultural, social, and linguistic
conditions that favour the use of a geocentric
frame of reference.
Contents: Part I. Introduction and Methods;
1. Theory and research questions; 2. Methods;
3. Settings; Part II. Results; 4. Pilot study in Bali
and first study (India and Nepal, 1999–2000);
5. Returning to Bali: main study 2002–2007;
6. Varanasi; 7. Kathmandu; 8. Panditpur;
9. Geneva; Part III. Additional Studies;
10. Spatial language addressed to children;
11. Geocentric gestures before language?;
12. Spatial organization schemes;
13. Neurophysiological correlates of geocentric
space; 14.Geocentric dead reckoning; Part IV.
HB ` 895.00
124
Conclusions; 15. Discussion and conclusions;
Appendix 1.Summary of instructions,
questionnaires, and coding schemes; Appendix
2. Examples of language in each location;
Appendix 3. Extracts from school manuals.
ISBN: 9781107008335
Good Thinking
Seven Powerful Ideas
That Influence the Way
We Think
Denise Cummins
408pp
Handbook of
Indian Psychology
K. Ramakrishna Rao,
Anand C. Paranjpe
and Ajit K. Dalal
HB ` 995.00
Do you know what economists mean when they
refer to you as a ‘rational agent’? Or why a
psychologist might label your idea a ‘creative
insight’? Or how a philosopher could be logical
but also passionate in persuading you to obey
‘moral imperatives’? Or why scientists disagree
about the outcomes of experiments comparing
drug treatments and disease risk factors? After
reading this book, you will know how the best and
brightest thinkers judge the ways we decide,
argue, solve problems and tell right from wrong.
But you will also understand why, when we don’t
meet these standards, it is not always a bad
thing. The answers are rooted in the way the
human brain has been wired over evolutionary
time to make us kinder and more generous than
economists think we ought to be, and more
resistant to change and persuasion than
scientists and scholars think we ought to be.
The Handbook of Indian Psychology is an
attempt to explore the concepts, methods and
models of psychology systematically from the
above perspective. The Handbook is the result of
the collective efforts of more than 30 leading
international scholars with interdisciplinary
backgrounds. Authors depict the nuances of
classical Indian thought, discuss their relevance
to contemporary concerns, and draw out the
implications and applications for teaching,
research and practice of psychology.
Contents: Contributing Authors; Preface;
Prologue: Introducing Indian Psychology; Indian
Thought and Tradition: A Psychohistorical
Perspective; Part I - Systems And Schools;
1. Jaina Psychology; 2. The Foundations of Early
Buddhist Psychology; 3. Varieties of Cognition in
Early Buddhism; 4. A Buddhist Theory of
Unconscious Mind (Alaya-Vijñana); 5. Indian
Buddhist Theories of Persons; 6. Buddhist
Psychology: A Western Interpretation;
7. Transpersonal Psychology in the BhagavadGita: Reflections on Consciousness, Meditation,
Work and Love; 8. Yoga Psychology: Theory and
Application; 9. Patañjali Yoga and Siddhis: Their
Relevance to Parapsychological Theory and
Research; 10.Yoga Psychology and the
Samkhya Metaphysic; 11. Psychology in the
Advaita Vedanta; 12. The Nyaya-Vaisesika
Theory of Perceiving the World of our
Experience; 13. Psychological Theories and
Practices in Ayurveda; Part II- Topics And
Themes; 14. Indian Theories of Perception: An
Inter-School Dialogue from Buddhist Perspective;
15. Indian Psychology of Motivation;
16. Personality in Indian Psychology; 17. “Giving”
as a Theme in the Indian Psychology of Values;
18. The Making of a Creative Poet: Insights from
Indian Aestheticians; 19. Anchoring Cognition,
Emotion and Behavior in Desire: A Model from
the Bhagavad-Gita; 20. Consciousness;
21. Freedom from Knowledge; Part III Applications And Implications; 22. Therapeutic
Psychology and Indian Yoga; 23. Towards an
Indian Organizational Psychology; 24. Research
on Indian Concepts of Psychology: Major
Challenges and Perspectives for Future Action;
Contents: 1. Introduction; 2. Rational choice:
choosing what is most likely to give you what you
want; 3. Game theory: when you’re not the only
one choosing; 4. Moral decision-making: how we
tell right from wrong; 5. The game of logic; 6.
What causes what?; 7. Hypothesis testing: truth
and evidence; 8. Problem solving: another way of
getting what you want; 9. Analogy: this is like that.
ISBN: 9781107644595
212pp
Indian psychology is a distinct psychological
tradition rooted in the native Indian ethos. It
manifests in the multitude of practices prevailing
in the Indian subcontinent for centuries. Unlike
the mainstream psychology, Indian psychology is
not overwhelmingly materialist-reductionist in
character. It goes beyond the conventional thirdperson forms of observation to include the study
of first-person phenomena such as subjective
experience in its various manifestations and
associated cognitive phenomena. It does not
exclude the investigation of extraordinary states
of consciousness and exceptional human
abilities. The quintessence of Indian nature is its
synthetic stance that results in a magical bridging
of dichotomies such as natural and supernatural,
secular and sacred, and transactional and
transcendental. The result is a psychology that is
practical, positive, holistic and inclusive.
PB ` 395.00
125
25. Meditative Traditions and Contemporary
Psychology; 26. Consciousness Evolution of the
Buddha until He Attained Satori; 27. William
James on Pure Experience and Samadhi in
Samkhya Yoga; 28. Sri Ramana Maharshi: A
Case Study in Self-Realization; 29. Altered
States of Consciousness and the Spiritual
Traditions: The Proposal for the Creation of
State-Specific Sciences; Pronunciation and
Transliteration of Sanskrit Alphabet; Glossary of
Sanskrit Terms; Index.
ISBN: 9788175966024
668pp
Fantasy of
Modernity
Romantic Love in
Bombay Cinema of the
1950s
Aarti Wani
HB ` 1495.00
SOCIOLOGY
Women in Prison
Suvarna Cherukuri
Contents: Introduction; Chapter 1. City of Love;
Chapter 2. The Song of Love; Chapter 3. Love
and Stardom; Conclusion; Bibliography;
Filmography; Index.
Women in Prison takes a look at the multiple
specificities that bring women into the prison
system. Drawing on empirical sources and
original research, and relying primarily on
interviews of women inmates, this book explores
the contexts of female crime and punishment in
India and looks at gendered disciplinary
mechanisms that are used to control women
inmates. The work invokes not only a sense of
history in understanding women’s crimes and
imprisonment, but also engages in a critical
dialogue in terms of gender, caste, culture and
sexuality. Unique in its analysis of the lives of
women prisoners within social and legal contexts,
the book is a major contribution to international
literature on women’s offences and their
experience of imprisonment
ISBN: 9781107117211
Living with
Disasters
Communities and
Development in the
Indian Sundarbans
Amites Mukhopadhyay
Contents: Preface; Chapter 1. Theoretical
Considerations; Chapter 2. Methodological
Framework and Positioning the Self; Chapter 3.
Indian Penitentiary and the Historiographical
Silence about Women; Chapter 4. Captive
Contexts of Crime: Stories from Inside the Prison;
Chapter 5. Life in Prison and Moments of Control;
Chapter 6. Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175965478
157pp
Romantic love overwhelms 1950s Bombay
cinema. Love and romance is evident in the
themes, lyrics and visual aesthetics of films of the
period, as it is in the publicity and gossip
surrounding films and film stars. Love in cinema
becomes significant when social reality
constrains its quotidian experience and
expression. By bringing a spectacular
imagination of love to centre stage, the 1950s
cinema deflected anxieties of ‘Indianness’ even
as the new aesthetic and affect of romance
offered an alternative engagement with the
contradictions of modernity. Fantasy of Modernity
explores the films, the songs, the stars and the
extra-cinematic discourse of the period to read
love and romance as its most productive trope
that mobilized a dynamic and contested public
sphere.
234pp
HB ` 895.00
This book is a critical account of the
disconnected nature of governance, conservation
and livelihood initiatives in the Indian
Sundarbans, an active delta that spreads over
25, 500 sq. km across India and Bangladesh and
lies in the Bay of Bengal. It draws a holistic
picture of the disaster-prone delta in eastern
India, which is a UNESCO World Heritage Site
and also one of the largest tracts of mangrove
forests in the world. The author juxtaposes the
vulnerable lives and frequently-displaced
existence of the islanders against the dominant
strategies of conservation and development
followed by the state.
Contents: Maps and illustrations; Tables and
charts; Glossary; Acronyms; Acknowledgements;
Note on Transliteration; Chapter 1. Introduction;
Chapter 2. From Wasteland to Wonderland: The
Making of a Heritage Site; Chapter 3. Governing
the Sundarbans Embankments today: Between
Policies and Practices; Chapter 4. Treading a
Fine Path between River and Land: Livelihoods
around Embankment; Chapter 5. Beldars,
Embankment and Governance: Question of
Aboriginality Revisited; Chapter 6. Catching
Prawn, Endangering Embankments:
Sustainability-unsustainability Rhetoric; Chapter
7. Conclusion; Bibliography; Index.
HB ` 395.00
ISBN: 9781107107281
126
220pp
HB ` 895.00
Witches, Tea
Plantations, and
Lives of Migrant
Laborers in India
Soma Chaudhuri
Bringing together a holistic theoretical
perspective drawing from sociology,
anthropology, and postcolonial history, the author
argues that witchcraft accusations among the
adivasi worker communities in the tea plantations
of West Bengal are a protest against the
plantation management. Thus the witchcraft
accusations are not as ‘exotic and primitive
rituals of a backward’ adivasi community during
times of stress, but rather as a powerful protest
organized by a marginalized community against
its oppressors. The book also illuminates how
witchcraft accusations should be interpreted
within the backdrop of labour-planters
relationship, characterized by rigidity of power,
patronage, and social distance.The amazing
narratives of the tea plantation workers are
woven into the broader arguments made. This
book is a must read for scholars interested in
gender and social movements and those in
South Asia studies. It is also relevant for scholars
who pursue scholarship about resistance by
indigenous groups.
also from those joined as Observers. Besides
looking at the trade and economic dimension of
SAARC, these essays discuss the security,
political and cultural aspects of regional
cooperation among the South Asian countries.
Contents: Preface; List of Figures; List of Tables
; 1. SAARC Prospects: The Changing
Dimensions; 2. SAARC and South Asian
Economic Integration; 3. Coping with the
Emerging Challenges: Poverty and Food
Security; 4. SAARC Energy Cooperation: Energy
Security and Environmental Challenges; 5. SubRegional Cooperation under SAARC: An
Economic Analysis; 6. SAARC: Social Charter
and Human Security; 7. SAARC and the South
Asian Security Architect; 8. Fighting Terrorism
through SAARC?; 9. SAARC and the Evolving
Asian Regionalism; 10. Role of SAARC
Observers: Members’ Perspectives; 11. Role of
SAARC Observers: Observers’ Perspectives;
12. Concluding Remarks; About the Contributors;
Index.
Contents: Acknowledgments; Prologue; 1. The
Politics of Witchcraft Accusations and Witch
Hunts: An Introduction; 2. Theory and Literature
on Witchcraft Accusations and Witch Hunts; 3.
Two Leaves and a Bud: The Beginning; 4.
Categorization of Witch Hunts; 5. Women, Moral
Boundaries, and Gossip in the Plantation; 6. Tea
Plantation Politics, Oppression, and Protest; 7.
Towards a New Direction: Activism and Protests;
Appendix A. Outline of Interview Guides;
Appendix B. Selected List of Participants for the
Interviews; Appendix C. List of Abbreviations;
Appendix D. Glossary; Bibliography; Index; About
the Author.
ISBN: 9789382993452
The Emerging
Dimensions of
SAARC
S. D. Muni
214pp
ISBN: 9788175967458
Subalternity,
Exclusion and
Social Change in
India
Ashok K. Pankaj and
Ajit K. Pandey
322pp
HB ` 695.00
The essays in this volume capture ideology,
knowledge and power as forces of subaltern
reproduction in Indian society, and map the
dominant trajectories of emancipation and
assertion adopted by different subaltern social
groups. Contributors show how subalterns are
negotiating emancipation amidst continued
oppression, subjugation and atrocities.
Contents: Foreword; Preface; Section I:
Introduction; 1. Understanding Subalternity,
Exclusion and Social Change in India Ashok K.
Pankaj and Ajit K. Pandey; Section II: Engaging
with Subaltern Studies in India; 2. Revisiting
Subaltern Studies in India K. L. Sharma; 3. On
Altering the Ego in Peasant History: Paradoxes
of Culturological Option Dipankar Gupta; 4.
Human Rights, Dalit Questions and Subaltern
Studies in India V. S. Sreedhara; Section III:
Subaltern Reproduction through Idea, Knowledge
and Power; 5. A Subaltern Perspective on the
Discourse of New Political Economy of India
Ashok K. Pankaj; 6. Modern Science and
Indigenous Techniques: Subalternity of
Knowledge Production in India Madhav Govind;
7. The Construction of the Subaltern through
Education: The Historical Failure of Mass
Education in India Nita Kumar; Section IV:
Routes of Subjugation and Emancipation: Identity
and Assertion, Mobilization and Power,
Knowledge and Production; 8. Contours of Dalit
Movement in South India: A Search for
Egalitarian Social Order Yagati Chinna Rao; 9.
Subalternity and the Mirage of Social Inclusion:
Bama’s Karukku and the Politics of Inclusion/
Exclusion Rajan Joseph Barrett; 10. Women and
Land: Agriculture and Opportunity S. Galab and
E. Revathi; 11. Religion and Society in Our Time
T. N. Madan; Section V: Aspects of Social and
Cultural Changes; 12. Exclusivist View of
HB ` 895.00
With the dawn of the twenty-first century, South
Asian region has undergone radical
transformation. It has witnessed a strong
democratic sweep. Most of the South Asian
economies have registered impressive growth
trajectories. Some of its countries have also
emerged as the hub of global terrorism. The
international community has become far more
involved in South Asian affairs due to the
nuclearization of the region. SAARC cannot but
keep pace with the changing regional dynamics.
It has moved ahead on its economic agenda and
expanded its reach not only by adding new
members (Afghanistan) but also by opening itself
to the participation of many other countries,
including China, Iran and the US, as Observers.
The Emerging Dimensions of SAARC is an
attempt to look at the changing dynamics of
South Asia and to learn whether SAARC will take
regional cooperation and integration in their
various dimensions closer to reality. S. D. Muni,
the editor of this volume has compiled essays
contributed by eminent academics and analysts,
not only from most of the SAARC countries, but
127
Hinduism: A Critical Appraisal Hetukar Jha and
Mahendra Prasad Singh; 13. Changing Role of
Caste and Class in Rural Bihar Gerry Rodgers;
14. Explaining Caste-Class Nexus: Continuity
and Change K. L. Sharma; 15. Khap Panchayat,
Honour Killings and Gender Relations in Western
India Madhu Nagla; Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993247
Population Ageing
in India
G. Giridhar, K. M.
Sathyanarayana,
Sanjay Kumar,
K. S. James and
Moneer Alam
387pp
People and Life on
the Chars of
South Asia
Dancing with the River
Kuntala Lahiri-Dutt and
Gopa Samanta
HB ` 895.00
A major emerging demographic issue of the
twenty-first century is the ageing of populations
as an inevitable consequence of the
demographic transition experienced by most
countries. While all countries are experiencing
growing proportions of the elderly, developing
countries are currently ageing faster than
developed countries. Population Ageing in India
creates a holistic research base by looking at the
demographics of the ageing population and
reviewing existing studies. It delves deep into the
socioeconomic layers of elderly health, work
participation and contribution to income
generation, national policy in practice and policy
initiatives to ensure elderly wellbeing in other
Asian countries. The shift of age composition to
an older age structure has important implications
for individuals, society as well as the country.
Therefore, there is a need to promote harmony
between development and demographic change
by increasing the economic and social sources of
support for the elderly.
Contents: Preface; Acknowledgements; List of
Abbreviations; Chapter 1: Introducing chars:
Where lands float on water; Chapter 2: Char
jage: A char rises; Chapter 3: Controlling the river
to free up land; Chapter 4: Bhitar o bahirkatha:
Inside and outside stories of chars and the
mainland; Chapter 5: Silent footfalls: People and
the chars; Chapter 6: Living with risk: Beyond
vulnerability/ security; Chapter 7: Livelihoods
defined by water: Nadir sathe baas; Chapter 8:
Living on chars, drifting with rivers; Appendix:
Full census data for surveyed chars; Notes;
Glossary; References; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993780
Mapping Social
Exclusion in India
Caste, Religion and
Borderlands
Contents: List of figures; List of tables; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Introduction G. Giridhar, K.
M. Sathyanarayana and K. S. James; 1.
Demographics of population ageing in India
Lekha Subaiya and Dhananjay W. Bansod; 2.
Elderly workforce participation, wage differentials
and contribution to household income Sakthivel
Selvaraj, Anup Karan and S. Madheswaran; 3.
Living arrangements of elderly in India: policy
and programmatic implications K. M.
Sathyanarayana, Sanjay Kumar and K. S.
James; 4. Health status of elderly in India: trends
and differentials Moneer Alam and Anup Karan;
5. The national policy for older persons: critical
issues in implementation S. Irudaya Rajan and U.
S. Mishra; 6. Policy initiatives on population
ageing in select Asian countries and their
relevance to the Indian context Mala Kapur
Shankardass; 7. Studies on ageing in India: a
review S. Siva Raju; About the editors and
contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9781107073326
250pp
With this book, Kuntala Lahiri-Dutt and Gopa
Samanta offer an intimate glimpse into the
microcosmic world of ‘hybrid environments’.
Focusing on chars – the part-land, part-water,
low-lying sandy masses that exist within the
riverbeds in the floodplains of lower Bengal – the
authors show how, both as real-life examples and
as metaphors, chars straddle the conventional
categories of land and water, and how people
who live on them fluctuate between legitimacy
and illegitimacy. The result, a study of human
habitation in the nebulous space between land
and water, charts a new way of thinking about
land, people, and people’s ways of life.
Paramjit S. Judge
HB ` 795.00
294pp
HB ` 895.00
Mapping Social Exclusion in India assesses the
problem of defining exclusion, the need for its
contextualization and establishes a relationship
between social exclusion, deprivation and
discrimination. It studies the distinctive character
of Indian society and system marked with the
existence of exclusionary practices and
structures on the basis of caste. The usage of the
concept of exclusion is more inclusive than any
other competing concepts of discrimination or
deprivation, though these concepts are
interchangeably used to denote it. It is, therefore,
important to conceptualize exclusion and, in the
process, come across different shades of its
interpretations.The social phenomenon of
exclusion that marks societies globally is studied
by various scholars who put together their
diverse research, studies, perceptions and ideas
and, most importantly, their years of expertise to
focus on a central theme of social exclusion in
Indian society. This cohesive volume highlights
the causal link between discrimination and
exploitation. The contributors study the role of the
state as an interventionist force and look into the
mobilization strategy as a reaction to exclusion.
They take a critical look at the reservation policy
and argue that state intervention creates certain
new forms of exclusion.
Contents: List of Tables and Figures; Preface;
Introduction; Part I: Social Exclusion in India;
Theoretical Perspectives and Issues; 1.
Inequality, Poverty and Social Exclusion in India;
2. Social Exclusion, Globalisation and
Marginalised Groups; 3. Situating Social
128
Exclusion in the Context of Caste: A Case of
Dalits in India; 4. Reservation Policy in India:
Exclusion in Inclusion; 5. Coping with Exclusions
the Non-Political Way; Part II: Empirical Studies:
Caste and Religious Exclusions; 6. Egalitarian
Religion and Caste-Based Exclusion in Rural
Punjab; 7. ‘Rajput’, Local Deities and
Discrimination: Tracing Caste Formation in
Jammu; 8. Excluded and Marginalised: Patterns
of Deprivation of the Scavengers; 9. Looking
Beyond Generalities: Caste, Social Exclusion
and Derasin Punjab; 10. Caste and Dynamics of
Inclusion and Exclusion in Local Governance;
Part III: Case Studies: Borderlands and Social
Exclusion; 11. ‘No Man’s Land?’: Exclusion in the
Border belt of Punjab; 12. Farmers at the Border
belt of Punjab: Fencing and Forced Deprivation;
13. Barbed Wire Fencing and Exclusion of
Border Communities; Conclusion; Contributors;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107056091
Gender, Conflict
and Peace in
Kashmir
Invisible Stakeholders
Seema Shekhawat
298pp
Empire Calling
Administering Colonial
Australasia and India
Ralph Crane,
Anna Johnston
and C. Vijayasree
HB ` 895.00
Contents: Introduction; Administering Colonial
Spaces in Australasia and India; Part 1:
Australasia and Its Diaspora; 1. Benevolent
Empire?; Protecting Indigenous Peoples in
British Australasia; 2. Population Control; A.O.
Neville’s Anxious Administration; 3. “At home” on
a Mission Station and in a Female Factory;
Imagining Mary Hutchinson; 4. “Dead Empires
Whisper Wisdom”; Alfred Domett and the
Postcolonial Conscience; 5. “Operation Unique”;
Administering Pitcairn Island in the Twenty-First
Century; Part 2: India and Its Diaspora;
6. Identifying Sher Mohamad; ‘a good citizen’;
7. Administering Domestic Space; Flora Annie
Steel’s The Complete Indian Housekeeper and
Cook; 8. The Native Element in the Steel Frame;
Indian ICS Officers’ Relationship with British
Colleagues; 9. The Production of Colonial
Knowledge and the Role of Native Intellectuals;
The Case of Kavali Borraiah; 10. Administering
the Literary Empire; Edmund Gosse, Toru Dutt,
and Sarojini Naidu; Notes on Contributors.
This book demonstrates that gender is a key
component of conflict and peace discourse. The
marginalization of women in conflict and peace is
all pervasive. Kashmir is a mirror image of this
global scenario. Kashmiri women aided the
militant movement in significant ways though
they did not take part in direct combat. They
played key roles to sustain and nourish the
movement – as protestors, protectors and
motivators, and facilitators. Their experiences of
participation in the conflict, however, remain
subdued by the dominant masculinist discourse.
Kashmiri women are excluded from the militancy
discourse as contributors as well as from
peacemaking discourse as stakeholders. The
study interrogates theory and practice of
women’s participation in conflict and argues that
changed gender-roles during conflict do not
necessarily revolutionize socially ascribed norms.
The book also examines the experiences of
women in sustaining conflict to make a case for
their due place in negotiating formal peace.
Contents: Preface; 1. Feminism, International
Relations and War; 2. Women Making War
in South Asia; 3. Conflict within Contested
Kashmir ; 4. Engendering the Conflict ; 5. Allwomen Separatist Groups; 6. Making Peace
Sans Gender; 7. Conclusion; Select Bibliography;
Index.
ISBN: 9781107041875
196pp
The essays gathered together in this book
explore the roles of the men and women who
served the British Empire in Australasia and
India, and those who were subject to their
administration. As these essays demonstrate,
administrative arrangements involve complex
cross-cultural relationships in colonial spaces,
often through radically unequal and racially
based power relations. Colonial administration
involves diverse domains of practice – the Civil
Service, schools and universities, missions,
domestic realms, justice systems – and many
forms of activities, including managing and
organizing; financing and accounting; monitoring
and measuring; ordering and supplying; writing
and implementing policies. In the two parts of this
book, the authors – from India, Australia, New
Zealand, and Britain – examine the ways colonial
administrations accumulated and managed
information and knowledge about the places and
peoples under their jurisdiction. The
administration of colonial spaces was neither a
simple nor a unilinear project, and the essays in
this book will contribute to key debates about
imperial history.
ISBN: 9789382264767
HB ` 795.00
129
194pp
HB ` 695.00
The Untouchables
Oliver Mendelsohn and
Marika Vicziany
the-century Istanbul; Lâle Can; 8. ‘Enough of the
Great Napoleons!’ Raja Mahendra Pratap's PanAsian projects (1929–1939); Carolien Stolte; 9.
Chinatowns and Borderlands: Inter-Asian
encounters in the diaspora; Evelyn Hu-Dehart;
10. Creating Spaces for Asian Interaction
Through the Anti-Globalization Campaigns in the
Region; Teresa S. Encarnacion Tadem; Index
In a compelling account of the lives of those at
the bottom of Indian society, the authors explore
the construction of the untouchables as a social
and political category, the historical background,
which led to such a definition, and their position
in India today. The authors argue that, despite
efforts to ameliorate their condition, a
considerable edifice of discrimination persists.
The book promises to make a major contribution
to the social and economic debates on poverty,
while its wide-ranging perspectives will ensure a
readership from across the disciplines.
ISBN: 9781107082083
Contents: Glossary; 1. Who are the
Untouchables?; 2. The question of the ‘Harijan
atrocity’; 3. Religion, politics and the
Untouchables from the nineteenth century to
1956; 4. Public policy I: adverse discrimination
and compensatory discrimination; 5. Public policy
II: the anti-poverty programs; 6. The new
Untouchable proletariat: a case study of the
Faridabad stone quarries; 7. Untouchable politics
and Untouchable politicians since 1956; 8. The
question of reservation: lives and careers of
some scheduled castes MPs and MLAs; 9.
Subordination, poverty and the state in modern
India; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9788175960749
Sites of Asian
Interaction
Ideas, Networks and
Mobility
Tim Harper and
Sunil Amrith
307pp
Gender and
Science
Studies across Cultures
Neelam Kumar
PB ` 695.00
A focus on the sites of Asian interaction enables
this volume to shed new light on the growing field
of diaspora studies. Research on Asia’s many
diasporas has enriched the older literature on
migration to illuminate the links of kinship, affect,
trade, and information that connect locations
across Asia, and beyond. But where many recent
works on particular diasporas have tended to
look inwards – at how distinctive diasporic
cultures maintained a sense of ‘home’ while
abroad – the volume’s focus has been on how
different diasporas have come into contact with
each other in particular places, often for the first
time. It also engages with research in the fields of
urban studies and urban history. The articles
develop the already rich historical literature on
port cities across Asia – the quintessential sites
of Asian cosmopolitanism – as well as more
recent work on the ‘moving metropolises’ and
‘mobile cities’ of contemporary Asia.
262pp
HB ` 795.00
Science has been gender-biased for centuries
across cultural contexts. Different ideological
constructions of gender through various eras
have restricted women’s access to science. The
twentieth century, especially its second half,
witnessed certain important changes in terms of
women’s status in society. Gender and Science:
Studies across Cultures includes essays by
leading academics and researchers from different
parts of the world, who discuss gender and
science in their society and explore the relevance
of gender theories. The book is divided into two
broad sections. The first section provides
conceptual reflections on gendered science and
the second section examines the gender-science
relationship using examples from various cultural
contexts. This unique volume tries to answer
several important questions such as these: •
Could science become free from gender biases?
• Could gender and science issues go beyond
race, class, colonization and social and
geographical distinctions? • Are gender and
science relations universal as assumed by the
‘ethos of science’ or vary with the culture? The
book also tries to strike a balance between
analyses of the gender dimension of science
itself and the role of the wider social, economic
and cultural factors.
Contents: List of Contributors;
Acknowledgements; Introduction: Reflections and
Realities across Cultures; Neelam Kumar;
Section I: Approaches and Perspectives; 1.
Getting More Women into Science: Knowledge
Issues; 2. Gender Imbalance in Science: Cultural
Similarities and Differences; 3. Gender and
Technology; 4. Gender, Science, and the
Psychology of Science; 5. Women and Minorities
in Science: Discrimination and the Solution; ;
Section II: Illustrative Examples; 6. Women and
Science in the Netherlands: A Dutch Case;
7. Japanese Women Scientists: Trends and
Strategies; 8. Saudi Women: Their Role in
Science and Education; 9. Changing the Facts:
Gender Dimensions of the South African Public
Science System; 10. Demographic Inertia and
the Glass Ceiling in American Science (1979–
2000); 11. Women in Science in France;
12. Women and Science: Issues and
Perspectives in the Indian Context; Conclusion:
The Persistent Patterns!; Bibliography; Index.
Contents: Preface; Introduction Tim Harper and
Sunil S. Amrith; 1. Singapore, 1915, and the Birth
of the Asian Underground; Tim Harper; 2. Living
in the Material World: Cosmopolitanism and trade
in early twentieth century Ladakh Jacqueline H.
Fewkes; 3. Nation, Race, and Language:
Discussing transnational identities in colonial
Singapore, circa 1930; Chua Ai Lin; 4. Intimate
Interactions: Eurasian family histories in colonial
Penang; Kirsty Walker; 5. Citing as a Site:
Translation and circulation in Muslim South and
Southeast Asia Ronit Ricci; 6. Popular Sites of
Prayer, Transoceanic Migration, and Cultural
Diversity: Exploring the significance of keramat in
Southeast Asia; Sumit K. Mandal; 7. Connecting
People: A Central Asian Sufi network in turn-of-
ISBN: 9788175969254
130
354pp HB ` 1295.00
Disability,
Education and
Employment in
Developing
Countries
From Charity to
Investment
Kamal Lamichhane
With several empirical evidences, this book
advocates the importance of human capital of
persons with disabilities and demands the
paradigm shift from charity into investment
approach. Society in general believes that people
with disabilities cannot benefit from education,
cannot participate in the labour market and
cannot be contributing members to families and
countries. To invalidate such assumptions, this
book describes how education in particular helps
make persons with disabilities achieve economic
independence and social inclusion. For the first
time, detailed analyses of returns to the
investment in education and nexus between
disability, education, employability and
occupational options are discussed. Moreover,
other chapters describe disability and poverty
followed by the discussion of barriers behind why
persons with disabilities are unable to obtain
education despite the significantly higher returns.
These foundational themes recur throughout the
book.
Towards a
Knowledge Society
New Identities in
Emerging India
Debal K. SinghaRoy
Contents; List of tables and figures; Preface;
1. Introduction: conceptualising knowledge
society: critical dimensions and ideal image;
2. Critiquing and contextualising knowledge
society; 3. Strategising for knowledge society in
India: the shifting backdrops and emerging
contexts; 4. Education for a knowledge society in
India; 5. Information and communication
technologies for a knowledge society; 6. Indian
growth story: the service and knowledge
dynamics; 7. Education, ICTs and work: the
divergent empirical reality in India; 8. The
knowledge society: work, workers and relations;
9. Knowledge society: culture, continuity and
contradictions; 10. Conclusion: marginality,
identity, fluidity and beyond; Bibliography.
Contents: List of tables; List of figures; Preface;
Acknowledgements; About the author;
1. Fundamentals of disability studies; 2. Disability
and the global employment situation; 3. Disability
and the role of education in jobs: case studies
from Nepal and the Philippines; 4. Disability and
jobs in a post-conflict country: Cambodia;
5. Gender and job: a comparison between people
with and without disabilities in Bangladesh;
6. Disability and human capital investment;
7. Disability, poverty and inequality: a case study
in Nepal; 8. Disability and job satisfaction
differentials; 9. Disability and determinants of
education: a case from India; 10. Disability and
barriers to education; 11. The way forward:
investment in disability.
ISBN: 9781107064065
286pp
This book depicts the emergence of knowledge
society across rural and urban spaces and
among cross sections of social collectivities in
India. It analyses the new economic momentum
and socio-cultural milieu as set in motion with the
emergence of this society. The ensuing impact
on the pre-existing facets of social identity and
marginality, and the processes of construction of
new social identities therein are studied. This
book delineates both the hope and despair, as
produced with the arrival of the knowledge
society, and identifies the scope and conditions
of alternative choice and liberation for the people
within the emerging socio-economic order of this
society. Rich in empirical data, this monograph
will interest students, researchers, teachers,
policy planners and social activists.
ISBN: 9781107065451
Collaborative
Learning in
Practice
HB ` 795.00
Ronnie Vernooy
397pp
HB ` 895.00
This book presents novel approaches to
collaborative learning by drawing on research
and practical experiences from China, South
Asia, and Southeast Asia. The case studies show
how local communities learn from challenges in
managing natural resources through joint efforts
with researchers and other actors. They
demonstrate the merits of learning strategies that
use a variety of methods that are grounded in the
local context that involves facilitators monitored
from the outset. It creates a strong environment
of collaboration and dynamic process
management. The book shows that learning
strategies that are both innovative and
collaborative can lead to sounder rural
development. Collaborative Learning in Practice:
Examples from Natural Resource Management in
Asia will be of interest to academics,
researchers, and postgraduate students in
development studies, practitioners and
development professionals, particularly in the
fields of capacity building and participatory action
methodologies as well as programme managers
and decision-makers in donor organizations and
development agencies worldwide.
Contents: Foreword; Acknowledgements;
Preface; 1. Toward Centres of excellence for
CBNRM (Community-Based Natural Resource
131
Geographic Profile; 3. Punjabis/Sikhs in Canada;
4. Punjabi Migration, Settlement and Experience
in the UK; Part II. Shifting Contours of Migration;
5. ZiddiMundeh: Political Asylum, Transnational
Movement and the Migrations of Men; 6. Punjabi
Illegal Migrants in France: Tales of Suffering,
Invisibility and Marginalization; 7. Migration as a
Transnational Enterprise: Migrations from
Eastern Punjab and the Question of Social
Licitness; Part III. Social Structures and
Organizational Links; 8. The Ambiguity of Punjabi
Transnationalism: Caste and Development within
a Transnational Community; 9. Punjabi
Diasporas: Conceptualizing and Evaluating
Impacts of Diaspora – Homeland Linkages; 10.
Punjabi Immigrant Organizations in the UK and
Their Transnational Connections; Part IV.
Education and Migration; 11. Sending Children
‘Back Home’ for their (Mis)education; 12.
Transnational Health Institutions, Global Nursing
Care Chains, and the Internationalization of
Nurse Education in Punjab; Part V. Family
Networks; 13. Punjabis in Italy: The Role of
Ethnic and Family Networks in Immigration and
Economic Integration; 14. Gender, the Life
Course and Home Making across Tanzania,
Britain and Indian Punjab; 15. Inter-Generational
Tensions and Cultural Reproduction in a Punjabi
Community in England.
Management); 2. Participatory Research and
Development in South Asia; 3. Adaptive
Learning: From IsangBagsak to the ALL in
CBNRM Programme; 4. Mainstreaming CBNRM
in Chinese Higher Education ; 5.Comparing the
Case Studies; References; Notes and
contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967120
Citizenship and
Identity in the Age
of Surveillance
Pramod K. Nayar
193pp
HB ` 695.00
This book is a study of cultures of surveillance,
from CCTV to genetic data-gathering and the
new forms of subjectivity and citizenship that are
forged in such cultures. It studies data, bodies
and space as domains within which this
subjectivity of the vulnerable individual emerges.
The book also proposes that we can see a shift
within cultures of surveillance where, from active
participation in the process of surveilling, a
witness-citizen emerges. The book, therefore,
seeks to alter surveillance as a mere top-down
system, instead arguing that surveillance is also
a mode of engagement with the world enabling
trust, accountability and eventually a responsible
humanitarianism.
Contents: Acknowledgements; 1. Vulnerability,
safety, surveillance; 2. Bodies and
biosurveillance; 3. Data and data subjects;
4. Spaces of surveillance; 5. Performative
surveillance and the witness-subject; 6.
Surveillance and global witness citizenship;
Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9781107080584
Migration, Mobility
and Multiple
Affiliations
Punjabis in a
Transnational World
S. Irudaya Rajan, V. J.
Varghese and Aswini
Kumar Nanda
240pp
ISBN: 9781107117037
The Cambridge
Companion to
Modern Indian
Culture
HB ` 595.00
Vasudha Dalmia and
Rashmi Sadana
Migration, Mobility and Multiple Affiliations
studies Punjabi transnational life from
perspectives that have relevance for
contemporary policy, planning and governance. It
analyses spatially-widespread, integrated and
complex Punjabi diaspora while simultaneously
reflecting their vulnerability in an increasinglyglobalized world. Besides an overarching
introduction and a historical overview, this book
covers shifting contours of international
migration, social structure and organizational
links, interrelationship between education and
migration, and family networks of the Punjabi
emigrants to focus on Punjabi transnationalism.
This edited volume, with contributions from
eminent scholars of diaspora and
transnationalism, creates a holistic picture of the
community, looking at caste consciousness and
identity abroad, social remittances, Sikh religious
identity, traditions and practices, politics of Sikh
separatism, transnational connections and
crimes and violence. The study gains greater
clarity through its approach of studying Punjabi
settlements in specific countries individually.
394pp
HB ` 795.00
India is changing at a rapid pace as it continues
to move from its colonial past to its globalised
future. This Companion offers a framework for
understanding that change, and how modern
cultural forms have emerged out of very different
histories and traditions. The book provides
accounts of literature, theatre, film, modern and
popular art, music, television and food; it also
explores in detail social divisions, customs,
communications and daily life. In a series of
engaging, erudite and occasionally-moving
essays the contributors, drawn from a variety of
disciplines, examine not merely what constitutes
modern Indian culture, but just how wide-ranging
are the cultures that persist in the regions of
India. This volume will help the reader
understand the continuities and fissures within
Indian culture and some of the conflicts arising
from them. Throughout, what comes to the fore is
the extraordinary richness and diversity of
modern Indian culture.
Contents: Chronology; Introduction Rashmi
Sadana and Vasudha Dalmia; Part I. Cultural
Contexts: 1. Scenes of rural change Ann
Grodzins Gold; 2. The formation of tribal
identities Stuart Blackburn; 3. Food and
agriculture Amita Baviskar; 4. Urban forms of
religious practice Smriti Srinivas; 5. The politics
of caste identities Christophe Jaffrelot; Part II.
Cultural Forms: 6. History and representation in
the Bengali novel Supriya Chaudhuri; 7. Writing
in English Rashmi Sadana; 8. Dalit life histories
Debjani Ganguly; 9. Three traditions in modernist
Contents: Introduction- Transnational World and
Indian Punjab: Contemporary Issues; Part I. A
Historical Survey; 1. Punjabis in America; 2.
Punjabi – Sikh Migration: Latin America- A
132
ISBN: 9781107641037
Credit to
Capabilities
A Sociological Study of
Microcredit Groups in
India
Paromita Sanyal
Sunil S. Amrith
326pp PB ` 495.00
Credit to Capabilities focuses on the controversial
topic of microcredit's impact on women's
empowerment and, especially, on the neglected
question of how microcredit transforms women's
agency. Based on interviews with hundreds of
economically and socially vulnerable women
from peasant households, this book highlights
the role of the associational mechanism –
forming women into groups that are embedded in
a vast network and providing the opportunity for
face-to-face participation in group meetings – in
improving women's capabilities. This book
reveals the role of microcredit groups in fostering
women's social capital, particularly their capacity
of organizing collective action for public goods
and for protecting women's welfare. It argues
that, in the Indian context, microcredit groups are
becoming increasingly important in rural civil
societies. Throughout, the book maintains an
analytical distinction between married women in
male-headed households and women in femaleheaded households in discussing the potentials
and the limitations of microcredit's social and
economic impacts.
Contents: 1. Asia’s great migrations, 1850–1930;
2. The making of Asian diasporas, 1850–1930;
3. War, revolution, and refugees, 1930–1950;
4. Migration, development, and the Asian city,
1950–1970; 5. Asian migrants in the age of
globalization, 1970–2010.
ISBN: 9781107020245
334pp
240pp
HB ` 895.00
SOUTH ASIA STUDIES
The Rational
Believer
Choices and Decisions
in the Madrasas of
Pakistan
Masooda Bano
Contents: 1. The global trajectory of microcredit;
2. Agency; 3. Converting loans into leverage; 4.
The power of participation; 5. Microcredit and
collective action; 6. Culture and microcredit: why
socio-religious dimensions matter7. Loans and
well-being; 8. Interpreting microcredit: beyond the
salvation/exploitation alternatives; 9. Epilogue:
the future of microcredit.
ISBN: 9781107130371
Migration is at the heart of Asian history. For
centuries migrants have tracked the routes and
seas of their ancestors - merchants, pilgrims,
soldiers and sailors - along the Silk Road and
across the Indian Ocean and the China Sea.
Over the last 150 years, however, migration
within Asia and beyond has been greater than at
any other time in history. Sunil S. Amrith’s
engaging and deeply-informative book crosses a
vast terrain, from the Middle East to India and
China, tracing the history of modern migration.
Animated by the voices of Asian migrants, it tells
the stories of those forced to flee from war and
revolution, and those who left their homes and
their families in search of a better life. These
stories of Asian diasporas can be joyful or
poignant, but they all speak of an engagement
with new landscapes and new peoples.
Migration and
Diaspora in
Modern Asia
art Sonal Khullar; 10. Mass reproduction and the
art of the bazaar Kajri Jain; 11. Urban theatre and
the turn towards ‘folk’ Vasudha Dalmia; 12.
Aesthetics and politics in popular cinema Ravi S.
Vasudevan; 13. Musical genres and national
identity Amanda Weidman; 14. Voyeurism and
the family on television Amrita Ibrahim; Further
reading; Index.
HB ` 695.00
133
Islamic schools, or madrasas, have been
accused of radicalizing Muslims and participating,
either actively or passively, in terrorist networks
since the events of 9/11. In Pakistan, the 2007
siege by government forces of Islamabad’s Red
Mosque and its madrasa complex, whose Imam
and students staged an armed resistance against
the state for its support of the ‘war on terror’,
reinforced concerns about madrasas’ role in
regional and global jihad. By 2006 madrasas
registered with Pakistan's five regulatory boards
for religious schools enrolled over one million
male and 200, 000 female students. In The
Rational Believer, Masooda Bano draws on rich
interviews, ethnographic, and survey data, as well
as fieldwork conducted in madrasas throughout
the country to explore the network of Pakistani
madrasas. She maps the choices and decisions
confronted by students, teachers, parents, and
clerics and explains why available choices make
participation in jihad appear at times a viable
course of action. Bano's work shows that beliefs
are rational and that religious believers look to
maximize utility in ways not captured by classical
rational choice. She applies analytical tools from
the New Institutional Economics to explain
apparent contradictions in the madrasa system –
for example, how thousands of young Pakistani
women demand the national adoption of
traditional sharia law, despite its highly restrictive
limits on female agency, and do so from their
location in Islamic schools for girls that were
founded only a generation ago.
Contents: 1. Religion and Reason: A New
Institutionalist Perspective; Part I: Institutional
Change and Stability; 2. Religion and Change:
Oxford and the Madrasas of South Asia; 3.
Explaining the Stickiness: State-Madrasa
Engagement in South Asia; 4. Organization of
Religious Hierarchy: Competition or
Cooperation? ; Part II: Determinants of Demand
for Informal Institutions; 5. Formation of a
Preference: Why Join a Madrasa?; 6. Logic of
Adaptive Preference: Islam and Western
Feminism; Part III: Informal Institutions and
Collective Outcomes; 7. The Missing Free-Rider:
Religious Rewards and Collective Action; 8.
Exclusionary Institutional Preference: The Logic
of Jihad; 9. Informal Institutions and
Development; Appendix: Research Methodology;
References; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264880
When
Counterinsurgency
Wins
Sri Lanka’s Defeat of
the Tamil Tigers
Ahmed S. Hashim
278pp
A Field of One’s
Own
Bina Agarwal
HB ` 895.00
Contents: Preface; l. Land rights for women:
making the case; 2. Conceptualizing gender
relations; 3. Customary rights and associated
practices; 4. Erosion and disinheritance:
traditionally matrilineal and bilateral communities
today; 5. Contemporary law: contestation and
content; 6. Whose share? Who claims? The gap
between law and practice; 7. Whose land? Who
commands? The gap between ownership and
control; 8. Tracing cross-regional diversities; 9.
Struggles over resources, struggles over
meanings; l0. The long march ahead.
When Counterinsurgency Wins traces the
development of the counterinsurgency campaign
in Sri Lanka, from the early stages of the war to
the later adaptations of the Sri Lankan
government, leading up to the final campaign.
The campaign itself is analysed in terms of
military strategy but is also given political and
historical context — critical to comprehending the
conditions that give rise to insurgent violence.The
tactics of the Tamil Tigers have been emulated
by militant groups in Palestine, Iraq, Afghanistan,
and Somalia. Whether or not the Sri Lankan
counterinsurgency campaign can or should be
emulated in kind, the comprehensive, insightful
coverage of When Counterinsurgency Wins holds
vital lessons for strategists and students of
security and defense.
ISBN: 9788185618630
Vying for Allah‘s
Vote
Understanding Islamic
Parties, Political
Violence, and
Extremism in Pakistan
Contents: Introduction; 1. The Sri Lankan War in
Context; 2. Background to War: State Formation
and Identities in Conflict; 3. The Eelam War I-III
Campaigns; 4. Eelam War IV: A Military Analysis;
5. Postwar Sri Lanka: Reconciliation or
Triumphalism?; Notes; Bibliography; Index;
Acknowledgments.
ISBN: 9789382993476
280pp
This is the first major study of gender and
property in South Asia. In a pioneering and
comprehensive analysis Bina Agarwal argues
that the single most important economic factor
affecting women's situation is the gender gap in
command over property. In rural South Asia, the
most significant form of property is arable land, a
critical determinant of economic well-being,
social status, and empowerment. But few women
own land; fewer control it. Drawing on a vast
range of interdisciplinary sources and her own
field research, and tracing regional variations
across five countries, the author investigates the
complex barriers to women's land ownership and
control, and how they might be overcome. The
book makes significant and original contributions
to theory and policy concerning land reforms,
'bargaining' and gender relations, women's
status, and the nature of resistance.
Haroon K. Ullah
HB ` 895.00
594pp
HB ` 495.00
Vying for Allah’s Vote studies how religion,
politics, and policy are inextricably linked in
Pakistan. In this book, Haroon K. Ullah analyses
the origins, ideologies, bases of support, and
electoral successes of the largest and most
influential Islamic parties in Pakistan. Based on
his extensive fieldwork in Pakistan, he develops
a new typology for understanding and comparing
the discourses put forth by these parties in order
to assess what drives them and what separates
the moderate from the extreme. A better
understanding of the range of parties is critical for
knowing how the US and other Western nations
can engage states where Islamic political parties
hold both political and moral authority.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Acknowledgments;
1. Introduction; 2. Islam and Democracy in
Pakistan; 3. Islamic Parties in Pakistan;
4. Muslim Democratic Parties: Origins and
Characteristics; 5. Islamist Parties: Origins and
Characteristics; 6. Islamic Voters in Pakistan:
Motives and Behavior; 7. Political Strategy: When
Extremism Works; 8. Lessons Learned: How
Pakistan Informs the Arab Spring and
Afghanistan; 9. Foreign Policy Implications and
New Trends; Appendix 1; Appendix 2; Notes;
Selected Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993841
134
270pp
HB ` 595.00
The Practice
of War
Production,
Reproduction and
Communication of
Armed Violence
Aparna Rao, Michael
Bollig and Monika Bock
Pakistan’s
Counterterrorism
Challenge
More needs to be understood about the ways of
war and its effects. What implications does war
have for people, their lived-in communities and
larger political systems; how do they cope and
adjust in war situations and how do they deal with
the changed world that they inhabit once peace is
declared? Through a series of essays that move
from looking at the nature of violence to the
peace processes that follow it, this important
book provides some answers to these questions.
It discusses and examines social, economic and
cultural practices connected to and generated by
violent combat through a cross-cultural
perspective. The book also analyses new
dimensions of social interaction, such as the
internet, which now provide a bridge between
local concerns and global networks and are
fundamentally altering the practices of war. The
editors present new empirical material and open
theoretical dimensions on the intricate relation
between war, society and culture.
Moeed Yusuf
Contents: Introduction - Moeed Yusuf; 1.
Pakistan’s Militancy Challenge: From Where to
What? - Moeed Yusuf with contributions from
Megan Neville, Ayesha Chugh, and Stephanie
Flamenbaum; 2. Militancy and Extremism in
Pakistan: A US Perspective - Marvin G.
Weinbaum; 3. Counterinsurgency: The Myth of
Sisyphus? - Ejaz Haider; 4. Political Instability
and Its Implications for an Effective National
Counterterrorism Policy in Pakistan - Savail
Meekal Hussain and Mehreen Zahra-Malik;
5. Counterterrorism Efforts of Law Enforcement
Agencies in Pakistan - Suhail Habib Tajik;
6. Legal Challenges to Military Operations in
Pakistan: The Case of the Federally and
Provincially Administered Tribal Areas; Ahmer
Bilal Soofi; 7. Choking Financing for Militants in
Pakistan - Muhammad Amir Rana; 8. Cyberia: A
New Warzone for Pakistan’s Islamists Zafarullah Khan; 9. Pakistan’s Paradoxical
Survival - Anatol Lieven; Conclusion - Moeed
Yusuf; References; List of Contributors; Index.
Contents: List of Figures and Tables; List of
Contributors; Preface; Introduction: The Practice
of War; Part I: Changing Qualities of Violence:
Case Studies from Africa; 1. ‘We Turned our
Enemies into Baboons’: Warfare, Ritual and
Pastoral Identity among the Pokot of Northern
Kenya; 2. Culture Slipping Away: Violence,
Social Tension and Personal Drama in Suri
Society, Southern Ethiopia; 3. Catholics and
Cannibals: Terror and Healing in Tooro, Western
Uganda; Part II: Memory, Trauma and
Redemption; 4. Coming Through Slaughter: The
Herero of Namibia, 1904–1940; 5. Trauma,
Therapy and Responsibility: Psychology and War
in Contemporary Israel; 6. ‘I Shall be Waiting for
You at the Door of Paradise’: The Pakistani
Martyrs of the Lashkar-e Taiba (Army of the
Pure); ; Part III: Organizing, Encouraging and
Dissuading: The Uses of Kinship, Gender and
Religion; 7. Is War Gendered? Issues in
Representing Women and the Second World
War; 8. Judging by Aesthetics: ‘Due Care’ in the
Management of ‘Collaboration’ in the First
Palestinian Intifada; 9. Islamist Militancy in
Kashmir: The Case of the Lashkar-e Taiba; Part
IV: The Inscription of War in Mediated Worlds ;
10. In the Combat Zone; 11. ‘Virtual’ Discourse
and the Creation and Disruption of Social
Networks: Observations on the War in Kashmir in
Cyberspace; 12. Martyrs, Victims, Friends and
Foes: Internet Representations by Palestinian
Islamists; 13. Mapping a Conflict in Cyberspace:
Chiapas on the WWW; Part V: Peace Building at
the Crossroads: Appropriations of War,
Ambivalences of Interest; 14 Violence and Peace
Processes; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993179
370pp
Pakistan, which since 9/11 has come to be seen
as one of the world’s most dangerous places and
has been referred to as ‘the epicenter of
international terrorism’, faces an acute
counterterrorism (CT) challenge. The book
focuses on violence being perpetrated against
the Pakistani state by Islamist groups and how
Pakistan can address these challenges,
concentrating not only on military aspects but on
the often-ignored political, legal, law
enforcement, financial, and technological facets
of the challenge. It explores the current debate
surrounding Pakistan’s ability — and incentives
— to crack down on Islamist terrorism and
provides an in-depth examination of the multiple
facets of this existential threat confronting the
Pakistani state and people. With original insights
and attention to detail, this book provides a
roadmap for Western and Pakistani policymakers
alike to address the weaknesses in Pakistan’s
CT strategy.
ISBN: 9789382993919
HB ` 995.00
135
270pp
HB ` 525.00
Energy and
Security in
South Asia
Cooperation or
Conflict?
Charles K. Ebinger
Economic growth and burgeoning populations
have put South Asia’s energy security in a
perilous state. Already, energy and power
shortages are stunting development in some of
the region’s least developed locations, spurring
political insurgences and social dislocation.
Should this trend continue, the subcontinent will
face dire economic, social and political crises. In
Energy and Security in South Asia, Brookings
ESI Director Charles Ebinger, a long-time adviser
to South Asian governments, lays out the current
regional energy picture arguing that the only way
to achieve sustainable energy security is through
regional collaboration both within the
subcontinent as well as with regional neighbors in
the Middle East and Central and Southeast Asia.
Balance, or Predominance in the Indian Ocean?;
Chapter 6: Pakistan’s View of Security in the
Indian Ocean; Chapter 7: China and the Indian
Ocean: New Departures in Regional Balancing;
Chapter 8: Redlines for Sino-Indian Naval
Rivalry; Part III: Third Powers and the Way
Forward; Chapter 9: International Law and the
Future of Indian Ocean Security; Chapter 10: A
Merlion at the Edge of an Afrasian Sea:
Singapore’s Strategic Involvement in the Indian
Ocean; Chapter 11: The Indian Ocean and US
National Security Interests; Chapter 12:
Conclusion: Access and Security in the Indian
Ocean Region; List of Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993148
Contetns: Preface; Acknowledgments; Policy
Prescriptions; 1 Introduction to a Region on
Edge; 2 India ; 3 Pakistan; 4 Bangladesh;
5 Nepal and Bhutan; 6 Energy Challenges in the
Regional Context; 7 Regional Cooperation;
8 South Asia’s Path Forward; Appendix; Notes;
Index.
ISBN: 9789382993018
248pp
Breakdown in
Pakistan
How Aid Is Eroding
Institutions for
Collective Action
HB ` 895.00
Masooda Bano
Deep Currents and
Rising Tides
The Indian Ocean and
International Security
John Garofano and
Andrea J. Dew
The Indian Ocean region has rapidly emerged as
a hinge point in the changing global balance of
power, and the geographic nexus of economic
and security issues with vital global
consequences. The security of energy supplies,
persistent poverty and its contribution to political
extremism, piracy and related threats to
seaborne trade, competing nuclear powers, and
possibly the scene of future clashes between
rising great powers India and China – all are
dangers in the waters or in the littoral states of
the Indian Ocean region. This volume, one of the
first attempts to treat the Indian Ocean region in a
coherent fashion, captures the spectrum of
cooperation and competition succinctly.
Contributors discuss points of cooperation and
competition in a region that stretches from East
Africa, to Singapore, to Australia, and assess the
regional interests of China, India, Pakistan, and
the United States. Chapters review possible ‘red
lines’ for Chinese security in the region, India’s
naval ambitions, Pakistan’s maritime security,
and threats from non-state actors – terrorists,
pirates, and criminal groups – who challenge
security on the ocean for all states.
350pp
HB ` 895.00
30 per cent of foreign development aid is
channeled through NGOs or community-based
organizations to improve service delivery to the
poor, build social capital, and establish
democracy in developing nations. However,
growing evidence suggests that aid often erodes,
rather than promotes, cooperation within
developing nations. This book presents a rare,
micro-level account of the complex decisionmaking processes that bring individuals together
to form collective-action platforms. It then
examines why aid often breaks down the very
institutions for collective action that it aims to
promote. Breakdown in Pakistan identifies
concrete measures to check the erosion of
cooperation in foreign aid scenarios. Pakistan is
one of the largest recipients of international
development aid, and therefore the empirical
details presented are particularly relevant for
policy. The book’s argument is equally applicable
to a number of other developing countries, and
has important implications for recent discussions
within the field of economics.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Preface;
1. Revisiting the Collective Action Dilemma;
2. Intrinsic or Extrinsic Incentives: The Evolution
of Cooperative Groups in Pakistan; 3. Why
Cooperate? Motives and Decisions of Initiators
and Joiners in Other-Regarding Groups; 4. Why
Cooperate? Motives and Decisions of Initiators
and Joiners in Self-Regarding Groups; 5. Does
Aid Break Down Cooperation?; 6. Why Aid
Breaks Down Cooperation; 7. Fixing Incentives:
The Way Forward; Glossary; Bibliography; Index.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Introduction; Part I:
Energy, Piracy, Terror, and Access; Chapter 1:
The Indian Ocean: Geographic Center of the
Global Oil Market; Chapter 2: Maritime Piracy in
the Indian Ocean: A Statistical Analysis of
Reported Incidents, 1994–2011; Chapter 3: Horn
of Troubles: Understanding and Addressing the
Somali “Piracy” Phenomenon; Chapter 4: Armed
Groups at Sea: Maritime Terrorism in the Indian
Ocean Region; Part II: Emerging Rivalries and
Possible Triggers; Chapter 5: India: Dominance,
ISBN: 9789382993162
136
240pp
HB ` 795.00
Global South
Asians
Judith M. Brown
over a 10-Year Period in Gujarat, Western India;
Chapter 9: Women, Politics and Islamism in
Northern Pakistan; Chapter 10: Violence,
Reconstruction and Islamic Reform—Stories from
the Muslim ‘Ghetto; Part III: Everyday Politics of
Reform; Chapter 11: Reading the Qur’an in
Bangladesh: The Politics of ‘Belief’ Among
Islamist Women; Chapter 12: Cracks in the
‘Mightiest Fortress’: Jamaat-e-Islami’s Changing
Discourse on Women; Chapter 13: Islamic
Feminism in India: Indian Muslim Women
Activists and the Reform of Muslim Personal Law
; Chapter 14: Disputing Contraception: Muslim
Reform, Secular Change and Fertility; Part IV:
Reform, State and Market; Chapter 15:
Cosmopolitan Islam in a Diasporic Space:
Foreign Resident Muslim Women’s Halaqa in the
Arabian Peninsula; Chapter 16: Jamaat-i-Islami
in Bangladesh: Women, Democracy and the
Transformation of Islamist Politics; Chapter 17:
Secularism Beyond the State: the ‘State’ and the
‘Market’ in Islamist Imagination; Index.
By the end of the twentieth century some nine
million people of South Asian descent had left
India, Bangladesh or Pakistan and settled in
different parts of the world, forming a diverse and
significant modern diaspora. In the earlynineteenth century, many left reluctantly to seek
economic opportunities, which were lacking at
home. This is the story of their often painful
experiences in the diaspora, how they
constructed new social communities overseas
and how they maintained connections with the
countries and the families they had left behind. It
is a story compellingly told by one of the premier
historians of modern South Asia, Judith M.
Brown, whose particular knowledge of the
diaspora in Britain and South Africa gives her
insight as a commentator. This is a book which
will have a broad appeal to general readers as
well as to students of South Asian and colonial
history, migration studies and sociology.
Contents: Introduction; 1. Traditions of stability
and movement; 2. Making a modern diaspora;
3. Creating new homes and communities;
4. Relating to the new homeland; 5. Relating to
the old homeland; Conclusion; Bibliography.
ISBN: 9788175963832
Islamic Reform in
South Asia
Filippo Osella,
and Caroline Osella
214pp
ISBN: 9781107031753
538pp
HB
995.00
PB ` 495.00
Kingship and
Ideology in the
Islamic and
Mongol Worlds
The authors in this volume discuss contemporary
Islamic reformism in South Asia in some of its
diverse historical orientations and geographical
expressions.‘Reformism’ is particularly
troublesome as a term, in that it covers broad
trends stretching back for more than 200 years.
Still, ‘reformism’ can be useful as a term in
helping contributors to insist upon recognition of
the differences between projects of revival and
renewal and such contemporary obsessions as
‘political Islam’, ‘Islamic fundamentalism’, and so
on. Urging a more nuanced examination of all
forms of reformism and their reception in
practice, the contributions here powerfully
demonstrate the historical and geographical
specificities of reform projects. In doing so, they
challenge prevailing perspectives in which
substantially different traditions of reform are
lumped together into one reified category (often
carelessly shorthanded as ‘wah’habism’) and
branded as extremist – if not altogether
demonized as terrorist. Academic researchers
and graduate students will find this book useful.
Anne F. Broadbridge
What were the attitudes to diplomacy and
kingship in the medieval Islamic world? Anne F.
Broadbridge examines struggles over ideology in
the Middle East and Central Asia from 1260 to
1405. She explores two very different ideological
worlds: the Islamic world of the Mamluk Sultans
of Egypt and Syria, and the Mongol world
inhabited by the Golden Horde in Central Asia,
the Ilkhanids in Iran and Anatolia, the Ilkhanids'
successors, and Temür. The relationships among
these rival rulers were often highly charged, and
diplomatic missions were exchanged in an effort
to promote each ruler's ideology. This was the
first book to explore what it meant to be a
monarch in the pre-modern Islamic world, and
how ideas about sovereignty evolved across the
period. This groundbreaking work will appeal to
scholars of Middle Eastern and Central Asian
history, Mongol history, and Islamic history, as
well as historians of diplomacy and ideology.
Contents: Introduction; 1. The ideology and the
diplomacy; 2. The establishment of ideologies
(1260–1293/ 658–93); 3. The age of Ilkhanid
conversion (1295–1316/694–716); 4. The age of
patronage and Muslim supremacy (1317–41/
717–41); 5. Mamluk regional sovereignty and the
post-Ilkhanid order (1335–82/736–84); 6. The
Temürid invasions and the destruction of Mamluk
sovereignty (1382–1404/784–807); Epilogue;
Bibliography.
Contents: List of contributors; Introduction; Part
I: Reformist Journeys; Chapter 1: The Equivocal
History of a Muslim Reformation; Chapter 2:
Islamic Reform and Modernities in South Asia;
Chapter 3: Reform Sufism in South Asia; Chapter
4: Breathing in India, c. 1890; Part II: Debating
Reform; Chapter 5: The Enemy Within: Madrasa
and Muslim Identity in North India; Chapter 6:
Islamism and Social Reform in Kerala, South
India; Chapter 7: Piety as Politics amongst
Muslim Women in Contemporary Sri Lanka;
Chapter 8: The Changing Perspectives of Three
Muslim Men on the Question of Saint Worship
ISBN: 9780521118712
137
250pp
HB ` 995.00
Learning from
the Field
Innovating China’s
Higher Education
System
Ronnie Vernooy, Li
Xiaoyun, Xu Xiuli,
Lu Min and Qi Gubo
Love in South Asia
Across China, university staff, researchers,
students, and farmers are joining forces to bring
to the fore action and field-based learning as a
way to promote rural development studies.
Learning from the Field presents first-hand
experience and lessons from an innovative,
participatory curriculum development initiative in
China. It includes the content of two novel
courses, ‘Community Based Natural Resource
Management’ and ‘Participatory Rural
Development’. The first versions of these courses
were delivered at the College of Humanities and
Development of the China Agricultural University
in Beijing in the spring of 2005 and at the Jilin
Agricultural University in Changchun in the spring
of 2006.The book showcases the manner in
which innovative ideas about curriculum reform
are born, put into practice, and further refined
through a joint experiential learning-by-doing
approach. The book highlights participants’
motivations and perspectives, the nature of their
participation, the challenges encountered, and
the results obtained. It draws on the personal
experiences of the authors and the findings of the
action research that guided the process. This
book will be of interest to teachers of rural
development, facilitators and researchers, as well
as to scholars, practitioners, and managers
active in higher education, curriculum
development, international development, learning
studies, and Chinese or Asian studies.
A Cultural History
Francesca Orsini
Contents: 1. Introduction Francesca Orsini; Part
I. Love and Courtliness; 2. The household and
the pleasure garden: love and dynastic marriage
in the post-Gupta period Daud Ali; 3. If music be
the food of love: music, masculinity and eroticism
in the Mughal mehfil Katherine B. Brown; Part II.
Worldly Love and Mystical Love; 4. The shifting
sands of love Christopher Shackle; 5. Love,
passion and reason in Faizi's Nal-Daman
Muzaffar Alam and Sanjay Subrahmanyam; 6. To
die at the hands of love Jeevan S. Deol; Part III.
Love and (Colonial) Modernity; 7. Tagore and
transformations in the ideal of love Sudipta
Kaviraj; 8. The spaces of love and the passing of
the seasons Vasudha Dalmia; Part IV. Shifting
Paradigms: 9. Love in the time of Parsi theatre
Anuradha Kapur; 10. Love letters Francesca
Orsini; 11. Love's repertoire: Qurratulain Hyder's
Ag ka darya Kumkum Sangari; Part V.
Contemporary Lovescapes; 12. Kiss or tell?
Declaring love in Hindi films Rachel Dwyer; 13.
Love's cup, love's thorn, love's end: the language
of prem in Ghatiyali Ann Grodzins Gold;
14. Kidnapping, elopement and abduction: an
ethnography of love-marriage in Delhi Perveez
Mody.
Contents: Foreword; Norman Uphoff; Preface;
Acknowledgements; Chapter 1: A New Journey;
Chapter 2: Preparations: Every Long Journey
Begins with a First Step; Chapter 3: The First
CBNRM Course in Beijing: An Itinerary of
Remarkable Experiences; Chapter 4: The 2006
CNNRM Course: Masters of Our Destiny;
Chapter 5: The Participatory Rural Development
Course in Changchun: Making the Road by
Walking Together; Chapter 6: The Fellowship
Support Programme: Learning in the Field;
Chapter 7: The Fruits of Teamwork: A Synthesis
of Our Learning Journery; Glossary; References;
Notes on contributors.
ISBN: 9788175966017
246pp
Love may be a universal feeling, but culture and
language play a crucial role in defining it. Idioms
of love have a long history, and within every
society there is always more than one discourse,
be it prescriptive, religious, or gender-specific,
available at any given time. This book explores
the idioms of love that have developed in South
Asia, those words, conceptual clusters, images
and stories, which have interlocked and grown
into repertoires. Including essays by literary
scholars, historians, anthropologists, film
historians and political theorists, the collection
unravels the interconnecting strands in the
history of the concept (shringara, 'ishq, prem and
‘love’) and maps their significance in literary, oral
and visual traditions. Each essay examines a
particular configuration and meaning of love on
the basis of genre, tellers and audiences, and the
substantial introduction sets out the main
repertoires, presenting the student of South Asia
with an important cultural history.
HB ` 895.00
ISBN: 9788175964334
138
384pp
HB ` 695.00
Religion and
Conflict in Modern
South Asia
William Gould
cultures Shireen Mirza; 7. Shari'a, Shi'as and
Chishtiya revivalism Tahir Kamran and Amir
Khan Shahid; 8. Third wave Shi'ism Simon
Wolfgang Fuchs; Contributors; Index.
This is one of the first single-author comparisons
of different South Asian states around the theme
of religious conflict. Based on new research and
syntheses of the literature on 'communalism', it
argues that religious conflict in this region in the
modern period was never simply based on
sectarian or theological differences or the clash
of civilizations. Instead, the book proposes that
the connection between religious radicalism and
everyday violence relates to the actual (and
perceived) weaknesses of political and state
structures. For some, religious and ethnic
mobilization has provided a means of protest,
where representative institutions failed. For
others, it became a method of dealing with an
uncertain political and economic future. For many
it has no concrete or deliberate function, but has
effectively upheld social stability, paternalism and
local power, in the face of globalization and the
growing aspirations of the region's most
underprivileged citizens.
ISBN: 9781107108905
The Politics of
Extremism in
South Asia
Deepa M. Ollapally
Contents: 1. Introduction: community and
conflict in South Asia; 2. Building spheres of
community: 1860s–1910s; 3. Transforming
spheres of community: the post First World War
world; 4. Nationalising spheres of community:
anti-colonialism and religious politics; 5. The
1940s, state transformation, community and
conflict; 6. National integrity and pluralism, 1947–
1967; 7. The decades of transformation: 1970s
and 1980s; 8. The resurgence of religious
nationalism: 1990 to the present.
ISBN: 9781107029217
The Shi‘â in
Modern South Asia
Justin Jones and
Ali Usman Qasmi
368pp
218pp
HB ` 595.00
South Asia is home to a range of extremist
groups from the jihadists of Pakistan to the Tamil
Tigers of Sri Lanka. In the popular mind,
extremism and terrorism are invariably linked to
ethnic and religious factors. Yet the dominant
history of South Asia is notable for tolerance and
co-existence, despite highly-plural societies.
Deepa Ollapally examines extremist groups in
Kashmir, Afghanistan, Northeast India, Pakistan,
Bangladesh, and Sri Lanka to offer a fresh
perspective on the causes of extremism. What
accounts for its rise in societies not historically
predisposed to extremism? What determines the
winners and losers in the identity struggles in
South Asia? What tips the balance between more
moderate versus extremist outcomes? The book
argues that politics, inter-state and international
relations often play a more important role in the
rise of extremism in South Asia than religious
identity, poverty, and state repression.
Contents: 1. Introduction: beyond and before the
9/11 framework; 2. Situating violent conflict in
South Asia; 3. Reaping the whirlwind in
Afghanistan; 4. Pakistan at crossroads;
5. Kashmir’s crowded politics; 6. Sri Lanka’s
violent spiral; 7. Bangladesh: divided politics and
geopolitics; 8. Conclusion.
HB ` 995.00
While most studies of Shi'i Islam have focused
upon Iran or the Middle East, South Asia is
another global region which is home to a large
and influential Shi'i population. This edited
volume establishes the importance of the Indian
subcontinent, which has been profoundly shaped
by Shi'i cultures, regimes and populations
throughout its history, for the study of Shi'i Islam
in the modern world. The essays within this
volume, all written by leading scholars of the
field, explore various Shi'i communities (both Isna
'Ashari and Isma'ili) in parts of the subcontinent
as diverse as Karachi, Lucknow, Mumbai and
Hyderabad, as well as South Asian Shi'i
diasporas in East Africa. Drawing from a range of
disciplinary perspectives including history,
religious studies, anthropology and political
science, they examine a range of themes relating
to Shi'i belief, practice, piety and belonging, as
well as relations between Shi'i and non-Shi'i
communities.
ISBN: 9780521749077
The India Pakistan Conflict
An Enduring Rivalry
T.V. Paul
Contents: Preface; Introduction Francis
Robinson; 1. Faith deployed for a new Shi'i polity
in India Sajjad Rizvi; 2. The Isma'ili – Isna 'Ashari
divide among the Khojas Michel Boivin; 3. Local
nodes of a transnational network Muhammad
Amir Ahmad Khan; 4. Shi'ism, humanity and
revolution in twentieth-century India Justin Jones;
5. Universalising aspirations Soumen Mukherjee;
6. Travelling leaders and connecting print
256pp
PB
` 495.0
The India-Pakistan rivalry remains one of the
most enduring and unresolved conflicts of our
times. It began with the birth of the two states in
1947, and it has continued ever since, with the
periodic resumption of wars and crises. The
conflict has affected every dimension of interstate
and societal relations between the two countries
and, despite occasional peace initiatives, shows
no signs of abating. This volume brings together
leading experts in international relations theory
and comparative politics to explain the
persistence of this rivalry. Together they examine
a range of topics including regional power
distribution, great power politics, territorial
divisions, the nuclear weapons factor, and
incompatible national identities. Based on their
analyses, they offer possible conditions under
which the rivalry could be terminated. The book
will be of interest to scholars of politics and
international relations, as well as those
concerned about stability and peace in South
Asia.
Contents; Part I. Introduction; 1. Causes of the
India-Pakistan enduring rivalry T. V. Paul; Part II.
Theories of Enduring Rivalry and the South Asian
Conflict; 2. Theoretical specifications of enduring
139
rivalries: applications to the India-Pakistan case
Paul F. Diehl, Gary Goertz and Daniel Saeedi;
3. India-Pakistan conflict in light of general
theories of war, rivalry and deterrence John A.
Vasquez; 4. The Indo-Pakistani rivalry: prospects
for war, prospects for peace Daniel S. Geller;
5. Realpolitik and learning in the India-Pakistan
rivalry Russell J. Leng; Part III. Roots of the
India-Pakistan Conflict; 6. Major powers and the
persistence of the India-Pakistan conflict Ashok
Kapur; 7. Nuclear weapons and the prolongation
of the India-Pakistan rivalry Saira Khan;
8. National identities and the Pakistan-India
conflict Vali Nasr; 9. At the heart of the conflict:
irredentism and Kashmir Stephen Saideman;
10. Institutional causes of the Indo-Pakistani
rivalry Reeta Chowdhari Tremblay and Julian
Schofield; Part IV. Conclusions: 11: South Asia’s
Embedded conflict: understanding the IndiaPakistan rivalry T. V. Paul and William Hogg.
ISBN: 9788175963641
South Asia
Beyond the Global
Financial Crisis
Amitendu Palit
290pp
Policy Options to
Achieve Food
Security in South
Asia
Surabhi Mittal and
Deepti Sethi
PB ` 445.00
Contents: List of Contributors; Foreword;
Acknowledgments; List of Abbreviations; 1. Food
Security in South Asia; 2. Food Security in India:
Policies and Options; 3. Multiple Facets of Food
(In) Security in Sri Lanka: An Input to Food
Policy; 4. Food Security in Bangladesh:
Achievements, Challenges and Way Forward;
5. State of Agriculture and Food Security in
Pakistan; 6. Food Security Situation in Nepal:
Issues and Suggested Policy Measures; 7. Food
Security in Maldives; 8. Role of Regional Trade
and Rural Development for Food Security in
Bhutan; 9. Food Security in Afghanistan.
The book is an edited volume of different
perspectives on the South Asian region and
captures the political, social and economic
challenges facing the region following the
financial crisis and the region’s responses to
these challenges.
Key features: • Wide coverage of issues such as
socio-economic development, conflict resolution,
terrorism political developments, environmental
challenges governance etc. • Regional
perspectives as well as individual country
analysis (India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, Sri Lanka
etc.)
ISBN: 9788175968097
Contents: • South Asia: Beyond the Global
Financial Crisis; • South Asia and the Global
Financial Crisis: Impacts and Implications;
• Global Crisis, Financial Institutions and
Reforms: An EME Perspective; • Socio-Economic
Developments in South Asia: Issues and
Outlook; • Political Developments in South Asia:
Issues and Outlook; • The Major Powers and
Conflicts in South Asia; • Religious Extremism
and Terrorism in Pakistan: Challenges for
National Security; • Prospects for Conflict
Resolutions in South Asia; • India, Pakistan and
Bangladesh: “Trilateralism” in South Asia?.
ISBN: 9788175968936
192pp
Agriculture in South Asia and many other parts of
the world is apparently caught in a low
equilibrium trap. The features of this trap are low
productivity of staples, supply shortfalls, higher
prices, low returns to farmers and Product
diversification, causing further shortage of staple
food. The question of food security has a number
of dimensions that go beyond production,
availability and demand for food. Food availability
does not ensure food security. Thus, distribution
and access of population to food is equally
important for food security. Food availability can
be achieved through better distribution
mechanisms and alternatively through imports to
ensure food security. This book identifies major
issues of food security in the South Asian
countries. Each chapter of the book throws light
on issues such as initiatives and policies taken
up in a particular country to achieve the goal of
food security, and also critically evaluates the
effectiveness of these policies. Discussing the
SAARC food bank to ensure food security in
South Asia, the book also suggests measures to
overcome the identified current constraints and
make the policies more effective.
HB ` 695.00
140
242pp
HB ` 795.00
Peace and Conflict
The South Asian
Experience
Priyankar Upadhyaya
and Samrat Schmiem
Kumar
Pakistan
South Asia’s diversity is also reflected in the
many violent inter-state and intra-state conflicts
that further distinguish it from other regions of the
world. Despite the national differences, one can
still find transnational commonalities in cultures,
languages and religions, bound together by the
common pre-colonial and colonial history of the
South Asian countries. This book takes its
readers into a ‘reflexive journey’ of understanding
peace in South Asia, and the imperceptible way
through which religious and cultural dimensions
contribute to the peace building process. It also
unravels the unique patterns of common cultural
practices in the region to emphasize that the
connect between cultures can ever be a source
of tension as well as reward. In addition, it
presents a fascinating account of the origins and
meaning of the concept of ahimsa in Buddhism
and Jainism, and looks at the practical examples
of ahimsa from India to highlight the diversity of
peace, non-violence and peace work that exist in
the country. One of the chapters offers an
intriguing example of nonviolent resistance in
Pakistan – it documents the history of a
nonviolent civil resistance movement, the
‘lawyer’s movement’, or also known as the ‘Black
Revolution’, for justice and the rule of law in
Pakistan.
Moving the Economy
Forward
Rashid Amjad and
Shahid Javed Burki
Contents: 1. Overview Rashid Amjad and
Shahid Javed Burki; 2. Failed economic promise:
lessons from Pakistan’s development experience
Parvez Hassan; 3. Economic management under
IMF tutelage: key lessons from the Musharraf
and PPP rule, 1999–2013 Rashid Amjad; 4. A
country and an economy in transition Shahid
Javed Burki; 5. Tackling the energy crisis Afia
Malik; 6. Exports: lessons from the past and the
way forward Hamna Ahmed, Naved Hamid and
Mahreen Mahmud; 7. The future path of tax
reforms in Pakistan Hafiz A. Pasha and Aisha
Ghaus-Pasha; 8. Pakistan’s Indus basin water
strategy: past, present and future Shahid Amjad
Chaudhry; 9. Economic governance and
institutional reforms Ishrat Hussain;
10. Benefiting from foreign direct investment
Khalil Hamdani; 11.An analysis of the
remittances market in Pakistan Rashid Amjad, M.
Irfan and G. M. Arif; 12.The prospects for IndoPakistan trade Hafiz A. Pasha and Muhammad
Imran; 13. Beyond the poverty line: a
multidimensional analysis of poverty in Pakistan
AzamChaudhry, Theresa Chaudhry, Muhammad
Haseeb and Uzma Afzal; 14. Can the new
intergovernmental structure work in Pakistan?
Learning from China Ehtisham Ahmed.
Contents: Foreword; Preface; Introduction;
1. Conflict Resolution and Peacebuilding: Ideas,
Approaches and Debates -Åshild Kolås;
2. Changing Perspectives on Peace Studies in
South Asia - Samir Kumar Das; 3. Peace
Pedagogies in South Asia: Interreligious
Understanding - Priyankar Upadhyaya; 4. Some
Responses of Communities to Social Tensions in
India - Vinay Kumar Srivastava; 5. The Plurality
of Peace, Non-Violence and Peace works in
India - Samrat Schmiem Kumar and Elida K. U;
6. Education and Culture of Peace: Engaging
with Gandhi - Kaushikee; 7. Structural Violence
and Human Security: Gandhi’s Visions - Ajay
Kumar Yadav; 8. Women and the Peace Process
in Nepal - Anjoo Sharan Upadhyaya; 9. Quest for
Peace and Justice in Pakistan: Lawyer’s NonViolent Civil Resistance - Malik Hammad Ahmad;
10. Antinomies of Democracy and Peace in
Nepal - Chandra D. Bhatta; 11. Post-Armed
Conflict Trajectories in Sri Lanka - Sumanasiri
Liyanage and Thilanka Silva;
12. Environmental Security and Conflict in
Bangladesh: Nature, Complexities and Policies Rafiqul Islam; Contributors; Bibliography; Index.
ISBN: 9789382993551
270pp
Pakistan’s economic performance over the past
65 years has confounded its critics – when the
country has performed much better than
expected, especially in the early years – and
disappointed those who had high expectations,
given its initial start and economic potential. The
central question that the contributors to this
volume seek to answer is how to reverse the
current prolonged period of low growth and high
inflation that Pakistan has experienced, and to
suggest and implement measures that would
decisively move the economy onto a more
sustainable growth path. The book draws on the
wide experience of the authors at the highest
level of policy-making to put forward realistic and
concrete policies keeping in mind what works and
does not work in the current socio-economicpolitical milieu. It also moves beyond the income
measurement of poverty toward a more
comprehensive analysis of what the best way is
to target poverty in Pakistan.
ISBN: 9781107109520
HB ` 595.00
141
411pp
HB ` 725.00
Organizations at
War in Afghanistan
and Beyond
Abdulkader H. Sinno
Contents: List of Figures and Tables;
Acknowledgments; Chronology of the Key
Events; List of Abbreviations; Introduction;
Prologue: Flying the Flag; The Setting: The
Kingdom in the Clouds; The Story: The Rocky
Road to Democracy; Epilogue: Working Towards
Peace; Postscript; Annexures; Notes on
References; Bibliography; Index.
While popular accounts of warfare, particularly of
nontraditional conflicts such as guerrilla wars and
insurgencies, favour the role of leaders or
ideology, social- scientific analyses of these wars
focus on aggregate categories such as ethnic
groups, religious affiliations, socioeconomic
classes, or civilizations. Challenging these
constructions, Abdulkader H. Sinno closely
examines the fortunes of the various factions in
Afghanistan, including the Mujahideen and the
Taliban, that have been fighting each other and
foreign armies since the 1979 Soviet invasion.
Focusing on the organization of the combatants,
Sinno offers a new understanding of the course
and outcome of such conflicts.
ISBN: 9789382993032
Liberal Perspective
for South Asia
Contents: List of Maps and Figures; List of
Tables; Preface; Note on Transliteration; 1.
Organizing to Win; Part I : An Organizational
Theory or Group Conflict; 2. Organization and the
Outcomeof Conflicts; 3. Advantages and
Limitations of Structures; 4. The Gist of the
Organizational Theory; Part II: Explaining the
outcomes of Afghan Conflicts; 5. The Soviet
Withdrawal from Afghanistan; 6. Resilience
through Division, 1979 - 1989; 7. The Cost of the
Failure to Restructure, 1989 - 1994; 8. The Rise
of the Taliban, 1994 – 2001; 9. Afghan Conflicts
under U.S. Occupation, 2001 -; Part III: And
Beyond. . .; 10. The Organizational Theory
beyond Afghanistan; Glossary of Terms;
Participants in Post-1978 Afghan Conflicts;
References; Index.
ISBN: 9788175966208
Nepal Votes for
Peace
Bhojraj Pokharel and
Shrishti Rana
352pp
Rajiva Wijesinha
HB ` 795.00
Nepal has a long history of political struggle and
popular uprisings have often threatened the
existing regimes of this landlocked,
predominantly Hindu state. In 1996, radical
Maoists launched what would become the
protracted armed struggle, known as The
People’s War, with the aim of replacing the
parliamentary system and the constitutional
monarchy with a people’s republic. Thousands of
people died and even more were injured over the
next 10 years in bitter fighting, which ravaged the
country and shocked the world. The gruesome
murder of King Birendra, his wife and seven other
royal family members in 2001 prompted more
international concern about the future of Nepal.
The violence eventually came to an end in 2005–
06 when the demand for a Constituent Assembly
election was agreed upon. The election was
finally held on 10 April 2008, marking one of the
most significant events in Nepal’s political history
because it abolished the country’s 239-year-old
monarchy and established a multiparty
democratic republic. This book, penned by the
former Chief Election Commissioner of Nepal,
narrates the country’s transformation from a
kingdom to a multiparty democratic republic
holding Constituent Assembly election. It also
discusses the roles of national and international
organizations, including the United Nations, in the
ongoing peace process of Nepal.
280pp
PB ` 450.00
Liberal Perspectives for South Asia discusses the
essentials of the liberal philosophy, while also
indicating how appropriate it is in the South Asian
context. In the past, the subcontinent was
renowned for the skill with which it took up the
dominant ideologies of the west and articulated
them for the Asian context. In the post-colonial
period, the only dominant ideology that was
sidetracked by all political parties was liberalism,
the ideology that promoted freedom of the
individual. The idea of a book about the need for
liberalism in the subcontinent was the brainchild
of Chanaka Amaratunga, who set up the first
avowedly Liberal Party in Sri Lanka. Many
political parties have implemented liberal policies
on an ad hoc basis and without a proper
framework to guide them. Not all parties would
accept all aspects of a liberal programme,
however, in a context in which many parties are
seeking an ideology that accords both with the
present times and trends, and also with some of
the goals they accepted in the past. It is hoped
that this volume will provide food for thought and
ideas for adoption and incorporation within the
party programme. Ranging from erudite
expositions of classic liberal thinkers to lively
discussions of liberal economic principles put into
practice by imaginative entrepreneurs, this
volume is essential reading for a region making a
swift transition into the contemporary, globalized
world.
Contents: Foreword; Preface; Chapter 1 – The
Evolution of the Liberal Idea; Chapter 2 – The
Fundamentals of Liberalism; Chapter 3 –
Historical Roots of South Asian Liberalism;
Chapter 4 – Liberalism and Constitutionalism:
Parliament and the Judiciary; Chapter 5 – The
Market Economy and Welfare: An Introductory
Note; Chapter 6 – Grassroots Capitalism: A
Glimpse of the UnrecognisedIndia; Chapter 7 –
Empowering the Poor: A Liberal Approach to
Education Reforms; Chapter 8 – Not by Religion
Alone: Aspects of Pakistani Society; Chapter 9 –
An Appraisal of Economic Liberalization in
Pakistan; Chapter 10 – Religion and Culture in
the Liberal State; Chapter 11 – Social Freedom in
the Liberal State; Chapter 12- The Future of
Liberalism in South Asia; Select Bibliography;
Notes on Contributors.
ISBN: 9788175966628
142
255pp
HB ` 895.00
Inside Nuclear
South Asia
Scott D. Sagan
The relentlessness of the confrontations between
India and Pakistan, and the fact that they have
more than once escalated into armed conflict,
makes Inside Nuclear South Asia a must read for
anyone – legislator, policy-maker, analyst,
intelligence or military professional, student, or
researcher – who wishes to gain a thorough
understanding of the spread of nuclear weapons
in South Asia and the potential consequences of
nuclear proliferation on the subcontinent.
Beginning with an examination of the origins of
the nuclear weapons programmes in India and
Pakistan, it goes on to analyse the
consequences of nuclear proliferation on the
subcontinent – and provides clear evidence that
the presence of nuclear weapons in South Asia
has increased the frequency and propensity of
low-level violence, further destabilizing the
region. Specifically, it demonstrates that nuclear
weapons in India and Pakistan have led to
serious political changes that challenge the ability
of the two states to produce stable and lasting
nuclear peace. Thus, this book provides new
insights into the domestic politics and
organizational interests behind specific nuclear
policy choices in South Asia, a critique of narrow
realist views of nuclear proliferation, and clear
signposting of the dangers of nuclear proliferation
in South Asia.
India’s Rise as an
Asian Power
Nation, Neighborhood,
and Region
Sandy Gordon
Contents: Preface; Author’s Note on Currency
Conversion; Abbreviations; Introduction;
1. Governance and the “Hybrid Inheritance”;
2. Enmeshed Dissonance in South Asia; 3. South
Asian Dissonance, Global Factors, and Global
Power Competition; 4. Wider Regional
Implications; 5. The Government Response:
Domestic Governance and Security; 6. External
Strategies and Challenges: From Neighborhood
to Region; Conclusion; Bibliography; About the
Author; Index.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Acknowledgments;
Introduction: Inside Nuclear South Asia; The
Causes of Nuclear Proliferation in; 1.The BJP
and the Bomb; 2.Testing Theories of Proliferation
in South Asia; 3.Contra-Proliferation: Interpreting
the Meanings of India’s Nuclear Tests in 1947
and 1998; The Consequences of Nuclear
Proliferation in South Asia; 4.Pride and Prejudice
and Prithvis: Strategic Weapons Behavior in
South Asia; 5.Revisionist Ambitions,
Conventional Capabilities, and Nuclear Instability:
Why Nuclear South Asia Is Not Like Cold War
Europe; 6.The Evolution of Pakistani and Indian
Nuclear Doctrine; Contributors; Index.
ISBN: 9788175967625
291pp
This book examines India’s rise to power and the
obstacles it faces in the context of domestic
governance and security, relationships and
security issues with its South Asian neighbours,
and international relations in the wider Asian
region. Instead of a straight-line projection based
on traditional measures of power such as
population size, economic growth rates, and
military spending, Sandy Gordon’s nuanced view
of India’s rise focuses on the need of any rising
power to develop the means to deal with
challenges in its domestic, neighbourhood (South
Asia), and regional (continental) spheres.
Terrorism, insurgency, border disputes, and
water conflict and shortages are examples of
some of India’s domestic and regional
challenges. Gordon argues that before it can
assume the mantle of a genuine Asian power or
world power, India must improve its governance
and security; otherwise, its economic growth and
human development will continue to be hindered
and its vulnerabilities may be exploited by
competitors in its South Asian neighbourhood or
the wider region. This book will appeal to
students and scholars of India and South Asia,
security studies, foreign policy, and comparative
politics, as well as country and regional
specialists.
ISBN: 9789384463434
HB ` 795.00
143
296pp
HB ` 650.00
Becoming Asia
Change and Continuity
in Asian International
Relations Since World
War II
Alice Lyman Miller
and Richard Wich
Asymmetric
Warfare in South
Asia
At the conclusion of World War II, Asia was
hardly more than a geographic expression. Yet
today we recognize Asia as a vibrant and
assertive region, fully transformed from the
vulnerable nation-states that emerged following
the Second World War. The transformation was
by no means an inevitable one, but the product of
two key themes that have dominated Asia’s
international relations since 1945 – the
competition between the United States and the
Soviet Union to enlist the region’s states as
assets in the Cold War, and the struggle of
nationalistic Asian leaders to develop the
domestic support to maintain power and
independence in a dangerous international
context. Becoming Asia provides a
comprehensive, systemic account of how these
themes played out in Asian affairs during the
postwar years, covering not only East Asia, but
South and Central Asia as well. In addition to
exploring the interplay between nationalism and
Cold War bipolarity during the first postwar
decades, authors Alice Lyman Miller and Richard
Wich chart the rise of largely export-led
economies that are increasingly making the
region the global centre of gravity, and document
efforts in the ongoing search for regional
integration.
The Causes and
Consequences of the
Kargil Conflict
Peter R. Lavoy
Contents: 1. Introduction: the importance of the
Kargil conflict Peter R. Lavoy; Part I. Causes and
Conduct of the Conflict: 2. The strategic context
of the Kargil conflict: a Pakistani perspective
Zafar Iqbal Cheema; 3. Pakistan’s motivations
and calculations for the Kargil conflict Feroz
Hassan Khan, Peter R. Lavoy and Christopher
Clary; 4. Military operations in the Kargil conflict
John H. Gill; 5. American diplomacy and the
1999 Kargil Summit at Blair House Bruce Riedel;
6. Kargil: the nuclear dimension Timothy D. Hoyt;
7. Why Kargil did not produce general war: the
crisis-management strategies of Pakistan, India,
and the United States Peter R. Lavoy; Part II:
Consequences and Impact of the Conflict:
8. Surprise at the top of the world: India’s
systemic and intelligence failure James J. Wirtz
and Surinder Rana; 9. Militants in the Kargil
conflict: myths, realities, and impacts C. Christine
Fair; 10. The impact of the Kargil conflict and
Kashmir on Indian politics and society Praveen
Swami; 11.The Kargil conflict’s impact on
Pakistani politics and society Saeed Shafqat;
Part III. Lessons Learned: 12. The lessons of
Kargil as learned by India Rajesh M. Basrur;
13.The lessons of Kargil as learned by Pakistan
Hasan-Askari Rizvi; 14. The Kargil crisis: lessons
learned by the United States Rodney W. Jones
and Joseph McMillan; 15. Kargil, deterrence, and
international relations theory Robert Jervis.
Contents: List of Illustrations; Preface; Chapter
1. Introduction; Chapter 2. Planning the Postwar
World; . Chapter 3. The Chinese Civil War;
Chapter 4. Japan: Occupation and Recovery;
Chapter 5. The Korean War; Chapter 6.
Decolonization, Nationalism, and Revolution;
Chapter 7. The U.S. Alliance System; Chapter 8.
The Sino- Soviet Alliance; Chapter 9. The
Vietnam War; Chapter 10. Strategic Realignment;
Chapter 11. The End of the Cold War; Chapter
12. The Rise of China; Chapter 13. Entering the
New Century; Chapter 14. Change and
Continuity; Notes Selected; Bibliography for
Further Reading; Index.
ISBN: 9789382264101
330pp
The 1999 conflict between India and Pakistan
near the town of Kargil in contested Kashmir was
the first military clash between two nuclear-armed
powers since the 1969 Sino-Soviet war. Kargil
was a landmark event not because of its duration
or casualties, but because it contained a very
real risk of nuclear escalation. Until the Kargil
conflict, academic and policy debates over
nuclear deterrence and proliferation occurred
largely on the theoretical level. This deep
analysis of the conflict offers scholars and
policymakers a rare account of how nucleararmed states interact during military crisis.
Written by analysts from India, Pakistan, and the
United States, this unique book draws
extensively on primary sources, including
unprecedented access to Indian, Pakistani, and
U.S. government officials and military officers
who were actively involved in the conflict. This is
the first rigorous and objective account of the
causes, conduct, and consequences of the Kargil
conflict.
HB ` 895.00
ISBN: 9781107427136
144
426pp
PB ` 695.00
FORTHCOMING TITLES
Discretion, Discrimination
and the Rule of Law
Politics of the Poor
Reforming Rape Sentencing in India
Indrajit Roy
Mrinal Satish
Poor people are central to Indian
politics. Public policy and political
parties, and development plans and
elected representatives derive their
legitimacy in the name of the poor. A
study of Indian politics challenges the
widespread academic, policy and
public assumption that poor people are
excluded from politics.
in Contemporary India
The book addresses and analyses in
depth, the sentencing regime for rape
in India. Based on a study of all rape
cases decided by High Courts and the
Supreme Court of India between 1984
and 2009, the book demonstrates
(using regression analysis, as well as
case studies) that sentencing courts in India tend to consider loss
of chastity, marriageability and virginity as the primary “harms” of
rape. Therefore, in sentencing the convicted rapist, courts
consider as relevant whether the woman was a virgin, her marital
status, her sexual history, etc. Through this analysis, the book
argues that despite law reform, the “myths” and “stereotypes”
about rapists and rape victims that used to be embedded in the
positive law of rape and/or in evidence law have in many cases
merely shifted from the charging and trial stages to the sentencing
stage. The book further argues that rape myths and stereotypes
influence sentencing, leading to unwarranted disparity.
India’s democracy provides the country’s poor with unique
opportunities for political engagement. They vote regularly. Does
their regular electoral participation make their politics the same as
everyone else’s? Side by side, poor people also face vulnerable
lives. Do their vulnerabilities render their politics different from
those of others?
Based on fieldwork in eastern India, this book argues that the
poor neither acquiesce with the primacy of electoral institutions
nor do they resist it. Rather, they negotiate with democracy. Their
negotiations are varied, shaped as they are by the dynamic
interaction of institutional opportunity and the social relations of
power.
The book undertakes a theoretical examination of the purposes of
punishment, the fundamentally overlapping nature of the stages
of the criminal process, and the meaning of “disparity.” Based on
a comparative study of sentencing reforms, and an examination
and analysis of recent efforts to reduce sentencing disparity in a
variety of common-law jurisdictions such as the United Kingdom,
Israel, and the United States, the book proposes an institutional
reform – an independent sentencing commission that would
establish detailed, presumptive guidelines for rape sentencing as a solution to the problem of unwarranted disparity in rape
sentencing in India. The book sets forth what the sentencing
guidelines for rape in India might provide, discussing factors that
should be considered relevant and irrelevant in the sentencing of
rape offenders. The underlying theme of the book is to bring the
rule of law to criminal sentencing in India.
The book situates detailed observations from eastern India in
conversation with the analytic debates on clientelism and
citizenship, moral vocabularies and languages of stateness,
preservation and improvement, and tradition and modernity.
Through these analytic interventions, Roy elaborates a new
framework with which to analyse poor people’s multifaceted
negotiations with democracy.
Contents: Introduction; Chapter 1. The Perspectives of the
Study; Chapter 2. Institutional Opportunity Structures; Chapter 3.
Social Relations of Power; Chapter 4. From Clientelism to
Citizenship; Chapter 5- From Moral Vocabularies to Languages of
Stateness; Chapter 6. From Backwardness to Improvements;
Chapter 7. From Tradition to Modernity; Conclusion
Contents: Chapter 1. Introduction; Chapter 2. An Introduction to
the Indian Criminal Justice System; Chapter 3. The Law and
Practice of Rape Adjudication in India; Chapter 4. Rape
Sentencing: An Empirical Analysis; Chapter 5. Myths and
Stereotypes in Rape Prosecutions; Chapter 6. Structuring
Sentencing Discretion: Guidelines Models and Approaches;
Chapter 7. Sentencing Discretion in India: The Need for
Structuring; Chapter 8. Sentencing Guidelines for Rape
ISBN: 9781107135628
300pp
HB
ISBN: 9781107117181
` 895.00
145
350pp
HB
` 850.00
Notes
146
www.cambridge.org
INDEX
A
A Concise History of Modern India --------------------------------------------------------- 49
A Course on Cooperative Game Theory -------------------------------------------------- 11
A Descriptive Study of Bengali Words ----------------------------------------------------- 54
A Field of One’s Own ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 134
A Gentleman’s Word --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 28
A History of Bangladesh ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
A History of Prejudice -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 47
A New Anthropology of Islam ---------------------------------------------------------------- 99
A Short History of English Literature ------------------------------------------------------- 23
A Social History of the Deccan -------------------------------------------------------------- 29
A Struggle for Identity -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 29
A Textbook of Cultural Economics --------------------------------------------------------- 13
Abortion in Asia ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1
Adjudication in Religious Family Laws ---------------------------------------------------- 76
Afghan Endgames ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 118
Amitav Ghosh ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21
An Experiment in Criticism (Canto Classics) -------------------------------------------- 15
An Intellectual History for India -------------------------------------------------------------- 30
An Introduction to Buddhism --------------------------------------------------------------- 100
An Introduction to Hinduism ------------------------------------------------------------------ 99
An Introduction to International Criminal Law and Procedure ----------------------- 67
An Introduction to Islam ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 98
An Introduction to Islamic Law ------------------------------------------------------------- 100
An Introduction to Mathematics for Economics ----------------------------------------- 11
An Introduction to Research ------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
An Introduction to the History of America ------------------------------------------------- 47
Anthropology, Politics, and the State -------------------------------------------------------- 1
Armies, Wars and their Food ---------------------------------------------------------------- 30
Asian Rivalries --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 117
Asian Voices in a Postcolonial Age ---------------------------------------------------------- 1
Asymmetric Warfare in South Asia ------------------------------------------------------- 144
Chinese and Indian Strategic Behavior ------------------------------------------------- 121
Citizenship and Identity in the Age of Surveillance ---------------------------------- 132
Civil Society --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 43
Collaborative Learning in Practice -------------------------------------------------------- 131
Colonial Justice in British India -------------------------------------------------------------- 44
Coming of Age in Nineteenth-Century India --------------------------------------------- 33
Commanding Right and Forbidding Wrong in IslamicThought ---------------------- 99
Communal Violence, Forced Migration and the State ------------------------------- 118
Companion to Comparative Literature, World Literatures, and Comparative
Cultural Studies ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
Complex Deterrence ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 116
Contract Law ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
Cookery for the Hospitality Industry -------------------------------------------------------- 28
Corporate Entrepreneurship Top Managers and New Business Creation --------- 3
Corporate Governance ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 64
Corruption and Reform in India ------------------------------------------------------------ 116
Courtly Culture and Political Life in Early Medieval India ----------------------------- 33
Crafting Strategy -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 80
Creating a New Medina ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 33
Creating New Markets in the Digital Economy ------------------------------------------ 80
Credit to Capabilities ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 133
Culinary Culture in Colonial India ----------------------------------------------------------- 33
Cyber Warfare and the Laws of War ------------------------------------------------------- 72
D
Decentralization and Empowerment for Rural Development -------------------------- 3
Decision Behaviour, Analysis and Support ----------------------------------------------- 80
Decolonising International Law -------------------------------------------------------------- 66
Deep Currents and Rising Tides ---------------------------------------------------------- 136
Democracy and Decentralisation in South Asia and West Africa ---------------- 121
Development of Geocentric Spatial Language and Cognition -------------------- 124
Devotion and Dissent in Indian History ---------------------------------------------------- 34
Disability, Education and Employment in Developing Countries ----------------- 131
Discretion, Discrimination and the Rule of Law --------------------------------------- 145
Disquieting Gifts ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Domesticity and Power in the Early Mughal World ------------------------------------ 34
B
Bangladesh --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Banking and Financial Systems ------------------------------------------------------------- 13
Becoming Asia --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 144
Becoming India ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
Bengal ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Between the State and Islam -------------------------------------------------------------- 117
Bombay Islam ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 32
Brand Society ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77
Breakdown in Pakistan ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 136
Building Respected Companies ------------------------------------------------------------- 77
Business Ethics and Continental Philosophy -------------------------------------------- 78
Butcher’s Copy-editing ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
E
Eating Grass ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 116
Economic Reform in India ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4
Elements of Tibetan Buddhism -------------------------------------------------------------- 98
Elite Parties, Poor Voters ------------------------------------------------------------------- 122
Empire & Information --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
Empire Calling --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 129
Empowering Society ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115
Energy and Security in South Asia ------------------------------------------------------- 136
English for the Media --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
English Literature in Context ----------------------------------------------------------------- 19
English Phonology ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 60
English Syntax ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 55
Explaining the Performance of Human Resource Management -------------------- 82
C
Cambridge Handbook of Culture, Organizations, and Work ------------------------- 78
Cambridge Handbook of Strategy as Practice ------------------------------------------ 79
Cartel Regulation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
Changing India ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 32
China and India in the Age of Globalization -------------------------------------------- 122
F
Fantasy of Modernity ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 126
149
Fate and Fortune in the Indian Scriptures ------------------------------------------------ 98
Indigeneity and Legal Pluralism in India -------------------------------------------------- 76
Fates of Political Liberalism in the British Post-Colony ----------------------------- 114
Indigenous and Western Medicine in Colonial India ----------------------------------- 45
Fighting Back ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 115
Indigo Plantations and Science in Colonial India --------------------------------------- 45
Fighting Eviction ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Industrial Organization ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Financial Analysis, Planning & Forecasting ------------------------------------------------ 4
Informal Labor, Formal Politics and Dignified Discontent in India ---------------- 121
Financial Market Bubbles and Crashes --------------------------------------------------- 14
Innovation in India -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Foreigners and Foreign Languages in India --------------------------------------------- 55
Inside Lawyers’ Ethics ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
Forest Ecology in India ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 35
Inside Nuclear South Asia ------------------------------------------------------------------ 143
Forest Policy and Ecological Change ------------------------------------------------------ 49
Insurgency and Counterinsurgency in South Asia ----------------------------------- 112
From Asian to Global Financial Crisis ----------------------------------------------------- 14
International Business Strategy ------------------------------------------------------------- 84
From Subjects to Citizens --------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
International Human Rights Law ------------------------------------------------------------ 68
G
Games in Economic Development --------------------------------------------------------- 11
Gandhi ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 122
Gandhi as Disciple and Mentor -------------------------------------------------------------- 43
Gandhi in the West ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
Gender and Science ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 130
Gender, Conflict and Peace in Kashmir ------------------------------------------------- 129
Global Outsourcing and Offshoring -------------------------------------------------------- 82
Global Services Outsourcing ----------------------------------------------------------------- 83
Global South Asians -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 137
Globalization and Competition ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Globalization and India’s Economic Integration --------------------------------------- 115
Good Thinking --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 125
Government as Practice --------------------------------------------------------------------- 118
Greening the Firm ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 114
International Law -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
International Law from Below ---------------------------------------------------------------- 67
Introducing Phonetic Science ---------------------------------------------------------------- 62
Introducing Phonology ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
Introducing Second Language Acquisition ----------------------------------------------- 60
Introductory Econometrics -------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Islamic Extremism ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 97
Islamic Reform in South Asia -------------------------------------------------------------- 137
Islamic Societies to the Nineteenth Century --------------------------------------------- 46
J
Journeys to Empire ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
Jurisprudence ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 74
K
Kingship and Ideology in the Islamic and Mongol Worlds -------------------------- 137
L
Labour, Employment and Economic Growth in India ------------------------------------ 9
Language and Linguistics --------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
Language Death --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
Language History of the Kamta and Cooch Behar Region -------------------------- 56
Language in South Asia ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 56
Language, Culture, and Society ------------------------------------------------------------- 63
Leading Strategic Change -------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
Leading the Sales Force ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
Learning from the Field ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 138
Leveraging Corporate Responsibility ------------------------------------------------------ 86
Liberal Perspective for South Asia ------------------------------------------------------- 142
Limits of Islamism ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 112
Linguistics ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
Living with Disasters ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 126
Localization Strategies for Global E-Business ------------------------------------------ 86
Love in South Asia ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 138
H
Handbook of Indian Psychology ---------------------------------------------------------- 125
Hard Times --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Hinduism and Law ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 75
Hinduism and the Ethics of Warfare in South Asia ------------------------------------- 98
History Culture and the Indian City --------------------------------------------------------- 36
How Children Learn to Be Healthy ------------------------------------------------------- 124
Human Capital ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
Human Rights and Law ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 68
Human Rights under State-Enforced Religious Family Laws in Israel, Egypt and
India ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 65
Humanitarian Intervention -------------------------------------------------------------------- 36
Hyderabad, British India, and the World -------------------------------------------------- 50
I
India and the Nuclear Non-proliferation Regime -------------------------------------- 114
India Before Europe ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
India in the World Order --------------------------------------------------------------------- 113
India Since 1980 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 113
India Working --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5
India‘s Healthcare Industry ------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
India’s Foreign Policy ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 113
India’s Labouring Poor ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
India’s Late, Late Industrial Revolution ---------------------------------------------------- 84
India’s Rise as an Asian Power ----------------------------------------------------------- 143
India–EU People Mobility --------------------------------------------------------------------- 10
Indian Business Groups ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
Indian Railways ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
M
Mahesh Dattani ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Making Money ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Making News in Global India ----------------------------------------------------------------- 28
Management Across Culture ----------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Managing Change ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 87
Managing Customer Value ------------------------------------------------------------------- 87
Mao’s Little Red Book ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 123
Mapping Social Exclusion in India -------------------------------------------------------- 128
Market Menagerie --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 6
Marketing Strateg ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 88
150
Memories of Post-imperial Nations --------------------------------------------------------- 44
Purifying Empire --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 46
Microeconomics for MBAs -------------------------------------------------------------------- 13
Q
Quest of a Discipline --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 58
Migration and Diaspora in Modern Asia ------------------------------------------------- 133
Migration, Mobility and Multiple Affiliations --------------------------------------------- 132
R
R. K. Narayan ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 20
Race, Religion and Law in Colonial India ------------------------------------------------- 73
Raja Rao ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 21
Realising the Demographic Dividend -------------------------------------------------------- 9
Reengineering in Action ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
Religion and Conflict in Modern South Asia ------------------------------------------- 139
Remembering Partition ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 38
Resource Economics -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14
Rethinking the Buddha ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 96
Reverence, Resistance and Politics of Seeing the Indian National Flag ------- 118
Revolutionary Pamphlets, Propaganda and Political Culture in Colonial Bengal38
Rohinton Mistry ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Rural Politics in India ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 120
Mobilizing Restraint --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 111
Models of Opportunity ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 88
Modern Islamic Thought in a Radical Age ---------------------------------------------- 102
Modern Legal Drafting ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
Monetary Policy, Sovereign Debt and Financial Stability ------------------------------- 6
Mortal Questions (Canto Classics) --------------------------------------------------------- 96
Muslim Belonging in Secular India --------------------------------------------------------- 52
N
Nanotechnology and Development ----------------------------------------------------------- 7
Nation-Building and Foreign Policy in India -------------------------------------------- 111
Nations and Nationalism since 1780 ------------------------------------------------------- 48
Nepal in Transition ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 119
Nepal Votes for Peace ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 142
News as Culture --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 26
No Exit from Pakistan ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 120
Nomadic Narratives ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 52
S
Science, Technology and Social Formation in Medieval Assam ------------------- 39
Semantics ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 62
Shaping the Emerging World -------------------------------------------------------------- 110
Shari‘a ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
Shi’a Islam in Colonial India ------------------------------------------------------------------ 39
Short Introduction to Strategic Human Resource Management -------------------- 90
Sites of Asian Interaction -------------------------------------------------------------------- 130
Small Town Capitalism in Western India ------------------------------------------------- 39
Sociolinguistic Variation ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
Sociolinguistics ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
Sounds and their patterns in Indic languages ------------------------------------------- 57
Sounds and their patterns in Indic languages ------------------------------------------- 58
South Asia -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 140
South Asian Languages ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
Speaking Like a State ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 110
Stakeholders Matter ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
State-Directed Development --------------------------------------------------------------- 109
Strange Riches ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
Strategic Conversations ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
Strategic Customer Management ----------------------------------------------------------- 92
Strategic Intelligence --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
Strategic Management ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
Strategic Risk Management Practice ------------------------------------------------------ 93
Strategy and Organization -------------------------------------------------------------------- 94
Strong Managers, Strong Owners ---------------------------------------------------------- 94
Studying English Literature ------------------------------------------------------------------- 19
Subalternity, Exclusion and Social Change in India --------------------------------- 127
Successful Strategies -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
O
Online Journalism ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 27
Operations Management ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 88
Organizations at War in Afghanistan and Beyond ------------------------------------ 142
Our Indian Railway ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 35
P
Pakistan’s Counterterrorism Challenge ------------------------------------------------- 135
Pakistan’s Experience with Formal Law -------------------------------------------------- 73
Paper Tiger --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65
Patronage as Politics in South Asia ------------------------------------------------------ 124
Peace and Conflict Pakistan --------------------------------------------------------------- 141
People and Life on the Chars of South Asia ------------------------------------------- 128
Performance at the Limit ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 89
Phone Clones ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 15
Piracy in the Indian Film Industry ----------------------------------------------------------- 70
Policy Options to Achieve Food Security in South Asia ---------------------------- 140
Political Structure in a Changing Sinhalese Village ------------------------------------ 37
Political Theory And Power ----------------------------------------------------------------- 111
Political Thought in Action -------------------------------------------------------------------- 97
Politics of the Poor ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 145
Population Ageing in India ------------------------------------------------------------------ 128
Poverty Amid Plenty in the New India --------------------------------------------------- 111
Practical Ethics ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
Pragmatics ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 63
Presidential Legislation in India ------------------------------------------------------------- 69
Preventive Detention and the Democratic State ---------------------------------------- 77
Price Theory and Applications --------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Principles and Practice of Social Marketing ---------------------------------------------- 89
Principles of Politics -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 110
Private Investment in India 1900-1939 ---------------------------------------------------- 38
Problem Solving in Organizations ---------------------------------------------------------- 89
Public Expenditure and Indian Development Policy1960-1970 ----------------------- 7
Public Management ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
T
Taming Tibet --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Teaching Management ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 94
Telangana People’s Struggle and its Lessons ------------------------------------------ 40
Tensions in Rural Bengal ------------------------------------------------------------------- 109
The Anglo-Maratha Campaigns and the Contest for India --------------------------- 48
The Business School in the Twenty - First Century ------------------------------------ 95
151
The Cambridge Companion to Comparative Law -------------------------------------- 72
The Partition of India --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
The Cambridge Companion to Creative Writing ---------------------------------------- 19
The Politics of Extremism in South Asia ------------------------------------------------ 139
The Cambridge Companion to Cricket ---------------------------------------------------- 26
The Power of Oratory in the Medieval Muslim World -------------------------------- 100
The Cambridge Companion to Gandhi ---------------------------------------------------- 48
The Practice of War -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 135
The Cambridge Companion to John Donne --------------------------------------------- 15
The Promise of Power ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
The Cambridge Companion to Modern Indian Culture ------------------------------ 132
The Rani of Jhansi ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 43
The Cambridge Companion to Nelson Mandela -------------------------------------- 120
The Rational Believer ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 133
The Cambridge Companion to Old English Literature -------------------------------- 16
The Religious Culture of India --------------------------------------------------------------- 96
The Cambridge Companion to Shakespearean Tragedy ----------------------------- 18
The Rise of China ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 106
The Cambridge Companion to W.B. Yeats ---------------------------------------------- 16
The Service Sector in India’s Development ---------------------------------------------- 10
The Cambridge History of English Romantic Literature ------------------------------ 16
The Shi‘â in Modern South Asia ---------------------------------------------------------- 139
The Cambridge Introduction to Gabriel Garcia Marquez ----------------------------- 18
The Sikhs of the Punjab ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
The Cambridge Introduction to the Short Story in English --------------------------- 22
The Spirit of Hindu Law ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 75
The Cambridge Shakespeare Guide ------------------------------------------------------- 25
The State and Land Records Modernisation -------------------------------------------- 78
The Camera as Witness ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
The Story of English in India ----------------------------------------------------------------- 59
The Challenge of Democracy -------------------------------------------------------------- 108
The Study of Langugage ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
The Cold War in South Asia ------------------------------------------------------------------ 50
The Tradition of Non-Use of Nuclear Weapons --------------------------------------- 106
The Concise Cambridge History of English Literature -------------------------------- 22
The Untouchables ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 130
The Conquests of Alexander the Great ----------------------------------------------------- 3
The US–India Nuclear Agreement -------------------------------------------------------- 105
The Crisis of Global Modernity -------------------------------------------------------------- 50
The World under Pressure ------------------------------------------------------------------ 105
The Dance of Siva ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 96
Themes and Conventions of Elizabethan Tragedy ------------------------------------- 23
The Economics of Derivatives ----------------------------------------------------------------- 8
Theory and Practice of Corporate Governance ----------------------------------------- 70
The Economy of Modern India -------------------------------------------------------------- 42
Think on my Words (Canto Classics) ------------------------------------------------------ 17
The Electronic Silk Road ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
Thought Leadership Meets Business ------------------------------------------------------ 95
The Emerging Dimensions of SAARC --------------------------------------------------- 127
Timepass ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 105
The Engagement of India ------------------------------------------------------------------- 108
Toppling Qaddafi -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
The Female Voice of Myanmar -------------------------------------------------------------- 44
Touch and Intimacy in First World War Literature -------------------------------------- 17
The Financial Inclusion Imperative and Sustainable Approaches -------------------- 8
Towards a Knowledge Society ------------------------------------------------------------ 131
The G20 Macroeconomic Agenda ------------------------------------------------------------ 8
Tracks of Change ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 44
The Good Muslim ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99
Trade Marks and Brands ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 75
The Government of Social Life in Colonial India ---------------------------------------- 45
Translating India --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 59
The Great Gatsby ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 22
Translation Studies ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 60
The Health of Nations -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 74
U
Urdu Literature and Journalism ------------------------------------------------------------- 26
The History of Peace-Building in East Timor ------------------------------------------ 119
The IMF and Global Financial Crises -------------------------------------------------------- 9
V
Varieties of Federal Governance --------------------------------------------------------- 104
Vikram Seth --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 21
Violent Conjunctures in Democratic India ---------------------------------------------- 123
Vortex of Conflict ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 104
Votes and Violence --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 103
Vying for Allah‘s Vote ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 134
The India - Pakistan Conflict --------------------------------------------------------------- 139
The Indian Army and the End of the Raj -------------------------------------------------- 52
The Indian Army on the Western Front ---------------------------------------------------- 53
The Indian Economy in Transition ---------------------------------------------------------- 10
The Indian Princes and their States -------------------------------------------------------- 53
The International Ambitions of Mao and Nehru --------------------------------------- 107
The Law of Electronic Commerce ---------------------------------------------------------- 74
W
Wandering with Sadhus ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2
Western Realism and International Relations ----------------------------------------- 121
When Counterinsurgency Wins ----------------------------------------------------------- 134
Why Ethnic Parties Succeed --------------------------------------------------------------- 122
Witches, Tea Plantations, and Lives of Migrant Laborers in India --------------- 127
Woman as Spectator and Spectacle ------------------------------------------------------- 27
Women in Prison ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 126
The Law-Making Process --------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
The Logic of Law Making in Islam ---------------------------------------------------------- 72
The Logic of Sharing ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 107
The Making of Roman India ------------------------------------------------------------------ 49
The Metaphysics of Text ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
The Mughal Empire ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 53
The Muslims Are Coming! ------------------------------------------------------------------ 107
The Mutiny Outbreak at Meerut in 1857 -------------------------------------------------- 42
The Origins of Yoga and Tantra ----------------------------------------------------------- 103
152